^^tkinson, Mentzer Ej GrovSP Publisher5 and School Furnishers E^i^tern Office 350^352 n^atosh ^IvenUe Charier F. Atkinson go^Boyistonst Chlcago Ed^S?ra?JjJ? A BHIEF OM . Haleye First Latin Book The "biography of a book" is the biography of an IDEA, This is doubly true of any book that pretends to be a contribution to a subject or to be in any sense creative. The success- ful school books of the past have been, almost without exception, books that embodied an IDEA, and that had a long existence previous to being presented to the public. The opening of the biography of Dr. Hale's "A First Latin Book" dates back to thB time when he was Professor of Latin in Harvard University. The second chapter of the biography was written when he was Head of the De- partment of Latin at Cornell Univer- sity; the third chapter, while Head of the Latin Department of the University of Chicago; the fourth and last chapter, while he was teaching a class of first year boys and girls at the University High School and taking his own son through his preparatory Latin course. G I If Your Order is direct to all to " dis- '/JAAAAAM^ GIFT or d \/ Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation ^ http://www.archive.org/details/firstlatinbookOOhalerich FIRST LATIN BOOK BY WILLIAM GARDNER HALE PROFESSOR AND HEAD OF THE DEPARTMENT OF LATIN IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO AND PROFESSOR OF THE TEACHING OF LATIN IN THE SCHOOL OF EDUCATION '^," ^"\ i^, I '' * * ''•>" ' '* • '' ATKINSON, MENTZER & GROVER CHICAGO Publishers BOSTON Prodi, parve liber. Precor ut te discipulusque Atque magister ament^ quantum ego amavi et amo. GIFT c • •••-•• • ••••••• • • • • •/ • • • "• • • Copyright, 1907 BY WM. GARDNER HALE Entered at Stationers^ Hall^ London PEEFACE This book is the product of class-room experience and prac- tice, at my own hands and those of many other teachers who have used it in mimeographed form, and, in the present year, in advance sheets. This is the fifth revision of the original draft. The method employed in the past in teaching beginners in Latin has been either to make them attack a piece of continuous narrative, written for mature Koman readers, and necessarily without grammatical arrangement, or to furnish them with exer- cises made up in the main of short bits, without connection. But let us suppose, now, that we could command the services of some ancient Roman teacher. What should we tell him that we wanted for a First Latin Book, or, — and this is the same thing, — what would he, if a good and practical teacher, think of on his own account ? A beginning with easy words, standing for fami- liar ideas connected with home life. The opening sentences should be simple and interesting, — about the dinner, good or bad, the servants, the boy and girl friends, and the like. A fruit- ful topic, next, would be the school, with its work and play. In time the sentence's would group themselves into paragraphs, and paragraphs into stories, making up the Reading Matter of a lesson, and setting the Roman before the student as a living being belonging to a living people. Then the story would become a " serial " from lesson to lesson, still remaining natural and interesting, and thus easy to read and to remember. For its subject, a hint might be taken from Horace's mimic battle (Letters, I, XVIII, 58-64), in which boys delighted to fight Actium over again, "till victory crowned the one side or the other." If the teacher should decide to have the boys in his classes read and write accounts of a mimic war, he would naturally use many of the words and phrases in a great general's story of his conquest of Gaul. He could depend upon the war-interest to help him in the teaching of a syntax and vocabulary fitted to the later needs of his students; and, every- iv • Preface where, the presence of a context^ a situatioUy would make both the force of the construction and the meaning of the words easier. This book is an attempt to supply just such a lack. Some may object to modern Latin. But all beginner's books (except those which start with Caesar, who certainly did not have beginners in mind) are made up of modern Latin. Even the occasional Caesar sentences are rewritten. Which is better from a modern, a continuous story, or incoherent bits? I have tried to lead my readers by a carefully graded road to the lower levels of Caesar. I have sought to interest theni by plain ideas plainly stated in easy Latin, and woven at the earliest possible moment into a connected narrative. There is not a word about Caesar, — the whole war is a boy s' affair. Then, when forms and constructions have been learned, Caesar appears, not as a writer of a school-book, but as a vigorous and effective per- son, dramatically rescuing the remains of his army and saving the situation. With few and slight changes the story is in his own words. The reading of this episode is likely to leave the student with a taste for more. The attention of teachers is called to the following: Vocabulary, In spite of its starting in simple affairs of homo life, 913^ per cent, of the moderate but sufficient vocabulary of 961 words are from the Gallic War, and cover the most important words. So large a proportion has never before been reached. In this reckon- ing, groups like bonus, melior, optimus, count as one. Verbs like amo, certOy cldmo, currd,fldd, lego, muto, ruvnpOySuddeo, are counted as non-Caesarian, though appearing in compounds in Caesar, and thereby demanding all the more that they be inserted. . Of the total number of non-Caesarian words, namely 82, 69 appear in the vocabu- laries of our texts of Cicero or Virgil, or both, leaving only 13 words in this book ^ that are not in High School Latin. It would hardly be possible to go farther than this, and still preserve a normal and natural vocabulary. Repetition. In the first forty-eight Lessons (after the first three, in which repetition of words without identity of sentences is at points difficult), every new word is used in two successive Lessons at ^They are aniica, dthleta^ Capreae, coqua, exemplar, hen, irtipigre (but piger and impiger occur), lulla, lapillus, Pojnpei, and schola. Preface v least, besides reappearing later. This feature, which is new, would appear to be an indispensable one. Organization of Vocabulary. Words closely connected are put, as far as possible, in the same Lesson, or in Lessons not far apart. Thus in §345 are given iungo and cdiungo; optimus and optime; prior ^ prius and priusquam; suddeo and sudvis. In Lesson XLIX, opto is given, to make it easy for the student to understand and remember the term Optative Subjunctive in Lesson L. English Vocabulary. The English vocabulary is of substan- tially the same length as the Latin — likewise a novel feature. The student knows his Latin words better, if he has used them from both directions. Principal Parts are given for all verbs, just as genitives are given for nouns. The purpose is to afford the student every opportunity to make his knowledge certain by the repeating of impressions. The same holds- for the mention of the more troublesome constructions. Forms. The forms are all given in the body of the book (except the unimportant list of numerals), and never in a mass, unless the parts of the mass are alike. There is much repetition, to show likeness or contrast (as of the active, when the passive is given). This takes space, but lessens labor. Every set of forms is put to immediate use in a context which enforces its meaning. The Reading ^Matter is largely in dialogue, both for greater naturalness, and to fix the persons of the verb. Syntax. The system is of extreme simplicity. Its categories are merely answers to the questions: What are the ideas which the Romans expressed by the cases ? What are the ideas which the Romans expressed by the moods ? In a given case, the student has only to know what the Latin means to name the construction. A Summary of Syntax is given immediately after the Supple- mentary Reading. It may bo useful by way of review with this reading. Excepting for the place-usage with names of towns (§409) the words employed in the sentences given to illustrate new construc- tions have already been made familiar. A needless difficulty has thereby been removed. In many instances, these illustrative sentences are taken from what the student has already read or written. He has, in fact, often come to feel the construction before he is asked to formulate it. In this and similar respects, the whole series of exercises and explanations will bo found to be carefully woven together. vi Preface Index. The Index, being intended for the convenience of the teacher, is full, with constant cross repetitions. The book has been made in the class-room. At every stage it has received and profited, by the criticism of other teachers who were using it. I wish to thank Mr. W. E. MoflPatt, formerly of the Bradley Institute, Peoria, Mr. C. H. Van Tuyl, Mr. H. F. Scott, Miss Frances S. Pellett, Mr. S. C. Johnston, Mr. O. M. Washburn, and Mr. W. L. Carr, of the University High School, all of whom have helped by their confidence, and all but two by many criticisms. Nor should I forget other teachers, mostly strangers to me, who in the present year have similarly aided me, in spite of the difficulties of using advance sheets, in suc- cessive pamphlets, and without a general Vocabulary, — namely in the Shortridge High School, Manual Training School, and eleven Grammar Schools in Indianapolis; the High Schools of Goshen and Princeton, Ind., Holyoke, Mass., Ishpeming, Mich., and Houston, Tex.; the Biggs ville Township High School, Biggs- ville, 111., and the Princeton Township High School, Princeton, 111.; the Public School, Pleasant Hill, Ala.; the Academy of Miami University, Oxford, O., and the Preparatory Schools of the University of Idaho, Moscow, Ida., and Eockford College, Rock- ford, 111.; the Lagrange Female College, Lagrange, Ga.; the Kenwood Institute, Chicago, the Blees Military Academy, Macon, Mo., and the Bartholomew-Clifton School, Cincinnati, O. I am also indebted, for the sympathetic granting of every facility, to President Harper, of the University of Chicago, Professor W.B. Owen, Dean of the University High School, and Professor N. Butler, Dean of the School of Education. To Mr. Edward Manley, of the Englewood High School, Chicago, I owe much wise and helpful counsel. And finally, I am deeply indebted to Mr. Carr, now of the Shortridge High School, Indianapolis, to Mr. C. H. Beeson, formerly of the Peoria High School, and to Mrs. C. H. Beeson, formerly of the University of Indiana, for invaluable criticism and assistance in the preparation of the present edition of the book. TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION (To the Student) PART I: PRONUNCIATION PART II: LEARNING TO READ LESSON * PAGE I. Principles: — Forces of Endings 4 II. Principles and Names: — Noun, Adjective, Conjunction. — Agreement. — Nominative and Accusative. — Normal Order and Emphatic Order 6 Til. Verb. — Subject and Predicate. — Attributive and Predi- cate Adjective. — Use of est 9 IV. Nouns, Proper, Common, Collective. — Personal Pro- nouns. — Possessive Adjectives. — Adverb 11 V. Appositive Noun. — Vocative.- — Interjection. — Emphatic Order (continued) 14 VI. Genitive and Dative, First Declension. — Genitive of PossessioBa — Dative of Figurative Direction ("to" or "for" Dative) 17 VII. Mood, Tense, Person. — Transitive and Intransitive Verbs.-r Direct and Indirect Object 20 VIII. Ablative Case. — Prepositions Defined 23 IX. Accusative and Ablative with Prepositions. — First De- clension Singular, Table . 25 X. First Declension, in full. — Present Infinitive and Third Person Plural, First Conjugation. — Sunt 28 XI. The Four Conjugations Distinguished. — Personal End- ings. — Present Indicative Active of amO and sum . . 31 XII. Second Conjugation, Present Indicative Active. — Dative with Certain Verbs 33 XIII. Genders in the First and Second Declensions. — 0-Stem Nouns and Adjectives in full 35 XIV. Shortened ro-Stems. — Irregular Forms 37 vii Vlll Table of Contents LESSON PAGE XV. First and Second Declension Adjectives in full. — Rule inferred for Agreement of Adjectives ... 40 XVI. First and Second Conjugations, Present Indicative Passive. — Agent of Passive Voice 43 XVII. Pronominal Adjectives, Declined. The Complain- ing Schoolboy. Favoritism in the School? ... 45 XVIII. First and Second Conjugations, Present Impera- tive and Infinitive, Active and Passive. — Ipse. The Father and the Lazy Schoolboy 48 XIX. Imperfect Indicative Active. — Ille and iste. — Pro- nouns and Adjectives as Substantives. — Clause and Phrase. Illness and Drooping Spirits. . . 51 XX. Imperfect Indicative Passive. — Is. The Reforming Student 55 XXI. Future Indicative Active. — Idem. Father and Son . 57 XXII. Future Indicative Passive. — Hie. The Pleasures of Work. The Best School 60 XXIII. Third Conjugation, Present Indicative and Impera- tive, Active and Passive. — "Yes" and "No" Ques- tions, and Answers. The Teasing Boys .... 62 XXIV. Fourth Conjugation. — Third Conjugation Verbs in -io. — All Conjugations, Present Indicative and Infinitive, Both Voices. A Quarrel Begins ... 65 XXV. Quis and qui. — Agreement of Kelative. The Quarrel Goes On 68 XXVI. Quicumque. — Quidam. — Present Imperative, All Conjugations. The Teacher and the Teasing Boys 71 XXVII. Third and Fourth Conjugations, Imperfect Indica- tive, Active and Passive. — Quisquam. — Quisque. — Genitive of the Whole. The Crybaby . ... 74 XXVIII. Third and Fourth Conjugations, Future Indicative, Active and Passive. — Aliquis.^ Objective Geni- tive. Mark Warns the Teasers 78 XXIX. Personal and Reflexive Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives. The Small Boy and Mark .... 81 XXX. Perfect Indicative Active, All Conjugations.— Per- sonal Endings.— Two Forces of the Perfect. The Teacher, to the Allied and the Beaten Boys . . 84 Table of Contents IX LESSOX PAGE XXXI. Stem-Formation in Perfect Indicative Active. — Perfect Passive Participle. — Principal Parts of Verbs thus fa,r Used. Picnic in the Woods. . 86 XXXII. Future Active Participle. The Tent in the Woods 90 XXXIII. Past Perfect Indicative Active, All Conjugations. An Adventure of the Smcdl Boys ....... 92 XXXIV. Future Perfect Indicative Active, All Conjuga- tions. Does it Pay to Work at School 9 . . . 94 XXXV. Present Perfect, Past Perfect, and Future Perfect Indicative Passive, All Conjugations. Does it Pay to Have Worked at School 9 ■ 96 XXXVI. Third Declension, Consonant-Stem Nouns.— Da- tive of Reference or Concern. The Boys Project a Mock War 99 XXXVII. Consonant-Stem Nouns (finished). War Talk . 102 XXXVIII. Neuter i-Stems.— Masculine and Feminine i-Stems. — Mixed Stems. — Ablative of Means or Instru- ment. Sword, Shield, and Helmet 105 XXXIX. Exceptional i-Stems. — Future Passive Participle, ' and Dative of Agent. The Braggart Soldier . 108 XL. Consonant-Stem Adjectives. — Dative of Posses- sion. Who will he Chosert Generals 9 .... Ill XLI. I-Stem Adjectives. — Dative of the Person Jud- ging. The Too-Athletic Girl 114 XLII. Present Active Participle. — Ablative with pro and prae.— Gerundive Defined. Electioneering .117 XLIII. Ablative Absolute.— Perfects with Present Mean- ing. — Middle or Reflexive Verbs. — Deponents. Mark Invites a Friend to See the Battle . . . 120 XLIV. Summary of Points of Difficulty in the Third De- clension.— Genders. Mark's Friend Ansvwrs . 124 XLV. Irregular Words of the Third Declension: vis, plGs , complores, duo, ambo. — Two Accusatives. — Ablative of the Measure of Difference. — Ablative with Otor, fruor, fungor, potior, and vescor. Proposed Ground of the Campaign Explored . 127 XLVI. Subjunctive Mood, Present in full. — Subjunctive of an Act Willed, and of an Act Anticipated. Different Boys Want Different Things .... 131 Table of Contents LESSON XLVII. XLVIII. XLIX. L. LI. LII. LIII. LIV. LV. LVI. LVII. LVIII. PAGE Various Uses of the Subjunctive of Will and the Subjunctive of Anticipation: Expression of Pur- pose; of Fear; of Deliberation. — Expression of Anticipation after Words Meaning Before or Until Committee on Rules Proposed 134 How Shall the Committee on Rules he Made Up 9 . 138 The Anxious Father 140 The Subjunctive expressing, an Act as Wished, Proper, Likely, Possible, or Certain in an Imagined Case. — Fourth Declension. The Too- Ambitious Servius and the Hoax 142 Electioneering 146 Imperfect Subjunctive, in full. — Meaning of the Tense. Mark and Lucius Elected Generals . . 148 Genitive of Material or Composition. — Descriptive Genitive and Ablative. Talk of Mark and Lucius with Their Backers 152 Fifth Declension. — Indefinite quis. — Ablative of the Time At or Within Which. — Impersonal Use of Verbs. Drilling for the Battle 156 Declension of domus. — Ordinary Expression of Place From, To, or In Which; Construction with Names of Towns and Small Islands, and with domus and rOs. — Locative Ablative of Certain Words with or without a Preposition. — Ablative of the Point of View from Which. Where Does Mark's Expected Friend Live f 160 Perfect Subjunctive, All Conjugations and sum. — Semi-Deponent Verbs. — The Consecutive Sub- junctive of Fact.— Is, ille, etc., with Desci:iptive Meaning. Mark's Correspondent Arrives . . . 164 Determinative Clauses. — Dative of Tendency, Pur- pose, or Result. — Dative of the Concrete Object for Which. — Dative and Ablative with fido and cOnfidO. — Accusative of Extent, Duration, or De- gree. Mark Justifies His Plan 168 Past Perfect Subjunctive. — Ablative of Cause or Reason. — Ablative of Respect,— Substantive quod- Clause of Fact, and quod-Clause of Respect. Au- thority of the Two Generals 172 Table of Contents liESSON PAGE LiX. Imperative, All Forms. — Supine. — Ablative of Ac- cordance. — Ablative, etc., with a Comparative. Bad Weather, Indoor Talk. Rules of Battle . 176 LX. Infinitive, All Forms. — Infinitive Tenses. — Infini- tive in Indirect Discourse. Plans of the Judges . 180 LXI. Inflection of the Regular Verb finished: The Gerund. — Uses of Gerundive and Gerund. — The Natural Harmony of Tenses ("Sequence of Tenses"). — Causal or Adversative quI-Clause. Talk of Mothers^ Timid and Otherwise . . . . 184 LXII. Irregular Verbs begun: possum. — Descriptive cum- Clause of Situation, and Causal or Adversative cum -Clause. Mark and his Officers at his Father's House 188 LXIII. Volo, nolo, malo. — Neutral Conditions and Conclu- sions; Future Conditions and Conclusions, More Vivid or Less Vivid. The Distrustful Schoolmate 192 LXIV. FiO, eO. — Historical Present. — Aoristic Narrative Clause with ubi, ut, postquam, or simul atque. — Ablative of Accompaniment. Fair Weather. Opening of the Battle 196 LXV. Regular Comparison of Adjectives. — Ablative of Manner. — Historical Infinitive.— Clauses of Cause or Reason with quod, quia, quoniam' or quando. — Ablative with Verbs of Separation. End of the Battle, and Decision of the Judges 200 LXVl. FerO. — Conditions and Conclusions Contrary to Fact. — Table of Conditions and Conclusions (sum- mary). — Dative after Verbs compounded with Cer- tain Prepositions. Fresh Challenge Accepted. Opening of the Second Battle 204 LXVII. Irregular or Defective Comparison of Adjectives. — Subjunctive of Indirect Discourse (finished). — Table of the Constructions in Indirect Discourse. End of the Second Battle^ .208 LXVIII. Formation and Comparison of Adverbs. — Special Uses of the Comparative and Superlative Degrees. — Infinitive with Subject Accusative. — Subjunc- tive by Attraction. An Incident from Real War- fare . 212 xii Table of Contents PART III: SUPPLEMENTARY READING The Gallic Uprising of 54 b. c. (From Caesar's Story of the Gallic War, Book v.) CHAPTER PAGE I. Disposition of the Roman Army for the Winter . . . 216 II. Revolt of Ambiorix and Catuvolcus. — Attack upon the Winter Camp of Cotia and Sabinus . 218 III. The Parley. — Argument of the Barbarians 220 IV. Council of the Roman Officers. — The Wrong View Pre- vails 222 V. Ambuscade and Battle 224 VI. Cotta is Wounded at the End of the Day. — Sabinus Asks for Mercy . 226 VII. Ambiorix Offers a Conference and Promises Safety. — The Trick. — Destruction of the Army 228 VIII. Sioift Attack upon the Camp of Cicero.— The Parley. — Cicero not Deceived. — Long Siege 230 IX. A Letter Is Carried through at Last to Caesar . . . 232 X. Caesar Enters the Enemy^s Country 234 XI. The Gauls Fly to Meet Caesar.— His Strategy .... 236 XII. Victory and Rescue. — Muster of the Survivors .- . . 238 SOUTHERN WALL OF PERMAXKXT ROMAN CAMP At Saalburg, near Homburg. Partly re- stored. From Jacobi INTRODUCTION (To the Student) Latin is the language spoken by the ancient Romans. It was at first the language only of Rome and its im- mediate neighborhood. But as the power of the city extended itself, it became first the language of the whole of Italy, and then the dominant language of the entire civilized world. And this it remained, for more than a thousand years. But no language stands still Changes are constantly going on, in the words employed, in their forms, in the pronunciation of them, in their meanings, and in the ways of putting them together to express ideas. Try, for example, our own poet Chaucer. You can make out a good many single words, but you cannot understand at all at ifirst. And if you went back still further, say to the writings of King Alfred, you probably could not make out more than one word in ten. In the Lord's Prayer of Alfred's time, out of the 49 different words used, you would recognize only and, we, us, to, on, and of, while you would not understand the ways in which some of these are used,^and would not even know that it was the Lord's Prayer which you had before you. English is thus, you see, a living, growing, and changing thing. Now of course Latin was also a living and growing and changing thing. And it changed somewhat differently in different parts of the world, — say in Italy, in France, and in Spain. The form which it took in Italy we call XIV hi*^odudion Italian, in France, French, and in Spain, Spanish. Now we speak of the English of King Alfred's time as Early English. You see that, in the same way, it would be correct to speak of Latin as Early Italian, and Early French, and Early Spanish. Or you might say that the Italian, the Frenchman, and the Spaniard speak Modern Latin. But it isn't these people only that speak Modern Latin. . We do it ourselves. Our language is only in part de- scended from Early English, or, as we might call it for greater clearness, Anglo-Saxon English. Two-thirds of the words which we have at our command (that is, the words found in a dictionary) are Latin; while, in our ordinary daily speech, half- the words we use outside of what we may call the "small change" of language, — such words as and, we, us, to, on, of, spoken of above, — are Latin. The little boy who says in the street, "please give me a cent. Mister," is speaking just one-half Anglo- Saxon English and one-half Latin English ("give," "me," and "a" have come down from Anglo-Saxon, and "please," "cent," and "Mister" from Latin). Moreover, the words that have come down from Anglo-Saxon are mostly very simple words. The words in which we express our finer distinctions in our thinking are mainly Latin. Latin is thus a good language to know. It is just as much our mother tongue as Anglo-Saxon is. Indeed, we should speak more properly if we called Latin the mother tongue, and Anglo-Saxon the father tongue. Our language of today is the child of both. It gets a good deal of its strength, though not all, from the father, and a good deal of its refinement, though not all, from the mother.^ Introduction xv To know Latin, then, is to understand English better, and to use it more intelligently and effectively. You will come to feel, as you go on, how much it is your own language that you are really studying. Moreover, our civilization comes mainly from Rome. It was Rome, and not England or Germany or Norway and Sweden, that first conquered the world; and Julius Caesar, who subdued France and Belgium (you will sometime read his own story of his wars), enormously influenced your life and mine. Rome spread its modes of living, its laws, its forms of literature, and its ways of thinking over the whole world. We are really, in all these things, Romans, or, more exactly (since Rome got its own arts and letters in part from Greece), we are Greeks and Romans. The story of our various forms of literature, — history, the oration, the essay, lyrical poetry, epic poetry, tragedy, comedy, everything, in short, except satire, — begins with Greece; and satire began in Rome. Science and philosophy, too, — the first methodical think- ing, in the part of the world to which we belong, about the processes of nature, and the meaning of life, arose in Greece. Our arts, likewise, except for those that have sprung up quite recently in connection with the wonderful progress of natural science, came from Rome. Your great grandfathers and grandmothers had no ways of building, heating, and lighting their houses, or of traveling or communicating with one another, that they had not inherited from Roman times; and in general they lived much less comfortably than the Ancient Romans. So, then, you want to know these people. Strains of their blood probably actually run in the veins of a great xvi Introduction many of us. But, at any rate, they are our intellectual ancestors. The first thing to do is to learn their language. Then, if you are so fortunate as to have the opportunity, you want to come to know their best books, and something of their arts, — especially their sculpture, and their archi- tecture. You will not be any the less free and independent if you do so; for it is not really the ignorant man who thinks most effectively for himself, and the real freeman is the man to whom most doors are open. And one thing more. Don't think of these people as "ancient." The great days of Rome are indeed eighteen and nineteen hundred years back. That might seem a long time; it is really extremely little in the history of man, and little, even, in the life of civilized man, as we know him, say, in Egypt. But the Romans are not intel- lectually so far back as the dates would make us believe. There was a long stretch of time in which the civilized world was in the main moving backward, until it began to return to where it had been, largely through the redis- covery of Latin and Greek literature, from which our modern literature and our modern science start. If you drop out these lost centuries, Rome isn't twice as far back as our own Shakespeare. The Romans were very like ourselves. If a man of the eleventh century, say, were to come back and lecture to us, you would find that he was living in an entirely difiPerent world from ours. If Horace or Pliny or Tacitus were to do the same thing, you would find him as modern as any of us, and that he looked at life in very much the same way. Think of these men*, then, as Romans of only the other day, and of their litera- ture and art as a part of our direct inheritance. And get all you can for yourself out of the family treasure. PART I: PRONUNCIATION (For Reference) * THE ALPHABET I. The Latin Alphabet is the same as the English, except that Latin has no w and no j. CLASSIFICATION II. The Vowels are a, e, i\ o, u, y. The remaining letters are Consonants. PRONUNCIATION III. The Vowels are pronounced as follows: a as in the first syllable of a/ia. a as in /a/^er. e as in let. e about as in they. i as in pin. i as in machine. . o about as in obey. about as in no. u as in pull. tl as in rude. y and y (rare, not occurring in this book) like French short and long u. IV. The Diphthongs (two-vowel sounds) are pro- nounced as follows: ae like ai in aisle. eu as 4{h)-oo, smoothly pro- Siu like ou in out. nounced in the same breath- oe like oi in coin. impulse. ei like ei in deign. ui as o6-i, smoothly pronounced ^ in the same breath-impulse. 1 2.' . Cf^nsonanfs, — Syllables. — Quantity of Vowels V. Most Consonants are pronounced as in English, but the following points are to be noted : c always has the k sound as in cat, never the s sound as in center. g always as in get, never as in gem. t as in tin, never as in nation. s as in hisSy never voiced {z) as in his. b before s and t like p. Thus urbs as urps. X (value of two consonants) like ks as in .extra. n before c, g, qu has the sound of ng in singing. Before s it lost its consonantal value, the preceding vowel being lengthened and nasalized. So trans = tras with nasal a. r rolled as in French. i consonantal (beginning a syllable) as y in yet. V as t(? in wet. u has the same sound in qu, ngu, and in suavis, suadeO, suescO, and their compounds. Compare quarter, anguish, persuade. ch, ph, th like k,p, t, but with added rough breath, as in uphill. Double letters represent real double consonants, pronounced with separate and distinct articulation and in different syllables, as in book-case, hop-pole, well-laid. So sic-cus, op-pO-nO, il-le. DIVISION OF SYLLABLES VI. A Latin word contains as many syllables as it has vowels or diphthongs. The division is as follows: 1. A single consonant between two vowels goes with the second vowel. Thus do-mi-na. It does not add appreciably to the time taken in pronouncing the vowel of its syllable. 2. A consonant followed by 1 or r goes with the 1 or r. Similarly q, g, and s go with u in the combinations given under u in V. Thus du-plex, a-gri, pa-tris, a-li-qua, per-sua-de-0. 3. In all other cases a consonant followed by another goes in the same syllable with the preceding vowel. Thus an-nus, dic-tus, mag- nus,cas-tra, sanc-tus. a. A consonant thus blocked by another may be called obstructed. QUANTITY OF VOWELS VII. Vowels are long or short according to the length of time taken in pronouncing them. Long vowels are shown thus: a, e, i, 6, u. Unmarked vowels are short. Quantity of Vowels and Syllables. — Accent 3 a. The difference between a long vowel and' a short one is a real difference in sound. Thus the difference between Latin i and i is as great as between jit and feet in English. h. A Latin long vowel (similarly a diphthong) takes about twice as much time in pronouncing as a short vowel. General Facts of Quantity VIII. 1. A vowel is long before ns, nf, nx, or net, as in insequor, Inferior, iQnxI, idnctus. 2. A vowel is short before another vowel, or h, as in eo, veho. 3. A vowel is short before final m or t, before nt and nd any- where, and, except in words of one syllable, before final r or 1. Thus in amem, amet, amantis, amandus, amer, animal. QUANTITY OP SYLLABLES IX. Syllables are long or short according to the length of time taken in pronouncing them. 1. A syllable is long if it contains a long vowel or a diphthong (fii?o-vowel group); for example the first syllable in ma-ter, au-di-0. 2. A syllable is also long, even when the vowel is short, if this is followed by two consonants (except as in VI, 2). Thus in dic-tus the i is short. But the clear pronunciation of the c before the t(as clear as of the corresponding sounds in "Dick took cold") takes as much time as the pronunciation of the vowel. 3. A syllable is short if it ends in a short vowel, as in i-ta. X. In Roman speech, combinations between words were pronounced in the same way as within words. a. Thus at amicus was pronounced a-ta-mi-cus (so that at was here short; compare our unconscious pronunciation of at all as a-tall), and at quaerO was pronounced at-quaerO (so that at was here long, just as in the single word at-que). ACCENT XI. 1. In words of two syllables the accent is upon the penult (syllable before the last). Thus: magis, tego. 2. In words of more than two syllables the accent is upon the penult if this is long, otherwise on the ante- penult (syllable before the penult). Thus a-mi'-cus, ma-gis-ter, but va-li-dus. Principles PART II: LEARNING TO READ LESSON I PRINCIPLES 1. Specimen Sentence: Serva cenam parat, the servant prepares the dinner. You will see that in this sentence three different things are presented to the mind, something acting (serva, the servant), something acted upon (cenam, the dinner), and hii act ((pdiXdity prepares) . 2. Specimen Sentence: Domina servam laudat, the mistress praises the servant. Here again three things are presented to the mind, something acting (domina, the mistress), something acted upon (servam, the servant), and an act (laudat, praises). 3. If you compare the two sentences, you see that words end differently, according as they represent that which acts, or that which is acted upon. Thus in the first sen- tence the servant acts, and the ending is -a (serva) ; while in the second the servant is acted upon, and the ending is -am (servam). 4. In both sentences, there is a word that expresses an act (parat, laudat), and it ends in the same way, namely in -at. 5. Notice that the Latin order differs from the English, putting the word for an act last. 6. Latin has no article (''the" or "a"). Thus cena may correspond, according to the rest of the sentence, to "dinner," "a dinner," or ^'the dinner." Exercises 5 7. Direction. In learning the Latin words in the Vocab- ularies, be sure that you pronounce them rightly in your mind, making the long sounds long, and the short short, and making the consonants full and clear. Then, when you have occasion to W7^ite the Latin words, you have merely to write them as they sound in your memory. 8. VOCABULARY (Commit these words to memory, so that you can at once give the English for the Latin, and the Latin for the English. ) amica, friend (used only of a culpat, blames, censures. woman or girl). laudat, praises, cena, dinner. parat, prepares, gets. domina, mistress. serva, servant or slave (used et, and. only of a woman or girl). 9. READING MATTER (Before translating a sentence, make out its meaning, according to what you have learned above of the force of the endings in -a, -am, and -at. Then translate it into English. ) 1. Domina cenam laudat. 2. Serva cenam parat, et domina servam laudat. 3. Amica cenam laUdat. 4. Domina cenam laudat et servam. 5. Domina servam culpat, serva dominam.l 10. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION (Write these sentences in Latin, remembering what you have learned about the way of expressing the person acting, the person acted upon, and the act, and also the order in which these are put. In writing, indicate how you pronounce each word. Thus, if you pronounce cena, don't write cena.) 1. The servant praises the mistress. 2. The mistress blames the servant. 3. The friend praises the dinner, the mistress the servant.^ 4. The friend praises the dinner and the servant. 1 Words easily understood can be omitted. What is omitted here? Principles and Names LESSON II PRINCIPLES AND NAMES 11. Specimen Sentences: Domina bona cenam laudat, the good mistress praises the dinner. Domina cenam bonam laudat, the mistress praises the good dinner. 12. Here we have words ending alike, — for instance, domina and bona in the first example, — but evidently of different natures. Bona expresses a quality (tells of what kind). Such words are called Adjectives, Words like domina, cena, etc., are names of persons or things. Such words are called Nouns. 13. You can tell which of two Nouns an Adjective goes with by the ending of that Adjective. Thus if you have domina bona servam, it is of course the domina of whom bona is said ("good mistress") ; if you have domina bonam servam, it is the servam of whom bonam is said ("good servant"). This going- together of one word with another is called Agreement. 14. Words expressing acts or states, for example laudat, are called Verhs^ Words like ' et, which join others together, are called Conjunctions. 15. Varying forms of a given noun, adjective, etc. (as serva servam, bona bonam) are called Cases. The form in -a used above is called Nominative^ the one in -am Accusative. Exercise 1 a. Look now at the sentences you have had, and see what is the case which represents a person or thing as acting^ and what the one which represents a person or thing acted upon. h. The Nominative in Latin corresponds to the Nominative in English Grammar. The Accusative corresponds to the Objective case in English Grammar. 16. A word that qualifies or limits another on which it depends is said to modify that word, and is called a modifier. Thus in the phrase^ "good mistress" the word ''good" modifies the word "mistress;" and in the statement "praises the servant," the word ''servant" modifies the verb "praises." 17. VOCABULARY noun: verb: reglna, giteen. SimsXy loves ^ likes. adjectives: conjunction: hona.^ good. et . . . et . . . i. e.,^ et doubled, mala, had. both . . . and . . . dcira, hard, stern, harsh. 18. READING MATTER (In sentences 1 to 3 the order is the normal'^ one. In 4, bona is made emphatic by its position, and in 5 the whole phrase bonam servam is made emphatic in the same way. See if you can express this emphasis in your translation by position or by stress of voice.) 1. Kegina dominam bonam laudat. 2. Domina servam malam culpat. 3. Serva bona dominam diiram culpat. 4. Bona serva dominam amat. 5. Bonam servam domina et laudat et amat. 1 A Phrase is a group of connected words not containing a subject and predicate. A more exact definition will be given later (148, 2). 2 The letters i. e. stand for the Latin words id est, meaning that is. 3 1, e., the regular one, where no special emphasis is to be given. 8 Word Order NORMAL ORDER AND EMPHATIC ORDER 19. From the above sentences you may make out the following rules ^ of order, to guide you in writing, and help you in reading : 1. The normal order in a Latin sentence is: Subject, with its modifiers modifiers of verb, with verb Thus: Serva bona dominam doram culpat 2. The Adjective normally follows its noun. Thus: Serva bona, a good servant (no special emphasis). 3. A word or phrase may be put out of its normal position to give it emphasis. Thus: Bona serva, a GOOD servant. Bonam servam domina et laudat et amat, a GOOD servant the mistress both praises and loves. a. Remember, then, that Latin expresses by position what in EngUsh we generally have to express by stress of voice. 20. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION ,1. The harsh mistress blames the servant. 2. The queen blames the harsh mistress. 3. The queen blames both the harsh mistress and the bad servant. 4. The queen both praises and loves a good'^ mistress. 5. A good^ mistress both praises and loves a good servant. lA "rule" is a brief statement of usage, summing up what you have learned. 2 Be sure to express the emphasis by your order. DISHES AND SPOONS FROM POMPEII (SILVER) Principles and Names LESSON III PRINCIPLES AND NAMES 21. Specimen Sentences: 1. Domina bona est, the mistress is good. 2. Serva bona est, the servant is good. 3. Serva coqua est, the servant is a cook. a. The verbs which we have had before have expressed action. We have now a verb, est, of a new kind, expressing state. 22. Verbs say ("predicate") something about a person or thing. That of which something is said is called the Subject (as "Julia" in "Julia cooks"). That which is said ("predicated") is called the Predicate (as "cooks"). .23. The verbs we have thus far had are called Finite (the meaning of this word will be explained later) . The subject with every one of them (that which acts or is) has been in the Nominative. We can, then, lay down the rule that: 24. The Subject of a Finite verb is put in the Nomina- tive. 25. We have now seen two ways of making an adjective go with a noun: 1. In the first way, the adjective was directly attached to the noun, as in domina bona cenam laudat, the good mistress praises the dinner. So attached, the adjective is called Attributive. 2. In the second way, seen in the specimen sentences of this Lesson, the adjective is a part of that which is predicated, as in domina bona est, the mistress is good (here "good" is just as much asserted of the mistress as "is"). Thus used, an adjective is called a Predicate Adjective. 10 Exercises 26. A noun may, in the same way, be a part of the predicate, and is then called a Predicate Noun, as coqua, cook, in serva coqua est, the servant is a cook. a. Since the predicate noun or adjective is said of the subject, you will of course expect it to agree with the subject. 27. adjective: benigna, good-natured, kind. VOCABULARY verbs: est, is. vocat, calls. coqua, cook. iQlia, Julia. 28. READING MATTER 1. Serva cenam parat. Cena bona est. 2. lulia coqua bona est J * . 3. Bona coqua liilia est.^ 4. Domina dura coquam vocat. 5. Domina dura est, serva mala/ 6. Domina benigna est, serva bona. 29. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. The dinner is bad. 2. The cook is bad. 3. The stern mistress blames the cook. 4. Julia is a bad cook. 5. Julia is a bad cook (or, a bad cook Julia is). 6. The kind queen calls the cook, and praises the good dinner. 1 What is the difference in meaning between sentences 2 and 3? BRONZE COOKING-UTENSILS FEOM POMPEII Nouns and Pronouns 11 LESSON IV DEFINITIONS 30. A noun that denotes a particular person, place, or thing, is called a Proper Noun, Thus lulia, Julia, 31. A noun that denotes any person or thing of a class is called a Common Noun, Thus serva, servaiit, a. A noun that denotes a number of persons or things taken together is called a Collective Noun. Thus turba, crowd, 32. Instead of nouns, we often use other words to denote persons or things. Thus instead of saying ''I saw John this morning. John was looking well,'' we say **I saw John this morning. He was looking well." Words like he^ they, you, J, this, who, etc., because they stand instead of nouns, are called Pronouns, 33. Some of these pronouns clearly tell us to which of the possible kinds of persons they refer, namely the per- son speaking (/, called the first person), the person spoken to {you, called the second person), or the person spoken of [he, she, it, called the third person). They are therefore called Personal Pronouns, 34. Corresponding words like my, your, his, her, which indicate persons as possessing, are called Possessive Adjectives,^ a. Possessive adjectives have the same position as other adjec- tives. That is, they normally follow their nouns. Thus: serva mea bona est, my servant is good, but mea serva bona est, MY servant is good. 1 Often called Possessive Pronouns. But they are not really pronouns. 12 Adverbs 35. In Latin, personal pronouns and possessive adjec- tives are freely omitted, when the meaning is clear with- out them. Thus after the question, serva bona est? is the servant good f the answer she is good would be expressed simply by bona est. 36. A word that modifies the meaning of a verb is called an Adverb; but adverbs may also modify adjectives or other adverbs. Thus: He does it willingly (modifying a verb). He does it very willingly (modifying another adverb). He is very willing, or. He is not willing (modifying an adjective). 37. Notice the position of the Latin Adverb in the fol- lowing sentences (semper means always and saepe often): Domina servam semper culpat, the mistress always blames the servant. Serva dominam saepe culpat, the servant often blames the mistress. From these we may lay down the rule that: 38. Adverbs 7iormally precede the words which they modify. ^ a. But of course an adverb, like any other word, may be put out of its normal position to give it emphasis. 39. VOCABULARY PERSONAL pronouns: POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES! me, Trie. Accusative. mea, my, mine. te, thee, you (in speaking to* tua, thy, thine, your, yours (in a single person). Accusative. speaking to a single person). ADVERBS : CONJUNCTION : nOn, not. sed, but. saepe, often. noun: semper, always. turba, crowd, mob. Exercises . 13 40. READING MATTER 1. lulia coqua mea est. Bona' coqua lulia est. 2. Coqua mea bona 6enam parat;- et cenam semper parat bonam.^ 3. Mea coqua cenam parat; sed malam saepe parat cenam. 4. Coqua tua bona est? (Answer) Mala est. 5. Regina me amat, non te. 6. Regina benigna est. Amat et te et me. 7. Regina te vocat. 8. Regina turbam^ non amat. 41. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. My cook is good, yours bad. 2. Is Julia your cook? (Answer) Julia is my cook. (Question) Is she a good cook? (Answer) She loves a good dinner, but she is a bad cook. 3. The queen is a good friend. 4. A good friend the queen is ! 5. The queen loves ^/oz^, not me. She always praises you. 6. The queen oftem praises you. 7. A mob calls you. 1 What is the effect of the order? 2 Translate by is getting. 3 Does this probably mean f/ie mob, or a mob? BRONZE PITCHERS AND DRINKING-HORN FROM POMPEII W: Appositives LESSON V PRINCIPLES AND NAMES 42. Specimen Sentences: Coqua cenam parat, the cook gets dinner, or the cook is getting dinner^ or the cook does get dinner. Coqua cenam parat? is the cook getting dinner? or does the cook get dinner? a. Notice that the single verb parat is used in Latin where Eng- lish uses three distinct forms, gets, is getting, does get. You must, therefore, translate always according to what is the most probable force in the given place. And in translating English into Latin, you must always use the one Latin form. 43. Specimen Sentences: lalia coqua cenam parat, Julia, the cook, is getting dinner. Domina laliam coquam laudat, the mistress praises Julia, the cook. a. In these sentences, you see that the word coqua is put along- side of iQlia, and coquam alongside of iQliam, to tell us something more particularly about Inlia or iQliam. Such a putting -along side is called Apposition, and the word so attached to another is called an Appositive. b. An appositive must, of course, show by its form with what word it goes. Hence: 44. An Appositive Noun agrees in case with the Noun or Pronoun to which it belongs. Vocative 16 45. There is, in the forms which we are now studying, another case, precisely like the Nominative, named the Vocative (from vocat, calls), because used in speaking to (addressing) a person. Thus: Cena, coqua, parata est? Cook, is dinner ready 9 a. A Vocative normally stands after one or more words. 46. Certain words loosely thrown into the sentence (^'interjected") are called Interjections, Thus 5, Eng- lish O or Oh. 47. VOCABULARY nouns: adjectives: culina, kitchen. magna, great, large, big. culpa (noun corresponding to the ^divv a., small, little. verb c\i\paX), fault, blame. parata (connected with the verb filia, daughter. parat), prepared, ready, villa, villa. pulchra, beautiful. splendida, splendid. verb: adverb: %iisptctBX,expects,awaits, waits cDr, why, for.' 48. READING MATTER 1. Domina cenam exspectat. Coquam vocat. 2. (The mistress says to the cook) Cena^ ciir n5n parata est? (The cook answers) Est, domina, parata. 3. (The mistress says) Cena tua, coqua, saepe mala est. (Answer) Culpa, domina, non raea est. (Mistress) Cur non tua est? (Answer) Culina parva et mala est. 4. (The cook says) Domina cur me semper culpat? 5. (A dialogue of mothers) Filia tua pulchra est. (Answer) Filia mea pulchra sed diira est. Tua et pulchra est et benigna. 6. Villa tua, amica mea, magna et splendida est. 7. Turba magna est! 1 " Waits for" is really a single idea, just as " awaits "is. 2 The thing of most consequence is put first to arrest the attention, as if we should say "the dinner now : why isn't it ready? " 16 Word Order [Continued) EMPHATIC ORDER, CONTINUED 49. Evidently the order in Latin is very nearly free. Let us see, then, how, in a sentence of several words, this freedom may be employed to give emphasis. 1. In the second sentence in 48 above, the dinner v^sls the impor- tant thing. Notice how this was expressed by putting cena at the head of the sentence. 2. In the second sentence of 40 (turn back), the goodness of the dinner was the important thing. Notice how this was expressed by putting bonam at the end of the sentence. From these instances we may see that: 50. The most emphatic places in a Latin sentence; or group of words, are the first and the last. a. This is just what we should expect in any language in which the order was free. For, evidently, emphasis may be obtained either by putting an important thing before the hearer immediately, or by holding it back for a time, to stimulate his curiosity, or to surprise him with an added idea (principle of Suspense). Apply these principles in your own writing. 51. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Mistress, the dinner is served.^ 2. Your servant, my daughter, is a good cook. (Answer) The dinner is often good, (but^) not always. 3. Julia, the cook, is preparing dinner. But my mistress does not expect a good (one ^). (Question) Why does she not expect a good (one) ? (Answer) The kitchen is bad, and the cook is bad. 4. Julia, the dinner is always bad. The fault is yours. 5. Your villa is splendid. (Answer) My villa is splendid, but it is not beautiful. Your villa is small, but beautiful. 6. A big mob calls (for) you. lUse the word for '* prepared," "ready." 2 Omit in translating, as unnecessary. In general, words in parentheses ( ) are not to be translated. Genitive and Dative 17 LESSON VI PRINCIPLES AND NAMES 52. Specimen Sentence: Villa reginae splendida est, the villa of the queen (or the queen's villa) is splendid, a. The case of reginae is called the Genitive, It corresponds to our English Possessive case, or the equivalent phrase with of. As you see in this example, 63. The Genitive may express that to which something belongs (Genitive of Possession). And a. A Genitive normally follows its noun. 64. There is, in the set of forms with which we have begun, another case, called the Dative, identical in form with the Genitive (thus reginae), but with an entirely different meaning, as in: Filia mea reginae cenam dat, my daughter is giving a dinner to the queen {or for the queen). Reginae is here Dative. Regina filiae meae benigna est, the queen is kind to my daughter. FTliae is here Dative. As you see in these examples, a. The Dative normally precedes the word or words which it modifies. 66. The Dative expresses Figurative Direction^ of vari- ous kinds. Hence it may be called the ^'/o, toward, or for case." iThat is, not literal direction in space, but the direction in which an act, a quality, etc., operates, — that toward which it goes out. Notice that, in English, literal direction and figurative direction are expressed in one and the same way. Compare ''go to the city" and "be kind to me" (the same word " to " in both). We shall see later that Latin has a different way for expressing literal direction (78, bj. 18 Exercise a. Compare the following, in which the English word "to," "toward," or "for," expresses this same idea of figurative direction: He gives a letter to me (direction taken by an Act). This is pleasant to (or for) me (direction taken by a Quality. The pleasantness goes out toward me). He is opposed to me (direction taken by an Attitude). He is unfriendly toward me (direction taken by an Attitude). He is near to me (direction taken by a Relation). 66. VOCABULARY nouns: adjectives: epistula, epistle, letter. adversa, adverse, opposed. si\va.y icood, forest. (Word of Attitude, taking Dat.) pronouns: grata, gratifying, pleasing, mihi, {to or for) me; Dative. agreeable. (Word of Quality, tibi, {to or for) you; Dative. taking Dat.) ^^j^ inimica, unfriendly, hostile. cenat (verb corresDonding to (Word of Attitude, taking Dat.) the noun cena), dines. ''"a, angry. (Word of Attitude, dat, gives. ' taking Dat.) adverb: propinqua, near. (Word of Ke- tam, so. lation, taking Dat.) 67. READING MATTER Caution. — When you meet a doubtful form, e. g.,i the Genitive-or-Dative form in -ae, or the Nominative-or- Vocative form in -a, you must carefully hold your judgment in suspense until all the evidence has come in. Do not jump at the first possibility that comes intx) your mind. 1. Villa reginae silvae magnae propinqua est. 2. Villa mea parva mihi grata est. 3. Serva dominae epistulam dat. 4. Domina coquae cur irata^ est ? (Answer) Cena mala est. 5. Regina cenat. Te, filia mea, exspectat. 6. Regina, filia mea, te non amat. Tibi semper adversa est. 7. Regina mihi cur tam inimica est? 1 This stands for exempli gratia, meaning /or example. 2 Angry toward the cook. But we say in English angry at. Exercise 19 58. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Thfe queen loves the great forest. 2. My villa is near^ (to)? the splendid villa of the queen. But the queen is unfriendly toward me. 3. My friend, why is the queen always so opposed to you ? Why is she angry at (— toward) you? 4. My daughter gives (to) me a letter. 5. Your letter is pleasing to me. 6. The mistress is dining. The dinner is good. 1 A predicate noun or adjective regularly stands next to the verb, since the two together make one idea. 2 In English, we omit the preposition " to " in such a combination. IN THE RUINS OF HADRIAN'S VILLA NEAR TIVOLI (TIBUR) Fifteen miles from Rome 20 Direct Object LESSON VII PRINCIPLES AND NAMES 59. The verbs which we have been using have all rep- resented an act or state as a fact. Such verbs are said to be in the Indicative Mood, They have dealt with present time, and hence are said to be in the Present Tense. Thus coqua cenam parat, the cook prepares (or is pre- paring) dinner (a fact, in the Present). a: Mood is the expression of the way in which the act is looked at, e. g., as 3. fact (Indicative). h. Tense is the expression of the idea of time through the form of the verb. c. The negative (denying word) for the Indicative is nOn, not, as we have already seen. 60. The ending -t, which we have had in all our verbs, indicates the action of a person or thing spoken of^ called the third person. In the same way, the ending -0 indi- cates the person speaking ("I"), called the first person. Thus cenam paro, I am preparing dinner. The first per- son of est, {he) is, is sum, (J) am, a. The endings alone are enough tq^indicate the person, without the use of any word for "I," "he," "it," etc. Thus regina sum must mean "7 am queen,'^ not "3/ie is queen,'' nor ^^you are queen.'' 61. A Transitive Verb is one that expresses an act im- mediately affecting some person or thing. . The person or thing immediately affected is called the Direct Object. Thus servam is a Direct Object in Anna servam laudat, Anna praises the servant. We have repeatedly seen that: 62. The Direct Object of a Transitive Verb is put in the Accusative, Indirect Object 21 63. An Intransitive Verb is one that expresses an act not immediately affecting any person or thing, or a state. Thus ceno, I dine, sum, I am. a. From its nature, such a verb cannot have a Direct Object. 64. We have also seen another case depending upon a verb, as in: Domina mihi servam laudat, the mistress praises the servant to vie. a. Here the case of mihi (the ^o-case, or Dative) expresses the person indirectly affected by the act. This is called the Indirect Object. We may then lay down the rule that: 65. The Indirect Object of a Verb is put in the Dative, From the abovejsxample note also that: a. The Indirect Object normally precedes the Direct Object. 66. We may likewise make a short rule combining the other uses of the Direction-Case seen in various ex- amples in the last Lesson. These uses are essentially one and the same. Compare the following: Villa mihi grata est, the villa is agreeable to me. QUALITY of the villa, going out toward me. (mihi, Dative) Regina mihi adversa est, the queen is opposed to me. ATTITUDE of the queen toward me. (mihi, Dative) Villa silvae propinqua est, the villa is near {to) the wood. RELATION of the villa to the wood. (silvae. Dative) We see, then, that: 67. The Dative is used to express that toward which a Quality, Attitude, or Relation is directed. 68. READING MATTER 1. Filiam tuam, regina me*a, laiido. Bona est et benigna. 2. Amo reginae filiam; sad reginae non grata sum. Mihi dura est. 3. Regina mihi semper benigna est. Tibi cur tam inimica est ? 22 Exercise 4. Domina mea reginae cenam magnam dat. 5. (The mistress says) Kegina, coqua, cenam meam non lau- dat. Culpa tua est. Tibi irata sum. 6. Villa amicae meae silvae pulchrae propinqua est. 7. Epistula tua mihi n5n grata est. Tibi irata sum. 69. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Your mistress is kind to you. Mine is always angry at me. 2. CJook, I do not praise your dinner. It^is (a) big (one); good it is not. Why is it not good? (The honest cook's answer) The fault is mine, mistress. I am not a good cook. 3. The villa of the queen's daughter is near (to) mine. It is a splendid villa. 4. I am angry^ at the daughter of the queen. She is always opposed to me. 5. Your letter, my friend, is not agreeable to me. iWhen you are puzzled how to express a given idea, look at the Latin Beading Matter and see how it was expressed there. Thus if the "at" of "angry at" troubles you, look in the Latin sentences of section 57 for an irata, and see how the idea was there expressed. YOUNG ROMAN LADY, POR- TRAIT BUST From Excavations in widen- ing the Tiber, 1880 Ablative 23 LESSON VIII PRINCIPLES AND NAMES 70. Specimen Sentences: Coqua a culinaabest, the cook is absent from the kitchen. Coqua cum domina in culina est, the cook is with the mistress in the kitchen, a. In culina and domina, we have a new case, with the same letters as the Nominative, but sounding differently, having a final long a. This case is called the Ablative. 71. The Latin Ablative is a mixed case, being made up of the remains of three cases, which originally were entirely distinct, in form as well as in meaning : the true Ablative, or /rom -case, ^ expressing separation; the Socia- tive, or with-case, expressing association ; and the Locative, or m-case, expressing location. It inherited the forces of all these cases, and thus expresses the /rom-idea, the with-idea, and the in-idea. 72. According to its forces, it is convenient to speak of the case as: 1. The Separative Ablative,"^ auBwering the question "whence?" "from what place?" 2. The Sociative Ablative, answering the question "with whom?" or "with what?" 3. The Locative Ablative, answering the question " where? "^ 73. Words like from, with, in, which define the rela- tion of a noun or pronoun to another word, are called Prepositions. iThe case is named from this use. The word "ablative" means "the case of taking-away." 2 Or Ablative of Separation. 3 The word Locative is the best word to use, but not a perfect one. It should be understood as covering exact location only — English in, on, or under— hut no other ideas of place. 24 Exercises 74. VOCABULARY (New verbs will henceforth be given in the first person.) prepositions: adverbs: aorab,^/rom,ait?o2//rom. Takes hlc^ in this place, here. Abl. hodie (on this day=:), today. cum, with. Takes Abl. ibi, there. in, in, on. Takes Abl. ubi, where. verbs: quoque, also, too. (Postpositive, absum (ab+sum), am away, am ^- ^- " P^^^^^ ^^^^^•" ^^^^^^ absent, am distant. . ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ modified.) ambulo, ivalk. 75. READING MATTER 1. luliahicest? (Ans.) In culina est. 2. (Said by a servant to a caller) Domina a villa abest. (Ques.)'^ Ubi est? (Ans.)^ In silva est. (Ques.) Ubi silva est? (Ans.) Silva villae propinqua est. 3. Regina hodie cum filia mea cenat. (Ans.) Amat regina filiam tuam; meae inimlca est. 4t. Ubi domina tua est? (Ans.) In silva cum amica ambulat. Silvam amat. (First speaker) Mea quoque domina silvam amat, et ibi saepe ambulat. 76. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Where is your mistress? Is she here? (Ans.) She is in the kitchen with the cook. 2. Why is your daughter absent from the villa? (Ans.) She J is dining today with the daughter of the queen. 3. My friend's villa is near a great forest, where I often walk. I love the forest. 4. My daughter also loves the forest, and often walks there. 1 Ab before vowels and h, a before consonants. But before most con- sonants ab may also be used. 2 We will now use the abbreviations Ques. and Ans. for Question and Answer. Cases with Prepositions 25 LESSON IX CASES WITH PREPOSITIONS 77. VOCABULARY prepositions: verb: ad, at, (near) by; with verbs of habito, inhabit, dwell, live. motion, to, toward. Takes Ace. ante, before, in-front-of. Takes Ace. adverb: post, behind^ after. Takes Ace. nunc, now. trans, across, beyond. Takes Ace. per, through. Takes Ace. ' noun: in (same word as before), into, casa, cottage, cabin. when used with Accusative. CASE USES AND SPECIMEN SENTENCES 78. Only Prepositions having a from, with, or in force take the Ablative. You will find that Prepositions ex- pressing other space-relations^ take. the Accusative. Thus : silva post vTllam est, the wood is behind the villa. villa ante silvam est, the villa is before (in-front-of) the wood, villa ad silvam est, the villa is by the wood. ad silvam ambulat, she walks to the wood. ^n silvam ambulat, she walks into the wood. ^But in silva ambulat, she walks in the wood. Notice that, in accordance with the principle above, and the one given in 72, 3: a. The Accusative is used with in to express the Place To Which something moves, the Ablative to express the Place In Which something is or is done. b. Literal Direction in Space is thus expressed by the Accusative with a Preposition (e. g., ad or in). The Dative expresses Figurative Direction only. c. Only the Accusative and Ablative are used with Prepositions. 1 In the real force of the Latin prepositions. But our expression, with our preposition, may sometimes be quite different. 26 Declining THE DECLINING OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES 79. We have seen all the six Latin cases, with their fun- damental forces, and all the forms of the Singular number (that is, the number which indicates one person or thing) in the first set of case-forms, called the First Declension, We shall now learn to give in order the six cases for serva, servant, then for bona, good, and then for serva bona, good servant, together (thus Nom. serva bona. Gen. servae bonae, etc.). This is called Declining. 80. First Declension: Singular Number Noun Adjective IN Agreement bona e bonae servae bonae servam bonam (serva serva bona bona English Translation the good servant of the good ser- vant, or the good servant's to or for the good servant the good servant (O) good servant from, with, or in the good ser- vant Fundamental Case-Meanings Case Nom. Subject. Gen. That to which some- thing belongs. Dat. Figurative Direction. Ace. Vcc. Abl. Space-Ideas (except from, with and in ideas), and Direct Object. Address. From, with, and in Ideas. 81. We have now had all the Latin Parts of Speech, which are as in English, minus the Article,^ — namely: Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, Interjection. a. Henceforth words will be arranged in the vocabularies in alphabetical order, unless there is a special reason for bringing par- ticular words together. Exercises 27 82. READING MATTER 1. Filia tua hodie hie est? (Ans.) A villa abest. In silva cum amiea ambulat. (First speaker) Mea quoque filia ibi nunc ambulat. 2. Ubi iQlia coqua est ? In culina non est. (Ans.) Ad casam amicae ambulat. (Ques.) Ubicasaest? Est ad silvam? (Ans.) Trans silvam amica habitat. Nunc per silvam coqua ambulat. 3. Villa mea ante silvam magnam est. (Ques.) Filia tua saepe in silva ambulat ? (Ans.) Saepe a villa ad silvam ambu- lat; sed in silvam non ambulat. Filia parva est, silva magna. 4. Ubi amica tua habitat ? Post silvam habitat. 83. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Why is the cook absent from the kitchen? (Ques.) She isn't there? (Another servant says) Here she is, 2. A friend of the cook lives in a little cottage behind the wood. 3. Where is your daughter now? (Ans.) She is dining with the queen today. (First speaker) My daughter, too, is dining with the queen. 4-. Where does your friend live? Does she live in-front-of the wood? (Ans.) She lives beyond the wood. (Ques.) Does she often walk into the wood? (Ans.) She often walks through^ the wood to my villa. 1 Always keep the preposition before its noun or pronoun. When, then, you want to emphasize a preposition, put the whole group into an emphatic place. SILVER PITCHERS FOUND IN BOSCOREALE 28 First Declension in Full LESSON X FIRST DECLENSION (FINISHED) 84. We may now finish the First Declension by adding the Plural (that is, the number which indicates more than one person or thing). The case-meanings are the same. 85. Words of the First Declension are called a-Stems, because their stems originally ended in -a- throughout.^ a. The stem of a word is the part which remains constant, and to which the endings are added as the word changes in inflection. b. When the stem ends in a vowel, a change in the stem or the ending, or in both, may take place, so that sometimes neither appears as it originally was. But in such cases it is still convenient to use the word "ending" for the apparent ending. 86. FIRST DECLENSION: SL-Stems Noun Adjective Stem serva- bona- SINGULAR Endings Nominative serva bona -a Genitive servae bonae -ae Dative servae bonae -ae Accusative servam bonam -am Vocative serva bona -a Ablative serva PLURAL bona -a Nominative servae bonae -ae Genitive servarum bonarum -arum Dative servls bonis -Is Accusative servas bonas -as Vocative servae bonae -ae Ablative eervis bonis -Is -iJn the First Declension, you can see something of the a-sound in almost every form. But the original long sound has been shortened in. several places. Infinitive 29 a. Learn to decline serva and bona separately and together. b. You will find that, in the Plurals of all Declensions, Nomina- tive and Vocative are alike, and Dative and Ablative are alike, c. Notice, that in the First Declension, the Genitive and Dative Singular are like the Nominative and Vocative Plural. You must be on your guard when you meet one of these doubtful forms. 87. The Infinitive is a kind of verb-noun. It expresses the mere idea of action or being. Thus amare, io love, Presen,t Infinitive of amo, I love, a. An Infinitive that completely fills out tho meaning of another verb, as in ambulare amo, I love to ivalk, is often called a Comple- mentary Infinitive ("complementary" is from a Latin word meaning *^fillout"). b. In general, the Infinitive in Latin is used in much the same way as in English, e. g., as Subject, Object, or Complement. Differ- ences will be pointed out later. 88. The third person plural of the Present Indicative is shown by the ending -nt. Thus amant, {they) love, sunt, (they) are. 89. VOCABULARY beata, happy, blessed, fortunate, rdstica, rustic, country. cGra, care, anxiety. sine, Prep., without. Takes Sepa- femina, woman. rative Ablative. multa, much. In Plural, many, tranquilla, tranquil. pectlnia, money. vita, life. 90. READING MATTER 1. Epistulas ab amicis nunc exspecto. 2. Amo arnicas meas: me amant amicae meae. 3. Amicae meae filias amo. Et pulchrae et bonae sunt. 4. Amo per silvas cum amicis meis ambulare. (Ans.)^ Amicae quoque meae amant in silvis ambulare. 30 Exercises 5. Sunt^ pulchrae villae et ad silvam et trans silvam. 6. Vitam tranquillam, amicae meae, sine multa pecunia et multis euris amo. Beata est vita riistiea. 7. Multis feminis vita splendida grata est: mihi grata est vita tranquilla. Ciira mult arum servarum mihi non grata est. 91. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. The mistresses of good servants are happy! 2. Much money gives many anxieties. (Ans.) But money is agreeable. 3. There are many cottages by the forest. (Ans.) There are many beyond the forest too. 4. Many women love a tranquil country life without care. 5. A. tranquil country life is agreeable to me, and to my friends also. 6. My friends live by a forest. 7. My daughters love to walk with friends through forests. 8. I often walk to the forest, not often i7ito the forest. 9. Dinner is ready, my daughters. Where are my friends? ^ There are. The English "there" is merely "expletive" (i.e., a "filling-out" word). Sunt is not emphatic, but, like "there," is put first in order that the more important words may be held up (Suspense). FARMER AND WOOD Ruins of ancient Aqueduct in distance Four Types of Conjugation 31 LESSON XI THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS 92. There are four regular types of Verb Inflection, known as the Four Conjugations. They are distinguished by the vowel which ends the stem in the Present ("char- acteristic vowel"). This is most conveniently seen in the Present Infinitive. Thus : Conjugation Present Indicative Present Infinitive Present Stem Ends In I amO ama-re, to love -a- (ama-) II moneO mone-re, to ivarn -e- (mone-) III IV tegO audio tege-re, to cover audi-re, to hear -e- (tege-) -1- (audi-) 93. A few verbs, called Irregular, are inflected in a different way. Thus sum, am, Infinitive, esse, to be, 94. We have already had half of the group of First Conjugation forms with which we began (namely amo, amat, ^mant). The whole group will now be given, together with the forms for sum. 96. PRESENT INDICATIVE First Conjugation Irregular Stem ama- Personal Endings 1st Pers. Sing . amO, I love -0 or -m sum, I am 2d *' " amas, you love -s es, you are or thou lovest or thou art 3d *' amat, he {she, it) loves -I est, he {she, it) is 1st Pers. PI. araamus, we love -mus sumus, we are 2d " " amatis, you Jove -tis estis, you are 3d " - amant, they love -nt sunt, they are a. Amo originally was ama-0 (the -a- being shortened before a vowel); But the a and ran together and the a disappeared. 32 Exercises b. The forms of these verbs show the Number and Person of the Subject. When, then, the Subject is expressed, the verb will agree with it in Number and Person. 96. VOCABULARY instSL^Just. 0, O, or 0/i (often used in address, iuvO, help. though never necessary). \aet3Ly joyous J glad, happy. quia, Conj., because. 97. READING MATTER 1. Dominam tuam amas? (Ans.) Dominam meam amo. Ser- vis semper benigna est. 2. Dominam, o servae, cur semper laudatis? (Ans.) Dominam laudamus, quia semper iusta et benigna est. 3. Multae feminae pecuniam cum curls amant, non multae vitam riisticam tranquillam et beatam. 4. Cur, filiae meae, tam laetae estis? (Ans.) Laetae sumus quia amicas exspectamus. 5. (The mother calls) Ubi es, filia mea? (The daughter) Hie sum. (The mother) Ubi "hie" est ? (The daughter) In culina sum. (The mother) Ciir in culina es? (The daughter) Coquam iuvo, Cenam paramus. 6. Filiarum tuarum amicae te quoque amant. Beata es. 98. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Do you (said to one person) often walk in the forest ? (Ans.) I love to walk in the forest, because I am always happy there. 2. Where are you, my friends (use o for practice)? (Ans.) We are waiting-for you and your daughter in-front-of (= before) the villa. Is she ready? 3. I give a-great-deal-of (=much) money to my servants. 4. The queen loves a just mistress. .5. I love to dine with friends. 6. The dinners of my friends are often splendid, but not always good. 7. I love to help the cook in the kitchen. Second Conjugation 33 LESSON XII FIRST CONJUGATION (Repeated) AND SECOND CON; JUGATION 99. PRESENT INDICATIVE First Conjugation Second Conjugation Stem ama- Stem mone- Personal Endings 1st Sing. amO, I love moneO, I warn -0 (or -m^) 2d " amas, you love mOnes, you warn -s 3d *' amat, he {she, it) loves monet, he (she, it) warns -t 1st PL amamus, we love monemus, ive warn -mus 2d " amatis, you love monetis, you warn -tis 3d " amant, they love monent, ihey warn -nt a.' Given the differing stems (-a- and -e-), the First and Second Conjugations are formed in precisely the same way in the Present Indicative, except that the First Conjugation has lost the final -a- of the Stem in the first person singular (originally ama-0, like moneO). h. You will now need to learn the following Rules, which will ex- plain various changes to be seen here or later: 100*. 1. A vowel is regularly short before another vowel or h. a. Thus ama-0 (becoming amO), not ama-0, and mone-5, not mone-0. 2. Every originally long vowel was regularly shortened before final m pr t, before nt and nd anywhere, and, ex- cept in monosyllables,^ before final r or 1. a. Thus ama-t and ama-nt became ama-t and ama-nt, and mone-t and mone-nt became mone-t and mone-nt. 1 We have seen the ending -m in the verb sum, am. 2 1, e., words of one syllable. 34 Dative with Certain Verbs 101. Certain Latin verbs express Quality, Attitude, or Relation, just as adjectives do, and hence are followed^ by a Dative of Figurative Direction (general rule in 67). a. Thus, just as one says vita rtistica mihi grata est, country life is agreeable to me, so one says vita rnstica mihi placet, country life is pleasing to me (or country life pleases me). 102. VOCABULARY causa, 'cause, reason. moneo, admonish, warn, chide, fere. Adv., generally; (then) instruct. . about, almost. plsLceOy am pleasing, please. habeO, have; hold; regard. (Word of Quality, taking Dat.) 103. READING MATTER 1. Nunc, coqua, parata sum te iuvare. 2. Filias tuas saepe mones? (Ans.) Filias meas n5n saepe moneo, quia mihi fere semper placent. 3. Domina mea me saepe sine causa monet. lusta non est. 4. Pecuniam, amicae meae, non mult am habetis. Cur tam laetae estis? (Ans.) Pecuniam n5n habemus multam; sed mul- tas non habemus curas. 5. Vita rustica tibi grata est? (Ans.) Vitarustica mihi placet. Tranquillam am5 vitam. 104. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. I am happy. My country villa pleases (= is pleasing to) me. '2. Your life pleases you, mine (pleases) me. 3. We love to help the cook, because she is always kind. • 4. Do we please you? (The mother answers) You do please me almost always. I have good daughters. 5. I do not please my mistress. She is generally harsh to me. 6. My friends often chide, me without reason. They are not just. 1 "Followed by" does not refer to the order of the sentence, but only to the effect of one word upon another. Second Declension 35 LESSON XIII GRAMMATICAL GENDERi 105. Nouns of the First Declension are feminine, except a few which denote males. These are masculine. 106. In the Second Declension, to which we now pass, nouns in -um are neuter. Most others are masculine. a. In this Declension, the stern originally ended in -o-. b. The Declension of Adjectives closely follows that of Nouns. 107. SECOND DECLENSION: o-Stems, in -us and -um servus, bonus, donum, bonum slave, M.2 good. gift, N.2 good. Stem servo- bono- dono- SINGULAR bono- Endings M.andF.2 N. Nom. servus bonus donum bonum -us -um Gen. servl boni doni boni -I Dat. servo bono donO bono -0 Ace. servum bonum donum bonum -um Voc. serve bone donum bonum -e -um Abl servo bono donO PLURAL bono* -0 Nom. servl boni dona bona -I -a Gen. servOrum bonOrum donOrum bonOrum -Orum Dat. servls bonis donis bonis -Is Ace. servos bonOs dona bona -OS -a Voc. servl boni dona bona -I -a Abl. servis bonis donls bonis -is a. It is only in the Mase. and Fem- Sing, of Second Declension words in -us that the Voc. regularly differs from the Nom. b. Learn to decline servus and bonus separately and together, and dOnum and bonum separately and together. 1 Gender is in Latin quite as much a matter of termination and of rela- tionship to other words as of sex. 2M. means masculine, F. feminine, and N. neuter. 36 Exei'cises 108. VOCABULARY agricola (Masculine), /armer. labOrO, labor, work. amicus, (man or hoy) friend. male, Adv. (cf. malus), badly. bene, Adv. (cf.^ bonus), well. Marcus, Mark, a name. dominus, master. numquam. Adv., never. dOnum, gift, present. satis, Adv. and Noun, sufficiently, Gallus, a Gaul. Also a man's enough. name, Gallus. servus, (man) servant or (man) hortus, garden. slave. 109. READING MATTER 1. Mihi placet in horto cum agricola laborare. 2. Casa Galli servi parva sed satis magna est. (Ans.) Casae serv5rum parvae fere sunt. 3. Tibi, Galle, dominus tuus saepe iratus est. (Ans.) Bonus sum servus, et bene fere laboro. Domino cur numquam placeo? Me semper sine causa monet. 4. Bonos, Marce, habes servds. Beatus es. Mei servi male laborant. 5. Donum tuum, amice, mihi placet. Bonus es. 6. Servis meis dona parva saepe do. Satis boni servi sunt. (Ans.) Bonum habent dominum. 110. ' MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Where is Gallus? (Ans.) He is with the farmer in the garden. 2. Gallus, your master's garden is small. (Ans.) It is large enough. 3. Mark, why do you chide your slaves without reason? (Ans.) I chide my slaves because they often work badly. 4. Why do you never give little presents to your slaves ? 5. The slaves of kind masters are generally good. 6. I love my master, because he is always kind. 7. I love to work well, because I love to please my master. 8. Why do you chide your friend? 1 For the Latin confer, meaning compare. Shortened ro-Stems 37 LESSON XIV SECOND DECLENSION (Cont'd): SHORTENED ro-STEMS 111. The Second Declension includes a number of Nouns and Adjectives, called ro- and ra-Stems, in which the Nominative ending has been shortened.^ Thus: Nouns Adjectives puer, hoy, M. ager^ fields M. vir, man, M. miser, miserable piger , lazy Stems puero- agro- viro- SINGULAR misero- pigro- Nom. puer ager vir miser piger Gen, pueri agri virl miseri pigri Dat puero agro virO . miserO pigro Ace, puerum agrum virum miserum pigrum Voc. puer ager vir miser piger Abl. puerO agrO virO PLURAL miserO pigrO Nom. pueri agrr virr miseri pigrI Gen. puerOrum agrOrum virOrum miserOrum pigrOrum Dat. puerls agrls virls miserls pigris Ace. pueros agros virOs miserOs pigros Voc, pueri agrr viri miseri pigri Abl. pueris agris viris miserls pigris a. Decline these new words separately. Then decline puer piger together, and vir miser together. Then decline amicus miser together (Gen. amici miseri, Dat. amicO miserO, etc.) b. Notice that the endings of these new words differ from those of servus and bonus only in the Nominative and Vocative Singular. You have thus but one new form to learn. 1 Originally the forms were the same in servus, puer, ager, etc., namely Nom. servo-s (becoming servus later), puero-s, agro-s, etc. But the ro- stems lost the -os in the Nominative. Thus original pueros became puer. If in such stems the r immediately followed a consonant, an e-sound crept in. Thus original agros became agr, then ager. 38 . Irregular Forms IRREGULAR FORMS OP DECLENSIONS I AND II 112. 1. Nouns in -ius and -ium have the Genitive Singular in -i (iiot -ii). Thus Cornelius, Cornelius, Gen. Cornell; ingenium, intellect, Gen. ingeni, 2. Nouns in -ius form the Vocative in -i. Thus Corne- lius, Cornelius, Voc. Cornell; filius, son, Yoc, fill. a. These contracted Genitives and Vocatives in -i have the accent on the penult, even if it is short. Thus ingeni. b. Mens, mine, has the irregular Voc. Sing. Masculine ml. 113. Filia, daughter, has the form filiabus in the Dative and Ablative Plural, to avoid confusion with filiis, sons, from filius. 114. VOCABULARY (From here on, the Genitive of every noun will be given, together with the Gender, indicated by M., F., or N., and the Declension ; also, for adjec- tives, the three Nominatives, Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.) ager, SLgrif M.. 2, land, field. miser, misera, miserum, miser- Cornelius, -1, M. 2, Cornelius, a able, unhappy. name. piger, pigra, pigrum, lazy, discipulus, -1, M. 2, pupil, school- impiger,impigra,impigrum(from boy. in, meaning not, +piger, lazy), fama, -ae, F. 1, fame, report, energetic, industrious. reputation. puella, -ae, F. 1, girl. filius, fill, M. 2, son. puer, -I, M. 2, boy. ingenium, ingeni, N. 2, intellect, pulcher,pulchra,pulchrum, beau- ability, tiful. magister, -tri, M. 2, master validus, -aj -um, strong. {= teacher). vir, virl, M. 2, man. 116. READING MATTER 1. Filiis meis gratum^ est in horto et agris cum agricolis laborare, filiabus meis placet coquam in culina iuvare. 2. Dominus servis impigris dona multa dat. 1 Translate: It is agreeable, etc. This "it" is merely an "expletive."— Notice that an adjective (as gratum) agreeing with an infinitive (as laborare) is neuter. Exercises 39 3. Te, Galle, dominus numquam laudat. Male laboras. 4. Te, puer piger, magister saepe monet. Non bene laboras. 5. Cornell, fill mi, satis impiger non es. Non amo puerum pigrum. 6. Fama ingeni Corneli non magna est. Bonus non est discipulus. 7. Magister puerorum pigr5rum et puellarum pigrarum miser est. 8. Vir validus et impiger es. Amiei tui te et laudant et amant. 9. lulia non pulchra est, sed bene laborat. Bona est coqua. 10. Filii tui, amice mi, pulchri sunt, f^iae tuae pulchrae. 116. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. My son has good ability. Why does he work badly? Does he like a bad reputation ? 2. Cornelius, my son, you are strong, and have good enough ability; but you are lazy. You are a bad pupil. 3. It pleases my daughters to work. They are energetic girls. 4. You work well, girls. You please me. 5. The lazy boy is generally unhappy. 6. The energetic man is almost always happy. 7. Why do you chide me, master? (Ans.) Because you work badly in the fields. ROMAN SCHOOL, FROM POM- PEIAN WALL PAINTING Ancient Aids to Learning 40 Adjectives of First and Second Declensions LESSON XV ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS (Summary) 117. Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions are declined like noiins of similar form, bonus, good (Masculine like servus) SINGULAR M. F. N. . Nom. bonus bona bonum Gen. boni bonae boni Dat. bono bonae bono Ace. bonum bonam bonum Voc. bone bona bonum Abl. bono bona bono PLURAL . Nom. boni bonae bona Gen. bonOruir I bonarum bonOrum Dat. bonis bonis bonis Ace. bonOs bonas bona Voc. boni bonae bona Abl. bonis bonis bonis miser, miserable (Masc. like puer) piger, lazy (Masc. like ager) SINGULAR SINGULAR M. F. N. M. F. N. Norn . miser misera miserum piger pigra pigrum Gen. miseri miserae miseri pigri pigrae pigrl Dat misero miserae miserO pigro pigrae pigro Ace. miserum miseram miserum pigrum pigram I pigrum Voc. miser misera miserum piger pigra pigrum Abl miserO misera PLURAL miserO pigrO pigra PLURAI pigrO Nom .miser! miserae misera pigrI pigrae pigra Gen. miserOrum miserarum miserOrum pigrOrum pigrSrum pigrOrum Dat miserls miseris miseris pigrls pigrls pigrls Ace. miserOs miseras misera pigros pigras pigra Voc. miseri miserae misera pigrI pigrae pigra Abl miseris miseris miseris pigrls pigrls pigrls Agreement of Adjectives 41 a. You have had all these forms before, with those of the cor- responding nouns. But you must now learn to recite the three genders side by side for each case (thus bonus, bona, bonum, etc.), in order that you may quickly recognize a given case and gender, and quickly form one in writing Latin. b. The Stems of bonus are o- and a-Stems, those of miser and piger ro- and ra-Stems. , AGREEMENT OP ADJECTIVES 118. We have constantly seen the Adjective taking different forms, according to the gender, the number, and the case of the word to which it belongs. Thus we find serva bona, servarum bonarum, servus bonus, servum bonum, servorum bonorum, etc., etc. We can then state the usage in the following rule: 119. Adjectives agree with their Nouns in Gender, Number, and Case. a. This of course does not mean that a Noun and its Adjective must necessarily have the same endings. Thus, if we wish to say "the good farmer," the masculine form must be used for ''good," since agricola is masculine. The declension will then be: Nom. agricola bonus Gen. agricolae boni Dat. agricolae bono Ace. agricolam bonum Voc. agricola bone Abl. agricola bono and similarly in the plural. 120. READING MATTER 1. Marcus agricola vir validus et impiger est. ^ 2. Agri agricolae boni semper pulchri sunt. 3. Marcus, Marci agricolae filius, bonus est discipulus. 4. Fama Marci, Marci fili, bona est. Impiger est discipulus. 5. Ingenium tuum, Corneli, n5n malum est, fama tua mala. 42 Exercises 6. Discipulus piger magistro non placet. Impigrum amat magister puerum. 7. Hortu3 filiarum mearum pulcher n5n est. Pigrae sunt puellae. 8. Filiae meae pigrae et miserae sunt, tuae impigrae et laetae. Beatus es. 121. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. It often pleases little boys to work in gardens. 2. My little sons love to help the farmers in the fields. 3. The good farmer is kind to the little boys and girls. 4. Mark is both an energetic farmer and a good man. 5. Mark, your son's ^ ability is great. You are fortunate. 6. (To another father) Your son Cornelius has sufficiently good ability and is strong. 7. But he is lazy. Lazy boys give a teacher many cares. 1 '' The ability of your son." YOUNG ROMAN, POETRAIX BUST Voice: the Passive 43 LESSON XVI VOICE 122. The Active Voice represents the Subject of the Verb as acting, the Passive represents it as acted upon. Thus moneo, I warn (Active), moneor, I am warned (Passive). FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS (Continued) 123. Present Indicative, Active^ and Passive First Conjugation, Stem ama-. Active Passive 1st Sing. amo, I love amor, I am loved 2d " amas, you love amaris or -re, you are loved 3d " amat, he [she^ it) loves amatur, he (she, it) is loved 1st PI. amamus, we love amamur, we are loved 2d " amatis, you love amamini, you are loved 3d " amant, they love amantur, they are loved Second Conjugation, Stem mone-. Active 1st Sing. moneO, I warn 2d " mones, you warn 3d " xaonGt,he{she,it\warns 1st PI. monemus, we warn 2d " monetis, you warn 3d " monent, they warn Passive moneor, / am warned moneris or -re, you are warned monetur, he {she, it) is warned monemur, we are warned monemini, you are warned monentur, they are ivarned 124. The Personal Endings are thus seen to be as follows: Active Passive 1st Sing. -0 (or -m) -r 2d " -s -ris or -re 3d " -t -tur 1st PI. -mus -mur 2d '' -tis -mini 3d " -nt -ntur ' Repeated for review and comparison. 44 Agent of the Passive Voice 125. Notice and remember the following, which are true of all the passive forms of the Finite Verb^ made from the stem seen in the Present Indicative: 1. The Second Person Plural always ends in -mini. 2. All other forms contain an r somewhere in the termination. THE AGENT OP THE PASSIVE VOICE 126. The Agent of the Passive Voice (the person hy whom the act is performed) is expressed by the Ablative with a or ab.^ Thus: Servus a dominO culpatur, the servant is blamed by the master. 127. READING MATTER 1. Domina me amat (Active). A domina amor (Passive). 2. Magister puerum pigrum monet. Puer piger a magistro monetur. 3. A magistro saepe moneris. Piger es discipulus. 4. Bene, filii mei, non laboratis. A magistro saepe monemini. 5. AgrT Marei, agricolae validi, pulchri sunt, et a multis^ laudantur. 6. Impigri sumus servi, sed a domino numquam laudamur. 7. Impigrae estis puellae, et a magistro laudamini saepe. 128. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. The queen blames the harsh master (Active). The harsh master is blamed by the queen (Passive). 2. Gallus, you are often admonished by the mistress. 3. I am often praised by my kind mistress. 4. My daughters, you are not admonished by a kind teacher without reason. 5. You are lazy girls. 6. I am not happy. I do not love lazy^ (people). iThe Finite Verb, as will be seen later (338), is made up of the Indica- tive, the Subjunctive, and the Imperative. ^ The meaning was originally /rom, the conception being that of the per- son /rom whom the action started. Compare "an arrow shot from a well- experienced archer." Shakespeare, Per. i. 1. 164. 3 Adjective used as a Noun (Masculine, because general). Pronominal Adjectives 45 LESSON XVII PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES 129. Nine Adjectives, called Pronominal, are declined like Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions, except in the Genitive and Dative Singular^ which have the pecu- liar PronominaV Endings -lus and -i in all genders. But alius has Neuter aliud, and its Genitive is generally re- placed by alterius, from alter. The nine words are: nnus, one, only alius, other, another (of several) nllus, any alter, the other, another (of two) nnllus, none, no uter, which 9 (of two) solus, sole, alone neuter, neither (of two) totus, total, whole a. Except anus and sOlus, these lack the Vocative. 130. The Declension in the singular is thus as follows: f totus, ivhole alter, the other M. F. N. M. F. N. Nom. totus tota totum alter altera alterum Gen. totlus totius totlus alterius alterius alterius Dat. toti totI toti alterl alterl alterl Ace. to turn totam totum alterum alteram alterum Voc. Ahl. totO tota totO alterO altera altero alius, another uter, which 9 (of two) Nom. alius alia aliud uter utra utrum Gen. (alterius alterius alterius) utrius utrius utrius Dat. alir alir alii utrl utrl utrl Ace. alium aliam aliud utrum utram utrum Voc Ahl. alio alia alio utrO utra utrO 1 These endings will be seen later in many pronouns, as ille, that (145). 46 Uses of Alius a. The Plural is like that of any other Adjectives of the First and Second Declension. Thus Nominative alii, aliae, alia, Genitive ali- Orum, aliarum, aliOrum, Dative alils, aliis, aliis, etc. b. Note that in these words the Nominative Plural Masculine is identical with the Dative Singular (thus alii is in either case). Be on your guard, then, when you meet such a form. 131. When alius is repeated (alius ... alius . . . ), the meaning is one . . . another ... (in the Plural, some ... others . . . ). When alter is repeated (alter . . . alter . . . ) , the meaning is one . . . the other . . . (in the Plural, one party . . . the other party . . . ). 132. You will notice, in the Reading Matter below, that the pro- nominal adjectives precede their nouns. And you will find, as you go on, that this is only one illustration of a general usage, which may be briefly stated as follows: 133. Words of Exactness, Quantity, or Number^ normally pre- cede their nouns. 134. VOCABULARY (Add the Pronominal Adjectives learned in 129) an, Conj., or (in second part of a quam, Adv., /iot(?, as, //laTi. Thus: question). quam multi, how many; tam faveo, be favorable to , favor, quam, so {much) as, as {much) (Word of Attitude, taking as; magis quam, more than, Dat.) minus quam, less than. magis. Adv., more? -que, Conj., a?2d(enclitic2). Rep- minus, Adv., less. resents closer connection than nOnnumquam , Adv. (nOn + num- et. quam, not never) sometimes. schola, -ae, F. 1, school. 135. READING MATTER 1. tJnus discipulus a magistr5 saepe' laudatur. Cur n5n alii tam laudantur quam Marcus? Ciir non tota schola n5nnum- quam laudatiu:? (Ans.) Quia niillus alius discipulus semper bene laborat. Non favet magister discipulo ulli. lE.g. : "this" man, the *'other" man (exactness); "much" money, the "whole" school (quantity) ; "one" boy, "ten" pupils (number). 2 Enclitic means "leaning back upon" something else. Exercises 47 2. (The master) Cornelio non minus faved quam Marco. Sed alter piger est, alter impiger. » 3. (A visitor remarks) Quam male laborat Cornelius ! ( Ans.) Piger est discipulus, et saepe culpatur moneturque a magistro. 4. (A pupil to the teacher) Utri magis faves, Marco an Cor- nelio? (Ans.) Neutri magis quam alter! fave5. T5tius scholae, n5n unius solius discipuli, magister sum. Sed alios discipulos laudo, ali5s ^ moneo, quia alii bene laborant semper, alii ^ nonnum- quam pigri sunt. 136. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Some pupils the master often praises; others he censures and^ warns. One he always praises. 2. (A pupil says) Teacher, I often work well. 3. Why do you not sometimes praise me as (much) as Mark?^ 4. Other pupils are lazy sometimes, and are sometimes ad- monished. 5. Mark alone always works well, and is never admonished. 6. (Cornelius) Which does the teacher favor, you or me? 7. (Mark) He favors neither. He favors no^ pupil more than any others. 8. He is ready to help the whole school. 9. He is kind to the whole school; he is the friend of the whole school. 10. (The master) I am ready to help Cornelius not less than Mark. 11. But. one (of the two) always works well, the other sometimes. 1 Where, as in this sentence, there is an obvious pair of contrasting ideas, Latin generally does not use a conjunction, while English generally does (and, but, while, etc.). Thus alios laudo, alios moneo, I praise some, (while) I warn others. • 2 Show the close connection of the ideas "censures" and "warns" by your choice between et and -que. 3 Look out for your case I The meaning is " praise me as-much as (you praise) Mark." * Emphatic. Make your Latin word so by your order. 48 Imperative LESSON XVIII FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS (Continued) PRESENT IMPERATIVE, ACTIVE AND PASSIVE 137. The Imperative Mood expresses Command, Advice, Request, Entreaty, etc., as in English. In the Present of the First and Second Conjugations the Second Persons Singular and Plural are formed as follows : PRESENT ACTIVE PRESENT PASSIVE I Conj. 2d Sing, ama, love (thou) amare, be (thou) loved 2d PL amate, love (ye) amaminl, be (ye) loved II Conj\ 2d Sing, mone, advise (thou) monere, be (thou) advised 2d PI. monete, advise (ye) monemini, be (ye) advised Irreg. 2d Sing, es, be (thou) (be can have no passive) 2d PL este, be (ye) a. Note that the 2d Sing. Imperative Active is the same as the bare stem (ama-, mone-; cf. 92). b. Note that the 2d Sing. Imperative Passive is the same as the Infinitive Active (amare),* and the 2d PI. the same as the 2d PI. Indicative Passive (amaminl). THE PRESENT INFINITIVES, ACTIVE (Repeated) AND PASSIVE 138. The Infinitives Active and Passive of the First and Second Conjugations are formed like the following: ACTIVE PASSIVE ConJ. I amare, to love amarl, to be loved " II monere, to warn monerl, to be warned iThus amare can mean either to love or be (thou) loved; etc., etc. It is only the surroundings (called the context) that can tell you which is the meaning in a given case. Declension of Ipse 49 a. Note that, to form the Present Infinitive, you add -re to the stem for the Active, and -ri for the Passive (ama-re, ama-ri; mone-re, mone-ri). And b. To make the Passive Infinitive from the Active, you change -re to -rl (thus culpa-re, to blame, culpa-rl, to be blamed), THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN ipse, self, very. 139. The Intensive Pronoun ipse, self, is declined pre- cisely like the Pronominal Adjectives, except for the single form ipse. Thus: ipse, self M. F. N. M. F. N. Nom. ipse^ ipsa ipsum ipsi ipsae ipsa Gen. ipsius ipsius ipsius ipsorum ipsarum ipsorum Dat. ipsi ipsi ipsi ipsis ipsis ipsis Ace. ipsum ipsam ipsum ipsos ipsas ipsa Voc. Abl. ipso ipsa ipso ipsis ipsis ipsis PERSONAL PRONOUNS AS SUBJECTS 140. Since the form of the verb shows its person and number, the Personal Pronouns are generally not ex- pressed as subjects. But they are necessarily expressed where emphasis or contrast is intended. Thus : Ego culpor, to laudaris, I am blamed, YOU are praised. 141. VOCABULARY ego, I. Nominative. etiam, Adv., even, also. impigre, Adv. (cf. impiger), ener- getically, vigorously. ipse, -a, -um, self. In English we say (my)self, (him)self, etc. ita, Adv., in such a way, thus, so. itaque, Adv. (ita + que), and so, therefore, accordingly, Indus, -I, M. 2, play, sport, game. solum, Adv. (cf. solus), only. NOn solum . . . sed etiam . . . not only . . ,^but also . . . studeo (cf. studium below), be zealous for, be eager for, be devoted to; study. (Verb of Attitude, taking Dat.) studium, studi, N. 2, zeal, inter- est; study. tG, thou, you (Sing.) Nominative. 1 In many forms of various pronouns, it is difficult to distinguish the ending. Accordingly the termiuations will nowhere be given in special type. 50 Exercises 142. READING MATTER 1. Tu studia an ludds magis amas? Ego ludos magis amo. 2. Impiger es,^ fill mi, et cum studi5 labora. Ego ipse labor5. 3. Impigri este, filii mei. Bene studete, et a me laudamini.^ 4. (The father) Cur, fill mi, a magistro semper laudatur Marcus, tu culparis monerisque? Moneri magis amas quam laudari? (Ans.) Ego laudari tam amo quam Marcus amat; sed magister Marc5 fa vet, mihi non fa vet. 5. (The father answers) Ita non est. Magister discipul5 favet nulli.^ Te non minus paratus est iuvare quam Marcum. Sed tu ludis s5lis studes, Marcus non solum ludos sed etiam studia amat. Itaque tu a niillo^ laudaris, Marcus laudatur et a magistro et ab ipsis discipulis. Tu quoque nunc impigre stude, et a magistro laudare, non monere. 143. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Do you like* better* to be praised or to be blamed? 2. I like better to be praised, and-so I work. 3. The master favors others. 4. (Ans.) It isn't so. The fault is yours, my friend. 5. Work as energetically as Mark (works). 6. Love not only your sports but also your studies. 7. Be an energetic pupil; study with interest, and be praised by the master and your friends. 8. Be energetic pupils. Study well, and be praised, not warned. 9. (Dialogue of pupils) Cornelius has good ability. 10. (Ans.) He has good ability, (but) no interest. 11. He is-devoted-to sports alone. 12. I myself love and^ praise sports not less than studies, but I praise no lazy boys. 1 How do you know whether this is Indicative or Imperative? 2 What effect has the suspense? 3 " By no (man)"=" by nobody. '^^ Nullus is here used like a Noun. "* Use amo and magis. 5 Use the conjunction of close connection. Imperfect Indicative Active 51 LESSON XIX FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS (Continued) 144. THE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE First Conjugation Second Conjugation Irregular I ivas loving, / was warning, I was, you were loving, etc. you were warning, etc. you were, etc. 1st Sing. amabam monebam eram 2d " amabas monebas eras 3d " amabat monebat erat 1st PL amabamus monebamus eramus 2d " amabatis monebatis eratis 3d " amabant monebant erant a. The Tense-Sign of the Imperfect Indicative is -ba-, which is added to the stem seen in the Present. Thus ama-ba-m, mone-ba-m, shortened to ama-ba-m, mone-ba-m; cf. 100, 2. h. The Imperfect represents an action as going on at some point or period in past time (English "Past Progressive Tense"). It thus expresses o. past state of affairs, a past situation, as in cenabam, I was dining. 146. DECLENSION OP THE DETERMINATIVE i NOUN ille, that,^ he^ PRO- SINGULAR PLURAL M. F. N. M. F. N. Nom . ille ilia illud illi illae ilia Gen. illius illius illius illorum illarum illorum Dat. illi illi illi illls illls illls Ace. ilium illam illud illos illas ilia Voc. Abl. illo ilia illo illis illls illls a. Iste, this (of yours), that (of yours) , he, is declined like ille. 1 A Determinative Pronoun (also called Demonstrative) shows just who or just what is meant, as in " That is the man ; he did it, not I." 2 " That " (Plural " those "), the English '' Demonstrative " Pronoun, y He " (Plural '' they "), the English " Personal " pronoun. 52 Substantives, Clauses, Phrases SUBSTANTIVES DEFINED.— PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES AS SUBSTANTIVES 146. Words which express persons or things are con- veniently called Substantives. A noun is thus a Substan- tive. So is a personal pronoun like tu. Thus, if I say, tu, Cornell, you, Cornelius, both words are Substantive. a. The Determinative Pronouns may be used in all cases as Personal. Pronouns of the Third Person. Thus, ille, he, ilia, she, illud, it; illius dOnum (the gift of him), his gift; illi, to him, etc. h. We have several times seen that Adjectives may be used as Substantives, i. e., as if they were in themselves expressions of per- sons or things. Thus Sl multls laudantur, they are praised by many. DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS AS ADJECTIVES 147. The Determinative Pronouns are also used as Determinative Adjectives, agreeing with a Noun. Thus ille puer, that boy, ilia puella, that girl, illud donum, that gift- a. The Determinative Adjectives normally precede their nouns, under the principle of 133. "CLAUSE" AND "PHRASE" DEFINED 148. 1. A Clause is a member of a sentence containing a Finite Verb of its own, or an Infinitive of corresponding value. Thus, in "it pleases me that you do this," the words ''that you do this" are a Clause. Similarly, in "it is sweet to die for fatherland," the words "to die for fatherland" are a Clause. a. An enclitic conjunction introducing a clause or phrase is naturally attached to the first word. Thus: Cornelium iuva, illique fave, help Cornelius and favor hir,i. 2. A Phrase is a group of associated words not con- taining a Finite Verb, or Infinitive of corresponding value. a. Thus, in cum studio labOra, work with zeal, cum studio is a Phrase. Exercises 53 149'. VOCABULARY aeger, aegra, aegrum, ill. nOnndilus, -a, -um (nOn+nnllus, aegre, Adv., in an ill manner, =not none), some. In PJ., i'ZZ, with difficulty. some, several, not a few. bellum, -1, N. 2, war. novus, -a, -um, new. enim, Conj., /or. Like nam,. but nnper. Adv., recently, postpositive in its clause.^ Otium, oti, N. 2, ease, repose; nam, Conj., /or. Cf. enim. leisure; peace. Germanus, -i, M. 2, a German. periculum, -I, N. % peril, danger, illef -Si y -udy that ; he, she, it. probo, approve, iste, -a, -ud, this {of yours) or timeOy fear, be afraid. that (of yours); he, she, it. tum, Adv., at that time, then. READING MATTER ( In the following sentences, a past state of affairs and a present state of affairs are contrasted, by the use of the Imperfect and Present tenses. ) 150. 1. Marcus nuperbene laborabat. Fama illius discipuli magna erat. Ilium et magister et tota schola laudabant. Nunc ita non est. Nonnulli ilium etiam culpant. 2. (The teacher) Nuper, Marce, bene laborabas, studiumque tuum tota schola laudabat. Nunc impigre non laboras. (Ans.) Ita est. Validus tum eram. Nunc aeger sum; itaque aegre laboro. Tu ipse mihi fave, meque iuva. 3. Nuper, amici mei, otium laudabatis, otio studebatis. Nunc bellum s5lum laudatis. (Ans.) Tum nullum timebamus peri- culum. Nunc Germanos timemus. (First speaker) Istud otium tum non probabam. Nunc isti studid novo non faveo; nam ego (or ego enim) periculum a ^ Germanis timeo niillum. 161. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION I. Recently, my friends, you were favoring peace. Why are you now favoring war? 2. (Ans.) At-that-time we feared^ no danger. Now we are expecting war from the Germans them- selves. II. e., placed after the first word of its clause, as in ille enim, /or he; sometimes after a prepositional phrase, as in ab illo enim, for by Mm. 2 From. 3 "Feared" here= '' were fearing," — a past situation. 54 Exercise . 3. That war was just: this new war (of yours) is not just. 4. t approved^ that: I do not approve this. 5. Some (people) never favor war. 6. My son, I do not favor this friend (of yours). 7. His^ rep- utation is not good. 8. He is strong, but works badly. 9. Warn and help this friend (of yours), for he is not working well now. 10. (Ans.) He is ill,' and is working with difficulty. ^ = was approving ; past situsition. 2 See section 146, a for the way to express "his." VILLA D'ESTE, AT TIVOLI (TiBUR). BUILT IN 1549 Imperfect Indicative Passive 55 LESSON XX FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS (Continued) 152. THE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE (Repeated) AND PASSIVE First Conjugation ACTIVE I tvas loving, etc. 1st Sing, amabam 2d 3d am abas amabat 1st PL amabamus 2d 3d am abatis amabant PASSIVE I was being loved, etc. amabar amabaris or -re amabatur amabamur amabamini amabantur Second Conjugation ACTIVE passive I was warning, I was being warned, etc. etc. monebam monebas monebat monebar monebarisor-re monebatur monebamus monebamur monebatis monebamini monebant monebantur a. The stem of the passive is the same as in the active (amaba-, moneba-). The personal endings are the regular ones seen in 124. 163. DECLENSION OP THE DETERMINATIVE PRO- NOUN is, this,^ that} ilie,^ he,^ she, it Singular Plural M. F. N. M. F. N. Nom. is ea id ei or ii (i) eae ea Gen. eius* eius eius eorum earum eorum Dut ei ei ei eis or iis (is) eis or iis (is) eis or iis (is) Ace. eum earn id eo3 eas ea Voc. Abl. CO ea CO eis or iis (is) eiri or iis (is) eis or iis (is) a. In the PL, the preferred forms are spelled with two i's, but pronour !ced with one. i^This" (Plural "these") and '^that" (Plural ''those"), the English "Demonstrative" Pronouns. 2 "The," the English ''Definite Article." 3 "He" (Plural "they"), the English "Personal" Pronoun. 4 Pronounce as if written with two i's, ei-ius ( = eh^-yoos). The first syl- lable is thus long. So regularly with e-i, a-i. 56 Exercises 154. VOCABULARY antea (ante + ea), Adv., before dlligentia, -ae, F. 1, c?i7/grence. this; before that; formerly. is, ea, id, this, that, the; he, she, condiscipulus, -I, M. 2 (con-=: it. cum), fellow pupil, school- magnopere (first part from mag- viate. nus, second from a word mean- cnnctus, -a, -um, all (together), ing work). Adv., greatly. whole. In PL, all, everybody. si, Conj., if. 155. READING MATTER 1. (A schoolmate of Cornelius, to his father) Cornelius nuper male lab5rabat, eiusque fama mala erat. Is a magistrd et a condiscipulis nonnullis culpabatur. Nunc cuncti ei puero fa vent, cQncti eum probant: nunc enim labdrat. (The father) Si ita est, id ' mihi magnopere placet. 2. Antea, mi fili, a magistro saepe monebaris; nunc ab eo laudaris. (Ans.) Ita est. Antea otium amabam, et saepe cul- pabar. Sed ilia fama mala mihi non placebat. Itaque nunc cum studio laboro. (The father) Ista nova diligentia mihi placet. 3. Filii mei antea a magistro culpabantur. Nunc laudantur. 4. Antea, filii mei, a magistrd saepe culpabamini. (Ans.) Ita est. Antea culpabamur. Sed nunc laudamur. Laudari magis amamus. 156. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Recently Cornelius was being blamed. 2. Now, all his schoolmates approve him, all are praising his new diligence. 3. Formerly, my friends, you were being praised by every- body.^ 4. Now you are (being) warned by many. 5. This does not please me greatly. 6. (Ans.) Then we were not sick, noiv we are. 7. Recently no dangers were feared. 8. Now danger is feared from the Germans; for they are strong, and are-eager-for war. 9. Recently, my friend, you were (being) censured. 10. If some (people) are now praising you, I am glad. 1 This (thing), this, it. 2 Use cuncti, all, in the proper case. Future Indicative Active 57 LESSON XXI FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS (Continued) 167. THE FUTURE INDICATIVE ACTIVE First Conjugation Second Conjugation I shall love, or / shall warn, or 1 shall he loving, etc. I shall he warning, etc. 1st Sing, amabo monebO monebis monebit monebimus monebitis monebunt a. The Tense-Sign of the Future Indicative in the First and Sec- ond Conjugations is -b- plus a variable vowel (-bO-, -bi-, -bu-, etc.). h. The Future Indicative represents an act either as going on at some point or period in future time, or indefinitely in the future. 168. DECLENSION OF THE PRONOUN Idem, the same 2d " amabis 3d " amabit 1st PL amabimus 2d " amabitis 3d " amabunt Endings Irregulae I shall he, etc. -bo erO -bis eris -bit erit -bimus erimus -bitis eritis -bunt erunt SINGULAR M. F. N. Norn, idem eadem idem Gen. eiusdem eiusdem eiusdem Dat eidem eidem eidem Ace. eundem eandem idem Voc. Ahl. • eodem eadem eodem PLURAL Nom. eidem or Idem (ildem) eaedem eadem Gen. eorundem earundem eorundem Dat. eisdem or eisdem or eisdem or isdem (iisdem) isdem (iisdem) isdem (iisdem) Ace. eosdem easdem eadem Voc. Ahl. eisdem or eisdem or eisdem or Jsdem (iisdem) isdam (iisdem) isdem (iisdem) 58 Exactness in Expressing Time a. Idem corresponds to is, with -dem added to every form. Before the d, m becomes n. (Thus Ace. eun-dem for eum-dem.) h. Note that idem (long i) is Masculine, and idem (short i) Neuter. c. Remember the following for the Plural of is and Idem: In the PI. of is, the preferred forms are spelled with two i's but pronounced with one i; in the PI. of Idem, the preferred forms are spelled, as well as pronounced, with one i. 159. For ego, the Nom. PL is nos (also Ace.) ; for tu, it is vos (also Ace. and Voe.). Like ego and tu, these words are generally not expressed as Subjects, since the form of the Verb itself shows the person and number. But they are necessarily expressed where emphasis or contrast is intended. Thus: Nos culpamur, vOs laudamini, WE are blamed, YOU are praised. 160. In if -clauses referring to the future, we commonly use a Present Indicative in English. Latin is generally more exact. Thus: Si bene laborabis, beatus eris, if you (shall) work ivell, you will be happy. This will be found to be true in many constructions. Remember, then, that: 161. In general, Latin expresses relations of time more exactly than English. 162. VOCABULARY certus, -a, -um, certain, sure, as- noster, nostVa, nostrum, our. sured, fixed; trusty. persevero, persevere, eerie. Adv., certainly, surely ; at umquam. Adv., ever. (Cf. num- any rate, at least. quam, never.) desidero, desire. verus, -a, -um, true, real. displiceo, be displeasing, dis- verO, Adv., in truth, really, in- please (Verb of Quality, taking deed. Often merely emphasizes. Dat.). vaster, vestra, vestrum (cf. vOs Idem, eadem, idem, the same. below), yoiir (when two or mox. Adv., soon. more persons are addressed), nimis, Adv., too much, too. vOs, you. Nom., Ace, and Voc. nOs, we, us. Nom. and Ace. Pi. PI. of tQ. of ego. Exercises 59 163. READING MATTER 1. Magister tuus et ipsi condiscipuli nuper te culpabant. Nunc bene laboras. Si perseverabis, idem magister et idem con- discipuli diligentiam tuam laudabunt. Studia tua niiper tibi displicebant. Eadem studia mox placebunt, tibique certam dabunt^ famam. Tii ipse laetus eris. (Ans.) Perseverabo certe. Si studia umquam amab5, beatus ero. Sed id ver5 n5n exspecto. 2. (Cornelius serves as an example. A father says to his sons) Cornelius niiper a ciinctis condiscipulis culpabatur. Eius- dem pueri fama nunc bona est: eidem puero ciincti fa vent, eun- dem ciincti magnopere laudant; nam is bene nunc laborat. V5s si impigre studebitis, eadem fama mox vestra erit. Magister vester et cuncti veri amici vestri vos laudabunt. Etiam studia vestra amabitis. (One of them answers) Nos studebimus, tii si id desideras, et laeti erimus; sed studia nostra certe numquam nimis amabimus. 164. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. You will please me, my son, if you (shall) work well, and you yourself will soon be happy, for you will have a real and assured reputation. 2. You displease me now. 3. (Ans.) I will work well, and I shall really be happy, if I (shall) please you. 4. But I shall not love my studies too-much. 5. You will please me, my sons, if you (shall) work well, and you yourselves will be happy. 6. (Ans.) We will work well, if you desire this greatly, and we shall be fortunate if ever you (shall) praise us. 7. We will persevere at any rate. 8. Our son and your son Mark are studying in the same school. 9. They have the same friends, the same studies, and the same sports. iDo has a short a in inflection, except in words of one syllable. Thus dare, dabam, dabo, etc. (but das). All other verbs of the first conjugation have the long a everywhere (except as by 100, 2). 60 Future Indicative Passive LESSON XXII FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS (Continued) 165. FUTURE INDICATIVE, ACTIVE (Repeated) AND PASSIVE First Conjt TGATION Second Conjugation Active Passive Active Passive / shall lovBy I shall be loved, I shall warn, I shall be warned, etc. etc. etc. etc. 1st Sing . amS.bO amabor monebo monebor 2d " amabis amaberis or -re monebis moneberis or -re 3d *' amabit amabitur monebit monebitur 1st PI amabimus amabimur monebimus monebimur 2d " amabitis amabimini monebitis monebimini 3d " amabunt amabuntu-r monebunt monebuntur a. The stem of the passive is the same as in the active. The per- sonal endings are the regular ones already seen in the present and imperfect. 166. DECLENSION OP THE DETERMINATIVE PRONOUN hie, this,^ he^ M. F. N. Norn. hie haec hoc Gen. huius^ huius huius Dat. huic* huic huic Ace. hunc hanc hoc Voc. Abl. hoc hac hoc PLURAL M. F. N. hi hae haec horum harum horum his his his hos has haec his his his a. Hie is made up of a true pronoun, to which in certain forms a -e is added, itself meaning something like "this" or "here." b. Notice hae-e in the Nom. Sing. Fem., and the Nom.-Acc. Neut. PI. The ae in these forms is a special pronominal ending, which you will see again in several pronouns. i^This" (Plural "these"), the English "Demonstrative" pronoun. 2 ''He" (Plural "they"), the English "Personal" Pronoun. 3 Pronounce hui-ius (= hooi-yoos), ^Pronounce hooie. Exercises 61 167. 1. Of the Determinative Pronouns hie, iste, and ille (now , learned), hie means this, he (near the speaker), iste this (of yours), that (of yours), he (near you), and ille that, he (over there). 2. Is, thisy that, he is less sharply specific, and is therefore pre- ferred when there can be no mistake about the reference. 3. Latin has thus four words, hie, iste, ille, and is, used as Per- sonal Pronouns of the Third Person. Is is the most common. 168. READING MATTER 1. Magister tuus te nuper culpabat. Si bene laborabis, ab hoc e5dem magistro mox laudaberis. Studia tibi antea nimis displicebant. Si bene umquam studebis, haec eadem studia a te^ vero amabuntur. Persevera, et tQ ipse laetus eris. 2. Hie puer impigre laborat. Haec puella ciir tain pigra est? 3. Cuncti condiscipuli nostri nos culpant. Ab his numquam satis probabimur, etiam si impigre studebimus. (Ans.) A me^ certe probabimini; magnopere enim desidero vos laudare. 4. Ciir tii huic scholae faves? (Ans.) Quia cuncti eius- disci- puli veri discipuli sunt. 169. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (A student, sick and despondent) I shall be censured if I do ^ not work well, even if I am^ ill. 2. (Ans.) You will be censured by no one. All will favor you. 3. My sons, you will be censured if you do^ not work well. 4. These new pupils are really working vigorously. 5. (Ans.) They will be praised by our teacher. 6. We shall be censured by him, even if we shall really work well. 7. This school was formerly bad. 8. Its master will not soon be happy; for the new pupil^ alone will work well. 9. This school is good, that (one) is too bad. 10. Therefore I favor this (one), and censure that (one). 1 Me and te are Ablative as well as Accusative. 2 For eius, following huic, see 167, 2. 3Look out for the real tense-meaning. 62 Third Conjugation LESSON XXIII THE THIRD CONJUGATION 170. The Third Conjugation, like the others, is best recognized in the Present Infinitive. The forms are repeated below from 92. Conjugation I II III Present Indicative amO moneO tegO Present Infinitive Present Stem Ends In amare, to love -a- (ama-) monere, to warn -e- (mone-) tegere, to cover -e- (tege-) a. The Present Infinitive Passive of the Third Conjugation is formed with only the ending -I. Thus tegere (Active) fo cover^ tegi (Passive) to he covered. 171. THIRD CONJUGATION, PRESENT INDICATIVE, ACTIVE AND PASSIVE tegO, cover; Stem tege- Active Passive 1st Sing. tegO tegor 2d " tegis tegeris or -re 3d " tegit tegitur 1st PI tegimus tegimur 2d " tegitis tegimini 3d " tegunt teguntur a. Notice that these endings are precisely the same as those which you have just learned for the Future of sum (erO, eris, erit, etc.). h. Remember that the characteristic vowel of the Third Conjuga- tion is variable (thus tege-re, but tegi-t, tegu-nt, etc.). 172. THIRD CONJUGATION, PRESENT IMPERATIVE, ACTIVE AND PASSIVE Present Active Present Passive 2d Sing, tege, cover {thou) tegere, be {thou) covered 2d PI. tegite, cover {ye) tegimini, be {ye) covered a. Tege, like ama and mone, is the bare stem. ''Yes"^^ or "No^^ Questions, and Answers 63 "YES" OR "NO" QUESTIONS, AND ANSWERS TO THEM 173. Questions calling for the answer "Yes" or ''No" may be asked in the four following ways: 1. With no sign but that of the inflection of voice, or, in print, of the "question mark." 2. With -ne (attached to the emphatic word), implying nothing about the answer { = a question mark at the beginning). 3. With nOnne, implying the answer "yes." 4. With num, implying the answer "no." Thus: 1. Marcus adest? Is Mark presents 2. Marcusne adest? Is Mark presents 3. Nonne Marcus adest? Isn't Mark present? 4. Num Marcus adest? Mark isn^t present, is he 9 174. 1. Answers to "Yes" or "No" Questions may be given, as we have seen, by repeating the verb, with or without a negative. Or, 2. "Yes" may be expressed by ita, etiam, verO, certe, etc. {so, even, in truth, certainly, etc.), and "no" by nOn, minime, etc. {no, not at all, etc.). 175. VOCABULARY (Infinitives will hereafter be given for new verbs.) cado, cadere,/aZ/. -ne, enclitic interrogative Adv., de, Prep., down from, from, of implying nothing about the descent. Takes Separative Abl. answer, equus, equl, M. 2, horse. nOnne, not 9 interrog. Adv., im- ex or e, Prep., out of, from. plying "yes."' Takes Separative Abl. Ex num, interrog. Adv., implying and e before consonants, ex "no." before vowels. peto, petere, aim at, attack; iam. Adv., by this time, already, seek, ask, now. properO, -are, hurry, hasten. inimlcus, -I, M. 2 (in, not, + rego, regere (make straight), amicus, not friend, =) enemy. direct, guide, rule. minimus, -a, -um, smallest, or saxum, -I, N. 2, stone, rock. very small. tego, tegere, cover; shield, hidei minime, Adv., in the smallest protect. degree; not at all. via, -ae, F. 1, way, street, road. nobis, Dat.-Abl. PI. of nOs. vObis, Dat.-Abl. PI. of vOs. 64 Exercises 176. READING MATTER 1. Parvine pueri a puerTs magnis vestra^ in scholapetuntur?^ 2. Inimici me petunt; me tege, amice mi. 3. N5nne tQ ab amicis tegeris? (Ans^) Vero. Nulli me petunt. 4. Nonne vos, pueri parvi, ab amicis magnis vestris tegimini? (Ans.) Ita. Semper tegimur. Amici nobis boni sunt. 5. A me regere,^ fili mi. Ego tibi verus ero amicus. 6. A me regimini,^ filii mei. Ego v5bis certus ero amicus. 7. Hie puer minimus est, sed equum magnum iam regit. (Second speaker) Num equus magnus a puero tam parvo regitur ? 8. Saxa viarum diira sunt. N5nne tu, puer parve, saepe de equo in ea^ cadis? (Ans.) Minime. Ego numquam cado. (First speaker) Mei filii iam magni sunt, sed saepe de equis cadunt. 9. Ex schola properate*. Vos in via exspectant amici. 177. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. I don't attack you, boys, do I? Why do you attack me? 2. Why are you attacked? Don't you yourself attack others? 3. We are attacked by our enemies. 4. If you are true and sure friends of -ours (say " to us "), protect us. 5. Does it please you, big boys, to attack little (ones) ? 6. In our^ school the smallest boys are never attacked. 7. Be guided by me. Attack no(body). 8. Are you sometimes attacked by big boys in school, my sons? 9. (Ans.) Yes, but other big boys protect us. We don't fear at all.^ 10. You are already big, but you fall from your horses upon the stones of the street. Aren't they hard? 11. Why are you hurrying out of the street? 12. (Ans.) We are-afraid-of ^ those horses. 1 Vestra goes with schola (a common group-order, — Adj., Prep., Noun). 2Peto has here its simple meaning, attack. 3 What is this doubtful form? Consider context. * "Upon them." Ea is Ace, because cadis expresses motion. cOf. footnote 1. 6 "We fear not-at-all." 7"We fear." The Four Conjugations 65 LESSON XXIV THE THIRD CONJUGATION (Continued).— THE FOURTH CONJUGATION 178. 1. The Fourth Conjugation has the characteristic vowel -i-. Thus, audio, audire, hear. 2. Besides these Fourth Conjugation verbs in -io, there are also certain Third Conjugation verbs in -16. Thus capio, caper e, take. a. These were originally of the Fourth Conjugation, but came to belong to the Third through a shortening of the characteristic vowel. h. There are thus two Third Conjugation types, namely in -0 and -io. » 179. THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS WITH INFINITIVES, ACTIVE AND PASSIVE Crnij. I Present Stem ends in -a- (ama-) Present Indicative amO Present Infin. Active am-are Present Infin. Passive am-arl •II -e- (mone-) moneO mon-ere mon-erl III IV -e- -I- (tege-) (cape-) (audi-) tegO capio audio teg-ere cap-ere aud-Ire teg-I cap-I aud-Irl a. Remember carefully that the Present Passive Infinitive of the Third Conjugation, in either type, ends merely in -I (thus tegl, capl); while in all the other Conjugations it ends in -ri added to the characteristic vowel (-arl, -eri, -Irl). h. From here on, the Conjugation of each new verb occurring in the Vocabularies will be indicated by a number, which is to be repeated when you are asked to give the verb. 66 Third ayid Fourth Conjugations THIRD CONJUGATION (Both Types), AND FOURTH CON- JUGATION 180. Present Indicative, Active and Passive Third Conjugation Fourth Conjugation Active capio, take capis capit capimus capitis capiunt Passive capior caperis or -re capitur capimur capimini capiuntur a. Note that all verbs showing i before another vowel in conjuga- tion (-io, -iunt, etc.) must belong to the Third or Fourth Conjugation. b. Remember that i is short in the Third Conjugation, and long in the Fourth (except, of course, in the places of regular shortening). 1st Sing. tego, cover 2d " tegis 3d " tegit 1st PI. tegimus 2d " tegitis 3d " tegunt 1st Sing. tegor 2d " tegeris or -re 3d " tegitur 1st PI. tegimur 2d « tegimini 3d " teguntur audio, hear audis audit audlmus audltis audiunt audior audiris or -re auditur audlmur audlmini audiuntur 181. VOCABULARY atque or ac,^ Conj., and. Of close connection, like -que. neque or nec,^ Conj., nor. Neque . . . , neque . . . , neither . . . nor . . . audio, audire, 4, hear. capio, capere, 3, take^ take up. cupidus, -a, -um, desirous. cupio, cupere, 3, desire, wish, want. cum, Conj., when. desisto, -ere, 3, desist, stop. faciO, facere, S, make, do; per- form; act. fugio, fugere, 3, flee, run away. iacio, iacere, 3, throw. mdrus, -I, M. 2, wall. pugnO, pugnare, 1, fight. quid, what? Neut. Nom.-Acc. Sing. scio, scire, 4, know. sonus, -1, M. 2, sound. sto, stare, 1, stand. video, videre, 2, see. 1 Neque generally before vowels, nee generally before consonants ; atque before either, ac only before consonants. Exercises 67 182. READING MATTER 1. (A quarrel begins) Nonnulli pueri in^ condiseipul5s de muro saxa iaciunt. (One says) Nos de mur5 petimur. (A passer-by) Hi pueri neque ipsi saxa capiunt nee fugiunt. (To the boys) Cur hie statis ? Ex via properate. Peticupitis? (One of the boys) Cupidi non sumus. (The passer-by) Ex periculo fugite. (Another of the boys to the rest) Minime. Cur n5n ipsi saxa capimus atque illos pueros petimus? Ciir non pug- namus? Num nos timemus? 2. Saxa capiuntur et iaciuntur. Haec in via cadunt. Sonus a magistro auditur. (He says to others) Auditisne? (They answer) Audimus. (He goes out and calls) pueri, quid facitis? Ciir saxa iacitis ? Mene auditis? Desistite. Hie ^ non est ludus, sed belluin verum. Magn5 in periculo cunctiestis. Nonne id scitis? Haec^ cum facitis, turn* vero* vobis iratus sum. 3. Vide ilium puerum parvum ! De equo cadit ! 183. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. That^ boy never^ falls from his horse. 2. Do you want to fight? (Ans.) I am not desirous. Stop. 3. What are you doing, boys? (Ans.) Wfe are standing on the wall. 4. (The teacher) Yes, I see that myself. 5. But I hear the sound of stones. Why are you throwing them ? 6. This^ (is what) I want to know. 7. Do your pupils often throw stones? 8. (Ans.) They never throw at schoolmates. 9. But when they are attacked by boys from (=out of) other schools, they sometimes take-up stones; for they love neither to be attacked nor to run-away. 10. (A boy shouts) Protect us, friends! (To his mates) We are heard, and other boys are hurrying to us from our school. ^ 7wto,= English af. ^ Then indeed, = f lien . . . really. 2Masc., because the Predicate is. ^Make emphatic by position. ^ These things {things like these) . ^Say merely "I want to know Note the emphatic position. #/iis." 68 The Interrogative and Relative Pronouns LESSON XXV 184. DECLENSION OF THE INTERROGATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS, quis, qui qui, Relative Pronoun, who, and Interrog. Adjective, what? quis, Interrog. Pronoun, who? (as Substantive). M. Nom. qui Gen. cuius^ Dat Ace. Voc. Ahl. CUl^ quern F. quae cuius cui quam SINGULAR N. quod cuius cui quod L. a.uu r . quis quid cuius^ CUIUS cui2 cui quern quid quo qua quo quo quo PLURAL (same for both words) Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. M. qui quorum quibus quos F. quae quarum quibus quas N. quae quorum quibus quae quibus quibus quibus a. Notice that quis and qui are declined alike in the Plural, and differ in the Singular only in the pairs quis, quid, and qui, quod. But quis does not distinguish between Masc. and Fem. in the Sing. b. Notice also the ending -ae in the Nom. Pern. Sing, and the Nom. and Ace. Neut. PI. of qui, just as in hae-c from hie (166). c. Id the Ace. Masc. Sing, quern, notice the new Ace. ending in -em. 185. The translations differ with the genders. Thus: Interrogative Substantive: quis? who? quid? ivhatf Interrogative Adjective: qui? what? which? Relative: qui, who, that (Masc. or Pem.); which, that (Neuter). 1 Pronounce cui-ius ( = cooi-yoos) . 2 Pronounce cooi. Agreement of Relative 69 186. The Interrogative Pronoun is a pronoun that asks a question. Thus quern vocas? whom are you calling? a. Note the difference in form between the Interrogative as Sub- stantive and the Interrogative as Adjective : Quis hie est? who is this? (Interrogative Substantive). Qui puer hie est? what hoy is this? (Interrogative Adjective). Quid paras? what are you getting up? (Interrogative Substantive). Quod bellum paras? what war are you getting up? (Interrogative Adjective). 187. 1. The Relative Pronoun is a connecting pronoun referring to something that precedes or follows. 2. The word to which the Relative refers is called the ^ Antecedent, because it generally comes before the Relative. 3. The part of the sentence consisting of the Relative, its Verb, and all that goes with them, is called the Rela- tive Clause. 188. Examples for the use of the Relative Pronoun: 1. Hie puer, quem tn eulpas, aeger est, this boy, whom you are blaming, is sick, a. Here quem must of course be Masculine and Singular, because it is meant to go with (refer to) puer, which is Masculine and Singu- lar; and it must be Accusative, because it is the Object of eulpas. 2. Has feminas laudo, quae bene labOrant, I praise these women, who work well. a. Here quae must of course be Feminine and Plural, because it is meant to refer to feminas, which is Feminine and Plural; and it must be Nominative, because it is the Subject of labOrant. Evidently these principles must always hold. Hence the rule: 189. Relative Pronouns agree with their Antecedents in Gender and Number, but their Case depends upon their relations in the Clauses to lohich they belong, 190. READING MATTER 1. (Same subject as in 182, 2. The teacher says) Quem sonum audio? Qui saxa de muro iaciunt? (Some one says) 70 Exercises Ego video. Illi qui saxa iaciunt discipuli ex hac schola sunt. (The teacher, to the boys above) Quid faeitis? Quod bellum paratis? Vos qui saxa iaeitis, desistite. Hi pueri qui in via stant magno in perieulo sunt. N5nne id scitis? Haec cum faeitis, turn vero mihi magnopere displicetis. 2. (A neighbor says) Haec schola, quae tibi placet, mihi non placet. Non prob5 eam^ scholam cuius discipuli in condisci- pulos saxa iaciunt. 3. Quam magnus equus!^ (Ans.) Sed hie idem equus a puero parvo amat regi. 191. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. In what school are you studying? (Ans.) In the same school in which Mark is studying. 2. (First speaker) But of what school (Genitive) is Mark? (Second speaker) Don't you know that ? ^ 3. (One father to another) What school do you approve? (Ans.) I favor a school in which the pupils desire to study. 4. I love the same studies that* you love, the same friends. 5. What are you doing? What danger are you fleeing? 6. (Ans.) Some boys are throwing stones from the wall. Don't you see? 7. When stones are thrown by your boys, what do you do? 8. (Ans.) I admonish the boys, and^ they^ stop. 1 That school whose, a school whose. ^Here "that" = "which." 2 How big a horse ! what a big horse ! ^ Use id. ^ Say ' ' and these. ' ' STAIRWAY PATH, VILLA D'ESTE Quicumque and Quidam 71 LESSON XXVI DECLENSION OF quicumque, whoever, and quidam, a certain 192. The Generalizing or Indefinite Relative Pronoun quicumque, tohoever, is declined like qui (184) with -cum- que^ added to each form. Thus: Nom. quicumque quaecumque quodcumque Gen. cuiuscuraque cuiuscumque cuiuscumque Dat. cuicumque cuicumque cuicumque, etc., etc. 193. The Indefinite Pronoun quidam, a certain, is declined like qui with -dam added, except that in the Nominative and Accusative Neuter Singular there is a second form quid-, which is used Substantively.^ The declension is as follows: SINGULAR quidam quaedam cuiusdam cuiusdam cuidam cuidam quendam quandam Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voe. Abl quoddam or quiddam cuiusdam cuidam quoddam or quiddam quodam quadam quodam Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Ahl. a. fore d quidam quorundam quibusdam quosdam quaedam quarundam quibusdam quasdam quaedam quorundam quibusdam quaedam quibusdam quibusdam quibusdam Notice that in quidam (just as in Idem in 158), m becomes n be- Thus quendam (for quemdam), quandam (for quamdam), etc. 1 The -que of qui-cum-que is an indefinite particle, meaning any. Qui- cum-que thus = mho-any-when, i. e., who at any time, i. e., whoever. 2 Thus quoddam donum, a certain gift, but quiddam, a certain thing. This distinction, — that the Substantive form is quid and the Adjective form quod, — you will find to hold for all compounds in this book having qui or quia for one element. 72 Present Imperative, All Conjugations 194. PRESENT IMPERATIVE OP ALL FOUR CONJUGATIONS CONJ. I Active II III IV 2d Sing, ama mone tege cape audi 2d PL amate monete tegite Passive capite audita 2d Sing, amare monere tegere capere uudire 2d PI amamihl monemini tegimini capimini audlmini a. Note that the passive forms are ambiguous (read 137, 6 again). 195. VOCABULARY accipio, accipere, 3 (ad + capio, take to oneself), take, receive, accept, animus, -I, M. 2, mind, spirit; feeling. aut, Conj., or. Aut . . . aut . . . , either . . . or . . . auxilium, -I, N. 2, aid, help. cedo, cedere, 3 (originally move, then, with Dative, movefor,=) yield; give way. (Verb of At- titude, taking Dative.) dIcO, dicere, 3, say, speak. discedo, -ere, 3 (dis-, apart,+ cedO, move 1), more off, depart. imperatum, -I, N. 2, command. incipio, incipere, 3 (in+capiO, take on), be^in. iniQria, -ae, F. 1, injury, wrong. lapillus, -1, M. 2, pebble. pello, pellere, 3, drive {out or off). pugna, -ae, F. 1, fight. quicumque (192), whoever. quidam (193), a certain. reliquus, -a,, -um, remaining, left; as Subst. in PI., the rest. vel . . . vel . . . , Conj., either . . . or . . . (where a choice is of- fered). verto, vertere, 3, turn; change. 196. READING MATTER 1. (A neighbor to the teacher) NdnnuUi discipulorum tuorum nonnumquam saxa in condiscipulos iaciunt. Tu hunc ludum aut n5n vides aut probas. Ego n5n probd. (Ans.) Lapillos, non saxa, iaciunt. Sed certe neque ego probo. 2. (To the pupils, later) Me audite. Quiddam a quibusdam discipulis peto. Aliis imperatum quoddam dare desidero. 1 The original meaning move is lost in the simplf3 verb cedo, but appears in all the compounds, as in discedo in this lesson. Dis- is used only in com- position, at the beginning of a word (hence called an "inseparable prefix"). Exercises 73 3. (A boy) Quid a n5bis petis ?^ Quodcumque tu cupis, id n5s facere cupimus. 6. (The teacher) Quidam ex v5bis lapillos in condiscipulos nonnumquam iaciunt. Hi illis^ ndncedunt. It a pugna vera ineipit. Schola nostra magnam accipit^ iniuriam. 4. Nunc iis qui has pugnas incipiunt haec dico: Quicumque haec facit, is scholae iniuriam facit. Itaque vel animos vestr5s ad alios ludos vertite, vel ex hac schola pellimini; vel cedite vel discedite. A reliquis hoc peto: Per vestrum auxilium famae bonae scholae nostrae favete. 197. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (The same ideas, in English) Certain boys of this school throw pebbles at little schoolmates. They* do not desire to do^ harm^ to them.* 2. But in whatever school pupils do these things, that school soon begins to be blamed. 3. Therefore I say to these boys: Either^ desist or^ depart. This is my com- mand. 4. (A boy says to the teacher) We do not approve (of) these boys. 5. (The teacher) Then I ask help of (==from) you and the rest; for these fights do harm^ to our good fame. 6. Say^ to these boys that^ which^ you say to me, and be heard by them. 7. (The boy to the teasers) Either yield, or leave^ the school, or be driven out. 8. To yield is good. It will be bad either to leave ^ the school, or to be driven out. 1 For the meaning of peto, look back at Vocabulary, 175. ^ These to those = the latter to the former, . ' 3 Receives injury = suffers injury. 4 Say ''those . . . to these." Latin is more exact than English in tiie use of pronouns. ^Use iniuriam and facio ("do an injury"). 6 This means, let them take their choice. Which should you use, aut or vel? 7^ Die not dice. See footnote, page 204. 8 Id quod. 9 ''Depart from." 74 Imperfect Indicative Finished LESSON XXVII IMPERFECT INDICATIVE (Finished) 198. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE, THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS Con J. II (Repeated) 1st Sing. monebam 2d " monebas 3d " monebat 1st PL monebamus 2d " monebatis 3d " monebant 1st Sing. monebar 2d " monebaris or -re 3d " monebatur 1st PL monebamur 2d " monebamini 3d " monebantur III Active tegebam capiebam tegebas capiebas tegebat capiebat tegebamus capiebamus tegebatis capiebatis tegebant capiebant Passive tegebar capiebar tegebaris capiebaris or -re or -re tegebatur capiebatur tegebamur capiebamur tegebamini capiebaminl tegebantur capiebantur IV audiebam audiebas audiebat audiebamus audiebatis audiebant audiebar audiebaris or -re audiebatur audiebamur audiebamini audiebantur a. Notice that the formation in the 2d, 3d, and 4th Conjugations is the same, e}:cept that the -io Verbs have the additional -i-. b. Remember now that -ba- marks the Imperfect Indicative. THE INDEFINITE PRONOUN quisquam, any at all 199. Quisquam is declined like quis (184), with -quam added. M. and F. N. Nom. quisquam quicquam^ Gen. cuiusquam cuiusquam Dat. cuiquam cuiquam Ace. quern quam quicquam^ VOG. Abl. quoquam quoquam iFor quid-quam (the q affecting the d). Quidquam also occurs. Quisque; Genitive of the Whole 75 a. Quisquam has no Plural. The Adjective use is supplied by alius. h. Quisquam and ollus are used especially with negative ideas, expressed or implied. 200. THE DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUN quisque,^ each, every As Adjective As Substantive Nom. Gen. Dat Ace. Voc. Abl. M. quisque cuiusque cuique quemque F. quaeque cuiusque cuique quamque N. quodque cuiusque cuique quodque M. and F. quisque cuiusque cuique quemque N. quidque cuiusque cuique quidque quoque quaque quoque quoque quoque a. Notice that quisque is declined exactly like quis (184) with -que added,. except that the form quisque itself is used both as sub- stantive and as adjective (whereas for quis the adjective form is qui). 5. The Plural is not common. (The forms, where used, are like those of quis plus -que. See 184). c. An Indefinite Pronoun quispiam, to be used later (564), is declined with quis- as in quisque. THE GENITIVE OF THE WHOLE (or THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE) 201. Specimen Sentences: Multi condiscipulOrum meOrum impigri sunt, many of my school- mates are energetic. Nallus amIcOrum meOrum piger est, not one of my friends is lazy. a. Notice that the Genitive condiscipulOrum (first sentence) here expresses the whole body of schoolmates, while muItl expresses a part of them; and similarly that amicOrum tneOrum (second sentence) expresses the whole body of friends, while nCillus expresses a part of them. The usage is thus as follows: iQuis-que = quis plus the indefinite -que already seen = each. any-who = every, 76 . Exercises 202. The Whole to which a Part Belongs may be ex- pressed by the Genitive, a. But there is also another way in which the same idea may be expressed, as follows: h. After most words, the whole to which a part belongs may also he expressed by de or ex with the Ablative. So regularly with quidam, and with Cardinal Numbers (one, two, three, etc.). Thus: Multi ex amlcis mels, many of my friends (many om< of my friends). Quidam de meis amicis, a certain one of my friends (a certain one from ....). Unus de meis amicis, one of my friends {one from ....). 203. VOCABULARY adsum, adesse (ad + sum), be modo, Ad\., Just, only ; just now. by, be present, be at hand. noceo, nocere, 2, be hurtful to, contra, against. Prep, of Space- hurt, injure. (Verb of Quality, Relation, taking Ace. taking Dat.) fleO, flere, 2, iveep, cry. quisquam (199), any at all. incommodum, -I, N. 2, trouble, quisque (200), each, every one. misfortune. respondeO, -ere, 2, respond, an- iterum, Adv., again. swer. lacessO, lacessere, 3, worry. Sextus, -i, M. 2, Sextus, a name. maneO, manere, 2, remain, con- vestrum, of you. Gen. PI. of tn. tinue. Cf . vOs. memoria, -ae, F. 1, memory. victoria, -ae, F. 1, victory. 204. READING MATTER 1. (The teacher) Quis modo flebat? (Ans.) Quidam puer par- vus. (Teacher) Cur id faciebat? (Ans.) A quibusdam pueris magnis lacessebatur. 2. (Teacher) Magna haec victoria erat! Sed quis erat, qui la- cessebatur ? (Ans.) Sextus erat. (Teacher) Qui eum lacessebant ? (The boys are silent. The teacher says) Niillam habetis me- moriam?^ Ciir non respondetis? Certe aut scitis aut n5n scitis. (Ans.) Scimus. 1 Notice the emphasis given to memoriam by the shght suspense. This is an extremely common order. Use it yourself. Exercises 77 3. (The teacher) Vide5. Seitis, sed dicere non capitis. Bene.* Animum'- vestrum probo. Num vos hos pueros probatis? (One answers) Minime. Nos iis adversi sumus. Sed cum tu modo Sextum audiebas, nos non aderamus. Nee quisquam^ aderat amJcorum Sexti, nee quicquam aliud auxiH.* Solus erat cum lis pueris qui eum lacessebant. 4. (The teacher) Auxilium vestrum contra hos quoque pueros peto. Nam id quod uni discipulo nocet, cuique discipulo nocet. Itaque schola iniuriam iterum accipit. Vel hoc vel illud mihi displicet. Manet incommodum^ scholae. 205. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Sextus, why were you crying just-now? 2. (Sextus is silent) Why don't you answer? Is your memory so bad? 3. (Sextus) I was (being) worried by certain big boys, and I wished ® to be heard. 4. (Teacher) You were certainly (being) well heard. 5. (To the whole school) Certain of you^ were recently throw- ing pebbles at fellow-pupils. 6. Now a new game begins, and our trouble remains. 7. Some^ of you are worrying our little boys. 8. This spirit does not please me, nor does any^ (one) of you*^ approve it. 9. Therefore I again say to each of you who is doing these things: 10. You are injuring the school^ either stop or leave ** it. 11. To the rest who are-present I say: Give me your aid against the*'^ boys who are doing these-things. 12. The victory will be yours. 1 Very well. 6 = was wishing. State of Affairs. 2 Spirit, feeling. 7 Read 202, b again. 3 Why is quisquam chosen? ^xjse nonnulli (Plural). *Nor anything else of help, nor 9 What pronoun after a negative? any other help. What kind of Geni- i^Use vestrum, Gen. PI. tive is auxilT? n Say " depart from it." fi Trouble remains for the school. 12 Means '* those boj^s who." 78 Future Indicative LESSON XXVIII THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS (Continued) 206. FUTURE INDICATIVE, ACTIVE AND PASSIVE Third Conjugation FouETH Conjugation in -e- Active in-i- 1st Sing. 2d " 3d " tegam teges teget capiam capies capiet audiam audies audiet 1st PI 2d " 3d *' tegemus tegetis tegent capiemus capietis capient Passive audiemus audietis audient 1st Sing. 2d " 3d " tegar tegeris or tegetur -re capiar capieris or -re capietur audiar audieris or -re audietur 1st PL 2d " 3d " tegemur tegemini tegentur capiemur capiemini capientur audiemur audieminl audientur a. Remember now that, in the formation of the Future, the four Conjugations divide in the middle, the First and Second forming it in -bo, -bis, -bit, etc., the Third and Fourth in -am, -es, -et, etc. Thus: Present Infinitive Future I amO amare amabO II moneO monere monebo III IV tegO capio audio tegere capere audire tegam capiam audiam Objective Genitive 79 207. THE INDEFINITE PRONOUN aliquis, some, any As Adjective As Substantive Nom. Gen. Dat Ace. Voe. Abl. M. aliqui alicuius alicui aliquem F. aliqua alicuius alicui aliquam SINGULAR N. aliquod alicuius alicui aliquod M. and F. aliquis alicuius alicui aliquem N. aliquid alicuius alicui aliquid aliquo aliqua aliquo aliquo aliquo PLURAL (same for Substantive and Adjective) Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voe. Abl. M. aliqui aliquorum aliquibus aliquos F. aliquae aliquarum aliquibus aliquas N. aliqua aliquorum aliquibus aliqua aliquibus aliquibus aliquibus a. Note that aliquis is declined like quis (184), except that in the Nom. Fem. Sing, and Nom.-Acc. Neut. PI. it has the regular ending -a, not the special pronominal ending -ae. h. An indefinite pronoun quis, to be used later (397) is declined like the quis at the end of ali-quis. THE OBJECTIVE GENITIVE 208. Specimen Sentences: Memoria huius victOriae did manebit, the memory of this victory will long remain . Hi pueri pugnae cupidi sunt, these boys are desirous of a fight. a. In both sentences, the Genitives really express an Object. The meaning in the first is that people will long remember the victory, and in the second, that these boys desire a fight. Pugnae cupidi sunt really means the same thing as pugnam cupiunt. Hence we may lay down the rule: 209. The Genitive may he used Objectively with many Nouns and Adjectives, or Participles used as Adjectives (Objective Grenitive). 80 Exercises 210. VOCABULARY aliter, Adv., otherwise, differ- resisto, -sistere, 3, resist (Word ently. (Cf. alius.) of Attitude, taking Dat.) aliquis (207), Indefinite Pro- sententia, -ae, F.l,/ee/i'ng, idea, noun, some, any one, any. view, (Cf. sentio below.) defendo, -ere, 3, defend. sentio, -Ire, 4, perceive (by the did. Adv., /or a long time, long. senses); feel, think. 211. READING MATTER 1. (A friend to one of the teasers) Tu modo dicebas, "mihi pla- cet puerds parvos lacessere, iisque flere non nocet." Ego aliter sentio; atque tu ipse, si in ista manebis sententia, aliter sen ties; aut in hac schola diu non manebis. 2. Pueri parvi tibi cedunt, quia te timent. Sed Marcus atque quidam amici eius te non timebunt. Pugnae cupidi non sunt; sed, tu si perseverabis, tibi resistent. Si aliquem tu discipulum lacesses, eum Marcus atque reliqui contra te defendent. Nee victoria tua erit. 3. Hi sine iillo periculo pugnabunt. Si aliqua pugna a magistro audietur, Marcus iterum laudabitur, tii ex schola pel- leris. Memoria istius incommodi tibi nocebit. (Ans.) Si aliquem ego lacessere cupiam, lacessam. Nee quemquam vestrum timeo. 212. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (Mark to the above) Why do you worry these little boys? It is a misfortune for the school. 2. (Ans.) Because it pleases me to do so. 3. (Mark) You will soon feel differently. 4. They do not resist you, because they fear to fight. 5. I am not desirous of a fight, but I shall not yield to you. 6. This is my idea. 7. Listen to (hear) me. 8. If any pupil shall do anything against the reputation of the school, I shall be his enemy (an enemy to him). 9. If any one shall do any wrong to any pupil, I shall defend that pupil. 10. Nor will any-one help you. 11. The victory will be mine, the memory of the wrong will long be yours.. Personal Pronouns 81 LESSON XXIX INFLECTION OF THE PERSONAL AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 213. 1. The Personal Pronouns indicate the speaker, the person spoken to, or the person (or thing) spoken of. Thus, tu me amas, you love me, tu eum amas, you love him. a. We have already had all of the forms of these Pronouns, except certain Genitives in -i. 2. The Keflexive Pronouns refer back to the subject of the verb. Thus, ego me amo, I love myself, tu te amas, you love yourself is se amat, he loves himself a. The forms of these two kinds of Pronouns are in Latin largely similar, and they are therefore given below in immediate succession. 214. THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS (J, you, he, she, or it) First Second Third SINGULAR Nom. ego, I tu, thou is, ille, hie, or iste, Gen. mei tul Tie, etc. (declined in Dat. mihi tibi 153, 145, and a, Ace. me te 166) Voc. Ahl. tu te me PLURAL Nom. nos, we VOS, you Gen. nostrum or nostri vestrum or vestri Dat. nobis vobis Ace. nos vos Voc. Ahl. vos vobls nobis 82 Reflexive Pronouns a. The Genitive forms in -um are Genitives of the Whole, while those in -I are Objective Genitives. Thus: multi vestrum, many of you. memoria vestri, the memory of you. 216. THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS {myself, yourself, himself, herself, itself, etc.) First Second Third SINGULAR Oen, mel, of myself tul, of yourself sui, of himself, her- Dat. mihi tibi sibi self, or itself Ace. me te se, sese Abl. me te se, sese PLURAL Gen. nostri, of ourselves yestri, of yourselves suT, of themselves Dat. nobis vobis sibi Ace. nos vos se, sese Ahl. nobis vobis se, sese THE PERSONAL AND REFLEXIVE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES 216. The Possessive Adjectives, Personal and Reflexive, are: 1. Personal Possessive Adjectives: 1st Person, meus, my (for ego); noster, our (for nOs) 2d Person, tuus, thy, your (for ttl); vester, your (for vOs) 3d Person, supplied by the Genitive of is, ille, hie, or iste Victoria mea magna est, my victory is great, Victoria tua magna est, your victory is great. Victoria eius magna est, his victory is great. 2. Reflexive Possessive Adjectives: c^-i ^ C Same as the Personal Possessive Adjectives 2d Person ) 3d Person, suus, his, theirs, etc. (same for Singular and Plural) Ego meum flHum amO, tn tuum, I love my son, you {love) yours. Nostrum fllium amamus, we love our son. Filium suum cCir laudat? why does he praise his son 9 Filium suum cQr laudant? why do they praise their son 9 Exercises 88 217. VOCABULARY dictum, -1, N. 2, saying, ivord. servO, -are, 1, preserve, save, gloria, -ae, F. 1, glortj. guard, keep. maleficium, -i, N. 2 (cf . male and sui, of himself, herself, itself, or facio), wrong -doing. themselves. posteSi {post+tSi) Adv., after that, suus, -a, -um, his (own), her afterward (opposite of antea). (own), its (own), their (own). prohibeO, -ere, 2, prohibit, pre- vincO, -ere, 3 (cf. victoria), van- vent, keep (from). quish, conquer, win. 218. READING MATTER 1. (Mark to one of the little boys) Cur non te defendis? Tu si resistes, ego te iuvab5. 2. (The teacher, to Mark and his backers) Vos vincetis. Memoria vestri dictorumque vestrorum hos pueros a maleficio prohibebit. Se contra vos n5n defendent, sed ex perTculo se servabunt; nam verae pugnae n5n cupidi sunt, nee cupiunt a condiscipulls suis culpari. Vobis non resistent. Quam d.iu ^ hic manebitis, nullum puerum lacessent. Si aliqui pueri parvi postea lacessentuf, alii pueri magni idem facient quod vos nunc facitis. Ita vestra victdria iniiiriam scholae in gloriam vertet. 3. (Mark) Sententia tua nobis grata est, multi enim nostrum idem sentiunt.^ Sed alii iinam et alteram^ pugnam exspectant. 219. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (One of the small boys) If anybody attacks me I shall defend myself. 2. Mark will help me after-that. 3. (One of his backers, to Mark) I expect no fig'ht.. 4. The memory either of you or of the master's words will keep these boys from wrong-doing. 5. They will feel their danger, and will wish to save themselves. 6. You will conquer. 7. (Another says) If anyone shall do otherwise he will hurt himself.* 8. We shall turn the injury of the school into (its) glory. 1 (4s) long as. s One and another = one or two. 2 Feel the same thing = have the * Use se, not ipse. Ipse is inten- same feeling. sive, not reflexive. 84 Perfect Indicative Active LESSON XXX THE PERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE, ALL CON- JUGATIONS 220. The Perfect stems of different words are formed in different ways, but the final endings are always the same. Thus amavi (from amo), monui (from moneo), cepi (from capio), fui (from sum). I have loved, I have teamed, I have taken, / have been, Perfect or / loved or I warned or / took or / was Endings 1st Sing, amavl monul cepi fui -1 2d " amavisti monuisti cepisti fuisti -isti 3d *' amavit monuit cepit fuit -it 1st PI. amavimus monuimus cepimus fuimus -imus 2d *' amavistis monuistis cepistis fuistis -istis Bd '' amaverunt monuerunt .ceperunt fuerunt -erunt or -ere or -ere or -ere or -ere or -ere a. Similarly inflect flevi (from fleO), habui (from habeo), prohibui (from prohibeO), placul (from placeO), mansi (from maneO), defend! (from defendO), verti (from vertO), vici (from vincO), iQvi (from iuvO), feci (from faciO). MEANINGS OF THE PERFECT INDICATIVE 221. The Perfect has two distinct forces: 1. It may represent the act as in a finished state ("perfect") at the time of &peaking ("present"), as in English *T have warned you." So used it is called the Present Perfect.^ 2. It may simply throw the act vaguely back into the past, as in "I warned you." So used it is called the Aoristic Perfect.^ 1 It is also called the " Perfect Definite," but less exactly. 2 It is also called the " Perfect Indefinite." Exercises 85 222. VOCABULARY adiuvO, -are, 1 (ad, Btrengthen- socius, -I, M. 2, associate, ally. ing, + iuvO, help), assist, aid. tamen, Conj., still, nevertheless, cOnservO, -are. Perfect cOnser- yet. vavi, 1 (con-, strengthening,^ temerarius, -a, -um, rash, servO, save), save, preserve. thoughtless. pristinus, -a, -um, pristine, temere. Adv., rashly, thought- former, lessly. Add also the Perfect forms learned in 220 and a. 223. READING MATTER (The Perfects here all have Present Perfect meaning.) 1. (His chief backer, to Mark) Tu vicisti; neque fuit pugna ulla. Famam malam scholae in gloriam vertisti. (Mark) N5ii ego vici, sed nos vicimus. Nee soli id nos fecimus. Soci5s habuimus, qu5rum quisque nos adiuvare paratus erat. 2. (The teacher to the allied boys) Quod v5s fecistis, id non minus mihi quam vobis placuit. Scholae bonam famam contra pueros temerarios defendistis ac conservavistis. Memoria vic- toriae vestrae diu manebit. (Mark answers) Hi discipuli temere haec fecerunt, mali tamen non sunt. In sententia pristina sua n5n manserunt, sed sese a maleficio prohibuerunt. 224. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (The teacher to the beaten boys) You have not continued in your former way -of- thinking. 2. (One answers) Mark and his allies have conquered. They have kept us from wrong-doing. 3. Nor does this please any one more than us. 4. We have been thoughtless, but we ourselves wish to aid the school, and pre- serve its good reputation. 5. (The teacher sums up) These boys have acted ^ rashly. 6. Still they censure themselves. 7. They will both remain in the school, and will keep^ from wrong-doing. 1 Say "" have done these things." ^ gay *' keep themselves." 86 Perfect Indicative Active, — The Participle LESSON XXXI THE PERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE.— THE PERFECT PASSIVE PARTICIPLE 225. The Perfect Indicative Active is formed in six different ways, namely in: 1. -VI, as in ama-v-I, from amO. 2. -uT, as in mon-u-I, from moneO. 3. -81, as in man-s-i, from maneO. !4. -1, with reduplication, as in ded-i, from do. 5. -1, with lengthened penult, as in itlv-i, from iuvO. 6. -1, without change, as in vert-i, from verto. a. The -T is the Ending, the rest is the Perfect Stem. b. The -s- of -s-T often affects a preceding consonant. Thus cedo, cessl (for ced-si); tegO, texl (for tec-si, from teg-sI). THE PARTICIPLE 226. A Participle is a Verbal Adjective. Thus loving (Present Active), loved (Perfect Passive). a. As an Adjective, a Participle belongs to a Substantive and agrees with it. As a Verb, it expresses Tense and Voice, may govern a Case, and may be modified by an Adverb. THE PERFECT PASSIVE PARTICIPLE 227. 1. The Perfect Passive Participle expresses an act as suffered by a person or thing (''passive"), and as in a finished state (''perfect"). Thus monitus, having been warned, or (simply) warned. It is declined like bonus. 2. The Perfect Passive Participle bears a general rela- tionship in form to the Perfect Indicative Active. It normally ends in -tus. Thus ama-tus, having beeii loved, or (simply) loved. a. The -t- of the ending -tus often affects a preceding conso- nant, and sometimes both are affected. Thus tegO, tectus (for teg- tus); cedo, cessum (for ced-tum). Principal Parts, by Types 87 b. A number of verbs (as we shall see later, 400), can have only the Neuter of this participle. Hence in a list it is more practical to give the neuter form for all verbs. PRINCIPAL PARTS OF VERBS 228. The Parts of a Verb from which all others may be formed are called the Principal Parts. These are: Pres. Indic. Pres. Infin. Perf. Indic. Perf. Pass. Partic. (Neuter ; see h above) amO amare amavl amatum, love. moneO monere monul monitum, icarn. tegO tegere texT tectum, cover. capio capere cepi captum, take. audio audire audlvl audltum, hear. 229. LIST OF REGULAR VERBS THUS FAR USED WITH PRINCIPAL PARTS AS ABOVE (For Study and Reference) 1. Perfect in -vl: amo amare amavi amatum, love. ambulo ambulare ambulavi ambulatum, walk Similarly ceno, culpo, desidero, exspecto, habito, laboro, laudo, paro, persevere, probo, propero, pugno, servo and conserve, voco. audio audire audivi audltum, hear. cupio cupere cuplvi cupitum, desire. fleo flere flevi fletum, iceep. lacesso lacessere lacessivi lacessitum, worry. peto petere petivi petitum. aim at. scio scire scivl scitum, knoiv. 2. Perfect in -ui: moneo monere monui monitum, warn. habeo habere habui habitum, have. prohibeo prohibere prohibui prohibitum, prohibit. noceo nocere nocui nocitum. injure . placeo placere placui placitum. please. displiceo displicere displicui displicitum. displease. studeo studere studul (lacking) be zealous for, timeo timere timui u fear. Principal Farts, by Types 3. Perfect in -si: cedo cedere cessi cessum, yield. discedo discedere discessi discessum, depart. dico dicere dixi dictum, say. maneo manere mansi mansum, remain. rego regere rexi rectum, rule. sentio sentire eensl sensum, feel. tego tegere texi tectum, cover. 4. Perfect in -i, with reduplication : do dare dedi datum, give. pello pellere pepuli pulsum, drive. 5. Perfect in -T, with lengthened vowel in penult: iuvo iuvare itivi iiitum, . help. adiuvo adiuvare adiuvi adiutum. aid. faveo favere favi fautum, favor. video videre vidl visum, see. vinco vincere vici- victum, conquer. capio capere cepi captum, take. accipio accipere accepi acceptum. accept. incipio incipere incepi inceptum, begin. facio facere feci factum, make. iacio iacere ieci iactum, throw. 6. Perfect in -1, without change in penult: defendo defendero defend! defensum, defend. respondeo respondere respond! responsum. answer verto vertere vert! v^rsum, turn. 230. VOCABULARY (From here on, the Principal Parts of new verbs will be given in full.) de (same word as before, with mane, Adv., in the morning* Abl. of starting-point of the thought), concerning, about. inquit, says he, or said he. Used in direct quotation, and always follows one or more words. invito, invltare, invitavl, invi- tatum, 1, invite; attract. nihil, indeclinable, Neut. Noun, nothing. periculOsus, -a, -um, full-of- danger^ dangerous. venio, venire, veni, ventum, 4, come. verbum, -i, N. 2, word. Exercises 89 231. READING MATTER (The Perfects here still have Present Perfect meaning.) 1. (The teacher) Marcus eiusque socii me adiuverunt. li qui Sextum lacessiverunt, non temere in pristin5 maleficio manserunt, sed sese conservaverunt. In schola manebunt. Ipse Sextus, , ab his diu lacessitus, tamen iis inimicus non est. Haec mihi magnopere placuerunt. 2. (Sextus has stayed away from Mark's picnic in the woods. Mark says) Sextus non venit. Viditnef eum aliquis? A me hodie mane invitatus, tamen abest. (One of the boys) Ego eum vidi. (Mark) Ubi erat? Quid faciebat? (Ans.) In villa sua manebat. (Mark) Quid erat causae?^ (Ans.) Ab aliquo agri- cola monitus, venire timebat. (Mark) Quid de nostra cena dicebat agricola? (Ans.) "Temerarius," inquit, "es. Silvaperi- culosa est." (Mark) Nihil hie est periculosi.^ Hie agricola Sexto verba dedit.^ 232. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (A friend goes to get Sextus) Hasn't Mark invited you to our dinner? 2. (Sextus) Yes. He has invited me. 3. (First speaker) Why, having-been- invited by him, have you neverthe- less not come? 4. (Ans.) I have not come, having-been -warned about the forest this morning by a certain farmer. 5. (First speaker) What was the farmer saying to you? 6. (Sextus) "These boys are rash," said he. "The forest is dangerous." 7. (First speaker) Are these his words? (Sextus) These are his very* words. 8. (First speaker) Have you yourself ever seen anything^ (of) dangerous in this forest? I have seen nothing. 9. That farmer has certainly fooled^ you.^ 10. Come now to our supper. 1 What (of) reason f Genitive of ^xjse ipse, very. the Whole. • ^Use quisquam (in Neuter), be- ^ Nothing (of) dangerous. cause of implied negative. 3 = has fooled Sextus. ^Cf . footnote 3. 90 Future Active Participle LESSON XXXII FORMATION A]ND USE OF THE FUTURE ACTIVE PARTICIPLE 233. 1. The Future Active Participle is formed with the ending -turns, and is declined like bonus, -a, -um. The stem generally follows that of the Perfect Passive Parti- ciple, with the same changes, if there are any, in the -t- (cf. 227, a). a. Practically, then, we may form the Future Active Participle of raost verbs by simply changing -us of the Perfect Passive Participle to -Grus. Thus amatus, amattirus; monitus, monitarus; audltus, audittlrus; pulsus, pulsQrus. 2. The Future Active Participle represents an act as intended or impending, a. Its regular use is in the Predicate with some form of the verb sum. Thus te monittirus sum, I am going to warn you. h. This combination of the Future Active Participle with sum is very nearly equivalent to a Future Indicative (just as "I am going to warn you " is very near to " I shall warn you "). Hence it is called the Periphrastic Future {= round-about Future). 234. A few verbs lack the Perfect Passive Participle, but have the Future Active, which will be given in their Principal Parts. Thus: sum esse ful futnrus, be. cado cadere cecidl casGrus, fall. fugiO fugere fogi fugitCirus, flee. desisto desistere destiti destitGrus, desist. resist© resistere restiti restitGrus, resist. sto stare stetl statGrus, stand. a. Compounds are conjugated like the simple verbs from which they are formed. Thus absum, abesse, afui, afutQrus. Exercises 91 235. VOCABULARY convenio, -venire, -v6ni,-ventum, locus, -i, M. 2, place. PI. loca, 4 (con — [-venio), come together, locorum, N. 2. meet. nQntiO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, an- doceO, docere, docui, doctum, 2, nounce, tell. teach, inform, tell, show. prope, Prep., near, taking Ace, eO, Adv., thither, to that place. of Space-Relation. expIOrO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, ex- statuO, statuere, statui, statn- plore, reconnoiter ; find out. turn, 3, set up; decide (set up heri. Adv., yesterday. in one's mind). hora, -ae, F. 1, hour. • tabernaculum, -I, N. 2, tent. i^^n^MS, -B., -nva, suitable, fit. valeO, -ere, -ui, -itGrus, 2, he lalius, -1, M. 2, Julius, a name. strong ov powerful, he well. 236. READING MATTER (The Perfects here are partly Present Perfects, partly Aorists.) Aliquid novi^ tibi nuntiatiirus sum. Ego et iQlius^ in silva prope scholam in idoneo Ioc5 tabernaculum statuturi sumus. Loca propinqua heri exploravimus. Nihil vidimus periculosi. Locus ipse ubi tabernaculum est staturum pulcher est. Eo saepe vel mane vel post scholae horas convenient amici a nobis invitati. Te invitare statuimus. Alios nunc de hoc tabernaculo doctiirus sum. Vale.^ (The hearer congratulates himself) "Te," inquit, "invitare statuimus." Haec Sexti ipsa verba sunt. Beatus sum. 237. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION L Julius has just-now announced some news^ to me. 2. He and Sextus are going-to-set-up a tent in the forest near the school. 3. They explored the neighborhood^ yesterday, and saw nothing dangerous. 4. The tent is going-to-stand in a suitable place. 5. They are going-to-inform their friends about it, and these will often meet there,^ either after school hours or in-the-morning. 6. They have decided to invite us too. Good- bye. 7. (The hearer) Many will come without^ invitation.^ '^Something (of) new = some news. "^Say "places near." 2 Latin order is : 1st Person, 2d, 3d. ^Say "come together thither." 8Be well, = farewell, good-bye. ^gay "not invited." 92 Past Perfect Indicative Active LESSON XXXIII THE PAST PERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE, ALL CON- JUGATIONS 238. The Past Perfect Indicative Active is formed by adding -eram, etc. (seen in the Imperfect of sum, 144) to the Perfect Stem. Thus: I had loved I had warned I had taken I had been Endings 1st Sing, amaveram monueram ceperam fueram -eram 2d " amaveras monueras ceperas fueras -eras 3d " amaverat monuerat ceperat fuerat -erat 1st PI. amaveram us monaeramus ceperamus fueramus -eramus 2d '' amaveratis monueratis ceperatis fueratis -eratis 3d " amaverant monuerant ceperant fuerant -erant 239. The Past Perfect represents an act as already in a finished state ("Perfect") at some past time ("Past"). It thus also implies that the performance of the act had preceded that time. Thus: Te monueram) / had warned you (act previously performed). 240. VOCABULARY at, Conj., hut^ yet. Of contrast forte, Adv., hy chance, perhaps. or objection. longe, Adv., far (cf. longus). autem, Conj., postpos., on the oth- longus, -a, -um, long. er hand,hut, however ; now. Of paulisper, Adv., a little {while), contrast,but not so strong as at. for a little (while). coIO, colere, colui, cultum, 3, prOcedO,-cedere,-cessi,-cessum, cultivate. S^ proceed, advance. defatigo,-are, -avi, -atum, 1 (de, propter, along, beside; on ac- intensive, + fatigO, fatigue), count of. Prep., taking Ace. fatigue, tire out of Space-Relation, denique. Adv., finally, at last. quattuor, indeclinable, Adj.,/owr. Exercises 93 - ♦ . 241. READING MATTER (An Adventure of the Small Boys) (Julius's father asks) Non vaJetis, filii mei? Aut forte nimis impigre hodie in sehola studuistis t Quid est I ^ Mihi respondete. (Julius) Heri tabernaculum, quod tu nobis dederas, in idoneo loco in silva prope scholam statuimus. Eo hodie bene mane^ ante scholae horam venimus. Quattuor condiscipulT, a nobis invitati, ad eundem locum venerant. Non diu mansuri eramus. Mox autem iinus ex discipulls, " Quid, " inquit, " si paulisper in silva ambulabimus, eamque explorabimus ? " Alius "id laudo/'^ inquit. Ciincti* probavimus. At mox longe processeramus. Eum locum ubi tum eramus numquam antea videramus. Mag- hopere timebamus.^ Denique agricolam vidimus, qui tum forte agrum propter silvam colebat. Is n5s de via docuit. At haec .longa fuit. Propter hoc iam defatigati eramus, cum magister nos in scholam vocavit. 242. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (Continuation) Finally the teacher said: "Aren't you well? You are not already tired out, are you? 2. Where were you, Julius, when I called you? " (Julius) I was in the road. 3. (Master) Where had you been before-that? (Ans.) I had walked a-little-while in the woods. 4. (Master) Had you perhaps gone (= proceeded) far? (Ans.) I had gone too far. 5. A farmer who was cultivating a field beside the wood told me about the way. It was (a) long (one). 6. (Master) Had you walked with others? Why don't you answer? 7. (One of the four) We had all four walked in the woods. 8. (Master) I am not going- to-chide you, but this I will say: 9. It pleases me when you walk in the woods; it does not please me, however, when you walk there before the schooP hour. 1 What is the matter f 'tNom. ; hence goes with Subject. 2 Well early = early in the morning. ^ We were much frightened. ^=thaVs a good idea. ^Say, " hour of school." 94 Future Perfect Indicative Active LESSON XXXIV THE FUTURE PERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE, ALL CONJUGATIONS 243. The Future Perfect Indicative Active is formed by adding -ero, etc. (seen in the Future of sum, 157) to the Perfect Stem. But the 3d Person Plural ends in -eriiit, not -erunt. I shall I shall I shall I shall have loved have warned have taken have been ENDINGS 1st Sing. amaverO monuerO ceperO fuerO -ero 2d " amaveris monueris ceperis fueris -eris 3d " amaverit monuerit ceperit fuerit -erit 1st PL amaverimus monuerimus ceperimus fuerimus -erimus 2d « amaveritis monueritis ceperitis fueritis -eritis 3d " amaverint monuerint ceperint fuerint -erint a. The Future Perfect represents an act as in a finished state ("Perfect") at a future time ("Future"). It thus also implies that the performance of the act will have preceded that time. 244. VOCABULARY aliquot, indecl. Adj., some, sev- eral. annus, -T, M. 2, year. cOnficiO, cOnficere, cOnfecT, cOn- fectum, 3 (con-+faciO, do thoroughly), j^ms/i., complete. cOnstituO, -stituere, -stitui, -sti- ttitum,3 (stronger than statuO), establish, place ; determine. disco, discere, didici, , 3, learn. efficio, efficere, effeci, effectum, 3 (ex+facio), make out, ac- complish, bring about. excedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, 3 (ex+cedo), come out (of), leave, withdraw. gerO, gerere, gessi, gestum, 3, carry, bear; carry on, wage, m^anage (e. g., a business, a war, etc.); do. negotium, -I, N. 2, business, oc- cupation. nisi, Conj. (ni, a negative particle, -|-si, if=if not), unless; with- out a wQYh^except. nOndum, Adv. (nOn, not, + dum, the while = not the while), not yet. Servius, -i, M. 2, Servius, a name. spatium, -i, N. 2, space, distance ; period (of time). subito, Adv., suddenly. Exercises 95 246. READING MATTER 1. (Mark remonstrates with a schoolmate) Quid tu, Servi, constituisti facere? Cum hos quattuor annos c5nfeceris, quid denique eifeceris?. Multi nostrum aliquid certe didicerimus; tu autem non longe processeris. Nihil bene colueris, nisi ludos. (Ans.) Ad^ negotium satis forte didicero. (Mark) Minime. Per longum annorum spatium piger fueris. At impiger vir, non piger, bene neg5tium gerit. Tu, cum paulisper laboravisti, subito defatigatus es. 2. (The teacher to a father) Filii tui in studiis non longe processerint, cum ex schola excedent. Per quattuor annos pigri fu^rint. Propter hoc ad negdtium parati nondum erunt. (The father, to these sons) Cum post hos quattuor annos negotium gerere incipietis, lab5rare non didiceritis. 246. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. You have finished several years in school; but you have not learned anything, except sports. 2. (Ans.) On this account,^ I am going- to-cultivate studies vigorously for-a-little-while. 3. I shall at-any-rate have accomplished something when I leave ^ the school. 4. Servius has suddenly determined to work vigorously. 5. He will not proceed far, however. 6. When he leaves^ the school, he will be prepared for nothing, because he will not have learned to work. 7. Unless you work* through this year, you will not be pre- pared for business. 8. (Ans.) I shall begin to work when I begin to carry ^ on business. 9. (First speaker) You will not-yet have learned to work. 10. Many of these boys will have been lazy through^ a period of four years. 11. They will not then suddenly begin to work. 1 Ad gains figurative meaning : In the direction of = for. 2 Say " on account of this." ^ More exactly, " shall have worked." 3 Express the time more exactly. ^ Use per as above. 96 Tenses of Completed Action, Indicative Passive LESSON XXXV THE PASSIVE TENSES OF COMPLETED ACTION IN THE INDICATIVE, ALL CONJUGATIONS 247. The Perfect tenses of the Indicative Passive are compound forms, made from the Perfect Passive Participle, combined with the verb sum in the Present, Imperfect, or Future. Thus, from moneo: Present Perfect monitus sum, I have been warned. Past Perfect monitus eram, I had been ivarned. Future Perfect monitus ero, I shall have been warned, a. These meanings arose naturally out of the combinations. Thus, monitus sum meant ovigiwbWy, I am a warned (man). But this, of course, implied the idea I have been warned. b. The three tenses express situation, present, past, or future, resulting from the completion of an action. Compare the examples. c. The Participle of compound forms must agree with the Subject, like any other Participle. Thus: ptier monitus est, the boy has been warned. feminae monitae sunt, the women have been warned. dona data sunt, the gifts have been given. The forms may then be exhibited as follows: 248. THE PERFECT TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE PASSIVE Present Perfect Past] Perfect Future Perfect I have I had I shall have been warned been warned been warned 1st Sing. monitus sum monitus eram monitus erO 2d " (( es a eras a eris 3d " (( est u erat u erit 1st PI. moniti sumus moniti er3.mus moniti erimus 2d " 11 estis (( eratis (( eritis 3d " u sunt u erant (( erunt Three Divisions of Time. — The Point of View 97 249. You may now easily form the Indicative tenses of completed action, Active and Passive, of any verb of which you know the Principal Parts. Thus, if you know the four parts doceo, docere, docui, doctum, feac/i, you get: Present Perfect Past Perfect Future Perfect Active docu-i docu-eram docu-erO Passive doctus sum doctus eram doctus ero a. Form now the three tenses of completed action, Active and Passive, for amO, tegO, capio, and audio (first saying 'the Principal Parts to yourself in each instance). 260. The Present Perfect Passive may of course be used with Aoristic force, just as the Present Perfect Active is. Thus, according to the context, r I have been warned (Pres. Perfect), or Monitus sum means either j ( I was warned (Aoristic Perfect). 261. There are only three possible divisions of time, namely the past, the present, and the future. a. A given act will appear differently according to the time with reference to which the speaker looks at it (that is, the point of view). Thus I may say, I AM now BUILDING a house, the point of view being the present time; but if by and by I think of the same act' and the same time, I should say, I WAS then BUILDING a house, the point of view being now a past time. — ^Again, I should say, I HAVE now BUILT a house, but, later, thinking of the same time, I HAD then BUILT a house. 262. VOCABULARY bracchium, -I, N. 2, the arm firmo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, make (strictly the fore-arm only). firm, strengthen. consilium, -I, N.2, counsel, plan; mGtO,-are, -avi, -atum, 1, change, judgment, wisdom; council. alter. doleO, dolere, doluT, dolitdrus, 2, proelium, -i, N. 2, battle. suffer, ache, grieve. sQmO, sGmere, sQmpsi, sQmptum, exerceO, exercere, exercul, exer- 3, take up, take, assume. citum, 2, exercise, drill, triumphus, -I, M. 2, triumph. 98 Exercises 253. READING MATTER 1. {Point of View Past) Filii mei spatium quattuor ann5rum in studiis iam confecerant, cum ex schola excesserunt. Sed ab iis ludi, non studia, semper culta erant. Propter hoc per aliquot annos negotium male gesserunt; nam laborare nondum didice- rant. 2. {Point of View Present) Multum^ a meis filiis in his annis effect um est. Et bracchia et animi e5rum exerciti sunt. 3. {Point of View Future) Cum hi pueri quattuor ann5s ad ludos sumpserint, quid ab iis denique effectum erit? Bracchia eorum firmata erunt, animi autem non erunt firmati. Nisi forte consilia sua mox mutaverint atque subito constituerint laborare, ad negotium iddnei n5n erunt. Tum vero dolebunt. Tum verum incipiet proelium. Niillos tum habebunt triumphos nisi exjanimi diligentia. 254. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION {Point of View Past) 1. Servius had at-that-time spent ^ four years in (his) studies. 2. But only games had been culti- vated by him; his mind had not yet been strengthened. 3. On this account he managed business- affairs^ badly for several years. {Point of View Present) 4. Several years have now been used up by you in (your) studies. 5. Has much been accomplished? (Ans.) Nothing has been accomplished. 6. This I see at last, and I have now determined to work. {Point of View Future) 7. When you leave* school, nothing will have been accomplished, unless perhaps you suddenly change* your plans. 8. Your arms will have been exercised, your mind will not have been strengthened for^ the real battle. 9. Then, indeed, you will suffer. Then you will have no triumphs. 1 Adjective used as noun, = much. ^Express time-idea exactly. 2" Spent " = " finished" (conficio). ^Use ad, as in the Latin above. 3 Plural of negotium. third line from end. . Third Declension, Consonant Stems 99 LESSON XXXVI THE THIRD DECLENSION; NOUNS 255. In the Third Declension, the Stem ends in a Con- sonant, or in -i. Consonant Stems will be taken np first. 256. rex, , king, M. miles, soldier, M. caput, head, N. Stems reg- milit- capit- Endings M. and F. N. Sing. Nom. rex miles caput -sor — — Gen, regis militis capitis -is -is Dat. regi militl eapiti -1 -1 Ace. regem militem caput -em — Voc. rex miles caput -s or — — Abl. rege milite capita -e -e PI , Nom. reges milites capita -es -a Gen. regum militum capitum -um -um Dat regibus militibus capitibus -ibus -ibus Ace. reges milites capita -es -a Voc. reges milites capita -es -a Abl. regibus militibus capitibus -ibus -ibus 257. victor, victor, M. Stems victOr- pater, father, M. robur, oak, N. patr- robor- Endings Sing. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. PI. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. victor victoris victorl victorem victor victore victores victorum victoribus victores victores victoribus pater patris patri patrem pater patre patres patrum patribus patres patres patribus robur roboris robori robur robur robore robora roborum roboribus robora r5bora roboribus Same as above 100 Dative of Reference or Concern 268. Remarks on the Third Declension Nouns with Consonant Stems: 1. The stem is found by dropping -is of the Genitive Singular. 2. Masculine and Feminine Nouns are declined alike. 3. Neuters have no case-ending in the Nom.-Acc.-Voc. Singular. 4. With these facts in mind, you can decline any consonant-stem noun, after mastering the case-endings given above, if you know the •Nominative and Genitive of that noun, and its Gender, THE DATIVE OP REFERENCE OR CONCERN 259. Specimen Sentence: His pueris timeO, I am afraid for these hoys. a. Here the Dative expresses the persons to whom the act refers, — the persons whom it concerns. The construction may be used after any Verb. Hence we may state the rule, that: 260. Any Verb may he followed hy a Dative of the Per- son to whom the act or state Refers., or whom it Concerns. 261. VOCABULARY arma, -Orum, N. 2 (not used in legO,legere,legi, lectum,3,pzc/?, ^ing.)^ arms, weapons. . choose; read. caput, capitis, N. 3, head. lex, legis, F. 3, law, rule. credo, credere, credidijCreditum, miles, militis, M. 3, soldier. 3, believe. (Verb of Attitude, pater, patris, M. 3,/a<7ier. taking Dat.) rex, regis, M. 3, king. dtlcO, dGcere, daxi, ductum, 3, rObur, robor is, N. 3, oafc; figura- lead. tive meaning, strength. eligO, eligere, elegi, electum, 3 simulo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, (6 + lego), pick out, elect, simulate, pretend. choose. unde. Adv., /rom what, whence; imperO,-are, -avi, -atum, 1, com- out of what. mand, order. (Verb of Atti- victor, -Oris, M. 3, victor, con- tude, taking Dat.) queror. inter, between, among. Prep., vulnerO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, taking Ace. of Space-Relation. wound. 262. READING MATTER Bellum simulatum {pretended war, mock war) pueri ex schola nostra inter se gesturi sunt. Reges ex discipulTs eligentur. Hi Exercises \^ -101 ■' " * » ^ ■* * * .J * ^ ' ) ' ■ • ex reliquis discipulis milites legent. Certae leges ^ pugiae c6i*,- stituentur.^ Victores denique regem victum in triumph5 ducent. Kegis victi milites, quaecumque iis victor imperaverit,^ ea facient. (Second speaker) Timeo his militibus et his regibus, nisi c5n- silium miitaverint; nee minus victori quam victo timeo regi. Nam si arma siimpta erunt, aliquot pueri vulnerabuntur. Bracchia iis firmabuntur, sed capita post proelium dolebunt. (First speaker) Non credo.* Dolitura non sunt; nam arma quae facient pueri periculosa non erunt. (Second speaker) Unde^ ea factiiri sunt? (Ans.) Ex robore. (Second speaker) Patresne horum regum horumque militum hoc consilium probabunt? (Ans.) Certe. (Second speaker) Tibi'non credo. Numquam probabunt. 263. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Have you heard about the mock war which we are going to wage among ourselves? (Ans.) I have heard nothing. 2. (First speaker) The boys are going- to-choose kings. By these (kings) soldiers will be chosen. 3. (Second speaker) Who will lead the soldiers ? 4. (First speaker) The kings themselves will command them; and, after the battle, the conqueror will lead the conquered (king) in triumph. 5. (Second speaker) What^ shall you make weapons out^ of ?^ 6. (First speaker) We shall make weapons of oak. 7. (Second speaker) Some of the boys will be wounded. 8. I fear for your heads and arms. They will ache for you after the battle. 9. (First speaker) I don't think so.* We shall not aim-at heads. 10. (Second speaker) Will your father approve-of this scheme? 11. (First speaker) If fixed rules are established,^ he will approve. ^ Fixed rules. ^ I donH believe it= I don^t think so. 2 Will be established. 6 Out of what? from what? ^Whatever (things)' the victor ^xJseunde. shall command (to) them. 7 Look out for the time-relation. 102 TUird D^plension^ "Oonsonant Stems [FiHishedy 264. LESSON XXXVII THE THIRD DECLENSION CONSONANT STEMS (Finished) sermd ytalk,M. multitQdO, nOmen, name, N. multitude^ F. Stems sermOn- multittldin- nOmin- Endings Sing, Norn. sermo multittido nomen As Oen. sermonis multittidinis nominis already Dat. sermonl inultitudini nominl given Ace. sermonem multitudinem nomen (256) Voc. sermo multittido nomen Abl. sermone multitudine nomine PI. Nom. sermon es multittidines nomina Gen. sermonum multitudinum nominum Dat. sermoQibus multittidinibus nominibus Ace. sermones multittidines nomina Voc. sermones multitudines nomina Abl. sermonibus multitudinibus nominibus 265. pulvis, dust, M. mOs, custom, M. corpus, body, ,N. Stems pulver- mOr- corpor- Endings Sing. Nom. pulvis mos corpus As Gen. pulveris moris corporis already Dat. pulverl morl corporl given Ace. pulverem morem corpus (256) Voc. pulvis mos corpus Abl. pulvere more corpora PI Nom. pulveres mores corpora Gen. pulverum morum corporum Dat. pulveribus moribus corporibus Ace. pulveres mores corpora Voc. pulveres mores corpora Abl. pulveribus moribus corporibus a. In Latin, s between two vowels regularly became r. Hence the change from the original s, preserved in the Nominative, to -r- in the other cases. Such words are often called s-Stems. Notes on Consonant Stems 103 266. NOTES ON CONSONANT STEMS (256,257,264,265) 1. In the Masc.-Fem. Nom. Sing., sometimes the s is lacking,^ sometimes the final consonant of the stem, and sometimes both. Thus victor (not victOr-s), miles (not mllet-s), sermO (not sermOn-s). 2. Before final r or 1, a vowel suffers the regular shortening (100,2). Thus victor, from victor. Gen. victOr-is. 3. Otherwise vowels generally remain unchanged in length. Thus, rex with long e, as in reg-is. 267. VOCABULARY apud^at, among ; at-the-house-of. multitndo, -inis, F. 3, multitude, Prep., taking Ace. of Space- great number. Relation. nOmen, nOminis, N. 3, name. compleO, -plere, -plevi, -pletum, pes, pedis,^ M. 3, foot. 2 (con-, intensive,-}-pleO,2 fill), pulvis, pulveris, M. 3, dust. fill thoroughly, fill up, fill* quamquam, Conj., although. corpus, -oris,N. 3, body. SGrm0y-6niSf'M..S,talk, eonversa- excito, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 (ex tion. +citO, rouse), rouse up, raise. sic. Adv., in this way, thus, so. frater, fratris, M. 3, brother. soror, sorOris, F. 3, sister. honor, -Oris, M. 3, /lOTior. virtus, -tntis, F. 3, manliness, mater, matris, F. 3, mother. courage, prowess (the quality mOs, mOris, M. 3, custom, habit. belonging to a vir). 268. READING MATTER 1. Audivistine sermonem discipulorum ? Tot us de armis est. Multitud5 eorum m5res veri belli apud se* a patribus discunt,^ quorum nonnulli ipsi milites fuerunt. Nomen militis apud eos magn5 in honore nunc est. Virtu tern laudant. Corpora sua exer- cent. In via pulverem vides, quern pedes eorum excitaverunt. (Ans.) Tibi credo. Servius, filius meus, iam victor est, quam- quam is rex^ neque elect us est, neque umquam eligetur. Leges 1 Hence the blank added to the -s in the scheme of endings, 256. 2 Pled, fill, appears only in compounds. 3 Note difference of quantity between Nominative and Genitive. {Excep- tion to 26^,^.) * At-the-house-of themselves=at home. ^Plural, because multitudo is plural in meaning (Collective Noun; cf. 31, a). *Rex is in the Predicate {chosen king). 104 Exercises ille constituit. Milites sibi ex amicis legit. ^ Fratres parv5s suos, cum sor5re parva, in triumpho simulato ducit. Magnam inter eos habet famam. Etiam matri multa^ imperat. Corpus suum exercet. Sonus armorum t5tam villam complet. Caput mihi vero dolet.^ (First speaker) Unde arma fecerunt pueri? (Ans.) Ex robore. R5bur non durum est. Tamen etiam sic multi vulnerabuntur. 269. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. There is war at my house* between my father and my mother. 2. (Second speaker) I don't believe you. They never fight each other.^ 3. (Ans.) It is true. (Second speaker) Why are they fighting? 4. (Ans.) My father appro ves-of our mock war. 5. My little brothers and sisters, too, love the very name of soldier. 6. But my mother grieves. 7. Although she praises our courage, yet on account of our talk she fears for our bodies, and she fears for our habits also. 8. My father says : " War is always thus in honor among boys. 9. The feet of our school- boys will raise a dust, and the sound of arms will fill the streets for-a-little-while. 10. But bodies will be exercised and strength- ened, and no^ soldier of the whole multitude will be wounded." 11. Nevertheless my mother resists. 1 What tense? Notice the short e, and distinguish from legit. 2 Commands his mother many things, = gives many orders to his mother. Why is matri Dative? ^ The head really aches for me,=my head really aches. * See definition of apud in the Vocabulary. ^Say ** among themselves," as in 262. 6 "And no" is in Latin "nor any." Do you want quisquam or uUus? See 199, a. Third Declension^ l-Sterns and Mixed Stems 105 LESSON XXXVIII 270. THE THIRD DECLENSION (Continued) NEUTER i-STEMS insigne, animal, exemplar, Endim signal, N. animal, N. pattern, N. Stems insigni- animd.li- exemplari- Sing. Nom. insigne animal exemplar -e, — Gen. Insignis animalis exemplaris -is Dat insignl animall exemplar! -! Ace. insigne animal .exemplar -e, — Voc. insigne animal exemplar -e, — AU. insignl animall exemplar! -! PL Nom. insignia animalia exemplaria -ia Gen. insignium animalium exemplarium -ium Dat. insignibus animalibus exemplaribus -ibus Ace. insignia animalia exemplaria -ia Voc. insignia animalia exemplaria -ia AU. insignibus animalibus exemplaribus -ibus 271. MASCULINE AND FEM- ININE i-STEMS (Mostly like Consonant Stems in Sing., but i-Stemsin Plural.) finis, end, M. caedes, slaughter, P. Stems fini- caedi- MIXED STEMS (Consonant Stems in Sing., biit i-Stems in Plural.) nox, night, F. gens, race, F. noct- in Sing, gent- in Sing. nocti- in PL genti- in PI. Sing. Nom. finis caedes nox gens Gen. finis caedis noctis gentis Dat. fin! caed! noct! gent! . Ace. finem caedem noctem gentem Voc. finis caedes nox gens AU. fine caede nocte gente PI. Nom. fines caedes noctes gentes Gen. finium ' caedium noctium gentium Dat. finibus caedibus noctibus gentibus Ace. finis (-es) caedis (-es) noctis (-es) gentis (-es) Voc. fines caedes noctes gentes AU. finibus caedibus noctibus gentibus 106 Ablative of Means or Instrument 272. NOTES ON THE i-STEMS AND MIXED STEMS 1. Neuter i-Stems show the -i- throughout the Plural, and in the Ablative Singular (-1).^ 2. Most Masculine and Feminine i-Stems, together with Mixed Stems,2 show the -i- only in the Plural, namely in Genitive -ium and Accusative -Is (with alternative -es). THE ABLATIVE OP MEANS OR INSTRUMENT 273. In Latin, as in English, the with-iAQOi is used to express not only Accompaniment, as in "I walk with a friend," but Means or Instrument, as in "I walk with a crutch" (=:"by means of a crutch"). a. This construction has never taken on a preposition in Latin, the idea being expressed by the case alone. We may then say that: 274. Means or Instrument may he expressed by the Ablative. Te cOnsiliO adiuvabo, / will help you with (or by) advice. Armis ex rObore pugnamus, we fight with weapons of oak. 275. VOCABULARY (The Genitive Plural will be added to mark i-Stems or Mixed Stems.) animal, -alis, -ium, N. 3, antmaZ. imago, imaginis, F. 3, image, barbarus, -a, -um, barbarian. likeness, representation. caedes, -is, -ium, F. 3, sZawg/ifer. insigne, -is, -ium, N. 3, decora- exemplar, -aris, -arium, N. 3, tion, badge, device; signal, pattern. nox, noctis, noctium, F. 3, night. ferus, -a, -um, fierce^ wild. Humerus, -I, M. 2, number. finis, -is, -ium, M. 3, limit, end, pingo, pingere, pinxi, plctum, 3, boundary; in PL, boundaries; paint. hence territory. ROmanus, -a, -um, Roman. galea, -ae, F. 1, helmet. sctltum, -I, N. 2, shield. A curved gens, gentis, gentium, F. 3, race. rectangle of wood and leather, gladius, -1, M. 2, stvord. specto, -are, -avl, -atum, 1, look hostis, -is, -ium, M. 3, enemy. at, witness, icatch. iThe -i- originally showed everywhere. Thus Nom. insigni, animali. 2 Many of the Mixed Stems were originally i-Stems, but came to be declined like Consonant Stems in the Singular. Of some, the opposite is true. The two types, originally opposed, thus became alike. Exercises 107 276. READING MATTER 1. (Serma inter condiscipulos). Mos est mllitum in proelio insignia in galeis gerere. Mater sororesque meae mihi nunc msigne faciunt. Exemplar ex insigni sumpserunt quod pater meus habet; nam ille antea miles fuit. Corpus meum scut5 magnd tegam, in quo imaginem animalis alicuius feri pingam. Fratres quoque mei parvi galeas et Insignia sibi faciunt; quam- quam hr spectabunt solum virtutem nostram, ipsT non pugna- bunt. (Ans.) Multitude puerorum qui nos spectabunt vias complebit, multumque^ pedibus suis excitabunt pulveris. Sed quibus tu armis pugnaturus es ? (First speaker) . Nonne arma Romana scuta gladiique sunt ? Ego certe ndmen Romani, non barbari, militis mihi sumam. Id solum in hon5re apud nos est. (Ans.) Ego tam Romanus sum quam tu. Sed quid si cuncti erimus ex Romana gente? Contra quos tum hostis pug- nabimus? Non magnus certe erit hostium numerus. 2. Quam diii hi pueri pugnabunt? (Ans.) Nox finem caedi faciet. 277. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (Ques.) Of what fierce animal shall you paint an image on your shield? 2. (Ans.) I shall paint no^ image of an animal on my shield; for I shall not be of any^ barbarian race. 3. Only barbarians fight thus with painted shields. 4. (Ques.) Shall you wear* a decoration on your helmet? (Ans.) Certainly; although I haven't yet a pattern. I have made me a sword already. 5. I shall protect my body with this, not with my shield. 6. (Second speaker) I shall watch your prowess when the fight begins. 7. When night comes, we Romans shall puf^ an end to the slaughter of the enemy. 8. Fortunate will be those-remaining. The number of these will not be large. ^Much — of what? Wait and see. 3";N^ot of any"="of no" 2 Say "an image of no animal." ^Say "bear." ^Say "make." 108 Exceptional 1-Stems LESSON XXXIX EXCEPTIONAL I-STEMS * 278. A few i-Stems preserve the i-Declension in the Singular, showing it in an Accusative -im (sometimes alongside of -em), or an Ablative -i (sometimes alongside of -e), or in both cases. Thus: turris, tower, P. ignis, fire, M. Stems turri- igni- Sing. Nom. turris ignis Gen. turris ignis Dat turrI igni Ace. turrim (rarely -em) ignem Voc. turris ignis Abl. turri or -e igni or -e PI. Norm. turres ignes Gen. turrium ignium Dat. turribus ignibus Ace. - turris or -es ignis or -es Voc. turres ignes Abl. turribus ignibus a. These exceptional words must be picked up individually. On general principles, if in doubt, decline any given Masc. or Fern. i'Stem or Mixed Stem as a Consonant Stem in the Singular and an i-Stem in the Plural (i. e., with Ace. -em and Abl. -e in the Sing., and Gen. -ium and Ace. -Is or -es in the PL). THE FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLE 279. The Future. Passive Participle is formed by adding -ndus (-a, -um) to the Present Stem. Thus: CONJ. I II III IV amandus monendus tegendus capiendus audiendus to be loved to be warned to be covered to be taken to be heard Example: Haec pugna nunc pugnanda est, this fight is nowto be fought. Dative of Agent with Future Passive Participle 109 280. The Future Passive Participle with sum, etc., early acquired the force of Obligation^ Propriety, or Necessity; and this is the force regularly found in this combination. Thus: " arms are to he made, that is . arms must he made, or Arma facienda sunt, -{ arms have to he made, or j there is an ohligation or necessity for [ making arms. a. This combination is often called the Periphrastic Future Passive. 5. The Future Passive Participle with sum is often accompanied by a Dative, which originally expressed the Person Concerned by the Obligation, Propriety, or Necessity, but has come to be in effect an expression of the Agent, as in : Arma nobis facienda sunt, for us, there is an ohligation to make arms; i. e., arms must he made BY us. We may now sum up the expression of the Agent as follows: 281. The Agent of the Passive Voice is expressed by the Ablative with a or ah. But the Dative is used to express the Agent with the Future Passive Participle, 282. VOCABULARY {uga.y -a.e J F.l, flight. Os, Oris, N. 3, mouth; face, Gallicus,-a, -um, Gallic. countenance. homo, hominis, M. 3, man. (The pars, partis, partium, F. 3, part; ordinary word for a man mere- . party, side (in this sense ly as a human being, whereas either the Sing, or the PI. vir implies a compliment.) may be used), ignis, -is, -ium,M. 3, Jire. (Abl. terreO, terrere, terrui, territum. Sing. -1 or -e. ) 2, terrify, frighten. incendO, -cendere, -cendi, -cen- terror, terrOris, M. 3, terror, sumy3,setonflre. fright. invenio, -venire, -veni, -ventum, turris, -is, -ium, F. 3, tower. 4 (in + venio, come upon), vulnus, vulneris, N. 3 (cf. vul- find, discover ; invent. nerc), wound. 110 Exercises 283. READING MATTER (Girl and Braggart Soldier) ' 1. Proelium ex villae meae turri spectabo. Sed tu Romanae an Gallicae eris partis? (The boy) Ego Gallicae gentis er5. Nam Galli barbari atque ferl sunt, et magnam gladiis suis faci- unt caedem hominum. (The girl) Turn tibi Gallicum insigne in galea gerendum est. Ubi exemplar invenies? (The boy) Marei pater multa insignia in bello eepit. Ex his exemplaria sumemus. Ego etiam imaginem animalis alieuius feri in scuto me5 pingam. Haec enim hostis terrore eomplebit. (The girl) Sed Gallorum mos est etiam ora atque corpora sua in terrorem ^ hostium pingere. Id tii facturus es ? (The boy) Cred5. (The girl) Matrem certe et fratres parv5s sqr5resque terrebis, sed militem terrebis nullum. Nee magnus erit numerus. vulnerum tu5rum. Finis erit virtutis tuae, cum pugna incipiet. Tum te territus fuga servabis, neque ante noctem fugere desistes. 2. (A father) Veri milites saepe igni pugnant. Haec pugna vobis sine igni pugnanda est. Silvae non sunt incendendae. 284. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (One mother to another) Have you heard the talk of this fierce boy? 2. He wishes to be of the barbarian side; for he has a real Gallic helmet. 3. (Second mother) Where did he find it? (Ans.) Some man gave it to him. 4. And he is going to paint his face and body for^ the terror of his schoolmates. 5. How beautiful he will be! We shall watch him from the tower of our villa. 6. (First speaker) If anybody attacks him, he will run- away in-a-f right. ^ 7. He will receive his wounds in flight. 8. (A father) There will be great danger from^ fire; for if the woods are-set -on-fire, our villas will-be-set-on-fire too. (Another father) Fires are not to be made by these boys. 1 "For the terror of " = "to frighten." 3 Say " terrified." 2 Use in as above. * Use a or ab. Consonani-Stem Adjectives 111 LESSON XL ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION 285. Like Nouns, Adjectives of the Third Declension are divided into two classes, those with Consonant Stems, and those with i-Stems. The i-Stems are by far the more numerous. CONSONANT-STEM ADJECTIVES 286. Comparative^ Adjectives, and a very few Adjec- tives of One Ending in the Nominative Singular are of the Consonant-Stem Declension. These are declined precisely like Consonant-Stem Nouns. Comparative Adjective Adjective of One Ending certior, surer vetus, old Stem certiOr- veter- M. and F. N. M. and F. N. Sing. Nom. certior certius vetus vetus Gen, certioris certioris veteris veteris Dat. certior! certior! veter! veter! Ace, certiorem certius veterem vetus Voc. certior certius vetus vetus Abl. certiore certiore vetere vetere PI Nom certiores certiora veteres Vetera • Gen. certiorum certiorum veterum veterum Dat. certioribus certioribus veteribus veteribus Ace. certiores certiora veteres Vetera Voc. certiores certiora • veteres Vetera Abl. certioribus certioribus veteribus veteribus 1 Adjectives express qualities in three degrees, called Positive, Compara- tive, and Superlative; thus sweety sweeter, sweetest. A Positive Adjective simply expresses the presence of the quality in a person or thing ; the Com- parative expresses its presence in a higher degree than in some other person or thing, and the Superlative expresses its presence in the highest degree. The same holds correspondingly for Adverbs. 112 Dative of Possession 287. 1. All Comparative Adjectives are declined like certior. Decline now melior, better, maior, greater, minor, less, validior, stronger. 2. Vetus, old, is the only Consonant-Stem Adjective of one end- ing to be used in this book.^ Remember, then, that except Com- paratives, and vetus, all Third-Declension Adjectives in this book are i-Stems. THE DATIVE OP POSSESSION 288. Specimen Sentence: Mihi multi amici sunt, for me there are many friends. a. The Dative here was originally the Dative of the Person Con- cerned, and has been translated as such above. But to say, " for me there are many friends," amounts to saying, "I have many friends," and this has come to be the regular meaning of such a combination. Hence: 289. PossessioJi may be expressed by the Dative with the verb sum, or other verbs implying existence. a. Of course, the same idea may be expressed by habeO, as we have often seen. Thus we may say: either multi amici mihi sunt ) ^ , ^ . , ,^. .... - [ I have many friends. or multOs amicOs habeO ) 290. VOCABULARY SiihletaiySiejM.l, athlete. maior, maius, greater, bigger. certior, -ius, surer, trustier. Compar. of magnus, grrea^, 6^gr. Compar.ofcertusy sure, trusty. minor, minus, smaller, less. dux, ducis, M. 3 (cf.dacO), leader, Compar. of parvus, small. guide. melior, melius, better. Compar. dedo, dedere, dedidi, deditum, 3 of bonus, good. (de+do, give away), give up; nemo, Dat. nemini. Ace. nemi- with reflexive pronoun, give nem (Gen. and Abl. supplied oneself up (to), devote oneself by nGllius and nQllo), M. 3, no (to); surrender. one, nobody. exemplum, -T, N. 2, example, oculus, -I, M. 2, eye. precedent. vaXi^ior ^ -ins ^ stronger. Compar. labor, labOris, M. 3, labor, work. of validus, strong. Lucius, -1, M. 2, Lucius, a name. vetus, -us, old; old-fashioned. 1 It is the only one in Caesar's story of the Gallic War, I-IV. Exe7xises 113 291. READING MATTER 1. Marcus certe nobis alter ^ ex regibus eligendus est. Nemo enini melior est discipulus, nem5 athleta melior. Nem5 se maiore cum diligentia liidis dedidit, nemd labori. Nemini validius est ingenium, nemini corpus validius. Niillius exemplum umquam melius fuit. Certiorem ducem n5n inveniemus. Quae- cumque imperaverit, ea milites eius facient. Eius nomen ipsum alteras partis terrebit. 2. (One of the opposition) Nullus in cuiusquam n5mine terror est. Tii Marco propter diligentiam eius faves. Ego veteres mores eius non amo. Lucio faveo. Is nihil nisi ludos colit. 3. (An anxious father) Haec consilia me terrent. Hi feri milites Gallic! et Roman! vulnera in ora^ aut oculos dabunt et accipient. Etiam ignes facient, quibus silvae incendentur. (Ans.) TQ, video, filio tuo times. Is autem in proelio se fugae dabit. Vel minus erit periculum, s! pugnam longe ex turr! spectabit. 292. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Lucius ought (say "is") to be chosen by us. 2. He loves games. He will devote himself to this war. 3. No- one will lead us with greater interest. 4. He has (use sum for practice) less diligence than Mark (has), but no one has a bigger or stronger body. 5. He really loves wounds. He doesn't fear for his face or eyes. Mark is too good. 7. He loves work and old- fashioned ways. He hurts us by his example. 8. If he is elected he will be a stern leader. 9. (Ans.) Wait a little (while). You will see. 10. Mark is even now the better athlete, and, on-account-of his ability, he will be the surer leader. 11. Yoii are filled with terror, because you do not wish to exercise your lazy body. 1 One (of the two). Notice that alter is here in the Predicate. 2 Ace, because the wounds go into the face. We say ^'in the face." 114 I-Stem Adjectives LESSON XLI I-STEM ADJECTIVES 293. I-Stem Adjectives are of Three Endijigs, Two Endings, or One Ending in the Nominative Singular. They are declined as follows: Of Three Endings Of Two Endings . acer, sharp for t is, ?)rat;e Stem acri- forti- M. F. N. M. and F. N. Sing. Nam. acer acris acre fortis forte Gen. acris acris acris fortis fortis Dat. acrl acri acri forti forti Ace. acrem acrem acre fortem forte Voc. acer acris acre fortis forte Abl. acri acri acri forti forti PI. Norn. acres acres acria fortes fortia Gen. acrium acrium acrium fortium fortium Dat. acribus acribus acribus fortibus fortibus Ace. acris or -es acris or -es acria fortis or -es fortia Voc. acres acres acria fortes fortia Abl acribus acribus acribus fortibus fortibus Of One Ending: duplex, double Stem di iiplici- M. and F. N. Sing.Nom, , duplex duplex Gen. duplicis duplicis Dat. duplici duplii I Ace. duplicem duplex Voc. duplex duplex Abl. duplici duplici PL Nom. , duplices duplicia Gen. duplicium duplicium Dat. duplicibus duplicibus Ace. duplicis or-es duplicia Voc. duplices duplicia Abl. duplicibus duplicibus Dative of the Person Judging 115 a. I-Stem Adjectives always have -I in the Ablative Singular. 6. Notice that those of Three Endings and those of Two differ practically only in the Nominative-Vocative Singular Feminine. Thus acer puer, a spirited boy, acris puella, a spirited girl, but fortis puer, a brave boy, fortis puella, a brave girl. DATIVE OP THE PERSON JUDGING 294. Specimen Sentence: Mihi Marcus athleta melior est, to me, Mark is the better athlete. a. The Dative here practically expresses the idea of the person in whose eyes, to whose judgment, the statement made is true. This became a regular power of the case, and we may accordingly lay down the rule that : 295. The Dative is used to denote the Person In Whose Judgme7it, or For Whom, the statement holds good. a. So often with videor (Passive of video), meaning seem: Marcus mihi melior esse videtur quam Ltlcius, Mark seems to me to be better than Lucius. b. Notice that the Predicate Adjective melior goes back finally (through esse and videtur) to Marcus, and of course agrees with it. 296. VOCABULARY acer, acris, acre, sharp, fierce. latus, -eris, N. 3, side; lung. alacer, -cris, -ere, eager. • maximus, -a, -um, Superl. of aptus, -a, -um, op^, ^^^ed,^^. magnus, greatest, largest, certamen, -inis, N. 3, contest. biggest; (in a family) oldest. certo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, con- maxime. Adv., in the largest de- tend, strive. gree, very greatly, exceedingly. civitas, -atis, -atium (some- omnis, -e, all, the whole; every, times civitatum), P. 3, state. any. cOnsuetQdo, -inis, P. 3, custom. omninO, Adv., in all, at all. duplex, duplex. Gen. duplicis, parum, Adv. (cf. parvus), little, twofold, double; ambiguous. too little. facilis,-e (cf. facio, do; do-able, prOmptus, -a, -um, ready (in i. e.), easy. sense of ready to do a thing). facile, easily (Adv. for facilis). statim, Adv., immediately, at fortis, forte, strong, brave. once. intrO, -are, -avl, -atum, 1, enter, videor (Passive of video), seem. 116 ^ Exercises 297. READING MATTER (The Too- Athletic Girl) 1. Soror Luci maxima turbae puellarum minorum imperat, nee quisquam certior aut melior dux est. Nunc maxime cupit gladio et scuto pugnare inter pueros. Fort is f rater est, soror non minus fortis. Animus eius ad^ bellum gerendum alacer^ ac promptus est. AcrTs habet oculos, latera^ bona. Multis athletis corpora non maiora aut validiora sunt. Multos ea * nostrum, si pugnabit, facile vincet. Sed ex consuetiidine vetere huius civitatis pugnae puellis omnino non pugnandae sunt. Puer acer mihi placet, puella nimis acris parum placet. Malum exemplum erit, haec^ si certamen intra verit. Quid tu sentis? 2. (Ans.) Mea sententia duplex est. Non probo; sed, si ilia pugnatura est, ego earundem partium esse desidero. Omnes enim ei hostes sese statim dedent, quia nemo cupiet cum puella certare. Itaque ilia sine omni labore vincet. 3. Proelia mihi puellis apta esse non videntur; sed facilis alteras partis manet victoria, haec^ si puella arma sUmpserit. 298. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Your words are ambiguous. 2. Certainly girls seem to you to be little fitted for* contests to-be-carried -on with boys. 3. Why don't you say so at -once? 4. This girl is exceedingly eager, and-not less brave and ready. 5. But many girls have^ sharp eyes, strong bodies, good lungs, and brave minds. 6. If all the oldest sisters of our friends enter the contest, the boys will not contend. 7. In that case,^ an easy victory easily awaits this girl. 8. But where will the sport be for the boys? 9. To me, this game seems not at-all fit for girls. 10. Accord- ing-to^ the custom of this state, other and smaller things are to-be-done by them. 1 Eager for war to be waged^ i.e., ^ Use ad as above. eager for waging war. ^ Use sum for practice. 2 Sides here clearly = lungs, ^ Say ' ' then. ' ' 3Note the emphasis. 7 Say ''from" as above. Present Active Participle 117 LESSON XLII THE PRESENT ACTIVE PARTICIPLE 299. The Present Active Participle is formed in the Nominative by adding -tis to the Present Stem. Thus : CONJ. 300. I II III IV am&ns monens tegens capiens audiens loving warning covering taking hearing DECLENSION OP THE PRESENT ACTIVE PAR- TICIPLE amans, loving Stems amant- in Sing. monent- in Sing. amanti- in PI. monenti- in PI. M. and F. N. M. and F. N. Sing. Nam . amans amans monens monens Gen. amantis amantis monentis monentis Dat. amanti amanti monenti monenti Ace. amantem amans monentem monens Voc. amans amans monens monens Abl. amante(or-i) amante(or-I PL Nom. amantes amantia Gen. amantium amantium Dat. amantibus amantibus Ace. amantis or -es amantia Voc. amantes amantia Abl. amantibus amantibus a. Present Participles are Mixed Stems (Abl. Sing, -e); but when used as Adjectives, they are i-Stems (Abl. Smg. -T). monen te (or -I) monente {or -I) monentes monentia monentium monentium monentibus monentibus monentis or-es monentia monentes monentia monentibus monentibus ABLATIVE WITH pro AND prae 301. Pro, originally forth [from), or in front [from)., and prae, in front [from)., take an Ablative of Separation. The meaning slightly changes, so that we should define pro and prae as meaning simply in front of (much like ante); but the case-usaofe remains fixed. 118 Gerundive THE GERUNDIVE 302. Specimen Example (from last Reading Matter) : Alacer ad bellum gerendum, eager for ivar to-be-waged. This clearly suggests, eager for WAGING war. a. In other words, what was originally merely a Future Passive Participle comes to be felt as the leading word in its phrase, and to seem very like a verbal noun (cf. WAGING in the translation above). When the form has reached this power, it is called the Gerundive. We may then state the usage as follows : 303. The Gerundive is the Future Passive Participle after it has gained the power of conveying the Leading Idea in its phrase. a. Notice that the Gerundive, although conveying the leading idea in its phrase, is still grammatically dependent. Thus, in the example above, bellum, not gerendum, depends upon ad, and geren- dum agrees with bellum. 304. VOCABULARY administro, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, pra.e, in front of. Prep., taking administer, manage. Abl. ars,artis, artium, P. 3, ar^ sA;i7Z. praecedo, -cedere, -cessi, -ces- castra, -Orum, N. PI. 2, camp. sum, 3 (prae -1- cedo, go in (Used only in PI.) front), precede. commode. Adv., conveniently, praesum,-esse,-fui,irreg. (prae+ prQperly, sum, be in front), he in com.- cotidie, Adv., daily, every day. mand over, be present. Parti- inermis, -e (in, not + arma, ciple praesens, being present^ arms), unarmed. as Adj., present. mllitaris, -e, military. Ars mill- prO, in front of. Prep., taking taris, art of roar, tactics. Abl. neglegO, -legere, -lexi, -lectum, Pnblius, -i, M. 2, a name. 3, neglect, pass by, disregard. teneO, tenere, tenui, tentum, 2, nOscO, nOscere, nOvI, nOtum, 3, hold. get acquainted with, come to pertineO, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum, know, learn. 2 (per + teneO, hold through oppidum, -I, N. 2, town. to), reach (to); pertain (to). Exercises 119 306. READING MATTER (Two Ways of Electioneering) 1. Servius hodie omnTs ad certamen vocavit ! Gladium et scutum praa se gerens,^ pro oppido processit cum acri multi- tudine amicorum, alacrium et ad omnia facienda promptorum. Ipse praesens ^ vidi. Praecedebat maxima turba puerorum par- vorum inermium, Servium propter eius studium laudantium. Hie lis fortis hom5 videbatur. Mihi non fortis sed neglegens^ et temerarius est. Latera autem eius certe bona sunt. 2. Marcus autem et Publius, Marci amicus, n5n statim certare cupiunt, sed milites cotidie spectant, qui, castra ante oppidum tenentes, gladiis ex robore factis pugnantes se exer- cent, omniaque quae ad bellum commode gerendum pertinent discunt. Servius maxime cupit rex eligi. Parum autem aptus est ad nos ducendos. Facile eligentur Marcus et Lucius. 3. (Second speaker) Servius ex consuetudine sua certamen nunc statim intrare cupit; omnia enim ei facilia videntur. Marcus autem omnia desiderat noscere. Itaque hie mox paratus erit ad bella administranda. Ars enim militaris duplex est. Bonus dux et gladi5 pugnat et consilio. 306. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Mark and Publius, studying the art of -war, are watching the soldiers every-day when they exercise in-front-of the camp. 2. I myself am often present^ and see them. 3. They are ex- ceedingly eager to * learn everything that pertains to managing a war properly. 4. Servius, neglecting everything, according to his custom, desires to enter the contest at once. 5. Nothing holds him. 6. So today he proceeded in-front-of the town, dis- playing his sword and shield. 7. The greatest mob of little boys, fierce but unarmed, preceded (him). 8. On account of his zeal and strong (say "good") lungs, many favor him. 1 Bearing in front of himself, displaying. ^ Neglecting, = careless. 2 Being present saw,= was present and saw. ■* Use alacer ad, as above. 120 Ablative Absolute LESSON XLIII THE ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE 307. Specimen Sentences: Md.rcO imperante, omnia bene administrantur, with Mark com- manding, everything is managed well. M3,rcO duce, omnia bene administrantur, with Mark as leader (or Mark being leader), everything is managed well. M3.rcO praesente, omnia bene administrantur, with Mark present (or Mark being present), everything is managed ivell. Hoc facto, puerl discesserunt, with this done (or this having been done), the boys departed. a. The Ablative is here used like the "Nominative Absolute" in English, in a loose connection with the rest of the sentence; and it is accordingly called the Ablative Absolute (i. e., free Ablative). As you see, it expresses the existing Situation, the State of Affairs. b. The second word in each case forms a kind of Predicate for the first. Thus in our first example, Mark com,mands; in the sec- ond, he is leader; in the third, he is present; in the fourth, the thing had been done. We may accordingly describe the construction as follows: 308. An Ablative Noun or Pronoun, with a Predicate word in the same case, may be used in loose connection with the rest of the sentence} a. The Ablative Absolute may be translated in a variety of ways,— by an English Nominative Absolute, by a ifJzY/t-phrase, or by a Clause introduced by when, since, although, or if. Thus: iwith this done this having been done when this had been done, etc. 1 In origin, the construction is simply a Sociative Ablative, precisely like the English construction in "with this done," 'Svith Mark as leader," etc. The English Nominative Absolute is itself probably an old Sociative con- struction from which the case-ending has been lost, so that what is left seems to be a Nominative. Reflexive and Deponent Verbs 121 PERFECT TENSES WITH THE MEANING OP THE PRESENT, ETC. 309. In several verbs the tenses of completed action have come to express a present, past, or future state. Thus nOvi, originally I have become acquainted with (from nOscO, I become acquainted with) practically means / know. Similarly, nOveram means / knew, and nOverO, / shall know. 310. A few verbs have wholly lost the forms made from the Present stem and are confined to the Perfect system. Thus memini, I remember (originally I have called to mind). Such verbs are called Defective, because they lack many forms. MIDDLE, OR REFLEXIVE, VERBS ' 311. Middle, or Reflexive, Verbs are those which express an act as done by the subject to or for himself. The terminations are the same as those of the Passive. Thus to express the idea "I exercise (myself)," one may use either the Active exerceO with an Object m6 (me exerceO), or the Reflexive exerceor. DEPONENT VERBS 312. A number of verbs which originally were reflexive have come to be practically Active in meaning. Thus reverter, I return^ from re-, back, and vertor, I turn inyself; vescor, / eat, originally I feed myself y from vescO, feed. But in many verbs we can no longer trace the rise of the use of the Passive form. These verbs are called Deponents, because they have "laid aside" their Active forms. We may then say that: 313. Deponents are verbs with Passive Form but Act- * ive Meaning. 314. The Principal Parts are of course those of the Passive. Thus: Conjugation I Vagor, vagari, vagatus sum, roam, wander about. II Vereor, vereri, veritus sum, fear, respect. Ill Sequor, sequi, secQtus sum, follow. IV Orior, oriri, ortus sum, rise, arise. 315. Transitive Deponents have the four Participles, all but the Future Passive being ordinarily of Active meaning. Thus: ver ens, fearing veritus, having feared veritvirus , about to fear verendus, to be feared 122 Exercise 316. VOCABULARY (Add the Deponent Verbs in 314.) altus, -a, -um, high, lofty. pons, pontis, -ium, M. 3, bridge. contineO, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum, regio, -Onis, F. 3, region. 2 (con — |-teneO, hold together), reverter, revert! (Infin.), reverti hold in, hem in, keep. (Perf.), reversum, 3, return, decertO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 (de+ Not Deponent in Perf. certo, strive it out), settle the rQs, rQris, N. 3, country. war, fight it out. undique. Adv., on all sides. dum, Conj., while. urbs, -is, -ium, F. 3, city. flQmen,-inis, N. 3, Hver. uterque, utraque, utrumque (de- interim. Adv., meanwhile. clined like uter, 130, + -que), mOns, mentis, -ium, M. 3, rnoun- each (of two), either. tain. vallis, -is, -ium, F. 3, valley. memim,-isse. Defect., remember. versor, -ari, -atus sum, 1 (cf. natcira, -ae, F. 1, nature. . verto), keep turning, hover; ob, against, before; on account be busy, be engaged. of^ (like propter). Prep, of vescor, vesci, , 3, feed one- Space-Eelation, taking Ace. self with, live on ; eat. Takes pOnO, pOnere, posui, positum, 3, Ablative (originally expressing place. the idea of Means). 317. READING MATTER (Mark Writes to a Friend) Tu de pugna quae mox pugnabitur iam audivisti. Sed civi- tatem nostram n5n novisti. Ego tibi dicam naturam loci. Oppidum in quo habito positum est in valle, quae monti- bus altis undique continetur. Ho» montis bene n5vi; nam in iis fere cotidie, dum exerceor, vagor. Tu forte, haec cum leges, mihi vereberis; sed nihil in ea regione umquam vidi periculdsi. Ad hos montis explorand5s heri iterum process!, aliquot par- vis amicis praecedentibus aut sequentibus. Fliimen parvum seciitus sum, quod ab his montibus oritur.^ In^ eo flumine ali- 1 Prepositions originally expressed space-relations. But they all gained figurative forces in addition, as we have now seen in the case of ab, de, ex, cum, in; ad, contra, ob, post, propter, etc. 2 0rior, though of the 4:th Oonj., has several 3d Oonj. forms. ^ On, over. Exercise 123 quot sunt pontes. Ex utraque parte^ loca castris idonea inveni. Hoe facto -^ reverti. Dum revertor, .Servium vidi, qui ex oppido processerat, turba amicorum sequente. Omnis eondisci- pulos ad certamen vocabat. Ego, quia inermis eram, me eontinui, eumque neglexi. Itaque is sibi melior miles visus est. Haec omnia, cum decertabimus, mihi ob oculos versabuntur.^ Bene meminero. Interim Servius sibi magnopere placet, atque gloria vescitur. Sed ea quae ad artem militarem pertinent non novit. Veni ab ista tua urbe ad nostram pugnam videndam.* Tii rus amas, et tibi nunc otium est. 1 From each side. In English, ON each side. 2 Ablative Absolute (''with this done," "this being done," "after doing this"). 3 Will hover before the eyes for me {= before m,y eyes), ^ Notice that ad with the Gerundive can express the idea of Purpose. SUBIACO IN THE SABINE MOUNTAINS, EAST OF ROME 124 Third Declension^ Summary LESSON XLIV SUMMARY OF POINTS OF DIFFICULTY IN THE THIRD DECLENSION ' • {For Be vie IV and Reference) 318. We have now finished the Third Declension (ex- cept for a few irregular words), and may sum up its points of difficulty. 319. Nouns of the Third Declension are divided into Consonant Stems, i-Stems, and Mixed Stems, with charac- teristics as follows: 1. Consonant Stems have the Ablative Singular in -e, the Geni- tive Plural in -um, and the Accusative Plural in -es for the Mascu- line-Feminine, and -a for the Neuter. 2. Most Masculine or Feminine i-Stems, together with Mixed Stems, are declined like Consonant Stems in the Singular and i-Stems in the Plural (that is, with the Genitive in -ium and the Accusative in -Is or -es). 3. But a few Masculine or Feminine i-Stems preserve the charac- teristic marks of the i-Declension in the Singular also, showing it in an Accusative -im (sometimes alongside of -em) or an Ablative -r (sometimes alongside of -e), or in both cases. 4. Neuter i-Stems have -i in the Ablative Singular, and an -i- in every Plural termination. 320. Adjectives and Participles of the Third Declen- sion are likewise divided into Consonant Stems, i-Stems, and Mixed Stems, with characteristics as follows: 1. Only Comparatives and a few Adjectives of one ending are Consonant Stems. 2. All other Third-Declension Adjectives are i-Stems, and these have the -i in the Ablative Singular f-I), as well as in the regular places in the Plural. 1-Stems and Mixed-Stems. — Genders 125 3. Present Participles are Mixed Stems (Abl. Sing, -e); but when used as Adjectives, they are i-Stems (Abl. Sing. -i). Thus: Marco praesente, with Mark present (Mark being-present), but in praesenti negotio, in the present business. HELPS IN DISTINGUISHING i-STEMS OR MIXED STEMS 321. The only sure general sign is -ium in the Genitive Plural. But a few other signs will be helpful, namely: 322. I-Stems are: 1. All Neuters in -e, -al, or -ar, with long penult in the Genitive. Thus animal, animalis. 2. Masculine or Feminine Nouns in -is or -es, with the same number of syllables in the Genitive.^ Thus finis, Genitive finis, caedes. Genitive caedis. 323. Mixed Stems are: 1. Nouns in -ns, -rs, -rx, -Ix, and some in -x. Thus mOns, pars, nox. 2. Most monosyllables in -ps or -bs. Thus urbs. GENDERS IN THE T^HIRD DECLENSION 324. A few general statements may be made about Third-Declension Genders: 1. Neuter are: a. Nouns in -e, -al, -ar. Thus animal. b. Most nouns in -en. Thus nomen. c. Most s-Stems. Thus corpus, corporis. 2. Masculine are: a. Most Mute Stems.^ Thus pes, pedis. b. Most Stems in 1 and r. Thus victor, victOris. (But most with short o in the Genitive are Neuter. Thus rObur, rOboris.) c. N-Stems in -0, -Onis {not in -iO, -iOnis). Thus sermO, sermOnis. iBut miles, Genitive militis {longer here) is a Consonant Stem. 2 The Mutes are consonants making complete stops: c, k, q, g, t, d, p, b. 126 Exercise ♦ 3. Feminine are: a. All Nouns in -io, -iOnis, and most of those in -0, -inis. Thus regiO, regiOnis, and multittldo, multitodinis . h. Nouns in -tas, -tatis, or -tGs, -tGtis. Thus civitas, civitatis, virtQs, virtGtis. c. Nouns in -es with the same number of syllables in the Geni- tive, the majority of those in -is, and most of the Mixed Stems. Thus caedes, turris, nox. (But several Mixed Stems in -ns are Masculine, as mOns, pOns.) 326. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION (The Friend's Answer to Mark's Letter) I. I have been in your state. 2. I know well the nature of the place where you are going to fight-it-out. 3. I know the little valley in which your town is placed. 4. I know the lofty mountains by which that valley is hemmed in on every side. 5. I have seen the little bridges, while ^ following-up the river to the place where ^ it rises. 6. I have wandered in the forest on^ either side. 7. I ijemember it* all well. 8. It is a beautiful region. 9. When everything is ready, with^ the kings elected and the rules of war established, I shall come to^ see the battle. 10. Meanwhile I shall myself study the art of war. II. You will be chosen one of the kings. 12. The^ boy who lives on glory will never be chosen. 13. Under ^ your leader- ship, your side will conquer. On account of your judgment, I do not fear. 14. Whfen^ this is done, I shall return at once to the city. 15. I love the country, but I am busy in school now. 1 Say " while I follow-up." The Present is regular in this use. 2 The Roman would say unde, ''^from which," "whence." 3 Look again at p. 123, footnote 1. ^Be more definite in the Latin (say these things). fi Use the Ablative Absolute construction. 6 Read 302 again. Say " to the battle to-be-seen." 7 How do you translate such a " the " as this? ^Say "(with) you leading." What construction? 9 Say "(With) this done," "this having been done." Irregular Nouns and Adjectives 127 326. LESSON XLV IRREGULAR NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES DECLENSION OF vis, force, P. Norti. Sing, vis Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl \'is (rare) VI (rare) vim vis vi PI. vires " virium " viribus " viris or -es " vires " viribus 327. DECLENSION OP plQs, more, AND complnres, a good many M. and F. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. N. plus pluris plus pltire M. and F. N. SINGULAR Nom. plures pltira Gen. plurium plurium Dat. pluribus Ace. pluris or -es plura Voc. PLURAL Nom. compltires Gen. complurium pluribus Dat. compluribus compluria or -a complurium compluribus Ace. compluris or -es compluria or -a Voc. t Abl. pluribus pluribus Abl. compluribus compluribus ^ a. In the Singular, plQs is used only as a neuter Substantive, often with a Genitive of the Whole. I 328. DECLENSION OP duo, two (SIMILARLY ambo, both) Nom. duo duae duo Gen. duorum duarum duorum Dat. duobus duabus duobus Ace. duos or duo duas duo Voc. Abl. duobus duabus duobus 128 Two Accusatives, — Measure of Difference TWO ACCUSATIVES 329. Specimen Sentences: Marcum regem faciemus, we shall make Mark king. Marcum regem eligemus, we shall elect Mark (as) king. Marcus omnls discipulOs alacrls ad bellum faciet, Mark will make all the schoolboys eager for the war. a. In the above examples, there are, in each sentence, two Accu- satives, a Direct Object (thus Marcum), and another word (thus regem) standing in a Predicate relation to the verb. b. In the first two examples, the Predicate Accusative is a Noun (regem); in the last one, it is an Adjective (alacrls). c. Several other verbs have similar power. We may then say that : 330. Verbs of Making, Choosing, Having, Regarding, Calling, or Showing may take, in addition to a Direct Objects, a Predicate Accusative, This may he either a Noun or an Adjective. a. In the Passive construction, the Direct Object of the Active Voice becomes the Subject, and the Predicate Accusative becomes a Predicative Nominative. Thus : Marcus rex eligetur, Mark ivill be chosen king. TWO NEW CONSTRUCTIONS ARISING OUT OP THE ABLATIVE OF MEANS ABLATIVE OF THE MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE 331. Specimen Sentences: LQcius capite altior est quam Cornelius, Lucius is taller by a head than Cornelius. Ltlcius multo altior est quam Cornelius, Lucius is taller by much { = much taller) than Cornelius, a. In these sentences, the Ablative is a rough expression of Means, — that is, it expresses that by u'hich the things compared differ (just as English "by" does in "taller by a head"). But that by which the things compired differ is the measure of the difference. We may accordingly lay down the rule that: 332. The Measure of Difference is expressed by the Ablative. Ablative with utor, fruor, fungor, potior, and vescor 129 ABLATIVE WITH Otor, fruor, fungor, potior, AND vescor 333. Several deponent verbs take an Ablative which was originally one of Means. a. Thus, as we saw in 312 and 316, vescor originally meant feed oneself with, the thing with which the feeding was done being expressed by the Ablative of Means. But the practical meaning of feed oneself with is eat. Hence in time the Ablative must have seenied to express simply the Direct Object. The same is true oliruor, projit-oneself -by, i. e., enjoy; potior, make oneself powerful by, i. e., gain possession of, get; Gtor, help oneself with, i. e., use; fungor, busy oneself with, i. e., perform. Hence we may lay down the rule that: 334. Utor, fruor, fungor, potior, and vescor take their Object in the Ablative. Scnto et gladio Gtor, I use a shield and a sword, Hostes oppido potiuntur, the enemy get-possession-of the town, a. Utor may take a Second Ablative, in Predicate relation. Marco amicO ntor, I use Mark (as) a friend. 335. VOCABULARY ambo (Declension 328), both. officium,-iy'N. 2, office, duty. commode (as before), conveni- ops, opis, F. 3, help; in PI., re- ently, properly, Compar. com- sources, means. modius,Superl.commodissime. pins (327), Gen. plGris, more. complQres (327), a good many. Compar. of multum, much. diligens, -ens. Gen. -entis, dili- potens,-ens. Gen. potentis, hav- gent, Compar. dlligentior, ing power, influential. Com- Superl. diligentissimus. par. potentior, Superl. poten- dlligenter , Adv., diligently , Com- tissimus. par. dlligentius, Superl. dlli- potestas, -atis, F. 3, power, con- gentissime. trol, opportunity. duo (328), ttvo. potior, potiri, potitus sum, 4, fruor,frui,fractus sum, 3, pro^^ gain possession-of, get. (Cf. by, enjoy. potens.) fungor, fungi, functus sum, 3, regnum,-iy'N. 2, kingship, king- perform, discharge. dom. obsto, obstare, obstiti, obstatG- Citor, Dtr, nsus sum, 3, use. rus,l (ob+sto, stand against), vis, vis, F. ^, force, violence; PL oppose, prevent. Takes Dat. vlreSyVlviumj strength. 130 Exercises 336. READING MATTER 1. Marcus ex consuetudine sua totam regionem dlligenter ^ iam exploravit. Vallem, montis, flumen, pontis, silvas novit. Haec omnia omnes nunc explorabimus. Marco duce commode ^ utemur. Nemo n5s commodius^ aut diligentius ducet. 2. Qui vestrumregn5potientur? (Ans.) Marcum regem faci- emus. Nem5 ei obstabit. (First speaker) Nonne duo ex v5bis apti sunt ad vos ducendos? N5nne Liicius quoque potens est? (Ans.) Ita; ambo potentes sunt; sed Marcus non solum potentior^ est quam Lucius, sed omnium est potentissimus. Ille plus virium corporis quam Lucius non habet, sed in omnibus officiis servan- dis multo diligentior est. Itaque compliires potestati fa vent Liici, fere omnes Marci. Huius consilio et ope saepe iam fructi sumus. Hie nunc, omnibus regni officiis diligentissime^ fungens, nos diligentissimos^ faciet milites. 337. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Do you know this region? 2. (Ans.) Yes. I have explored it with Mark, whom I used as a guide. 3. (First speaker) So you have profited-by Mark's diligence. 4. (Ans.) Yes, he knows everything; no one discharges his duties more diligently or more properly. 5. He even makes all his friends more diligent. No one has more (of ) power among the boys. 6. Who are the two most influential boys of the school? 7. (Ans.) Mark and Lucius are (by) much the most influential. 8. A-good-many oppose Mark, but more favor him. 9. Lucius will also get a kingship. 10. Both are strong in body. But Mark will conquer Lucius; for he will fight not only with strength of body but with judgment. 11. He will use all his resources. 1 Notice how Adverbs are made, — from Adjectives of the First and Second Declension, in -e (thus certus, certe; aeger, aegre), from Adjectiyes of the Third Declension, in -ter (diligens, dlligenter). 2 Notice also how you compare, — Adjectives in -ior, -issimus, and Adverbs in -ius, -issime. ^Most diligently = very diligently. The Superlative often means very. Suhjunctive Mood 131 LESSON XLVI • . THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 338. Beside the Indicative and Imperative Moods, which we have been using above, Latin has another Mood, called the Subjunctive. These three make up what are called the Finite Moods. 339. THE PKESENT SUBJUNCTIVE CONJ. I II III IV ACTIVE ^ 1st Sing . amem moneam tegam capiam audiam 2d " ames moneas tegas capias audias 3d " amet moneat tegat capiat audiat 1st PL am^mus moneamus tegamus capiarnus audiamus 2d " ametis moneatis tegatis capiatis audiatis 3d " ament moneant tegant capiant audiant PASSIVE 1st Sing . amer monear tegar capiar audiar 2d " ameris monearis tegaris capiaris audiaris or -re or -re or -re or -re or -re 3d " ametur moneatur tegatur capiatur audiatur 1st PL amemur moneamur tegamur capiamur audiamur 2d " amemini moneamini tegamini capiamini audiaminl 3d " amentur moneantur tegantur . capiantur audiantur a. In the formation of the Present Subjunctive, the four Conju- gations divide after the first, the mood-sign being -e- in the First Conjugation, and -a- in the other three (with shortening in the regu- lar places; 100, 2). b. The Passive corresponds to the Active, just as in the Indica- tive. 340. The Present Subjunctive of the Irregular Verb sum is: ' 1st Sing, sim 1st PL simus 2d " SIS 2d " sitis 3d " sit 3d » sint 132 Origin and Meanings of the Latin Subjunctive ORIGIN AND MEANINGS OP THE LATIN SUBJUNCTIVE 341. The Latin Subjunctive is a mixed mood, just as the Latin Ablative is a mixed case. It is made up of the remains of tioo moods which originally were entirely dis- tinct, in form as well as in meaning: an old Subjunctive, and an old Optative. The Latin Mood takes its name from the first. a. Just as the Ablative Case has inherited the powers of the cases that compose it, though bearing the name of only one of them, BO the Subjunctive Mood has inherited the powers of the moods that compose it, though bearing the name of only one of them. 342. The Latin Subjunctive has a variety of forces. We will begin with those that were inherited from the old Subjunctive. SUBJUNCTIVE USES INHERITED FROM THE OLD SUBJUNCTIVE 343. The old Subjunctive probably originally expressed Will, and later gained the power of expressing Anticipa- tion. Both forces will be seen in the following: Priusquam pugnemus, art! militaristudeamus, before we fight (Anti- cipation), let us study the art of war (Will). a. The fighting (pugnemus) is here expressed as merely antici- pated, expected, looked forward to, counted upon; while the study- ing (studeamus) is expressed as wanted, willed, urged, intended. b. In place of saying Subjunctive of Will and Subjunctive of Anticipation, it is convenient to use the shorter phrases Volitive Subjunctive (compare the English word "volition"), and Anticipa- tory Subjunctive (compare English "anticipate" and "anticipation"). c. Notice that the Volitive Subjunctive is close to the Impera- tive in meaning, the Anticipatory close to the Future Indicative. d. The Volitive Subjunctive is generally best translated by the emphatic auxiliary will of the first person and shall of the second and third (/ will, you shall, he shall), or by let {let me, let him, etc.), or by is to, are to, etc. All these express that which the speaker WANTS, and means to have. — The Anticipatory Subjunctive is best tranlated by shall in all persons. Exercise 133 344. The negative for the Volitive Subjunctive is ne; for the Anticipatory, non. 345. VOCABULARY cautus, -a, -um, cautious. potius, Adv., preferably, rather. cOnfirmO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, prior, prius, Compar. Adj., for- strengtJien, establish. mer, first; in front. decern, indeclinable Adj., ten. prius, Compar. Adv. (cf. prior), deliberO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, de- before, first, sooner. liberate. prius quam, or priusquam, Conj., iungO, iungere, iGnxI, itinctum, 3, sooner than, before. join. suadeO,suadere,suasi, suasum,2, adiungo, -iungere, -iQnxT, -idnc- advise, urge. Takes Dat., be- tum, 3 (ad + iungo), yom (^o). cause originally meant make ne. Adv., not. agreeable to. (Cf. suavis.) optimus, -a, -um, best. Superl. suavis, -e, siceet, agreeable. Adj. for bonus, good. Word of Quality, taking Dat. optime, in the best way, best, tres, tria. Gen. triumfthree. Superl. Adv. for bene y well. tertius, -a, -um, third. 346. READING MATTER (Different boys want different things and propose them) Nunc reges duos eligamus. (Second boy) Quos eligamus?^ (First boy) Marcus certe prior eligetur. Turn Liicium eligamus. (A third) Priusquam reges omnin5 eligamus, leges pugnae con- stituamus. Id nunc commodius faciemus. (A fourth) Minime. Id nunc ne faciamus. Eligamus potius reges duos. His duo- bus tertium adiungamus puerum, tribusque sic electis omnem demus potestatem legum constituendarum. Potentissimi et optimT elect! erunt. Illi cauti erunt, atque optime omnia admi- nistrabunt. (A fifth) Ego aliter sentid. Ambobus, qui regnis potiti erunt, potestas suavis erit. Officio suo fruentur, non fun- gentur. Vires suas iungent, atque omnibus opibus Utentur ad illam potestatem confirmandam. Etiam plus cupient habere potestatis. Hoc ego vobis potius suadeo: Ex tot a schola pueros eligamus decem, qui^ leges dent. Nam decem diligentius deli- berabunt quam aut duo aut complures. 1 Whom shall we choose^ ^ . . . . who shall give us rules (Purpose). 134 Volitive and Anticipatory Subjunctive Uses LESSON XLVII VARIOUS USES THAT MAY BE MADE OF THE SUB- JUNCTIVE OF WILL AND THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF ANTICIPATION 347. The feeling of Will may of coarse exist in different degrees of intensity, varying from a mere proposal or suggestion/ as in "how let us choose two kings," with which our last Reading Matter began, to a strong urgency, or insistency, ending even in an absolute command or prohibition (i. e., a command not to do a thing). 348. In using the Volitive Subjunctive in any of these ways you are telling somebody what you want [declaring your will). 349. But you may of course, on the other hand, ask yourself what you want, or ask somebody else what he wants. That is, you may deliberate with yourself, or you may ask another for instructions. Such questions may best be called Questions of the Will, or Volitive Questions,^ a. Thus you may say to yourself, quid faciam? what shall I do 9 or you may ask another person, quid faciam? what shall I do 9 b. The negative for all questions in Latin, volitive as well as any other, is nOn. Thus quid faciam, quid nOn faciam? what shall I do, what shall I not do 9 350. Thus far, we have been speaking of independent sentences. But we may also, of course, do these same things in dependent clauses, — telling what we or some- body else wants, or asking what we or somebody else wants. - 1 Often called " Exhortation." 20ften called "Deliberative Questions." Volitive and Anticipatory Subjunctive Uses 135 351. Thus, as we have already seen in. the last Reading Matter, we can put the act wanted into a dependent clause introduced by a relative, and can thereby express our Plan or Purpose, as in pueros eligamus decern, qui leges dent let us select ten hoys, who shall give us rules (i. e., for the purpose of giving us rules). And we shall presently find in other Reading Matter that we may do the same thing by a clause introduced by ut, in which way, by which, as in arti militari studeamus, ut commode pugnemus, let us study the art of war, by which (i. e., by which studying) let us fight properly (in English, in order that we may fight properly, or that we may fight properly).^ Or, if a comparative is used, we may express our purpose by a clause introduced by quo (Ablative, expressing both Means and the Measure of Difference), as in arti militari studeamus, quo commodius pugnemus, let us study the art of war, by which means {^and by which amount) let us fight more properly (in English, in order that we may fight more properly)} Or, if we don't want the act to take place, we may express our purpose by a clause, introduced by ne, not, as in arti militari studeamus, ne male pugnemus, let us study the art of war, let us not fight badly (in English,^ that we may not fight badly, or lest we fight badly). a. Notice that ut a ad ne make a pair of natural opposites, ut introducing an act wanted, and ne an act not wanted. 352. Or, again, we may attach the act wanted or not wanted (1) to another verb, which in itself expresses or suggests wanting, as in suadeo exspectetis (or ut exspec- 1 The English expression has arisen from a different mood-feeling from that of the Latin. But of course, in our final translating, it is the English "way that we must use. 136 Volitive and Anticipatory Subjunctive Uses tetis)/ I advise that you wait, or suadeo ne exspectetis, I advise that you do not wait {=1 advise you not to wait) ; or (2) to a verb that expresses not wanting (a verb of hindrance, prevention, or check). In the latter case we must of course use a negative. The negatives found are ne, quominus,^ and quin,^ that not. ObstO ne pugnetis, / oppose your fighting (originally, / oppose: you shall not fight). ObstO quOminus pugnetis, I oppose your fighting (originally, lop- pose: by which you shall fight the less). NOn obstO quin pugnetis, I do not oppose your fighting.* a. This last connective, quIn, is used only after a negative, ex- pressed or implied (here nOn). 363. Or, again, we may attach the expression of what we want or do not want to a verb or phrase of fear or anxiety, as in timeo ut^ cauti sint, I am afraid: I want them to he cautious (in English, I am afraid that they MAY NOT be cautious), or timeo ne vulnerentur, I am afraid: I do not want them to be wounded (in English, I am afraid they MAY be wounded ) . Such clauses are conveniently called Clauses of Fear or Anxiety. a. These last clauses, after verbs of Wanting, Hindering, Fearing and the like, 352, 353, since they stand in a sort of case-relation to the main verb, are called Substantive Clauses. 1 There is no connective in this use originally. None was needed for the positive idea. The unnecessary ut has come in, as the natural opposite of ne (351, a), from the purpose clause. In this use, we may call it formal ut. In most constructions of the kind shown, formal ut may be used or not, as the speaker pleases. We will indicate this by parentheses. 2Quominus = quo + minus, and meant originally by which the less. ^Quin originally meant by which .... not. It is made up of a relative adverb qui, by which, and -ne, not (with loss of the final e). ^Non here modifies the whole combination of the main verb. and dependent clause. The meaning is I do NOT — oppose-by- which-you-shall-not-fight. ^This ut is likewise purely /orma?, having come in as the opposite of ne. VolUive and Anticipatory Subjunctive Uses 137 354. The dependent clauses which we have been look- ing at tell what is wanted or not wanted. But we may of course also hang a question of what is wanted or not wanted upon some verb expressing or suggesting the idea of a question, as in deliberamus quos eligamus, we are deliberating whom we shall choose (or, whom to choose), 356. You will soon get to recognize easily, as you read, what these various Subjunctive sentences or clauses do in particular. The important thing, for the present, is to feel the volitive force common to them all (the idea of wariting something, expecting something), and to dis- tinguish it from the anticipatory force (the force of merely looking forward to something) , which you will find in other examples. It will help you, too, if you will con- stantly keep in mind that, in dependent clauses, the posi- tive conjunction ut is used if the act is wanted (or quo, if a comparative follows), and one of the negative con- junctions, ne, quominus, or quin, if the act is not wanted. 356. The Anticipatory Subjunctive has not so large a range as the Volitive. It had ceased to be used in inde- pendent sentences (and also in most dependent clauses), before the Romans began to write books, being driven out by the Future Indicative. It remained, however, in steady use in a few kinds of dependent clauses, especially those introduced by conjunctions meaning ''before" or "until," which naturally (if the act has not yet taken place) suggest the idea of looking forward (Anticipation). 357;^^ ^he next two Lessons are for practice in getting the feeling of the Volitive Subjunctive and the Anticipatory Subjunctive as you read your Latin, and of recognizing the corresponding ideas where they occur in your English exercises. 138 Exercise LESSON XLVIII 358. VOCABULARY celeriter, Adv., swiftly, quickly. pervenio, -venire, -veni, -ven- dum (same word as before ),t<;/ii7e; turn, 4 (per + venio, come until. through), arrive. fortasse, Adv., perhaps. pilum, -I, N. 2, javelin. A heavy iter, itineris, N. 3, way, road; missile, about six feet long. journey ; march. proficlscor, proficlsci, profectus mattlrus, -a, -um, ripe. sum, 3 (make off), set- out, de- mattlrO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, part. make ripe; hasten, make qu(^ y by ichich,in order that. Con]. haste. ' used with Comparatives, melius. Adv., better; cf. melior. ut or utl, Conj., in which way, mora, -ae, F. 1, delay. as; whereby, in order that; ne. Adv., not; as Conj., that not, that; so that. lest. saltern. Adv., at least. 369. READING MATTER (Remember that every Subjunctive you meet for the present will express either Will or Anticipation.) 1. (A boy says) Pugnemus priusquam patres nostri hunc ludum prohibeant. Saltern mox pugnemus, ut bellum celeriter conficia- tur. Quid obstat? Hac mora defatigatus sum. (Another says) Minime. Cum pugnaverimus, bellum, ita ut tu dieis,^ confec- tum erit. At hie ludus optimus inter omnis ludos est. Ego suade5 potius exspeetemus^ dum^ consilia nostra matura sint. Id optimum est. Saltem exspectemus dum amicus Marci per- veniat; qui ex urbe maturat proficisci, atque etiam nunc fortasse in itinere est. Interim Marco et Lucio potestas detur legum constituen- darum. Haec iis sua vis erit, atque ambo diligentissime et mt with Indicative means as. Ita ut dicis means, so as you say = just as you say. 2 / advise rather let us wait, = I advise that we wait. 3 Wait until .... What follows must be an act anticipated. Exercises 139 optime deliberabunt. Vel his du5bus tertius adiungatur. Hi dum deliberabunt, nos cotidie exerceamur, quo^ commodius armis iitamur, utque vires nostrae confirmentur. Sic multo melius pugnabimus. 2. (A boy, to his father) Nonniilli pueri pila compliiria fecerunt. (The father) Ego suadeo, pilis ne^ xitamini. Peri- culosa sunt. 360. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (A boy reports to the teacher) Some of the boys are tired- out with the delay, and wish to finish the war quickly. 2. Isn't this best? What prevents? 3. (Ans.) I advise that they at least wait until Mark's friend shall arrive. 4. Perhaps he has already set out from the city and is on the way. 5. Meanwhile let them drilP every -day, in -order- that * they may (say "shall") fight more properly, and that* they may (say ''shall") get^ into condition.^ 6. This will be much better. 7. (A father says) I give^ you the same advice. The plans for (say "of") the fight are not mature. 8. Let two boys be elected, who shall ^ make-haste to establish the rules. 9. Or let these two join a third boy to themselves, to assist ^ them. 10. ShalP the boys ^ use javelins? 11. (Ans.) I advise them not to use javelins. ^^ ^ In order' that .... the more properly. Why is quo used? ^ I advise donH use . . . . , / advise you not to use .... 3 Use the reflexive voice. ^ Purpose. Do you want quo or ut here? What decides the question? sSay "establish (cdnfirmo) their strength." 6 Say "I advise the same (thing) to you." 7 You see that this also expresses purpose. Notice carefully that purpose closely associated with a person will be expressed by a qui-clause, with an act by a qu5- or ut-clause (as in the English sentence 5 above). 8 This expresses the purpose of appointing the third boy. Say therefore *'who shall assist." You must never use the Jjaiin Infinitive to express purpose. ^Called a " Deliberative Question." It is, as you see, merely a Question of the Will (it asks what the person spoken to wants done) ; and this name, or the name Volitive Question^ would be simpler and better. 10 Say "I advise them they shall not use javelins." 140 Exercise LESSON XLIX 361. VOCABULARY caedO,caedere,cecidi, caesum,3, opto, -are, -avl, -atum, 1, wish, cutjkill. (Cf.caedes, slaughter.) hope. curro, currere, cucurri, cursum, Oro, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, beg, en- 3, run. treat. dOnec, Conj., until (same mean- periculosior, more dangerous. ing as dum). Compar. of pericuIOsus, dan- frOns, frontis, -ium, F. 3, fore- gerous. head ; front. prOnDntio, -are, -avl, -atum, 1 (pro ^vsiViSy^^^ heavy ; serious. -^nxmtid), proclaim. ' Insequor, -sequT, -secGtus sum, puto, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, think. 3 (in + sequor, follow against), quin, Conj., by which not, that follow up, pursue. not, mitto, mittere, misi, missum, 3, quOminus, Conj., by which the send. less, that not. ntlntius, -i, M. 2, messenger; mes- secundum, along. Prep., taking sage. (Cf. nOntiO.) , Ace. of Space-Relation. 362. READING MATTER (The Anxious Father) 1. Timed ne puerT, temere pugnantes, vulnerentur. Aliud quoque timeo. Nonne aliqui, secundum flumen current es aut alios insequentes, iji id cadent? Te oro, me adiuva. Pronunti- emus ne omnmd pugnent pueri. (Ans.) Minime. Tu, puto, filio tuo times. Nihil obstat quin' tu eum a pugna prohibeas. Meum n5n prohibebo. 2. Pueri nunc deliberant, pilisne''^ iitantur. Hoc si facient, timeo ne in ora vulnerentur. Gladii etiam ex r5bore facti facile f routes aut ocul5s aut ora caedent. (Another father) De gladiis n5n timeo; nam pueri hi^ capita non petent. Sed certe eis imperemus pilis^ ne utantur; idqure statim pronuntiemus. Pila 1 Why does quin have to be used here? 2 Pilisne = pilis plus interrogative -ne. Translate by whether. 8 What is the force of the position? Exercises 141 gravia sunt, ac multo periculosi5ra quam gladii. Optimum est (ut) ad pueros sine mora nuntium mittamus, qui haec niititiet. (First speaker) Timed ut hie nuntius iis plaeeat. 3. Nondum, cred5, Marci amicus ille ab urbe profectus est. Nos exspectemus donee (or dum) perveniat? (Ans.) Ab urbe, credo, iam proficiscJ maturayit, moxque ad nos perveniet. (First speaker) Id opto. 363. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Sextus will be a bad soldier. He cries for nothing.^ 2. (Another) His father fears that Sextus' forehead or eyes or mouth may be cut. 3. He also fears that, pursuing others swiftly and rashly along the river, he may fall into it. 4. He • will order him^ not to fight. 5. (First speaker) I hope so. I beg you, advise him to do^ this. 6. Many fathers oppose our using javelins. 7. I'm afraid that they may send a messenger to announce* this. 8. (Another boy) I myself am afraid that in the fight we may not be cautious. 9. Javelins are heavy, and will easily hurt faces. 10. It is best that we shall not use them. 11. (Another) / think so, too. Let us proclaim this at once. 12. What^ prevents us from doing it? 1 Say " without any cause." 2 Say " that he fight not." 3 Of course you must use a Conjunction and Finite Verb, not an Infinitive. 4 Evidently Purpose. Do you want connective qui, ut, or quo, and why? 5 Implies "nothing prevents." What Conjunction, then? GLADIATORS' HELMETS FROM POMPEII 142 Uses Inherited from the Old Optative LESSON L THE SUBJUNCTIVE (Continued) USES INHERITED FROM THE OLD OPTATIVE 364. We have learned to recognize the two forces inher- ' ited by the Latin Subjunctive from the old Subjunctive, and are ready to learn those that were inherited from the old Optative. . 365. The Optative probably expressed Wish or Desire originally, and gained at a later time the other powers which we find it to possess, namely those of Obligation or Propri- ety, Natural Likelihood, Possibility, and Mental Certainty in an imagined case. a. Utinam, would that, is often added to the expression of a Wish. 366. Examples of the Leading Forces inherited from the Old Optative: Utinam filii mei bene studeant, would that my sons would study well! (Wish). A legibus nOn discedamus, we should not depart from the rules (ObUgation or Propriety). Cnr nOn facile vincamus? why shouldn^t we win easily 9 i. e., we are likely to win easily (Natural Likelihood). Pueros cotldie se exercentes videas, you can see the boys drilling every day (Possibility). Marco duce certe vincamus, with Mark as leader we should cer- tainly win (Mental Ce»tainty). a. These forces may appear in dependent clauses as well. Thus: NQlla causa est cOr a legibus discedamus, there is no reason why we shoidd depart from the rules. (Dependent Clause of Obligation or Propriety. This is simply a longer way of saying we should not depart from the rules.) Nulla causa est car nOn facile vincamus, there is no reason why we shouldn't win easily. (Dependent Clause of Natural Likelihood. This is only a longer way of saying loe are likely to win easily.) ^Inherited Forces of the Latin Subjunctive 143 367. We may now put together, in the form of a table, what we have learned about the leading powers which the mixed mood called the Subjunctive inherited from the two originally separate moods of which it is made up. And we may conveniently add a working name for each power, as follows: 368. The Latin Subjunctive inherited the power of expressing: I. Will {Volitive Subjunctive) II. Anticipation {Anticipatory Subjunctive) III. V^i^h. {Optative^ Subjunctive) IV. Obligation or Propriety {Subjunctive of Obligation or Propriety) V. Natural Likelihood {Subjunctive of Natural Likelihood) VI. Possibility {Potential Subjunctive) VII. Mental Certainty {Subjunctive of Mental Certainty) 'ft. In the independent sentence, the mood-feeling is always that of the speaker himself. In the dependent clause, it may be either that of the speaker or that of the subject (or agent) of the main act. Thus in pugnemus, let us fight, it is J, the speaker, that want the fighting to be done; but in dux imperat ut pugnemus, the general orders that we fight, it is the general that wants it. b. The negative for Will and Wish is ne, for all other mood-forces nOn. But remember that for all questions the negative is nOn. c. We may now define the moods as expressions of Attitudes of Mind, i.e., of ways of looking at an act. Thus (Subjunctive) the wanting attitude, the expecting attitude, the wishing attitude, etc. The Indicative looks at an act as a fact. 1 From opto, meaning I wish. It is from this particular use of the mood that the old Optative receives its name. 2 From Latin potens, having power. The Potential Subjunctive, like the corresponding English "can" or "may" with the Infinitive, expresses what one can do, or may do. 144 Fourth Declension THE FOURTH DECLENSION 369. In the Fourth Declension the Stem ends in -u- casus, chance, M. corntl, horn, N. Stem casu- cornu- Endings M. and F. N. Sing. Nom. casus corntl -us -G Gen. casQs cornGs -Gs -GS Dat casul, -G cornn -Ul, -G -G Ace, casum cornQ -um -G Voc. casus cornG -us -G Abl cast! cornG -G -G PI Nom. casGs cornua -Gs -ua Gen. casuum cornuum -uum -uum Dat. casibus cornibus -ibus -ibus Ace. casGs cornua -GS -ua Voc. casQs cornua -Gs -ua Abl casibus cornibus -ibus -ibus 370. Nouns of the Fourth Declension in -us are mostly Masculine. Those in -u are Neuter. a. Masculines and Feminines are declined alike in this Declension. 371. VOCABULARY appello, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, ad- exercitus, -Gs, M. 4, army. dress ; call, name. armO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, arm. casus, -Gs, M. 4, chance; acci- dent; case. cOnatus, -Gs, M. 4, attempt, un- dertaking. cOnor, -arl, -atus sum, 1, attempt, undertake. cornG, -Gs, N. 4, horn; wing (of an army). cupide. Adv., eagerly. decipio, -cipere, -cepi^ -ceptum, 3 (de + capio, catch away), catch, deceive. gravor, -ari, -atus sum, 1 (take heavily; cf. gravis), he an- noyed. laetor, -ari, -atus sum, 1 (cf. laetus), be delighted, rejoice. praeter, Prep., beside, along, past; besides. Takes Ace. of Space -Relation. primus, -a, -um, first. Superl. of prior, former. primo. Adv., at first. qui? Adv., how^ strepitus, -Gs, M. 4, noise. utinam, would that. Exercises 145 372. READING MATTER (Be ready to state the mood-feeling of each Indicative or Subjunctive in this dialogue. You will find every kind that you have learned, except one.) Quis^ est ille cornuum sonus? (Another boy, impatient) Qui ego sciam? Hie, non ibi, sum. (First speaker) Cur sic graveris ? Quid conaris ? Pugnam cupide petis ? (A third boy, entering) Quid vos f acitis ? Non obsto quin pugnetis, sed suade5 exspectetis d5nec verum bellum incipiat. (First speaker) Tiine eornua audivisti? (The newcomer) Audivi, et casu his oculis causam strepitus vidi. Servius amicos suos armatos iterum praeter oppidum ducit. Primus inter nos esse cupit. Videas magnum exercitum puer5rum p^jvorum, qui eum sequuntur,^ (Ans.) Utinam hoc conatii desistat. Ad eum niintiuni mittamus, qui eum decipiat, regem appellans. (The newcomer) Liidus optimus hie sit; sed timeo ne caedat nuntium Servius. Nam primo, omnia temere credens, laetetur, postea autem maxime gravetur. (Ans.) Niillum sit periculum. Ego nuntius ero. 373. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. O great king, — for so you have been named by your school- mates, — would-that I might be chosen among your first soldiers! 2. (Servius) I have been chosen king? I am greatly delighted. 3. But how have you heard this? 4. (Ans.) It isn't true! You are prepared to believe anything^ good^ about yourself.. 5. You would never be chosen king. 6. Why do you so eagerly attempt it? 7. Now are you still going to lead your army past the town, wearying everybody with the noise of horns, or shall you desist from your undertaking? 8. (Servius) I am awfully^ mad.* 9. (The tease) What are you going to do (about it)? Are you going to kill me? 10. (Ans.) You deceived me at first. Now, however, I see. 11. But I shall do nothing. 12. Sextus happens to be* sick now, and is not going to fight. 13. (Ans.) Why shouldnH he be sick? He nev^ exercises. 1 Agrees in gender with its noun. s = " am greatly annoyed." 2 Say * • all things good." ^ = " by chance is." 146 Exercise LESSON LI 374. VOCABULARY cOgitQ,-are,-avi, -atum, 1, think, necesse, N., indecl., necessity. In plan. predicate, = necessary. deinceps, Adv., in succession, one opus, operis, N. 3, work, task. after the other. pauci, -ae, -a, feid, a few {only), for sitsin f Ady., perhaps. Always persuadeO,-suadere,-suasI,-sua- with the Subjunctive of Possi- sum, 2 (per + suadeO, thor- bility. oughly advise), persuade. genus, generis, N. 3, race, kin; ratio, -Onis,F.3(thinking; hence) kind, class. theory, science; manner. gratia, -ae, F. 1 (cf. gratus\ singuli, -ae, -a, single, one at a popularity, favor. time ; one each. hortpr, -arr, -atns sum, 1, exhort, vix. Adv., scarcely, hardly. urge. voluntas, -atis, F. 3, will. 376. READING MATTER (Electioneering) 1. Nos cdgitas cornuum strepitii terrere? Armaeius generis^ non periculosa sunt. Gladiis, n5n cornibus, nos pugnabimus. ^ 2. (Two plotters. One says) Cur non uterque^ exercitus com- ' plureseligatduces, qui singuli deinceps imperent? (Ans.) Bene. Forsitan nos ipsi eligamur. Pauci tarn idonei sunt. 3. Apud omnes primo Marcus magna in gratia erat. Nunc compliires ei diligentissime obstant, quia optant ut ipsi eligantur. 4. (A boy comes up to electioneer) Opt5 ut Marcus eligatur.^ Ego saltem laeter. Sed aliquis dicat : " Is etiam nunc de studiis, n5n de operibus belli faciendis cogitat. Cur ei faveamus? Alium vel complures eligamus." Id si aliquis dicet, vix quicquam contra eum dicamus. (Ans.) Marcus n5n de studiis sed de bell5 nunc cogitat. Belli studet ratidni. Proelia magnorum ducum 1 Arms belonging to this class. Possessive Genitive, but suggests the idea of Description (arms of this kind, SUCH arms). ^ Each (of the two). » Substantive Clause of Wish. Exercises 147 legit. ^ Nem5 praeter me id vidit, sed omnes facile videant. Praeter Marcum et Lueium, niilli sunt a quibus exercitus nostri com- mode ducantur.- Necesse est ut ii eligantur,^ quamquam tua obstat voluntas. Te hortor, Marco ne obstes. 376. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION I. (Two friends of Mark discuss the situation.^ This* is a great task. What is Mark planning? 2. Why should^ he read (up) old battles? Let us urge him to desist. 3. (Ans.) He is studying the theory of war most-diligently, in order that he may conquer the enemy by brains.^ 4. But let us not say this to anybody. 5. W^e are all friends to-one-another "^ now; but we are about-to fight. 6. In battles it is necessary to deceive an enemy. 7. (Second speaker) What do you think about the plan of choosing several leaders, who shall command one-at-a-time in succession? 8. (Ans.) At first that boy persuaded me, but now! do not approve. 9. Several leaders could ^hardly lead well. 10. And few of us are fit. II. I hope that Lucius may not choose us by chance among his soldiers. 12. I should hate^ to be of his army. 13. (Ans.) That is not his will. 14. We are not of that kind. 15. We are not in great favor with ^^ him. ^ Is reading {up). ^ By whom .... can. What is the idea of the Subjunctive? 3 Substantive Volitive Clause. Comes from a use with two separate sen- tences : " let these be chosen : it is necessary." . -^Must of course agree with the predicate. s" Should" here expresses Obligation or Propriety. How may you express this idea in Latin? 6 Say "by judgment." 7 Say "among ourselves." 8 How may you express the "can" or "could" idea in Latin? And what do we call a Subjunctive with this idea? ^ = "be annoyed." loUseapud. 148 Imperfect Subjunctive 377. LESSON LIT THE SUBJUNCTIVE (Continued) THE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE CONJUGAT ION I II III IV ACTIVE 1st Sing. amarem monerem tegerem caperem audirem 2d ** amares moneres tegeres caperes audlres 3d " amaret moneret tegeret caperet audiret 1st PI amaremus moneremus tegeremus caperemus audiremus 2d " amaretis moneretis tegeretis caperetis audlretis 3d ** amarent monerent tegerent caperent audirent PASSIVE 1st Sing. amarer monerer tegerer caperer audlrer 2d '* amareris monereris tegereris capereris audireris or -re or -re or -re or -re or -re 3d amaretur moneretur tegeretur caperetur audlretur 1st PL amaremur moneremur tegeremur caperemur audlremur 2d " amaremini moneremini tegeremini caperemini audlremini 3d " amarentur monerentur tegerentur caperentur audirentui a. Notice that you can form the First Person Singular of the Imper- fect Subjunctive Active by adding -m to the Present Infinitive Active. 378. The Imperfect Subjunctive of sum is : 1st Sing. essem 1st PL essemus 2d " esses 2d " essetis 3d " esset 3d " essent TENSE-MEANING OP THE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE 379. The Imperfect Subjunctive is a tense of the past, just as the Present Subjunctive is a tense of the present or future. In what follows, compare the examples corre- sponding in number. You will find that the only differ- ence lies in the point of view. The Point of View in Tenses 149 a. The same Subjunctive tenses are used for acts seen with ref- erence to a future point of view as for acts seen with reference to the present point of view, just as in English. (Thus we use shall both in *' we are waiting until James shall come,^' and in *' we shall wait until James shall come"). Hence in our examples we shall not need to give separate illustrations for the future point of view. 380. Past Point of View 1. Quid facerem? What was I to do 9 (then). 2. Tris elegimus puerOs, qui le- ges cOnstituerent, we chose three boys, who were to (or should) establish the rules, (Past Purpose.) 3. Timebam ne complQres pueri vulnerarentur, I was afraid that a number of boys might be wounded. (Past Fear.) 4. Vos monui ne pills ntereminl, I advised you { that you should not use,=) not to use Javelins. (Past Will.) 5. Exspectabamus dum amicus pervenlret, we were waiting until our friend should ar- rive. (Past Anticipation.) 6. Optabam ut Marcus vinceret, I hoped that Mark might con- quer. (Past Wish.) 7. Magnam videres caedem, you might (then) see a great slaughter. (Past Possibility.) Present Point of View 1. Quid faciam? What am I to do 9 (now, or in the future). 2. TrIs eligimus puerOs, qui le- ges cOnstituant, we are choos- ing three boys, who are to (or shall) establish the rules. (Present Purpose.) 3. TimeO ne complQres puerl vulnerentur, I am afraid that a number of boys may be wounded. (Present Fear.) 4. Vos moneO ne pills ntaminl, I advise you (that you shall not use,^)not to use javelins. (Present Will.) 5. Exspectamus dum amicus per- veniat, we are waiting until our friend shall arrive. (Pres- ent Anticipation.) 6. OptO ut Marcus vincat, I hope that Mark may conquer. (Present Wish.) 7. Magnam videas caedem, you may (now) see a great slaugh- ter. (Present Possibility.) a. The English auxiliaries show precisely the same shift to express the shift of the point of view. Thus (from the above): Past Point of View Present Point of View was to am to should shall might may 150 The Past-Future Subjunctive 381. We have learned that there are two ways, in de- pendent clauses, of expressing the idea of futurity from the present point of view, namely the Future Indicative and. the Anticipatory Subjunctive (according to the con- struction needed). On the other hand, there is only one •possible way of expressing futurity to the jpasi in a corre- sponding clause, namely the Anticipatory Subjunctive. The Indicative has no single form that can convey the idea. 382. When, then, you want to express any past-future idea by a single verb in a dependent clause, you must use the Anticipatory Subjunctive, even if, from the present point of view, the Future Indicative would be used. Thus: Past Point of View Present Point of View Annus aderat cum ex schol3. Annus adest cum ex scholS. ex- excederemus (Anticipatory cedemus (Future Indicative), Subjunctive), the year was at the year is at hand in which hand in which we should leave we shall leave the school, the school. a. Remember now that, in your reading, an Imperfect Subjunctive of Anticipation from a past point of view (i. e., a Past-^utvre Sub- junctive) may correspond to either a Present Subjunctive or a Future Indicative, from the present point of view. 383. VOCABULARY aliquantus, -a, -um, some. Neut. facilis, -e (as before), easy. Com- as Substantive = someiohat. par. facilior, Superl. facilli- cOnsequor, -sequi, -sectltus sum, mus.^ 3 (con + sequor), follow vig- difficilis, -e (dis-^ + facilis), diffl- orously, overtake; gain. cult. Compar.^difficilior, Su- facile. Adv. (as before), easily. perl, difficillimus. Compar. facilius. Superl. fa- quidemy Adv., indeed, at any i^ate. cillime.^ Ne . . . quidem, not even. 1 Follows facilis in its Comparison. See next note. 2 A special way of comparing, confined to a few Adjectives in -ills. spis- means asunder, apart, and then not (dis-facilis, not-easy). Exercises 151 384. READING MATTER 1. (Mark, to a supporter) Si electus ero, aliquanto maiorem nu- merum puerorum hostibus dabo. Victoria facilis erit. (Ans.) Utinam quidem vincas; et vincas forsitan. Sed magnopere timeo ne vincaris. NQlla saltern causa est cur conatuna tuum difficili5rem facias quam necesse est. Id quod nunc conari cogitas certe difficillimum ^ sit. Cur maiorem partem hostibus des ? (Mark) Quo maiorem exercitus meus consequatur gloriam.'^ 2. (Mark reports at home) Ego et Lucius reges elect! sumus. Lucid aliquanto maidrem numerum militum dedi. (His father) Cur idfecisti? Lucius te facillime vincet. Saltem nulla causa erat cur conatum tuum difficiliorem quam necesse erat faceres.^ (Mark) Id fe6i quo maiorem exercitus meus consequeretur^ gloriam. Vict5ria facillima erit. Lucius ne cautus quidem est. Cautum hostem vix ille vincat. Corporis modo* viribus ille pugnabit. 385. . MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (Lucius, to a lieutenant) Does Mark not even desire victory? 2. Why did he give me a much larger number of soldiers than was necessary? 3. (Ans.) He did this in order that he might gain somewhat greater glory. 4. He did not fear, indeed, that you would conquer him. 5. But there is no reason why you should not conquer. 6. Victory will be easy enough. 7. But it is very difficult (say "most difficult") to wait. 1 Very difficult. 2 What two words are emphasized by the order, and how? 3 Why is .the tense different from the corresponding one above? 4 Only, emphasizing the preceding word. 152 Genitive of Material,— Descriptive Genitive LESSON LIII THE GENITIVE OF MATERIAL OR COMPOSITION 386. Examples: Haec multitndo puerOrum, this multitude of hoys, Spatium pedum decern, a space of ten feet. a. The Genitive in such expressions has come down from an ori- ginal Genitive of the Whole. Thus, in our first example, out of hoys in general (the Whole), this multitude contains a Part. But the feeling naturally comes to be simply that of the Material of which the multitude is composed.^ We may then lay down the rule that: 387. Material or Composition may he expressed by a Genitive attached to a Noun. THE DESCRIPTIVE GENITIVE 388. Examples: 1.. Homo eius generis, a man of this class. 2. Homo magnae virtQtis, a man of great courage. 3. Spatium decem pedum, a space of ten feet. 4. Mnrus decem pedum, a wall of ten feet. a. We have already had eius generis (in 375), and have seen that, while it originally is a mere Possessive Genitive (thus, a man helong- ingAo this class), it practically amounts to a Description {a man of • this class, a man of this kind). Through this and similar phrases the Genitive comes to be thought of as having the power of descrihing, and it is then used in combinations in which it could not have been used originally, as in homo magnae virtntis (example 2). This is nothing but descriptive. 1 Cf. such expressions as "a cup of water," of which the original concep- tion was, *'a cup containing (not all the water in the world, but) some wafsr.^^ The word "some" here marks distinctly the conception of a part, — which, in general, we have lost out of our English speech. Descriptive Ablative 153 h. We have also had spatium pedum decern in 386, under the head of the Genitive of Composition. The original meaning was a space made up of feet, ten in number. But this likewise suggests Description according to size or measurement; and the case is then used descriptively in combinations in which it could not have been used originally, as in mtlrus decern pedum (example 4), which is nothing hut descriptive. c. You see, then, that a Genitive Noun with a modifier may be used to describe, expressing either the idea of the Kind (as in examples 1 and 2) or the idea of Measure (as in 3 and 4). But there is another case which is used in a similar way, and we will look at this before laying down our formal rule. THE DESCRIPTIVE ABLATIVE 389. Examples: • 1. Homo eOdem genere, a man from the same class. 2. Homo magnS. virtnte, a man with great courage. 3. Homo magnis oculls, a man with big eyes. 4. Homo bono in nOs animo, a man with kindly feeling toward us. 5. MagnO honOre apud nOs es, you are in great honor among us. a. Evidently these examples also describe, through the from, with, and in ideas.^ If the three cases making up the Latin Ablative had remained distinct, we should have had an Ablative of Descrip- tion, a Sociative of Description, and a Locative of Description. b. In these examples, we find again the idea of Kind, as in the Genitive (cf. magnae virtntis and magna virtnte). But we also find the ideas of Physical Characteristics, (in 3), of Mental State (in 4), and of Situation (in 5). The last two, though occurring frequently, are confined to a few phrases. We may now make our general statement for the descriptive use of the two cases, as follows : 390. 1. Kind or Measure may he expressed by the Genitive of a Noun accompanied by a Modifier. 2. Kind or Physical Characteristics may be expressed by the Ablative of a Noun accompanied by a Modifier; also, in a few phrases, Mental State or Situatioji. iThis is shown by the occasional actual occurrence of ex, cum, and in. 154 Two Principles in the Growth of Language 391. In tracing the history of these constructions, we have seen two important principles in the growth of language : 1. We have seen a case-use gain an entirely new force, through the chafice occurrence of that force in a particular set of phrases. This often happens. We may conveniently make ourselves a formula by which to refer hereafter to the process, — namely, x, x + y> y (where x is the original force, x + y the original one plus the new one, and y the new one, now used freely hy and for itself alone, in phrases where it could not have started).^ 2. We have also seen (both in 388 and in 389) that two or three different constructions may suggest the same new idea, and so all contribute to the same new construction, which is thus like a river made up of two or three distinct streams.^ Constructions thus arising may be called Constructions of Several Origins, or, more briefly. Composite Constructions. 392. VOCABULARY adgredior, adgredl, adgressus ' icidico, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 (cf. . sum, 3 (ad + gradior, go at), index), yitdge. attack. diindicO, -are,-avl, -atum, 1 (dis- contrOversia, -ae, F. 1, contro- +i^dicO, judge between), de- versy. cide {between). dolus, -1, M. 2, trick, stratagem. paulum, -T, N. 2, a Utile. index, indicis, M. 3,ytidgfe. post (same word as before, but indicium, -I, N. 2, judgment, used as Adv.), afterward, opinion. later. 393. READING MATTER 1. (A friend, to Mark) Cdnsilium cepistP ut dolo et ratione, non vi, vinceres. Ita saltern iudico; nam huius generis semper 1 This rise of new meanings in a construction is precisely like the familiar rise of new meanings in words, as we see it in our own language. Very few are confined to their original meaning. Often, too, the original meaning entirely disappears. Thus the word "villain" meant at first merely a "peasant" (person attached to a villa), and then, through the prejudice of the upper classes, a "peasant, who is naturally a base person," and thep merely a "base person." 2 It is mainly because of such practical coincidences of forces that the three cases that make up the Latin Ablative came to be thought of as one, ^Have taken up apian, have formed a plan. Exercises 155 fuistl. ludicium tuum non probo. Tu quidem magnae virtutis magnique consili es. Sed amlci Luci, quos tu non eliges, magnis sunt corporum viribus. (Mark) Omnia tibi paulo post dicam. Nunc autem pueris suadeamus ut indices eligant, qui, cum in proelio controversiae orientur, inter pugnantis diiudicent. 2. Marcus discipulis persuasit ut indices eligerent, qui, cum controversiae orirentur, inter pugnantis diiudicarent. 394. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (Lucius, to a friend) What is Mark planning ? 2. Will he, in the battle, yield to the larger number? 3. He does not seem to me to be of that kind. 4. He is a boy of great courage, and with great strength of body. 5. (Ans.) He has formed a plan, — so I judge at any rate, — to conquer us by theory. 6. We shall see a little later. 7. (Lucius) Why did he persuade us to elect judges to decide between the fighters? 8. Did he fear that, when the-battle- should-take-place, controversies would arise? 9. None (=no controversies) will arise. This is my judgment. 10. We shall attack him without stratagem, and easily conquer him by force. VIEW FROM PROBABLE SITE OF HORACE'S FARM Sabine Mountains, twelve miles above Tivoli 156 Fifth Declension LESSON LIV THE FIFTH DECLENSION 396. In the Fifth and last Declension, the Stem ends in -e-. dies, , day, M. and F. res, thing, F. Stem die- re- Endings Sing. Nom. dies res -es Qen. diel rei -el or -ei Dat. die! rel -ei or -ei Ace. diem rem -em Voe. dies res -es AM. die re -6 PI. Nom. dies res -es Gen. dierum rerum -erum Dat. diebus rebus -ebus Ace. dies res -es Voe. dies r6s * -es Abl diebus rebus -ebus a. Notice that an e-sound appears in every ending. b. In the Genitive and Dative Singular we find long e (e) after a vowel, but short e after a consonant. Thus diei, but rei. 396. Nouns of the Fifth Declension are Feminine, ex- cept dies J day, and meridies, midday. And dies is usually Feminin^e when meaning an appointed time, or time in general. THE INDEFINITE PRONOUN quis 397. Quis, the vaguest of the Indefinite Pronouns, means any one, some one, and is used chiefly with si, nisi, ne, and with Interrogative or Relative words. It always stands after one or more words of its clause. a. This indefinite quis is declined like the second part of ali-quis. See 207, and a. Thus ali-quis, ali-qua, ali-quod, etc., any, and ne quis, ne qua, ne quod, etc., lest any ... Ablative of the Time At or Within Which 157 ABLATIVE OF THE TIME AT OR WITHIN WHICH 398. Specimen Sentences: Gaius, Marcl amicus, tertio die perveniet, Gains, Mark's friend, ivill arrive (will come through) on the thii^d day. Tribus diebus perveniet, he will arrive in (within) three days. a. In the first example the Ablative tertio die evidently expresses the time at which Gaius will arrive, while in the second the Abla- tive tribus diebus expresses the time within which he will arrive. We may accordingly lay down the rule that: 399. The Time At or Within Which anything is or is done may be expressed by the Ablative, a. But once in a while prepositions are used. These are in, at or in, and cum, with. We may compare our own varying usage. Thus: "And in the dawn he bade them all farewell" ("Time when" expressed through the Locative idea). "And with the dawn he bade them all farewell" ("Time when" expressed through the Sociative idea). . b. This occasional use of the Prepositions in and cum shows us that the Latin Ablative of Time is of double origin, like a river made by two streams that have flowed together, — though it is probable that the Locative stream was larger than the Sociative, just as, in the corresponding English expressions of time, "in" or " at " is com- moner than " with." THE IMPERSONAL USE OF VERBS 400. Specimen Sentences: Din pugnatum est, (it was fought for a long time, — ) there was a long battle. Mihi nocetur, (it is being injured to me, =) I am being injured; a. These verbs, as you see, have no subject, and represent the mere action as such. They are accordingly called Impersonal. It is evident that any verb might be used in this way. Notice, too, that: 6. The Dative (mihi) of the Active is retained. We may then state the Roman usage as follows : - 158 Exercise 401. Any Verb may he used in the Third Singular Passive without a Subject, and is then called Impersonal. 402. Verbs governing a Dative in the Active are used ONL Y Impersonally in the Passive. The Dative remains . 403. VOCABULARY acies, -ei, F. 5, sharp edge; line of battle. adsuefacio, -facer e , -feci , -factum , 3, accustom. circum, around, around in. Prep., taking Ace, or Adv. circumveniO, -venire, -veni,-ven- tum, 4 (circum + venio, come around), surround. commtlnicO, -are,-avi, -atum, 1, communicate. convert©, -vertere, -verti, -ver- sum, 3 (con- + verto, turn thoroughly), turn about. dies, diei, M. and F. 5, day. divide, dlvidere, divisl, divTsum, 3, divide. extends, extendere, extendi, cx- tentum and extensum, 3 (ex + tendo), stretch out, extend. gradus, -ns, M. 4, step. InstruO, Instruere, instrOxi, in- strQctum, 3, draw up. OrdO, Ordinis, M. 3, order, rank. par, par. Gen. paris, equal, even. peritus, -a, -um, having experi- ence of , experienced in. Takes Objective Genitive. prOgredior, prOgredi, prOgres- sus sum, 3 (prO + gradior), go forward, advance. quis (qui). Indefinite Pronoun, ' any. (See 397, a). recipio, recipere, recepi, recep- tum, 3 (re + capio), take back. Me recipio, I return, I retreat. res, rei, F. 5, thing, affair, mat ter. Res militaris, warfare. Septimus, -a, -um, seventh. signum, -i, N. 2, sign, signal; standard. ConvertOsigna,fwrn the standards, wheel about. 404. READING MATTER (The preparations) Duo exercitus diem constituerunt, qua die^ in acie decertarent. Hie dies dictus est ex e5 die septimus. Interim Marcus su5s rel militari adsuefaciebat,^ ut, cum pugna- 1 Latin often repeats the Antecedent in the Relative Clause. 2 Was aceusto7ning=was trying to accustom. In this way the Imperfect gets the power of expressing Attempted Action. Exercises 159 retur,^ quaecumque necesse essent, haec statim facerent. CotT- die aciem instruebat,^ instructam*^ circum silvas ducebat. Turn exercitum in duos dividebat exercitus qui inter se* pugnarent. Milites alterius^ exercitus docebat pugnantis^ ordines servare, paribus gradibus^ progredT, aut fuga simulata se recipere, turn signis conversls cornibusque extentis alterum exercitum circum- venire, atque omnibus ex partibus eum adgredi. (Ques.) Nonne Lucium aliquis de eius consiliTs docebit? (Ans.) Prohibitum est ne quis consilia ducis sui cum alterd duce communicaret. 2. Timeo ne, cum controversiae orientur, difficile sit inter pugnantis diiudicare. (Ans.) Id indices, rei militaris periti, facile facient. (First speaker) Indices non omnia vident. 405. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Mark's army was now studying military theory. 2. Every- day he would-divide^ his (men) into two parties. 3. He would- draw-up each party in line-of -battle. 4. He was-trying-to-teach^ the soldiers to advance side-by-side,^^ or to retreat, keeping their ranks. 5. One party would-pretend flight, the other would-pur- sue; then, a little later, the former would- wheel-about and, with its wings extended, would-surround the other and attack it. 6. By (say "on'') the seventh day, when the-battle- will-be- fought,'^ Mark's soldiers will have been accustomed to all th6s^ matters, and will do at once whatever shall be necessary. 7. Are Lucius' soldiers experienced in these matters? 8. (Ans.) No one knows. 9. It has been forbidden that any- one shall communicate the plans of his army to (Latin with) the other army. 1 What kind of Subjunctive ? Of what kind is the next? 2 Every day was drawing up= every day would draw up. The Imperfect, as you see, comes to have the power of expressing Habitual Action. 3 Drawn up= when drawn up^ after drawing it up. 4 =wit.h each other. 8 Read footnote 2 again. ^ Of one army (of the two). 9 Read footnote 2, p. 158, again. ♦> With what agreeing? Be careful. lo gay " with equal steps." 7 With equal sfeps,=side by side. ^^ Use Impersonal Verb. 160 The Ordinary Expression of Place LESSON LV DECLENSION OF domus, F., house or home 406. Domus is declined in full according to the Fourth Declension, but lias also a number of forms of the Second Declension, Grenerally speaking, these Second Declen- sion forms are more common than the others. Sing. Nom. . domus PI Nom. domtls Gen. domGs or domt Gen. domuum or domOrum Dat domul or domO Dat. domibus Ace. domum ACG. domtls or domOs Voc. domus Voc. domtls . Abl. domU or domO Abl domibus THE ORDINARY EXPRESSION OF PLACE 407. As we have repeatedly seen in our reading, The idea of Place is regularly expressed as follows: 1. Place From Which by the Separative Ablative with ah j de, or ex. 2. Place To Which by the Accusative with ad or in. 3. Place In Which by the Locative Ablative with in. • Thus: . Ab urbe venit, he comes from the city. Ad urbem venit, he comes to the city. In urbe est, he is in the city. . 408. But a few classes of words were in such common use in the expression of these ideas that the preposition never came into regu- lar use with them (just as, in i^nglish, we say "go home," never "go to home"). These are: Names of Towns and Small Islands, the words for home and the country (domus and rtls), arid a few others. With these words the Place From Which is expressed by the bare Ablative, the Place To Which by the bare Accusative, and the Place In Which by the bare Locative. — Now in general the Locative case is mixed with the Ablative. But in the Singular of the First and Sec- ond Declensions the Locative has a separate case-form, whichhappens to end just like the Genitive. Hence the following usage: Flace From, To, or In Which 161 PLAGE CONSTRUCTIONS WITH NAMES OF TOWNS AND SMALL ISLANDS, AND WITH domus AND rGs 409. Special Constructions of the Place From Which, To Which, or In Which. 1. To express the Place From Which, names of Towns and Small Islands are put in the Ablative without a ' Preposition. Roma^ profectus est, he has set out from Home. Caprels^ profectus est, he has set out from Capri, a. Similarly domo, from home, rore, from the country. Domo venit, he has come from home. Rnre venit, he has come from the country. 2. To express the Place To Which, names of Towns and Small Islands are put in the Accusative without a Pre- position. Romam revertetur, he will return to Rome. Capreas revertetur, he will return to Capri, a. Similarly domum, home, and rOs, to the country. Domum revertetur, he will return home. ROs revertetur, he will return to the country. 3. To express the Place In Which, names of Towns and Small Islands are put in the Locative, — which in the Singular Number of the First or Second Declension is identical with the Genitive, and elsewhere with the Ablative. Amicus mens Romae est, my friend is in Rome. Amicu^ mens Corflni^ est, m.y friend is in Corfinium. Amicus mens Tibure* est, my friend is in Tivoli. Amicus mens Capreis est, my friend is in Capri, a. Similarly doml, at home, and rDrl or rQre, in the country. Amicus meus doml est, my friend is at home. Amicus meus rOri est, my friend is in the country. 1 From Nominative Roma. 3 From Nominative' Corfinium. 2 From Nominative Capreae (PL). *From Nominative Tibur. 162 Ablative of Me Point of View from Which LOCATIVE ABLATIVE WITH OR WITHOUT A PREPOSITION 410. With a number of words in very common use, the Place In Which (literal or figurative) may be expressed by the Ablative either with or without in. a. So for example with locO, parte, regiOne, cornQ [wing), and with Adjectives meaning middle or all. Thus: eO loco or in eO locO, in that place. . ea regiOne or in ea regiOne, in that region. tola Italia or tota in Italia, in all Italy, throughout Italy. ABLATIVE OP THE POINT OP VIEW FROM WHICH 411. The Romans often used the Ablative with ab or ex to express the Point of View From Which something is looked at (where our conception is that of the Place Where) . Hostes nOn a fronte adgrediemur, we shall not attack the enemy on the front (in Latin, from the front). Prope a mea domo habitat, he lives near my house (near, reckoned from my house). a. Among the commonest examples are a fronte, on the front , a tergO, on the rear, Si latere, on the side, ab or ex utraque parte, on either side, omnibus ex partibus, on all sides, etc. 412. VOCABULARY aestas, -atis, P. 3, summer. impetus, -Gs, M. 4 (cf. in and agmen, agminis, N. 3 (cf. ago, peto), attack. drive, lead), army (on a march). Italia, -ae, P. 1, Italy. ago, agere, egl, actum, 3, drive, Pompei (pronounce Pompei'-yi), lead; carry on, do; pass, -Orum, M. 2, Pompeu. spend (of time). primum. Adv. (the first thing), Capreae, -arum, P. 1, Capri. first, in the first place. Corflnium, -I, N. 2, Corfinium. ROma, -ae, P. 1, Rome. deinde. Adv. afterward, next; simul, simultaneously, at the in the second place. same time, together. domus, -ns and -I, F. 4 and 2, tarde. Adv., slowly, late. house, home. tergum, -T, back, rear (of an hiems, hiemis, P. 3, storm; army). winter. Tibur, Tiburis, N. 3, Tivoli. Exercises 163 * READING MATTER » 413. 1. Qua (in)^ regione Italiae, Marce, iste amicus tuus habitat? (Ans.) Hieme Romae habitat, aestate aut Tibure aut Pompeis aut Capreis. Etiam run prope a R5ma vlllam parvam habet, et ibi saepe, domo Roma^ profectus, reliquam partem diei agit. (Ques.) Nuncne domi est, aut iam hie Corfini? {Ans.) Dom5, credo, profectus est, sed Corfinium nondum pervenit. Tarde certe venit. 2. Quid Marcus his diebus faciebat? (Ans.) Suos rei militari adsuefaciebat; nam magna ille est diligentia. Nonnumquam agmen, aut paribus gradibus, aut niillis ordinibus, circum silvas agebat, ut corpora suorum lab5re confirmarentur. Nonnumquam exercitum in duas dividebat partes, quarum altera, cornibus extentis, alteram circumveniebat, in eamque simul a fronte, ab latere, a tergo impetum faciebat. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 414. 1. What was Lucius doing in these days? 2. (Ans.) Sometimes he would lead his army around-in the woods, some- times he would draw up a litie-of-battle. 3. (Ques.) Did he teach his men to retreat, then to wheel -about and make an attack simultaneously on the front, on the side, and on the rear? 4. (Ans.) No, Lucius did none^ of these things. He is not (a boy) of great diligence of mind. 5. He did not fear that he would be beaten. 6. And so he will effect nothing. 7. In what part of Italy do you live? 8. (Ans.) In winter I live in Pompeii or Rome, the summer I pass in Corfinium among the mountains. 9. I love to be in the country, and so I am * never slow* to set-out* from home. Neither am I ever slow to return home; for I enjoy life at home also. 1 Parentheses mean that the preposition may be used or not, at will. ^From home from Rome (English, less exactly, /rom his home in Borne), ''^Vse nihil (nothing). ^ Say ** I never set out slowly." 164 Perfect Subjunctive LESSON LVI THE PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE 415. The Perfect Subjunctive Active is formed by add- ing -erim, etc., to the Perfect Stem, and the Passive by the Perfect Passive Participle plus sim, etc. When, then, you have learned it for one verb, you can form it for any other from the last two Principal Parts. ACTIVE Conjugation I II III 1st Sing. amaverim monuerim texerim 2d a amaveris monuerls texerls 3d u amaverit monuerit texerit Similarly ceperim,etc. 1st PL atnaverlmus monuerlmus texerimus audlverim,etc. 2d u amaveritis monueritis texeritis 3d it amaverint monuerint PASSIVE texerint 1st Sing, amatus sim monitus sim tectus sim Similarly 2d a " SIS ■ SIS " sis captussim,etc. 3d i( " sit sit " sit audrtussim,etc. 1st PL amatl slmus monitl simus tecti Bimus 2d u " Sltis " Sltis " Sltis 3d ii " sint " sint *' sint a. Notice that, in the Active, every ending contains an i-sound. h. Notice also that (except in the First Person Singular) the Per- fect Subjunctive is exactly like the Future Perfect Indicative in spelling ; but the -i- of the Subjunctive is long, except in the places of regular shortening (100, 2). 416. The Perfect Subjunctive of sum is; 1st Sing, fuerim Ist PI. fuerimus 2d 3d fueris fuerit 2d 3d fuerltis fuerint Semi- deponents. — Consecutive Subjunctive of Fact 165 SEMI-DEPONENT VERBS (i. e., Verbs JEfaZZ-Deponent) 417. Semi-Deponents are verbs of which the Perfect System is Passive in form but Active in meaning. Thus: audeO audere ausus sum, dare gaudeO gaudere gavlsus sum, rejoice, be glad of soleO solere solitus sum, he accustomed fido ftdere iisvLs svLm, trust THE CONSECUTIVE SUBJUNCTIVE OP FACT (Existing in Dependent Clauses only) 418. Specimen Sentences: 1. Marcus talis est puer qui labOrare amet, Mark is such a boy that loves to work (in English, such a boy that he loves, or simply a boy that loves). 2. Ita rQs amO, ut maximam partem aestatis ibi semper agam, I so love the country that I always spend most of the summer there. 3. Numquam in nostra schola tam male est, quin aliquis puerOs par- vOs defendat, it is never so bad in our school that some one does not defend the little boys {qmn=that .... not). 4. Effecimus ut in hac schola parvl puerl a magnTs nOn lacessantur, we have brought-it-about that in this school the little boys are not worried by the big ones. Study of the Above Sentences 419. In all four examples, notice the following points of likeness: 1. What is expressed by the Subjunctive is a fact. If the clauses were independent, the Indicative would be used in all (Marcus . . . amat, ego . . . ago, etc.). Hence we may conveniently say that these Subjunctives are not true Subjunctives, but belong to the province of Fact. They are usually best translated by the English Indicative. 2. The dependent clauses express something that follows from the nature of something else, given in the main sentence {such that he, etc., loves so much that he, etc.). Such clauses are accordingly called Consecutive (from cOnsequor, follow). 166 Is, lUe, etc, with Descriptive Meaning 420. The differences are as follows: 1. The first clause describes the antecedent (Mark is such a hoy that . . . )• Hence we may call it a Descriptive Clause. 2. The second and third clauses express result (loves so much that . . . , never is so bad that . . . ). Hence we should call them Clauses of Result. 3. The last clause (ut nOn lacessantur) expresses the Object of effecimus, just as an Accusative Noun would (it is the thing ivhich we have brought about). Hence we should call it a Substantive Clause of Fact. We may combine these statements in a rule: 421. In Dependent Clauses of Consecutive nature or origin, the Subjunctive is used to express Facts [nega- tive non) , as follows : 1. In Descriptive Clauses of Fact, with a Relative Pronoun. 2. In Result Clauses of Pact, with ut, ut nOn, or quln. 3. In Substantive Clauses of Fact, with ut or ut nOn, after verbs of Bringing About or Existence} Is, ille, ETC., WITH DESCRIPTIVE MEANING (stalls) 422. Thus far, we, have seen is, ille, hie, and iste used only as Determinative Pronouns, telling who is meant, etc. But they are also freely used with Descriptive force, telling what kind of person is meant, — i. e., with the same meaning as talis, such. Thus: Marcus is est qui labOrare amet, Mark is one that loves to work, or Mark is a boy that loves to work. a. Note that English " a . . . who " is always descriptive. b. One may also use a Descriptive Qlause without any introductory word at all, after expressions of existence or non-existence. Thus: Sunt qui hoc credant, there are (people) who believe this. c. Summary. The Descriptive Subjunctive Clause is used after descriptive antecedents not complete in themselves, and after gene- ral expressions of existence or non-existence (since these demand a descriptive idea to fill them out). 1 An extension from the idea of Effecting. " It has been brought about that" suggests "it is now the case that." Exercise 167 423. VOCABULARY (For audeO, gaudeO, soleo, fido, see 417) . commGnis, -e, common. modus,-!, M. 2, measure; method, cOnfidO, -fidere, -flsus sum, 3 (con- way, inanner, fashion ; kind, + fidO), trust (to), confide (in). provides, -videre,-vidi, -visum, 2 diversus, -a, -umy. different. (prO + video), foresee, provide. Gaius, -I, M. 2, a name. * quaerO, quaerere, quaeslvi, quae- intervallum, -I, N. 2, interval. situm, 3, inquire, ask, seek. loquor, loquf, locQtus sum, 3, talk, talis, -e, such, converse. tma. Adv., in unison, together. 424. READING MATTER (Be ready to explain every Subjunctive in this Lesson. If anyv;^here you don't see at once, run down the list in the table in 368. If your example does not belong to any of these, it must be some kind of Consecu- tive Clause of Fact. In that case, see, finally, under which of our three kinds in 421 it comes.) 1. (Gaius, amicus Marci, Corf inium per venit, domuque Marci inventa ex servo ita quaerit) Marcusne domi est? Ego Gaius sum. (Servus respondet) Nunc abest, sed domum mox revertetur. Dixit ut se hie exspect ares. Non longum erit intervallum. 2. (Marcus revertitur. Duo amici inter se loquuntur. Mar- cus) Ubi hunc annum egisti? (Gaius) Diversls (in) locis; sed semper fui in Italia. Hiemem egi Komae. Koma nunc venio; sed hac aestate fui etiam Capreis, Pompeis, Tibure. Nunc gaudeo iina tecum ^ Corfini esse, et de communibus studils nostris loqui. 3. (Marcus ea quae fecit Gaio dicit. Is ita respondet) Si quis est talis qui pericula amet, tii certe is es. Si quis est qui semper omnia ausus sit, tii is es. Sed nemo est qui se num- quam decipiat. In hac re, put5, vinceris. Ipse effecisti ut hostis multitudine^ militum multo validior sit. ludicium tuum non laudo. iWith Personal, Rel., and Interrog. Pronouns, cum, with, is enclitic. 2 "Much stronger by means of" suggests the idea "much stronger in," .ie., the idea of the Respect in Which the enemy' is stronger (x+y). 168 Determinative Clauses LESSON LVII DETERMINATIVE CLAUSES 425. Specimen Sentence (from last Reading Matter) : Marcus ea quae fecit Gaio dicit, Mark tells Gains the things which he has done. a. In this sentence, ea is evidently Determinative. It means "the things." But it isn't, by itself, determinative enough. We should still have to ask, '''what things do you' mean?" To this, the answer is given by the fact stated in the Relative Clause, " (the things) which he has doneJ*^ The clause here pieces out an incomplete Determina- tive word. We should accordingly name it a Determinative Clause. Such clauses are extremely common. You have repeatedly read them, and have written Latin examples of them yourself. h. The idea is in strong contrast with that of the Descriptive Clause. The Determinative Clause, with its Antecedent word (e. g., is), is like a big Determinative Pronoun {pointing at something). The Descriptive Clause, with its Antecedent word, is like a big Adjec- tive {describing something). c. Of course anything may be determined, by the mention of some fact that fixes it, — thus a person, a thing, a time, as in the following; (From 204) Solus erat cum ils puerls qui eum lacessebant, he was alone with the boys who were worrying him. Determinative quI-Clause (fixing the boys meant). (From the same passage) Turn cum tn Sextum audi€bas, nOs nOn aderamus, at the time when you heard Sextus, we were not pres- ent. Determinative cum-Clause (fixing the time meant). We may then lay down our rule as follows: 426. An Indicative Clause, with an appropriate Rela- tive or Conjunction, may he used to determine an anteced- ent of any kind (a person, a thing, a time,* etc., etc.). Dative of Tendency^ etc.; — of the Concrete Object 169 THE DATIVE OF TENDENCY, PURPOSE, OR RESULT i 427. Specimen Sentences: Cui hocbellum bono erit? to whom will this war he {for) a good thing (i. e., whom will it tend to benefit)? Hi milites nObIs auxilio venient, these soldiers will come for an aid to us (i. e., to-aid us). Hoc bellum puerOrum magnae mihi cOrae est, this ivar of the boys is (for) a great anxiety to me. a. In each of these sentences, besides a Dative of the Person Con- cerned (cui, nobis, mihi; 260), there is another Dative (bono, auxilio, cOrae) with the idea of Direction ("to" or "for"). It expresses that toward which something tends (Tendency; thus bono); or something which it is meant to reach (Purpose; thus auxilio); or something which it does reach (Result; thus cOrae). b. The nouns so used are all Abstract,^ and Singular. We may then lay down the rule that: 428. The Dative of many Abstract Nouns may be used to express Tendency, Purpose, or Result. DATIVE OP THE CONCRETE OBJECT FOR WHICH 429. Specimen Sentences: Locum castrls cepistis? have you taken a place for a camp? Diem proelio cOnstituistis? have you appointed a day for the'battle? a. Here the Dative is again one of Figurative Direction, express- ing that for which something is intended. But the nouns used are Concrete.^ The verbs with which they are employed express Choos- ing or Appointing. Hence we may lay down the rule that: 430. A Dative of the Concrete Object For Which some- thing is intended may be used with phrases containing verbs of Choosing or Appointing. 1 Also called the Predicate Dative (it is regularly predicative). — The name "Two Datives" is also given to the combination (see a). ^Denoting things that cannot be perceived by the senses, as " care." ^Denoting things that can be perceived by the senses, as "camp." 170 Accusative of Extent, Duration, or Degree DATIVE AND ABLATIVE WITH fido AND cOnfidO 431. Specimen Sentences: Tibi cOnf ido, I trust {to) you. Multitndinl suae cOnfldunt, ^/le?/ trust {to) their numbers. Multitftdine sua cOnfldunt, they trust in their numbers. As you see from these sentences, 432. Fido and confido, trust, may take the Ablative. But they may also take the Dative (so regularly of a person)} THE ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT, DURATION, OR DEGREE 433. Specimen Sentences: Mtlrus multOs pedes longus est, the wall is many feet long. DuS.s horas cotidie ambulo, I walk two hours every day. Multum cotidie ambulo, I walk much {a good deal) every day. a. As you see, the Accusatives in these examples all indicate Extent,— of space, of time, or of the amount of activity. Hence, distinguishing by appropriate names, we may say that: 434. Extent of Space, Duration of Time, and Degree are expressed by the Accusative} 436. READING MATTER (Continue to study the Subjunctives with especial care.) (Marcus respondet) Mihi non multum confidis. Sed n5n effi- cis ut verear.^ Me n5n n5visti. Sunt qui pericula semper time- ant. Ego eius modi* non sum. Sunt qui omnia audeant. Neque eius sum generis. Is^ sum qui, consili5 fidens, semper solitus iThey take the Dative as verbs of Attitude (cf. English "trust to"). The Ablative construction is Locative (cf*. English "trust in"). 2 This Accusative is like the one with per. It expressed originally the idea of continuous contact. 3" You do not make that I fear." In Enghsh, you do not make me fear. What kind of clause? -* Of this fashion, of this kind. '>Is is here descriptive, = talis. Translate by / am one who. Exercises 171 sim omnis casus pr5videre. Quod^ nunc feci. Nam primum milites optimi generis elegi, et qui mihi confiderent. Deinde hos rei militari adsuefeci, it a ut omnia facere didicerint. Inter alia didicerunt fugam prim5 simulare, tum signa convertere, inque hostes omnibus ex partibus simul impetum facere. Co- gito Lucium hoc modo^ decipere. Nam ii quos ille elegit,^ mul- titudine sua confisi, temere nostros consequentur, neque ullum timebunt casum. (Gains) Nonne Lucius quoque hoc intervallo aliquot dierum iititur ? (Marcus) Forsitan is agmen suum ali- quot horas per silvas egerit, et milites eius inter se gladiis et scutis pugnaverint; sed certe nihil aliud {—else) egerunt. 436. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Let us talk together (= between ourselves). You have inquired about my plans. 2. In-the-first-place, Lucius is not of-a-kind* to have foreseen that^ which I am planning. 3. There are boys who work with brains. 4. He is not of this class. 5. He is one^ who has been accustomed to conquer; and so he trusts himself. 6. He has always profited -by the carefulness^ of his friends in all things, so that he has never been carefuP himself. 7. In-the-second-place, by ^giving him a much larger army, I have made him not fear^ any danger. 8. He trusts much in his strength. (Gains) I shall rejoice if you conquer him by this method. lAnd this. Quod feci is not dependent, but goes right on. (Call it a Forward-Moving Relative Clause or Sentence). "^By this method. Means suggesting a new force, that of Way or Manner (x + y ) . We shall see this force in its full and separate power later. It starts up from several sources. 3 Is this clause Determinative or Descriptive ? 4 Say "such who has foreseen," using talis or is (it makes no difference which). 5 Use is (Neut. PI.). Is it Determinative or Descriptive here ? 6 Use is. Is it Determinative or Descriptive here ? 7 Use diligentia and diligens for "carefulness" and "careful." 8 Use the Ablative Absolute (a much larger army having been given him). 8 Say "have made that he does not fear." 172 Past Perfect Subjunctive LESSON LVIII THE PAST PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE 437. The Past Perfect Subjunctive is formed in the Active by adding -issem, etc., to the Perfect Stem, and in the Passive by combining the Perfect Passive Participle with essem, etc. When, then, you have learned it for one verb, you can form it for any other from the last two Principal Parts. Conjugation I ' 1st Sing, amavissem 2d " amavisses 3d " amavisset 1st PI 2d " 3d " amavissemus amavissetis amavissent ACTIVE II monuissem monuisses monuisset monuissemus monuissetis monuissent III IV Similarly texissem, etc. cepissem, etc. audivissem, etc. PASSIVE 1st Sing, amatus essem monitus essem 2d *' " esses " esses 3d " " esset " esset 1st PL amati essemus monitl essemus 2d " " essetis *' essetis 3d " " essent " essent Similarly tectus essem, etc. captus essem, etc. auditus essem, etc. 438. The Past Perfect Subjunctive of the Irregular Verb sum is: 1st Sing, fuissem 2d " fuisses 8d " fuisset 1st PL fuissemus 2d " fuissetis 3d " fuissent Ablative of Cause or Beason; — of Respect 173 THE ABLATIVE OP CAUSE OR REASON 439. Specimen Sentences: Vulnere aeger sum, I am ill from (or with) a wound. Gloria tua gaudeo, I rejoice in your glory. a. In both these sentences the Ablative expresses Cause or Reason (English from, with, in, on account of, because of). No preposition appears. Our rule will then be: 440. Cause or Reason may be expressed by the Abla- tive.^ THE ABLATIVE OP RESPECT 441. Specimen Sentences: Lucius multitadine suOrum valet, Lucius is strong in the number of his soldiers, Marcus et Lacius virtdte pares sunt: ingenio nOn sunt pares, Mark and Lucius are equal in courage : in intellect they are not equal, a. In these sentences the Ablative answers the question, In what respect f Wherein 9 We may then lay down the rule that: 442. The Respect in Which* the meaning of a Verb or Adjective is to be taken may be expressed by the Ablative.^ •1 The construction is of composite origin, the idea having been expressed originally by three entirely distinct cases, the Ablative, the Sociative, and the Locative. Our EngHsh ways of expressing the idea correspond (thus "desperate from his trouble," "desperate with his trouble," "desper- ate in his trouble") ; only, in English the use of the differing Prepositions has kept the three constructions from coming to be thought of as one. 2 The construction is of composite origin, having come from three dis- tinct sources, the true Ablative of the Point of View from Which (thus " equal /rom the Point of View of courage"), the Sociative (thus "strong with the number of his soldiers," " by means of the number of his soldiers "), and the Locative (thus "equal in courage"). We have the same ways of expressing the idea in English, but the use of differing Prepositions keeps them from becoming one in our thought. 174 Substantive Quod-Clause of Fact THE SUBSTANTIVE quod-CLAUSE OF FACT 443. Specimen Sentences: Id mihi placet, quod pueri pills nOn ntuntur, this pleases me, (namely) that the boys do not use Javelins. Mihi placet quod puerl pills nOn Qtuntur, it pleases me that the hoys do not use Javelins. Quod puerl pills nOn atuntur laudo, I praise (the fact) that the boys do not use javelins. a. In the first sentence the quod-Clause explains id, standing in a sort of Apposition to it. In the second and third sentences, the use is the same, except that the clause stands by itself, as the Sub- ject or Object of the verb. b. In all three examples the quod-Clause is like a Noun or Pro- noun,^ — i. e., it is Substantive, And, in all, it states a fact. We may then lay down the rule that: 444. A Substantive qnod-Clause of Fact [Indicativey may be used in explanation of some antecedent word; or it may itself form the Subject or Object of a Verb. a. Quod-Clause of Respect. The Substantive quod-Clause may be used in loose connection with the main sentence, meaning with respect to the fact that, as to the fact that, as for .... Thus: Quod tn victOriam exspectas, videbimus cum pugnabimus, as /o?' the fact that you expect victory {=as for your expecting victory)^ we shall see when ive fight. 445. VOCABULARY aequus, -a, -um, equal; fair; lib&nter, Adv., willingly. favorable. moveO, movere, mOvI, motum, aeque, Adv., equally. 2, move. auctOritas, -atis, F. 3, authority, opus (same word as before), with concedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, est and Abl. = there is need of. 3 (con- + cedO, yield thorough- Originally this Abl. was one of ly)j yield, grant, concede. Means (thus there is work to be cOpia.y-aej¥.l, abundance, sup- done with . . . .) ply. In F\., resources; (mili- saepe (as before), o/^en. Compar. tary) forces. saepius, Superl. saepissime. disciplina, -ae, F. 1, discipline, tempus, temporis, N. 3, time. imperium, -i, N. 2, command, Dniversus, -a, -um, all (without empire. ^ exception). Exercises 175 446. READING MATTER (Note that times, as well as persons, are here described.) 1. Marcus talis erat qui, c5nsili6 fidens, semper solitus esset omnis casiis providere. Liicius is erat qui, viribus suis c5nfisus, nihil umquam timuisset. In eius modi certaminibus saepe vicerat, n5nnumquam casii, saepius viribus magnis suis, saepis- sime autem consiliis et opibus Marei in omnibus rebus friictus.^ Sed non iina^ nunc consilia capiebant. Hoc autem tempus tale erat quo (or cum) consilio ac iudicio magis quam viribus opus esset. Qua re ^ is qui omnia pericula providerat * meliore (in) loc5 erat quam is qui nihil timuerat.* 2. Gratia aeque valebant Marcus et Lucius, auctdritate pliis ^ valebat^ Marcus. Hie et durus et aequus erat. Qua re copiae eius per hos dies semper in opere versatae sunt; neque iillum fuerat tempus cum is meliore (in) loc5 apud condiscipulos fuisset. Placebat^ his quod tam multa discebant, et movebantur periculo in qu5 erant. Itaque iiniversi ei auctoritatem atque imperium libenter concedebant, disciplinamque servabant. 447. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. There were many in Mark's forces who at first had not trusted his judgment; for Mark was the one* who had brought it about that they were less strong in number than the enemy. 2. But all were moved now by the danger; and there was need of discipline. 3. So they yielded everything to Mark's authority and command. 4. Their leader was both stern and fair. 5. It also pleased them that they were very-often learning new things together. 6. For which reason all were engaged equally will- ingly in doing work; nor had there ever been a time when Mark had been in greater popularity, or had been more powerful.^ ^Having enjoyed, i. e., because he ^ig this idea primarily Determin- had enjoyed. ative, or primarily Descriptive? ^Together. ^ More powerful. Plus is an Ace. 3Abl. of Cause, because of which of Degree. thing, wherefore, for which reason. ^ impersonal (it pleased). 176 Imperative. — Supine 448. LESSON LIX THE IMPERATIVE (Finished) Active Passive SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL ( Pres. 2d ama amate amare amamihl I. Fut. 2d amatO amatote amator ( < Fut 3d amato amanto amator amantor ( ' Pres. 2d mone monete monere monemini 11. ! Fut. 2d moneto monetOte monetor ( . Fut. 3d monetO monento monetor monentor ^ Pres. 2d tege tegite tegere tegimini Fut. 2d tegito tegitote tegitor HI. Fut. 3d tegito tegunto tegitor teguntor Pres. 2d cape capita capere capimini Fut 2d capito capito te capitor I Fut 3d capito capiunto capitor capiuntor ' Pres. 2d audi audite audire audlmini IV. Fat 2d audito audltote auditor . Fut. 3d audrto audiunto auditor audiuntor Irreg. Pres. 2d es este Verb - Fut 2d estO estote sum . Fut 3d estO sunto 449. The (so-called) Present Imperative refers to the immediate future, the Future to a more distinctly future time, or to future time in general (hence especially used in laws, treaties, and maxims). The negative is ne. THE SUPINE 450. The Supine is a Verbal Noun of the Fourth Declension. It has two cases only in ordinary use, an Accusative in -um and an Ablative in -u. The Accusa- tive is identical in form with the Perfect Passive Parti- ciple Neuter (though of a diflPerent Declension). Uses of Siipi)ies._ — Ablative of Accordance 177 451. SUPINES Conjugation I II III IV Acc. amatum monitum tectum captum auditum Ahl. amatQ monita tectn captci auditCi 462. Specimen Sentences: Te monitum venio, / come to warn you. Hoc facile facta est, (this is easy in-the-doing, = ) this is easy to do. As you see from these examples, 453. 1. The Supine in -um is used to express Purpose after Verbs of Motion.^ 2. The Supine in -u is used to express Respect with Adjectives. THE ABLATIVE OP ACCORDANCE 454. Specimen Sentences: More suO, in accordance with his custom. Ex cOnsuetndine sua, in accordance tvith his custom. COnsuettldine sua, in accordance with his custom. Voluntate eius, (in accoi dance with his will, = ) with his good-will, with his approval, a. Each of these examples expresses that in accordance with which something is done. With cOnsuetCidine, one may use the Preposition or omit it. With the others it is not commonly used in prose. Hence we may lay down the rule that: 455. That in Accordance with which one acts or judges may be expressed by the Ablative of certain words, regu- larly without a Preposition.^ a. So especially mQre and cOnsuetGdine, iadicio, exemplo, volun- tate. 5. With Tnost words, de or ex must be used to express the idea. 1 In origin, the Accusative Supine in -um is simply an old Accusative of the end of motion. Monitum venio is like domum venio. 2 The frequent use of ex with consuetudine, and the regular use of de or ex with all but a small list of words, show the construction to be of true Ablative (i. e.. Separative) origin. It expressed the idea of that from- which the act proceeded (thus more suo, '' proceeding from his custom "). 178 Constructions with Comparatives ABLATIVE, ETC., WITH A COMPARATIVE 456. Specimen Sentences: Tn fortior frat^e es, you are braver than your brother. To fortior es quam frater, you are braver than your brother. Scntum habes meO melius, you have a better shield than mine. Sexti scutum longius est quam Marci, Sextus' shield is longer than Mark^s. a. You see that the idea than after a comparative may be ex- pressed either by the Ablative,^ or by quam, the second word then being in the same case as the first. But you also find only quam, if the first word is in any case but Nominative or Accusative.^ The examples represent regular usage. Our rules will then be: 457. A Comparative Adjective is often followed by the Ablative meaning ^'than.^^ But quam may generally be used instead, and MUST be used if the first of the words compared is in any case but Nominative or Accu- sative, 458. VOCABULARY apertus, -a, -um, open. quadringenti, -ae, -a, four hun- citrSiy this side. Prep., taking Ace. dred. decimus, -a, -um, tenth. septem, indecl. Adj., seven. dexter, -tra, -trum, right; dex- sinister, -tra, -trum, left; si- tra, -ae, as Noun, right hand. nistra, -ae, as Noun, left hand. gdtlcO, edGcere, edtixr, eductum, tango, tangere, tetigl, tactum, 3 {e-\-dZicG), lead out. 3, touch. morior, mori, mortuus sum, 3, tempestas, -atis, F. 3, weather; die. Par tic. mortuus, ^= dead. bad iveather, storm. passus, -ns, 4, pace (with both transgredior, -gredl, -gressus feet ; = about five English feet). sum, 3 (trans + gradior, step pro (as before), in front of; hence across), cross. as a representative of, in be- u\trSi,beyond,onthe other side of. half of, for; hence further, Prep., taking Ace. in place of, as. tlsus,-ns, M. 4, use; experience. 1 The idea is of the thing reckoned from as a standard. 2 Because then the second word does not itself depend upon the Com- parative idea (thus the shield is not longer than Mark). Exercise 179 459. READING MATTER (Watch for is describing persons and things, including times.) 1. Magnae secutae sunt tempestates, quae et pueros et multos ex patribus e5rum domi continerent.^ 2. Eo tempore cum (or quo) bonam exspectabant^ tempestatem, fere sic de communi studio loquebantur: (Talk of some fathers) Hoc tempus id est cum opus sit^ bonis et acquis iiidicibus. Magnane sunt auctoritate et gratia ii quos pueri elegerunt?^ (Ans.) Ita; ii sunt qui magnum rei militaris iisum habuerintJ His ambo exercitus aeque c5nfidunt. Nemini quidem pliis quam his confidunt; nam nem5 his peritior (comparative) est. Has leges iam pr5niintiaverunt: 3. (Leges pugnae) Intervallum septem dierum esto. His diebus nemo finis alterius exercitiis transgreditor. In aperta valle ab utraque parte fluminis ante diem pugnae dictum nemo versator. Nemo consilia ducis sui cum militibus alterius ducis communicate. 4. Locum castris Marcus ad dextram, Lucius ad sinistram capito. Haec castra aequ5 spatio a flumine absunt5. Hoc spatium quadringentorum passuum esto. 5. Septimo die decertanto. Eius diei decima hora* iinus ex iiidicibus signum cornu dato. Tum duces suum quisque exer- citum ediicunto vel citra vel ultra fliimen pugnatum. 6. Scutis et gladiis modo in proelio iituntor. Pilis ne iituntor. Alia omnia R5man6 faciunto more. 7. Qui gladio tactus erit,^ pro mortuo habetor, exque exercitii suo a tergo excedito. 8. (Comment of a listener) Haec facilia dictii sunt, factii erunt difficillima. Qiii pugnatum venerint, ii non libenter discedent. 1 Does this clause determine or describe? ^At the time when. A Determinative cum-Clause (425, c). 3 The present time is one when^ = is such that. What kind of clause? 4 The Romans reckoned twelve hours, from sunrise to sunset. ^ Who shall be touched, he . . , =he who, etc. 180 Infinitives Finished LESSON LX THE INFINITIVES (Finished) 460. 1. We have* seen how to form the Present Infini- tives (92, 179). 2. The Perfect Infinitives correspond in form to the Perfect Indicatives. Thus Active Indicative amavi, I have loved, Infinitive amav-isse, to have loved; Passive Indicative amatus sum, I have been loved, Infinitive ama- tus esse,^ to have been loved. 3. The Future Infinitive Active is formed by the Future Active Participle with esse. Thus amaturus esse,' to be going to love. The Future Passive is peculiarly formed, namely by the Supine in -um, coupled with iri. Thus amatum iri, to be going to be loved. 461. The Infinitives for I our specimen verbs are thus : II Active Passive Active Passive amare amavisse amatnrus esse amarl amatus esse amatum irl monere monuisse monitCirus esse moneri monitus esse monitum iri Active Passive III Active Passive tegere texisse tectorus esse tegl tectus esse tectum Irl capere cepisse captQrus esse cap! captus esse captum irl IV Active audire audlvisse auditnrus esse Passive audiri auditus esse auditum iri Irregular Verb sum esse fuisse futnrus esse or fore 1 Esse is very frequently omitted in the Perfect Passive Infinitive, and almost always so in the Future Active Infinitive. In our reading, this free- dom of choice will be shown by parentheses. Infinitive Tenses. — Infinitive in Indirect Discourse 181 THE MEANINGS OP THE INFINITIVE TENSES i 462. The tenses of the Infinitive express an act as, at the time of the verb on which they depend, completed (Perfect Infinitive), in progress (Present Infinitive), or yet to come (Future Infinitive). They are thus purely relative tenses, like those of the Participle. Thus: Dicitur labOrd.visse, he is said to have worked (Perfect Infinitive). Dicitur laborare, he is said to be working (Present Infinitive). Dicitur labOratQrus esse, he is said to be going to work (Future Intinitive). USE OF THE INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 463. When, instead of being put directly (Direct Dis- course), one's words or thoughts are made to depend upon a verb of saying, thinking, or the like, they are said to be in Indirect Discourse. a. Thus in *'I think (or know, or believe) him to be honest," the words " him to be honest " are an indirect expression of the thought, "he is honest." In "he says that he shall be present," the words "that he shall be present" are an indirect expression of the words, " I shall be present." b. English can use the Infinitive with such verbs as think, believe, know, etc. (as above). Latin, by a striking usage, can employ it also with such verbs as say (dicO), where we have to use a clause, commonly introduced by that, — which may, however, be omitted. 1 The Latin Present Infinitive was at first merely a verbal noun, in two eases, — a Dative in -i, and a Locative in -e. These were used like the cases of any other nouns in the same period. Thus " I drive the slave to work " (Dative of Direction), "I see the slave at work, — in the act of working" (Locative) . As the -uerft-f eehng grew, the case-endings became meaningless, and were then used to express voice; and forms also then sprang up to express the other two tense-ideas (Perfect and Future). The English "to-Infinitive" has had in part exactly the same history. It was originally a Dative Noun, helped out by the Preposition "to." The original Dative forces still remain in common use, as in "he went out to play,'''' and " I drove him to work.''^ But all consciousness of the case has passed away, so that the Infinitive may to day be used also as Subject (thus in " to play is easier than to work ") or Object (thus in "I love to play"). 182 Infinitive in Indirect Discourse c. Thus the ideas of the three statements, ego audivT, I have heard, ego audio, I hear, and ego audiam, / shall hear, may be expressed in dependence upon a verb of saying in any tense, becom- ing Infinitive, as in the following: 464. Specimen Sentences: • Dicit se audivisse, he says (that) he has heard (he says audivi ) Dicit se audire, he says (that) he hears ( " " audio ), Dicit se auditnrum (esse), he says (that) he shall hear ( " " audiam) Dixit se audivisse, he said (that) he had heard (he said audlvl Dixit se audire, he said (that) he heard (" " audio ) Dixit se auditnrum (esse), he said (that) he should hear ( u « audiam). a. You see that in each of these sentences the Infinitive makes an indirect Statement, and that its Subject is in the Accusative. Our rule will then be: 466. The Infinitive is used to express an indirect State- ment after verbs of Saying^ Thinking, Perceiving, Know- ing, and the like. The Subject of the Infinitive is put in the Accusative,^ a. The Subject is sometimes omitted, when perfectly clear. Thus: Dicit pard,tum esse, he says that he is ready. Dixit audivisse, he said that he had heard. 466. For verbs having no participial stem (thus studeo, studere, studui, — ) the Future Infinitive is replaced by fore or futurum esse with ut and the Subjunctive (of expected future fact; 421, 3); and the same equivalent may be used for the Future Infinitive of any verb. Thus : Non credo fore ut ille studeat, I don't believe that it will be (the case) that he will study, = I don't believe that he will study. 1 This use of the Infinitive has grown out of case-uses (see last footnote), as in "I drive him to work" (Dative of Direction), and "I see him at work" (Locative), which last easily suggests, "I see that he is working.^'' From verbs of perceiving, the use probably first extended itself to verbs of knowing or thinking, and then to verbs of saying. The Accusative, originally the object of the main verb, came to be felt as the Subject of the Infinitive, Exercises 183 467. VOCABULARY collis, -is, M. 3, hill, exterus, -a, -um, outside, Com- committo, -mittere, -misT, -mis- par. exterior, outer, Superl. sum, 3 (con- + mitto, bring to- extremus or extimus, ouier- getheT),Join; commit. most, extreme (or the edge of). contendO, -tendere, -tendi, -ten- impedimentum, -I, N. 2, hin- tum, 3 (con- + tendo, stretch drance. thoroughly), strain; strive, medius, -a, -um, middle or the- hasten. viiddle-of. dedCicO,-dilcere, -dtlxT,-ductum,3 sub, under. Prep,, taking Ace. of (de + dQcO), lead off. motion, and Abl. of rest. 468. READING MATTER 1. (A judge) Multi venient pugnam spectatum. Hipugnanti- bus impedimento erunt. Quo modo hoc prohibeamus ? (Another) Id facillimum erit factu. Hos universes ante pugnam in extre- mam vallem sub colles deducemus. Pro certo habeo^ ambos exercitus, signo dato, in mediam vallem contenturos (esse), ibique proelium commissum iri. (The third) Facile erit eos qui aderunt sub colles deducere; sed manebunt sub collibus? 2. (One asks) Quem vos putatis victurum (esse) ? Luci exer- citus aliquanto maior est quam Marci. (Another) Marcus multo diligent ior Lucid est. Pro certo habeo eum suo more omnes dolos cogitavisse, atque etiam nunc rei militari domi studere. 3. IJnus e iudicibus credebat Marcum victurum (esse). Pr5 certo habebat omnes dol5s ab e5 c5gitat6s (esse). 469. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. I feel sure that Mark has formed plans, is drilling his men, and will conquer. 2. But I believe that those who come to witness the battle will be a great hindrance Ho the fighters. 3. (Ans.) The judges say that they shall lead-off^ all these (people) under ^ the diflPerent hills on* the edge-of-the valley. 4. The armies will hasten toward the middle-of-the valley, and the battle will be joined there. 1 Hold for certain,=feel sure. sj^ea of rest, or of motion? 2 Be careful about the case, ^See the Latin idea, in 468, 1. 184 Gerund and Gerundive LESSON LXI INFLECTION OF THE REGULAR VERB (Finished) THE GERUND 470. .1. We have seen that, in many combinations, the Future Passive Participle has gained the power of express- ing the leading idea in its phrase, as in cupidus belli gerendi, desirous of war to he waged, which amounts to saying desirous OF WAGING- war. The Gerundive is thus nearly the equivalent of a Verbal Noun. It is in thought the leading and governing word, but not yef grammatically so. 2. It naturally came in time to take this one step fur- • ther, and became a complete Verbal Noun, in the Neuter Gender and Singular Number. It is then called the Gerund, Thus in: Cupidus bellum gerendi, desirous of waging war. We may then define the Gerund as follows: 471. The Gerund is a Complete Verbal Noun. As Verbal, it has the power of governing a Substantive. As a Noun, it is itself governed in case. The Gerund exists only in four cases. Thus, for amO, Gen. amandi Dat. amando Aqc. amandum Abl. amando 472. Since the Gerundive and Gerund are closely cor- responding constructions, we may conveniently sum up their uses together,>as follows: 473. The Gerundive and Gerund exist only in the Geni- tive, Dative, Accusative, and Ablative cases. The case- uses are in general the same as those of Nouns. Thus: Gerund, etc. — Natural Harmony of Tenses 185 474. GERUNDIVE Gen. cupidus pugnae videndae, desir- ous of seeing the fight. Dat. diem cOnstituerunt open faci- endo, they have appointed a day for doing the work. Ace. alacer ad pugnam videndam, eager for seeing the battle. Abl. drligentia in bellis legendls, d^7^- GERUND cupidus pugnam videndl, de- sirous of seeing the fight. diem cOnstituerunt pugnan- do, they have appointed a day for fighting. alacer ad pugnandum, eager for fighting. drligentia in legend© , dili- gence in reading. gence in reading-up wars, a. In the Dative, or after a Preposition, the Gerundive is necessary if a Substantive is used. Otherwise the choice is free. THE NATURAL HARMONY OF TENSES ("Sequence of Tenses") 475. 1. If you are thinking of two acts as connected (main and subordinate), they (1) are likely to be in the same division of time; and (2) the subordinate act is likely to be seen in its temporal rela- tion to the main act (which makes the point of vieio). Thus " I watched" (yesterday) "a man who was stealing" (then, of course). 2. In the Subjunctive, as you already know and feel, the tenses of the present or future point of view are the Present and Perfect, of the past point of view the Imperfect and Past Perfect. Hence, in combinations of verbs and dependent clauses: 476. A verb of the present or future is generally accom- panied by the Present or Perfect Subjunctive, a verb of the past by an Imperfect or Past Perfect Subjunctive. 477. Table of the Natural Harmony of Tenses ("Sequence"). In the Past In the Present In the Future Past Act and Past Point of View Present Act and Present Point of View Future Act and Future Point of View Thus Quaeslvl quidagerem, I asked (then) what I was (then) to do. Dux erat qui nihil prO- vidisset, he was a leader who had foreseen nothing. Thus QuaerO quid agam, I ask (now) what 1 am (now) to do. Dux est qui nihil pro- vider it, he is a leader who has foreseen nothing. Thus Quaeram quid agam, I shall ask (then ) what I am (then) to do. Dux erit qui nihil prO- vlderit, he will he a leader who will have foreseen nothing. 186 Causal or Adversative QnuClause NEW FORCE GAINED BY THE CONSECUTIVE quI-CLAUSE The Causal or Adversative qui^-Clause 478. Specimen Sentences: 1. Magnae secQtae sunt tempests.tes, quae puerOs doml conti- nerent, great storms followed, which kept the boys at home. (From the Reading Matter in 459, 1.) 2. Magnae hae sunt tempestd.tes, quae hOs puerOs, pugnandi cupidOs, domi continuerint, great storms are these which (and since they) have kept these boys, eager for fighting, at home. 3. Dolet Lcicius, qui pugnare magnopere cupiat, Lucius grieves, who ( = since he) is very eager to fight. 4. Marcus, qui pugnare magnopere cupiat, tamen de his tempesta- tibus nOn dolet. Mark, who (= although he) is very eager to fight, nevertheless doesn't grieve about these storms. a. In the first sentence the qui-Clause is a consecutive clause, such as we have already had a number of times. b. In the second sentence the qUi-Clause is consecutive, and very like the one in the first; but it also, in consequence of the nature of the combination, suggests an additional idea of Cause or Reason ; i.e., you feel that it not only expresses the result of the greatness of the storms, but the reason why the speaker says "great." — In this way the Subjunctive qui-CIause gets a new power, that of expressing Cause or Reason; and it is then naturally employed to express Cause or Reason alone, as in the third example.^ c. The Adversative use (i. e., to express Opposition, as in the fourth example) grows out of the Causal use. We may then lay down the rule that: 479. A Relative Clause in the Subjunctive may he used to express Cause or Opposition (Causal or Adversative qui-Clause). iThis is to be understood as meaning any form of the Relative, — any case, gender, or number, or any relative Adverb (as ubi or unde). 2 Another instance of the rise of a new force in a construction, illustrated by our formula (force originally consecutive [x], then consecutive plus causal [x+y], then causal only [y] ). Exercises 187 480. VOCABULARY acer (as before), fierce. Compar. quare (cf. 44:6, 1, and footnote 3), acrior, Superl. acerrimus.^ Rel. and Interrog. Adv., for acriter, Adv. for acer, keenly, which reason, wherefore, why. fiercely. Compar. acrius, sperO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, hope. Superl. acerrime. tardus, -a, -um, slow, tardy; dis- patior, pati, passus sum, 3, suf- inclined. fer, allow, permit. tantus, -a, -um, so great, so much. 481. READING MATTER 1. (A timid mother) Tii scis me ex hoc bello aliquid semper exspectavisse incommodi. Quare his tantis tempestatibus gau- deo. Diem pueri constituerunt decertando. Sed sper5 fore ut ipsa mora universi tardi5res ad pugnandum sint. (Another mother) Tii gaudes, quae timeas ne filio tuo noceatur. Sed n5n est timendum.^ liidices periti sunt tales res administrandi, nee patientur quemquam cuiquam nocere. (First speaker) Quod tii dicis^ iiidices homines peritos esse, id me non tantum movet. Hi pueri acriores* sunt, acri usque* contendent. 482. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. One mother says that she is-glad-of these (so-)great storms. 2. She feels sure that her son will be injured in the fighting. 3. This does not move me much. 4. (Same ideas, in past.) A certain mother said yesterday that she was-glad-of these storms; that she felt sure that her son would be injured. 5. I think that she will not allow him to fight. 6. Why don't you practice ? Are you slow for fighting ? 7. (Ans.) The boys formed their plans at a time when I was ill {descriptive idea); for- which -reason I was not chosen. 8. (First speaker) I am desirous of witnessing^ the battle, but I hope^ the boys will not fight too fiercely. 1 As you see, Adjectives in -er have a peculiar way of forming the Super- lative, — namely. In -errlmus, as if by adding -rimus to the -er. Adverbs formed from them follow (Adj. acerrimus, Adv. acerrime). 2 Impersonal, it is not to be feared, = one should not fear. 3 See 444, a. ^Gerund, for practice. ^The Comparative often means "too." ^^ote omission of "that." 188 Conjugation of Possum LESSON LXII IRREGULAR VERBS 483. In the last Lesson, we finished the inflection of the regular verbs. 484. There are a few verbs left, which present a little irregularity. This irregularity is confined, so far as the endings are concerned, to the forms made from the Present Stem, a. Hence if you merely know the Principal Parts of a given irregular verb, all the forms from the Perfect Stem will follow with certainty. b. Further, in the forms belonging to the Present Stem, you can always make the Imperfect Subjunctive Active, as in Regular Verbs, by adding -m to the Present Infinitive Active. c. In most cases, the irregularity of ending is confined to th6 Present Indicative Active, as in the first verb to be given. 485. CONJUGATION OP possum, am able, can INDICATIVE pusauxuy ]j uasc, putui, — ■ SUBJUNCTIVE Pres. possum 1 possim potes possis potest possit possumus posslmus pbtestis possitis possunt possint Imperf. poteram, -as, -at, etc. possem, -es, -et, etc. Fut. potero, -is, -it , etc. iQld Latin has an Adjective meaning able, in two forms, potis and pote. These forms were originally of different genders, but came to be used for any gender. Among other uses, they were compounded with sum. The forms above arose from these compounds. Thus potis-sum (possum), / am- able; pote-es (potes), you are-able. New Forces gained by Consecutive Oum-Clause 189 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Perf. potui, -isti, -it, etc.i potuerim, -is, -it, etc. Past Perf. potueram, -as, -at, etc. potuissem, -es, -et, etc. Fut. Perf. potuero, -is, -it, etc. INFINITIVE PARTICIPLE Pres. posse potens (which has be- Perf. potuisse come an Adjective) NEW FORCES GAINED BY THE CONSECUTIVE cum-CLAUSE 486. Specimen Sentences: Puerl cOnsilia eO tempore (or turn) ceperunt cum ego aeger essem. Postea, cum me haberem melius, a MarcO accipl cupiebam. Sed, cum me in armis nOn exercuissem, is me nOn accepit. The boys formed their plans at a time when I was ill. Later, when I was feeling better (had myself better), I wished to be accepted by Mark. But, since I had not drilled, he did not take me. a. In the first sentence (you yourself wrote it in translating 482, 7), the cum-Clause is a simple descriptive clause, like those which we have several times had. It describes its antecedent, namely, eO tempore. The boys formed their plans at a time when I was ill, — at a time of illness on my part. This was the Situation, the State of Affairs, the Circumstances. Hence we may call such a clause a Descriptive cum-Clause of Situation. b. In the second sentence, the cum-Clause, which is in itself pre- cisely like the first one, similarly gives the situation for the main verb, cupiebam. — But it was because of this situation (namely, my feeling better) that I wished to be accepted. Hence an additional idea of Cause or Reason comes into the construction (" when " and ^''because;'' x+y). c. The natural consequence was that the construction was next used to express the idea of Cause or Reason alone (y), with the origi- nal idea of time wholly gone out of it, as in the third sentence in the passage above {'''since I had not practiced"). 1 The forms of the Perfect Stem, together with the Present Participle potens, are from an old Second Conjugation verb poteo, potere, potui, which has otherwise disappeared. 190 Cnm-Olauses : Descriptive, Causal, Adversative d. But the main act may be performed, not because of the char- acter of the situation, but m spite of it, as in the following: Cum me omninO nOn exercuissem, Ltlcius me accepit, when (or although) I had not practiced at all, Lucius accepted me. Here the additional idea is that of Opposition ("when" and ^^ although"). The clause then comes also to be used with this new idea alone ("although"). We may sum up these uses in the following rules: 487. A Subjunctive cnm-Clause may he used to describe the Situation under which the main act took place (Descrip- tive cum-Clause of Situation). 488. ^ Descriptive cnm-Clause of Situation may be used with an additional idea of Cause or Opposition ( Descriptive cum-Clause, with additional Causal or Adversative Idea). 489. A Subjunctive cum-Clause may be used to express Cause or Opposition alone (Causal or Adversative cum- Clause). 490. VOCABULARY centurio, -Onis, M. 3, centurion mllle, indecl. Adj. or Noun, a (commander of a company). thousand. F\, as Noun, milia, cohors, cohortis, -ium, F. 3, co- -ium, N. 3. Mllle passuum = hort (tenth part of a legion). 5,000 feet, or a Roman mile. .cOnsistO, -sistere, -stiti, , multus (as before), much, Com- 3 (con- + sist6, cf. stO; stand par. plus, more, Superl. plQri- Urmlj), take position ; halt. mus, most (or a great deal, cum (same word as before), Conj., PL, a great many), when, as; since; although. possum, posse, potui, — , irr., be ducentr, -ae, -a, two hundred. able, can. With plOs, etc., be Inferus, below. Compar. inferior, more able, can do more, etc. lower, Superl. iflfimus or imus, prOcurrO, -currere, -currl and lowest. -cucurri,-cursum,3(prO+currO), legatus, -I, M. 2, ambassador; run forward, charge, lieutenant (high officer). superus, -a, -um, above. Compar. legio, -Onis, F. 3, legion. superior yhigher,SuperL supre- licet, licere, licuit and licitum mus or summus, highest. est, 2, Impers., be permitted. tribdnus, -i, M. 2, tribune. Exercises 191 491. READING MATTER 1. (At Mark's house. Mark, to his father) Omnia in5re et exem- plo Roman5 feci. Exercitum in legidnes et cohortes divisi. Hos legatos, tribunos, centuriones elegi. Summi sunt consili. Plurimos dolos sciunt, etplurimum^ auctoritate valent. 2. (The father) LQcius multitudine plus ^ potest. Quid vos in pugnando potest is? (One answers) Multum^ nos possumus. 3. (Mark) Primo nihiP poterant mei, atque discipHna eorum mala erat; imperium autem cum mihi concessissent, mox multa didicerunt. Nunc eos exercui, ita ut summi ^ et infimi^ aliquot horas atque multa miliapassuum ambulare possint; ut ducentos vel quadringentos paissus celeriter currere possint; ut servatis 5rdinibus vel procurrere vel se recipere possint; ut, Una fugientes, vel simul vel deinceps consistere possint. 4. (The father) Numquam credidi fore ut tui tantum possent. magna vis disciplinae, quae ex pueris milites peritissim5s faciat! 5. Nunc, cum haec didiceritis, mihi liceat omnia bona vobis op tare. Vincat Marci exercitusi 492. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (The father) But when Lucius had chosen his army,* didn't he also, according to the Roman custom, divide it into legions and cohorts, and choose lieutenants, tribunes and centurions? 2. Don't his soldiers concede command to him ? 3. Can't they also walk many miles, and run two hundred or four hundred paces? 4. Haven't they learned a-great-many stratagems? 5. Hasn't Lucius also drilled the highest and the lowest, so that they can run forward together, and then halt one-after-another or retreat keeping their ranks ? 6. Your men can (do) very-much. 7. Can they (do) more than Lucius's soldiers (can)? 8. (Mark) Since Lucius has never been diligent, it is per- mitted to think that he has not been diligent in drilling his men. 1 Ace. of Degree. Adjectives so -^ Like plurimum above, used (cf. multo, etc.) are much like ^— the greatest and the least. Adverbs. Translate are very strong. '^ Clause of Situation. 192 Conjugation of Volo, Nolo, Malo LESSON LXIII 493. IRREGULAR VERBS (Continued) CONJUGATION OF volo, nolo, malo volo, velle, volui. Principal Parts \ nolo, nolle, nOlui, malo, malle, malui. Indic. SUBJ. Pres. volo velim VIS veils vult velit volumus vellmus vultis velitis volunt velint Imperf. volebam vellem Fut volam Perf. volui voluerim Past Perf. . volueram voluissem Fut. Perf. voluero Indic. Sub J. Pres. malo malim mavis mails mavult malit malumus mallmus mavultis , malitis malunt malint Imperf. raalebam mallem Fut. malam Perf. malui maluerim Past Perf . malueram maluissem Fut. Perf. maluero INFINITIVE Pres. velle nolle Perf, voluisse noluisse PARTICIPLE Pres. volens nolens , If ill, want , he unwilling^ ni-\nnrt-pt-tnn 1 Indic. Sub J. nolo nolim non vis nolis non vult nolit nolumus nolimus non vultis nolitis nolunt nolint nolebam nollem nolam nolui noluerim nolueram noluissem noluero IMPERATIVE Pres. noli nolite Fut. nolito nolitote malle maluisse 1 Nolo is from non and volo, don^t want, mal5 from magis volo, want more. / Neutral Conditions and Conclusions 193 CONDITIONS AND CONCLUSIONS 494. A Conclusion is a statement, the truth or realiza- tion of which depends upon the truth or realization of something else called a Condition (^/-clause, or an equiva- lent). Thus "if he has come" (Condition), "we are safe" (Conclusion). The negative for both is non. a. Conditions are introduced by si, ^/, nisi, unless^ Relatives, or Conjunctions (thus qui or quicumque, whoever, cum, whenever, etc.). h. Conditions and Conclusions may deal with a sin^jle case (Indi- vidual), or any number of cases of a kind (General). Thus: " If he has come, he brings presents." (Individual.) "If ever he comes, he brings presents." (Generalizing.) "When he comes, he brings presents." (Generalizing Conjunction.) " Whoever comes, brings presents." (Generalizing Relative.) NEUTRAL CONDITIONS AND CONCLUSIONS, PRESENT OR PAST 496. Specimen Sentences: Id si fecist!, bene fecisti, if you have done this, you have done icell. Id SI facis, bene facis, if you are doing this, you are doing well. a. As you see, these conditions imply nothing as regards the truth or falsity of the condition and conclusion. We may then call them neutral, and may state the usage as follows: 496. Neutral Conditions and Conclusions in the Present or Past are expressed by the Indicative, FUTURE CONDITIONS AND CONCLUSIONS 497. Specimen Sentences: Id si facies, bene fades, if you (shall) do this, you will do well. Id si facias, bene facias, if you shoidd do this, you would do well. a. Both examples reler to the Future. The difference is merely one of greater or less vividness. The Indicative {if ... . shall) is more vivid, the Subjunctive {if ... . should) less vivid. b. The Present Subjunctive, as we call it, clearly here refers to the Future. Similarly the Perfect Subjunctive may be employed as Q. Future Perfect, as in id modo sifecerls, bene fecerls, if you should have done merely this, you would have done ivelL 194 Future Conditions and Conclusions We may then lay down our rules as follows: 498. 1. More Vivid Future Conditions and Conclusions are expressed by Indicative tenses of Future time (the Future and Future Perfect). 2. Less Vivid Future Conditions^ and Conclusions'^ are expressed by Subjunctive tenses of Future time (the so-called Present and Perfect). 499. VOCABULARY amplus, -a, -um, ampler large. nolo, nolle, nOluI, , irr., not amplius, Compar. Neut., as want, be unwilling. Substantive, more; as Ace. of perterreO, -terrere, -terrul, -ter- Degree, more, further. ritum, 2 (per + terreO), thor- dignus, -a, -um, worthy, and oughly frighten, terrify. indignus, -a, -um, unworthy. quando, Conj., since, as. Take Abl. (Construction of quoniam, Conj., since. doubtful origin.) rumpO, rumpere, rQpi, ruptum, fides, -el, F. 5, faith, loyalty; 3, break. promise, word. sive or seu, Conj., or if, or; sive honestus, -a, -um, honorable. .... sive .... (seu .... seu imperator, -Oris, M. 3, general. ....)? whether . ... or ... . iubeO, iubere, iussi, iussum, 2, superO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 (cf. bid, order. Takes Infinitive. superus, above, over), over- malo, malle, malui, , irr., coTne, defeat, conquer. tvant more, prefer. veto, vetare, vetur, vetitum, 1, malus (as before), bad, Compar. forbid. Takes Infinitive. peior, t^?or*se, Superl. pessimus, volo, velle, volul, , irr., worst. want, will. 1 Formed by the coming-together of four kinds of independent conditions. Thus: CONDITION CONCLUSION VoUtlve : let him come (veniat) : ^ Anticipatory : / expect him to come (veniat) : ( / should (in that case) be Optative : / hope he may come (veniat) : f glad (gaudeam). Potential: he may perhaps com,e {veniat) : ) When these constructions were used dependently (with si, etc.), the differences of feeling of course disappeared, leaving only the idea common to all the forms, namely that of a Condition. 2 The Subjunctive Conclusion is simply a statement of Mental Certainty. Exercises 195 500. READING MATTER (A soldier to Mark) Tecum, imperator, licetne mihi loqui? (Ans.) Te dicere iubeo. (Soldier) Hac re perterritus sum, quod ' mala tempest ate tam multos dies proelium exspectavimus. For- sitan aliquis iam Lucium de tuis consiliis certiorem^ fecerit.^ Etiam nunc, si quis eum certi5rem f ecerit, facile victor sit. (Ans.) Quando tu dixisti, respondebo; sed iratus sum quod omnin5 timuisti. Pessimum est exemplum. Num tu Liicium certidrem facere vis? (Soldier) Ego certe nol5; numquam volui fidem rumpere; sed non void ut alius id faciat. (Ans.) Quem tu putas velle? Id quod tii facere non vis, omnes nostri facere n5lint, quoniam hones ta volumus omnes. Et honesta aeque vult Liicius. Dignus est fide nostra. Sive nos vincemus sive ille vincet, nihil se indignum fecerit.^ Etiam si quis nostrum cum e5 de c5nsiliis nostris loqui velit, non liceat; vetet ilium Liicius omnino dicere. Is est hostis noster qui superari malit quam hoc modo vincere. Summa ille est fide. Quare n5li^ amplius de hac re vel mecum vel cum aliis loqui. 601. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. (Another repeats the scolding outside.) If we should make you general, should you want to talk with any one who should want* to inform you about the plans of the enemy? 2. (Ans.) I should not want (to). 3. (The other) Why should you think that Lucius wants (to)? 4. The boys of our school are all honor- able. 5. It is not permitted to believe anything unworthy of them. 6. You said that you were terrified lest some one should break faith. 7. Whether we shall fight now or after many days, no one will do this, since all would prefer to be defeated. 8. But as you have thought the worst, we order you to say nothing further. 9. If you talk about this again, we shall forbid you to fight along (Una) with the rest. 10. You will not be worthy. 1 Make more certain^ inform. ^ Be unwilling (to),=do not. 2 What difference from f ecerit above? * Really a condition, =i/ he. 196 Conjugation of Fio LESSON LXIV IRREGULAR VERBS (Continued) CONJUGATION OF fio, become 502. Fio, become^ serves as the Passive of facio, make, in the Present System. The Perfect System and the Future Passive Participle are formed regularly from facio . Principal Parts: ; ■ fioi fieri factus sum INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Pres. fio fis fit flam flam us flas fiatis fiat fiant fiunt Imperf, fiebam fierem Fut. fiam Perf. factus sum factus sim Past Perf. fact us eram factus essem Fut. Perf. factus ero IMPERATIVE INFINITIVE PARTICIPLE Pres. fi fite Pre!^. fieri Perf. factus Perf. factus esse Fut. faciendus Fut. factum . iri GERUND GERUNDIVE faciendi faciendi, -ae, -i faciendo . faciendo, -ae, -o faciendum faciendum, -am, -um faciendo faciendo, -a, -o SUPINE factum, -vl a. Compounds of faciO with Prepositions usually have the regular Passive. Thus the Principal Parts of cOnficiO are: Active: conficio, conficere, confeci, confectum. Passive: conficior, confici, confectus sum. iThe i is long throughout, except in fit and before short e (thus fieri, fierem). Conjugation of Eo 197 603. CONJUGATION OF ' eO, go (Note the contracted forms.) Principal Parts: eO Ire ir {or ivi) itum INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Pres. eo Imus earn eamus IS itis eas eatis it eunt eat eant Imperf. . ibam Irem Fut ibo Perf. il {or ivi) iimus ierim isti {or iisti) istis {or iistis) lit {or It) ierunt (< or iere) Past Perf. ieram issem Fut. Perf. iero IMPERATIVE INFINITIVE PARTICIPLE Pres. I ite Pres. Ire Pres. lens, lens, Gen. euntis Fut. Ito Itote Pei^f. isse (or iisse) Fut. ittirus ito eunto Fut. iturusesse Fut. Pass, eundum (est, Impersonal) GERUND eundl, eundo, eundum, eundo PICTURESQUE USES OP THE TENSES: HISTORICAL PRESENT, etc. 604. By the use of tenses properly belonging to the present point of view, a past scene may be vividly brought before the mind, and its . events pictured as now taking place. The dependent clauses may be made picturesque, by the same means, or they may be put in the sober tenses of the past. Thus: , Dux militi imperat ut eat, ' y the leader orders the soldier to go. Dux mrliti imperat ut iret, a. A Present Tense so used is called an Historical Present.^ iQur best English uses the picturesque tenses very little. And we regu- larly use them in all parts of the sentence, if in any. he saw the enemy, he changed his plan. 198 Narrative Clause with Ubi, etc, THE AORISTIC NARRATIVE CLAUSE WITH ubi, ut, post- quam, OR simul (atque) 506. Specimen Sentences: Ubi \ Ut / p , > hostls vidit, consilium mntavit. Simul (atque) / when when or as | after as soon as a. You notice that the four conjunctions of time here employed introduce a clause in narration, i. e., they tell you something (vIdit), in the progress of a story, as a preparation for the main event (mnta- vit). And you notice also that the tense used is an aorist (not " when he had seen" which would be situation, but merely "when he saiv"). This is the regular usage. We may then lay down the rule that: 606. An Aoristic Indicative Clause with ubi, ut, post- quam, or simul (atque), may he used in narration to introduce the main event. The tense is the Perfect or the Historical Present, a. The Aoristic Narrative Clause is interchangeable with the Descriptive cum-Clause of Situation (487). Thus you may say; (either) ubi hostls vidit, \ when he saw the enemy, I consilium motavit, (or) cum hostrs vidisset, I he changed his plan, when he had seen the enemy, ] THE ABLATIVE OP ACCOMPANIMENT 607. As we have repeatedly seen, Accompaniment is expressed by cum and the Ablative, Cum amico profectus suip, I set out with a friend, a. But in military language cum may he omitted, if the noun has a modifier, and this is not a numeral. Thus: Omnibus cOpils profectus sum, I set out with all my forces. (but) Cum tlna legione profectus sum, I set out with one legion. Exercise . 199 508. VOCABULARY adpropinquo, -are, -avl, -atum, 1, paltls, -Gdis, F. 3, swamp. approach. Word of Relation. posterus, -a,-um (cf. post, after), conlocO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 (cf. following. Compar. posterior, con- and locus), place, station. later, Superl. postremus or decedO,-cedere,-cessr,-cessum,3 postumus, latest. {de-{-ced6), go away, withdraw. suspicor, -arl, -atus sum, 1, eO, rre, ii (or IvI), itum, irr., go. suspect. fro, fieri, factus sum, irr., become. triplex, -ex. Gen. -icis, triple. Used also as Passive of facio. ubi (as before) where; also intra, within. Prep., taking Ace. when. meridies, -el, M. 5, midday- ut (as before), as; also when. 509. READING MATTER (Fair weather. The battle) Postero die post meridiem duo exercitus ad sua quisque castra eunt. Omnia more Roman5 fiunt. Lucius aciem triplicem instruit. Marcus, quia minorem habebat numerum, maiorem partem suorum in duplici acie c5nstituit; reliquos intra silvam prope paludem quandam conlocat. Haec autem paliis a silva ad flumen pertinebat. Paulo ante decimam horam, indices eos qui pugnam spectatum venerant certiores fecerunt tempus pugnandi adesse; ipsi sub colles in extremam vallem decederent;^ qui ex eo loco exces- sissent^ priusquam decertatum esset,^ eos ex valle pulsum iri. Ubi signum pugnae datum est, Liici exercitus ad fliimen contendit . Marci autem milites, ita ut iussi erant, minus celeriter ponti adpropinquaverunt. Lucius eum prior transgressus in milites Marci omnibus copiis impetum acerrime fecit. Hi, se perterritos esse simulantes, terga verterunt atque secundum fliimen cucurrerunt. Insecuti sunt hostes. Etiam tum, si Liicius de dolis suspicatus esset,^ facile propter numerum suorum victor esset.^ Sed nihil est suspicatus. iCommand of judges (Vol. Subj.). 2PastFut.-Perf. (English '^should"). ^A Future Condition and Conclusion from a past point of view: Even thent if Lucius should suspect stratagems, he would easily be victor. 200 Regular Comparison of Adjectives LESSON LXV COMPARISON 510. Introductory. You have already become familiar with the common types. of regular comparison, both for Adjectives and for Adverbs, and with the comparison of nearly all the more important irregular words also; but the whole will now be put together for review, distributed among three Lessons. REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 611. 1. The Comparative is regularly formed by adding -ior, the Superlative by adding -issimus, to the stem of the Positive minus its final vowel, if it has one. Thus: POSITIVE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE certus . certior certissimus drligens drligentior diligentissimus 2. Adjectives in -er form the Superlative in -errimus, as if by adding -rimus to the -er. Thus: acer acrior acerrimus aeger aegrior aegerrimus 3. Certain Adjectives in -ills form the Superlative in -illimus, as if by adding -limus to the stem of the Positive minus its final vowel. Thus: facilis facilior facillimus difficilis difficilior difficillimus 4. But many Adjectives form the Comparative and Superlative by prefixing magis, more., and maxime, most., to the Positive. This is true of most Adjectives in which the vowel of the stem is itself preceded by another vowel. Thus: idoneus magis idOneus maxime idoneus Ablative of Manner, — Historical Infinitive 201 THE ABLATIVE OF WAY OR MANNER 512. Specimen Sentences: CasQ eum vidi, I saw him by chance. Hoc modo vincO, I conquer by this method {—in this way), Pedibus Ibo, I shall go (with the feet =) on foot. Cum ccira omnia explOras, you explore everything with care. Magna cum cQra omnia explOras, you explore everything ivith great care. a. You see that Way or Manner may be expressed by the Ablative.^ b. The construction, being very common, in the main resisted the coming-in of prepositions.^ The usage may then be stated thus: 513. Way or Manner may he expressed by the Ablative, regularly without a Preposition. But Abstract Nouns hi less frequent use take cum if there is no Modifier, and MA Y take it even if there is one, THE HISTORICAL INFINITIVE 514. Specimen Sentences: Duo exercitQs prOcurrerunt, proelium commiserunt. SubitO hostes fugere, the two armies rushed forward, and joined battle. Suddenly the enemy fled. a. Such constructions occur in lively passages. — As you see, the Infinitive here makes a statement, just as an Indicative would do.^ And you notice that, like an Indicative, it has its Subject in the Nominative. We may then lay down the rule that: 515. In lively narration, the Infinitive may be used in place of an Indicative. Its Subject is then in the Nominative. iThe construction is of composite origin, formed from the coming- together of Ablative, Sociative, and Locative uses. Cf. English ''from de- sign," ""with design," " in haste " (all expressing Manner). But in English the Prepositions keep the three constructions from coming to seem like one. 2 In the oldest stage of language there were no prepositions. 3 This construction probably originated in a Locative use of the Infinitive, when the two forms (-e and -i) still had their case-forces. Thus,- lo! the enemy in flight ! 202 Clause with Quod, etc, — Ablative of Separation CLAUSE OF CAUSE OR REASON WITH quod, quia, quoniam, OR quando 516. Specimen Sentences: GaudeO quod tCi vales, I am glad that (= because) you are well. Quia valeO, pugnabo, because I am well, I shall fight. Quoniam otium habes, veni, since you have leisure, come. QuandO puerl pugnatnrf sunt, ego certe adero, since the boys are going to fight, I shall certainly be present. a. In these examples, as you see, the Indicative clause states a fact, as the Cause or Reason for something given in the main sentence. We may then lay down the rule that: 617. Cause or Reason may he expressed by an Indica- tive Clause with quod, quia, quoniam, or quando.^ ABLATIVE WITH VERBS OF SEPARATION 518. Specimen Sentences: Castrls suOs edacit, he leads his men out of the camp. Ex castrls suOs edncit, he leads his men out of the camp. Pugna desistunt, they cease from fighting. a. Verbs of separation are mostly compounds containing one of the separative prepositions, ab, de, ex. The three examples illus- trate the general usage of nouns depending upon them. In the first two, literal separation in place is expressed, and either with or with- out a preposition. In the last, figurative separation is expressed, and no preposition is used. This corresponds to the regular usage. We may then lay down the rule that: 519. Verbs of Separation take the Ablative, with or without a Preposition. But verbs expressing Figurative Separation only regularly omit the Preposition. lYou can easily see how the force of Cause or Reason came into the clause with quod. " I am glad that " naturally suggests " I am glad because." Quia (which is an old Neuter PI. of qui, just as quod is a Neuter Sing.) got its causal force in the same way. Quoniam and quandd, which were originally conjunctions of time meaning when, have gained their causal force in the same way as EngUsh *' since." Exercise 203 520. VOCABULARY circumdo, -dare, -dedr, -datum, insidiae, -arum, F. 1, ambush, 1 (circum -|- do), throw around, ambuscade. surround, interclQdO, -cladere, -closi, -cln- clamO, -are, -a VI, -atum, 1, s/iot*^. sum, 3 (inter+claudo, shut), clamor, -Oris, M. 3, shout. shut in, hem in, block. confertus, -a, -um, crowded. labor, labl, lapsus sum, 3, slip. cOnfestim, Adv., immediately. manus, -ns, F. 4, hand; band. cursus, -ns, M. 4, running, run. subsidium, -T, N. 2, reserve, rein- demum, Adv., at last, finally. for cement, help. eicio, eicere, eieci, eiectum, 3 transeO, -Ire, -il, -itum, irr. (e-j-iacio), throw out. Me (trans + eO), go across, cross eicio, I rush out. over, go over. 521. READING MATTER (The End of the Battle) Ubi autem pri5res milites Luci magno cursu euntes paludi adpropinquaverunt, ex exercitu Marcl ii qui (in) extrem5 dextro cornu constiterant restiterunt, hostibusque obstabant. Idem ab alils deinceps factum est, ita ut tota mox acies contra milites Luci constitissent. Hi autem, cum maxime temere essent con- seciiti, nunc inter flumen et Marci exercitum intercliisi erant; nam a sinistr5 latere paliis progredi vetabat. Tum ii quos Marcus in insidiis conlocaverat magno (cum) clamore se ex silvis eiciunt, suisque subsidio veniunt; simulque tertia acies, cum ad sinistram cdnfestim transisset, hostes etiam ab h5c latere circumvenit. Sic Marcus, flumine et paliide usus, minore exercitu exercitum maiorem undique circumdederat. Tum demum verum commissum est proelium. LQcius suis clamare^ ut omnibus viribus pugnarent. Hi autem, ut^ in tali re fit,^ ita inter se conferti erant ut manibus armisque non pos- sent commode iiti; et quidam etiam, ex inferiore loco in fliimen lapsi, magno in periculo erant. Itaque iiidices imperaverunt ut omnes pugna desisterent; Marcum^ enim superavisse.^ 1 Historical Infinitive. 2 ^g happens in such a case. 8 The Accusative- with-Infinitive betrays Indirect Discourse. 204 Conjugation of Fero 522. LESSON LXVI IRREGULAR VERB^ (Finished) CONJUGATION OF ferO, bear Principal Parts: ferO ferre tuir latum Active Passive Indic. SUBJ. Indic. Sub J. Pres. fero feram feror ferar fers feras ferris feraris or -e fert ferat fertur feratur ferimus feram us ferimur feramur fertis feratis ferimini feramini ferunt ferant feruntur ferantur Imperf. ferebam ferrem ferebar ferrer Fut. feram ferar Perf. tuli tulerim latus sum latus sim Past Perf. tuleram tulissem latus eram latus essem Fut. Perf. tulero latus ero IMPERATIVE Pres, feri ferte ferre ferimini Fut. ferto fertote fertor ferto ferunto fertor feruntor INFINITIVE Pres. ferre ferri Perf. tulisse latus (esse) Fut. laturus (esse) latum iri PARTICIPLE Pres. ferens Perf latus Fut. laturus Fut. ferendus SUPINE GERUND GERUNDIVE latum, -u ferendl, etc. ferendl, ferendae, ferendi, etc. 1 Dico, duco, f acio, and fero have Imperatives die, due, fac, fer. Conditions and Conclusions Cojitrary to Fad 205 CONDITIONS AND CONCLUSIONS CONTRARY TO FACT (New Force Gained by the Subjunctive Tenses of the Past) 623. In the Eeading Matter of 609 we had the sentence: Etiam turn, si Lucius de dolls suspicatus esset, facile propter nume- rum suOrum victor esset, even then, if Lucius should suspect stratagems, he would easily be victor on account of the number of his men. a. The mind of the teller of the story was here fixed upon a point in the past, at which the outcome of the battle was still in the future. Si suspicatus esset is a past future-perfect and victor esset is apast future (i. e., the expression of a mental certainty about something which at this past time was sure to come). b. But as we look back from the present point of view, we see that both condition and conclusion express something which we know to be contrary to the actual fact. Lucius did not suspect, and is not victor. Practically, then, the meaning suggested becomes " if Lucius had suspected, he would now be the victor." In this way, the Imperfect and Past Perfect Subjunctive get the new power of expressing conditions and conclusions contrary to fact, the Imperfect dealing with Present time, and the Past Perfect with finished action at any time in the past up to the present moment. We may then lay down the rule that: 624. Conditions and Conclusions Contrary to Fact are expressed by the Imperfect and Past Perfect Subjunctive. The Imperfect refers to the Present, the Past Perfect to the Past. a. We may now present all Conditions and Conclusions together: 526. Table of Conditions and Conclusions (Summary) Future ( More Vivid: Indicative, Future or Future Perfect. I Less Vivid: Subjunctive, Present or Perfect. Neutral: Indicative, Present or Past Tenses. Contrary to Fact: Subjunctive, Imperfect or Past Perfect. 206 Dative after Compound Verbs DATIVE AFTER VERBS COMPOUNDED WITH CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS 626. Specimen Sentences: Disciplina animum exercitul adfert (ad + fert), discipline brings spirit to an army, Pontl adpropinquant, they approach {draw near to) the bridge. M&rcus exercitul praeest, Mark [is in front for the army, =) is in command of the army. a. The Dative in the first example is the Dative of Direction, just as it would be after ferO without ad. In the second it is the Dative of Relation (after adpropinquO, draw near to, just as after propin- quus, near to). In the third, it is the Dative of the Persons Con- cerned. Now a great many instances of the kind occurred with verbs thus compounded with Prepositions. The result was that it seemed natural to use the Dative with verbs compounded with any Preposition, unless the idea of space-relation was too prominent. We may then lay down the rule that: 627. The Dative is used after many Verbs compounded with certain Prepositions. (These are ad, ante, circum, con-, in, inter, ob, post, prae, pro, sub, and super) „ 528. VOCABULARY adferO, adferre, attull, allatum, partior, -Irl, -itus' sum, 4, sTiare. irr. (ad + ferO), bring (to). poUiceor, -licerl, -licitus sum, 2, citerior, -ius, on this side, hither promise. (a Compar. form). Superl. propior, -ius, nearer (a Com- citimus, hithermost. par. form). Superl. proximus, dimicO, -are, -avT, -atum, 1, fight. nearest, close by. facultas, -atis, F. 3 (cf. facilis), quoad (quo + ad, up to what facility; opportunity, time), Conj., until (like dum). ferO, ferre, tulT, latum, irr., bear, super, above. Prep., taking Ace. bring, carry. tradtlcO, -dDcere, -dGxi, -ductum, fortnna, -ae, F. 1, fortune. 3 (trans + dOcO), lead across. miror, -ari, -atus sum, 1, admire, tumulus, -i, M. 2, mound, low hill. noctCi, Adv., at night, by night. ulterior, -ius, on the other side, occupo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, take farther (a Compar. form). possession of, occupy, Superl. ultimus, farthest. Exercise 207 629. READING MATTER Omiies nunc Marci mirabantur ingenium. Lucius autem, qui vellet hanc gloriam partiri saltern, aegre pugnam^ adver- sam^ ferebat. Itaque cum domum Marci noctu venisset, 5rat^ ut iterum liceat^ dimicare; sese enim de- dolls atque insidiis nihil providisse. "Si," inquit, "e5dem nos mod5 pugnavisse- mus,^ ego nunc victor essem."^ "Ita vero," inquit Marcus; "sed, nisi ego providissem ^ divers5 nos modo pugnaturos, tibi maiorem exercitum numquam dedissem.^ Si tu autem fortunam tuam aegre fers, facultatem quam petis dabo.^ Ut tu vis, fiat. Concede ut iterum decertetur." Itaque pronQntiatum est exer- citiis poster5 die iterum dlmicatQros. liidices idem qui* an tea* se proelio adfore polliciti sunti Hora pugnae constitiita signo dato, Marcus suos trans pon- tem magno cursu tradiicit. Liicius autem, qui dolis iterum superari n5llet,^ omniaque nunc timeret, tumulum silvae proxi- mum occupat, superque eum instriictis suis, exspectabat quoad se Marcus adgrederetur.^ Id fecit, ne quod auxilium huic in pugna adferretur. Marcus autem, quia putaverat in. ulteriore parte vallis, non in citeriore, pugnatum iri, omnia pr5viderat. Itaque suis copiis progressus est quoad sub tumulum venit,^ ubi eas consistere iubet. "^ Adverse battle^ = defeat, 2 0rat expresses neither exactly Will nor exactly Wish, but rather Request or Entreaty ; and the Substantive Clause that follows of course expresses the same idea. Some grammarians put this with the Volitive Subjunctive, others with the Optative. But the languages that keep the two moods distinct show that both were used to express the idea ; and the Latin usage has thus prob- ably come down from both. Compare English " I beg that he shall be for- given" (Volitive form) and "I beg that he may be forgiven" (Optative form). — The same is true of the corresponding idea of Consent, seen in fiat and in concedo ut iterum decertetur (Substantive Clause) below. 3 What kind of Condition and Conclusion ? ^ The same (who had promised) before, = the same as before. fi Causal qui-Clause, — because he didn^t wish .... ^Ijooked forward to by Lucius (Anticipatory Subjunctive). } Both with 7 Looked back upon by the narrator (Indicative of Fact). ) quoad. 208 Irregular Comparison of Adjectives LESSON LXVII IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 530. Several Adjectives show two or three different stems in the three Degrees, or different forms of the same stem. Compare English good, better, best. Thus: ' bonus, good malus, bad magnus, great multus, much parvus, small melior, better peior, worse maior, greater plQs, more minor, smaller optimus, best pessimus, ivorst maximus, greatest plQrimus, Tnost minimus, smallest 531. For a few Adjectives, the Positive is lacking or rare, or appears only in Adverbs or Prepositions. Thus:^ citra, on this side ultra, beyond in, intra, within prope, near prae, prO, before exterus, outside (and ex) Inferus, below superus, above (and super) ^ost&Tws y folloiving (and post) citerior, hither ulterior, farther interior, inner propior, nearer prior, former exterior, outer Inferior, lower superior, higher posterior, later citimus y hithermost ultimus, farthest intimus, innermost proximus, nearest primus y first ( extremus ) ( extimus ) ( Infimus ) outermost lowest 'hest supremus) , . , > high( I summus ) { postremus ) last I postumus ) late-born 1 The definitions given in the list represent the simplest meanings. But most of the words have figurative meanings also. For example, you will find superior in the Reading Matter of the present Lesson in the sense of higher-in-point-of-thne, i.e., former; and it also often means superior, just as the opposite, inferior, lower, often means inferior. Subjunctive of Indirect Discourse 209 THE SUBJUNCTIVE OP INDIRECT DISCOURSE (Finished) 532. Specimen Sentences (from the Reading Matter of 609): Paulo ante decimam hOram iudices eOs qui pugnam spectatum venerant certiOres fecerunt tempus pugnandr adesse; ipsi sub colles in extremam vallem decederent; qui ex eO locO excessissent priusquam decertatum esset, eOs ex valle pulsum Irl. A little before four o'clock the judges informed those who had come to see the battle that the time for the fighting was at hand; that they (the spectators) should withdraw und.er the hills at the edge of the valley ; that those ivho should leave that place before the battle should be finished icould be expelled from the valley. a. All of the sentence after the words certiOres fecerunt reports in substance what the judges said, but it is not in their exact words. It is thus in Indirect Discourse. b. The first thing said is that the time was at hand (in the origi- nal form, tempus adest, "the time is at hand"). This, as the Prin- cipal Statement, is expressed by the Infinitive, as you have already learned in 465. c. The next thing is a Command, which in the original form would be expressed by an Imperative, sub colles discedite, "withdraw under the hills." But the Imperative cannot be used here, because that mood is, by its very nature, the form for direct command. Some other mood must therefore be employed, and this must have in effect the same power. Obviously the Volitive Subjunctive has it, and so completely meets the needs. The same holds true similarly in Prohi- bitions {negative commands). d. The next thing originally said was: "Those who shall leave that place," qui ex eO locO excederint (Future Perfect Indicative), "before the battle shall be over, will be expelled from the valley." The future idea in "who shall leave," being thrown back into the past, becomes apas^future idea (just as priusquam decertatum esset, "before the battle should be finished," is); and you already know (381) that the one and only way which the Romans had for expressing a past-future idea in a dependent clause by a single verb is the Anticipatory Sub- junctive. In this indirect telling of the story, then, the Future Perfect Indicative must necessarily become a Subjunctive. 210 Summary of Constructions of Indirect Discourse e. In other words, the Future or Future Perfect Indicative would necessarily go over into the Subjunctive if the time of the main verb was past; and the Imperative would necessarily do so, no matter what the time was. But the two things happened so often that it seemed natural to put ALL clauses in Indirect Discourse (except the Prin- cipal Statement) into the same mood; and this became the fixed habit. We may then sum up as follows: THE CONSTRUCTIONS IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE (Summary) 533. In Indirect Discourse the Principal Statement is put in the Infinitive, with Subject Accusative {which may he omitted if perfectly clear). All other verbs that would be in the Indicative if in Direct Discourse, and all Com- mands or Prohibitions, are put in the Subjunctive. Thus: Ntlntius imperatOrl dicit quid factum sit; si prOgrediatur, magnO eum in periculo futDrum esse, quia itinera interclQsa sint, the messen- *ger tells the general what has been done ; that, if he shall advance, he will be in great danger, because the roads are blocked. a. Quid factum sit stands for quid factum est? a Question of Fact: what has been done 9 b. Si prOgrediatur stands for si prOgredieris, a more Vivid Future Condition : if you shall advance. (Note the change of Persons.) c. Quia itinera intercIOsa sint stands for quia itinera interclGsa sunt, a Clause of Cause or Reason with quia: because the roads are blocked. (Cf. 517.) 534. Table of the Constructions of Indirect Discourse by Kinds CONSTRUCTION EXPRESSED BY Indirect (Principal) Statements of Fact Infinitive with Subject Accusa- tive Indirect Questions of Fact Subjunctive Indirect Commands or Prohi- bitions Subjunctive (ut, ne) Glauses Subordinate to any of these Subjunctive Exercise 211 635. VOCABULARY conclamO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 orbis, -is, -ium, M. 3, circle. In (con- + clamo), shout vigor- orhem cCtnsistO, take position ously, shout out. in a circle. cOnsultO, Adv., purposely, inten- partim, Adv., partly. tionally. praeficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum, 3 demitto, -mittere, -misT, -mis- (prae + facio, make to be in sum,3(de+mitt0), .^end dozfti, front), put in command (of). let down. Me demitto, I de- quasi. Adv. (cf. quam and si), as scend, come down. if, almost. exiguus, -a, -um, scanty, slight. refer 0,-fer re, -tull, -latum (re- + initium, -I, N. 2, beginning. ferO), irr., bring back. Pedem InstO, -stare, -stiti, -statQrus, 1 refero, I retreat, retire. (in + sto, stand on against), traho, trahere, traxl, tractum,3, press on. draiv, drag ; drag out. interior y inner. See 531. vOx, vOcis, P. 3, tJOice. 536. READING MATTER Turn clamat Marcus, "Quid vis? Cur rem trahis? Si c5pias nostras exiguas times, cur non in intima silva mansisti?'' Ad quae quaesivit Lucius, ubi Marcus reliquos in insidiis conloca- visset, qui sibi subsidium ferrenti Is respondet omnes adesse omnesque paratos esse dimicare. Tum magna voce, ut hostes audire possent, suos progredi iussit; sed legatis quos comibus dextro et sinistr5 praefecerat (ipse mediae aciei praeerat) iam ante (m advance) docuerat quid in tali re facerent. Conclamant omnes. Acerrime initio pugnatum est. Tum Marcus cum pueris minoribus, quos consult© media acie conloca- verat, pedem celeriter referunt; cornua tardius (Compar.) cedunt. Hostes, qui se iam vicisse crederent, cupide instare. Ita fit ut omnes mox Liici milites de tumulo sese demisissent, atque uter- que exercitus quasi in orbem c5nstitisset. Tum tertia Marci acies, subito partim ad dextram partim ad sinistram transgressa, hostis adgressa est a tergo. Sic minor exercitus exercitum maio- rem aequo loco undique circumvenerat, militesque Liici, ut superidre pugna, armis commode uti non poterant. Tum iiidices proniintiaverunt Marcum iterum vicisse. 212 Formation and Comparison of Adverbs LESSON LXVIII FORMATION OP ADVERBS 537. 1. Adverbs from Adjectives of the First and Sec- ond Declensions commonly end in e. Thus tardus, Adv. tarde; aeger, Adv. aegre. 2. Adverbs from Adjectives of the Third Declension commonly end in -ter. Thus diligens (Gen. diligentis), Adv. diligenter; acer (Gen. acris), Adv. acriter. REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADVERBS 638. In Comparison the Adverb follows the formation of the Adjective, except that the Comparative ends in -ius (like the Neuter Nominative- Accusative of the Compara- tive Adjective), and the Superlative in -e. Thus: tarde, sZoii^Z?/ t2iv6mSy more slowly tardissime, mos^ slowly diligenter, diligently dlligentius, more dili- diligentissime, most gently diligently Sicnt^v y fiercely SicnuSy m.ore fiercely Sicerrime, most fiercely facile, easily facilius, more easily facillime, 7nost easily a. Magis and maxime are often used, as with Adjectives (511, 4). IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE COMPARISON OF ADVERBS 539. The following show two or three different stems in the three Degrees (like the corresponding Adjectives given in 630), or are otherwise peculiar or defective: bene, well melius, better optime, best male, ill peius, worse pessime, worst magnopere, ) greatly . . _ . T, f , magis, more maxime, most multum, ) much multum, mt^c/i plQs, more plQrimum, mos^ parum, little minus, less minime, least prius, before primum, first prope,7iear propius, neai^er proxime, iiearest,7iext saepe, often saepius, oftener saepissime, oftenest Infinitive with Subject Accusative 213 SPECIAL USES OF THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLA- TIVE DEGREES 540. The Comparative Degree sometimes has the force of rather .... or too . . . . , and the Superlative of very .... Thus: cupidus, eager cupidior, too eager cupidissimus, very eager cupidey eagerly cupidiusy too eagerly cupidissimej^er?/ eagerly INFINITIVE WITH SUBJECT ACCUSATIVE (More General Construction) 541. Specimen Sentences: Optimum est nOs Ire, It is best {for us to go, — ) that tee go. Volo te Ire, I want you to go. So in a variety of uses. Hence, we may say that: 542. The Infinitive ivith Subject Accusative may be used in dependence upon many Verbs and Phrases.^ 543. You will note that this construction comes into a sort of rivalry with the Subjunctive construction. Compare the following: Volo te Ire, I ivant you to go. Volo ut tti eas, I want {that you go, = ) you to go. a. Some verbs and phrases admit either construction (as volO) others the Subjunctive only (as impenO), others the Infinitive only (as iubeo and veto). You should note as you read, and remember. SUBJUNCTIVE BY ATTRACTION IN CLAUSES DEPENDING UPON A SUBJUNCTIVE OR INFINITIVE] 544. Specimen Sentences: MOs est ut reges qui victi sint in triumpho dncantur, it is the custom that kings who have been conquered should be led in triumph. Mos est reges qui victI sint in triumphO dCicI, it is the custom for kings xoho have been conquered to be led in triumph. 1 Another instance of the general development seen in the footnotes on pages 181, 182, — due to the influence of the Infinitive with Subject Accusa- tive in Indirect Discourse, and of such natural constructions of Accusative and Infinitive as in "compel him to . . . ," "urge him to . . . , " where the Infinitive was originally a Dative of Direction. 214 Subjunctive by Attraction a. The Subjunctive Clauses in these sentences have no reason in themselves for being in that mood. If attached to Indicatives, they would also be Indicative (thus reges qui victi sunt in triumpho dacuntur, kings who are conquered are led in triumph). The reason for the mood here must therefore be that the clauses are influenced by the Subjunctive and Infinitive. We may then lay down the rule that : 545. A Dependent Clause attached to a Subjunctive or Infinitive Clause, and expressing an essential part of the thought conveyed by it, is put in the Subjunctive? 546. VOCABULARY accurrO, -currere, -curri and -cu- curri, — , 3 (ad+currO), run up. BaculuSy -I, M. 2, a Roman name. cognOscO, -gnOscere, -gnOvi, -gnitum,3(con — (-nOscO, earlier form gnOscO), learn thorough- ly, find out ; recognize. commtltO,-are,-avi,-atum,l(con- +mtltO) completely change. conligo, -ligere, -legi, -lectum,,3 (con-+legO), gather, collect. deficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum, 3 (de+facio, make away), fail. erumpO, -rumpere, -rOpi, -rup- tum, 3 (e+rumpo), hieak out, sally out. eruptio, -Onis, F. 3, sally. excipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum, 3 (ex+capio, take from some one), receive, pick up. experior, experirl, expertus sum, 4, try. Galba, -ae, M. l,a Roman name. inter ficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum, 3, kill. intermitto, -mittere, -mlsi, -mis- sum, 3 (inter-j-mitto, send be- tween), intermit, stop. porta, -ae, F. 1, gate. relinquo,-linquere, -llqul, -lictum, 3 (cf. reliquus), leave. salGs, -Gtis, F. 3, salvation, safety. sex, indecl. Adj., six. Sextius, -1, M. 2, a name. spes, -ei, F. 4, hope. tantummodo, Adv. (tantum+mo- do., so much only), merely. telum, -1, N. 2, missile. Volusenus, -i, M. 2, a name. iThis usage came about especially through the frequent occurrence (1) of dependent Subjunctive clauses which really owed their Mood to Indirect Discourse, but happened to be dependent upon other Subjunctive Clauses ; (2) of past-future Subjunctives in dependence upon other Subjunctives ; and (3) of Subjunctive clauses with real but not obvious mood-force, in dei)endence upon other Subjunctives (cf. 501, 1, footnote 4). The use with the Infinitive is a still further extension. Exercises 215 547. READING MATTER ' (An Incident from Real Warfare : Victory in a Desperate Situation) Cum iam amplius horis sex pugnaretur^ ac non solum vires sed etiam tela nostros defieerent, Publius Sextius Baculus, cen- turio, et Gaius Volusenus, tribunus militum, vir et consilT magni et virtutis, ad Galbam accurrunt atque unam esse ^ spem salutis decent, si eruptione facta extremum^ auxilium^ experirentur.* Itaque celeriter milites certiores facit paulisper intermitterenf^ proelium ac tantummodo tela quae missa essent*"' exciperent; post dat5 signo ex castris erumperent atque omnem spem salu- tis in virtiite ponerent. Quod iussi sunt faciunt, ac subito omnibus portis eruptione facta neque cognoscendi quid fieret^ neque sui conligendi hosti- bus facultatem relinquunt. Itaque commutata fortuna eos qui in spem^ potiundorum castrorum venerant undique circumven- tos^ interficiunt.^ 548. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. They had now been fighting more than six hours and not only strength but missiles were failing. 2. Then a centurion and a tribune showed Galba that, unless they should try a des- perate remedy, there was no hope of safety; (that) if, however, stopping*^ the battle ^^ for a little, and merely picking up the missiles that should be sent, they should sally out by all the gates, they would leave the enemy no opportunity for collecting themselves or for knowing what was going on;^^ and would surround and kill those who had come to hope to possess the camp. And-this ^^ was done. iMust mean HAD now BEEN. 7 indirect Question of Fact. Trans- Note horis sex. late what was going on. 2 Indirect Principal Statement. 8 jjad come INTO the hope (notice 3 = a desperate remedy. the case), = had come to hope. 4 Indirect Future Condition. ^ Kill those . . . . , surrounded. 6 Indirect Command. In English, surround and kill. 6 Past-Future Subj., also in Indir. lo Use the Ablative Absolute. Disc., and also suggesting Attraction. ii = ''was being done." Of. footnote on opposite page. ^^ Uge the connecting pronoun. 216 Reading PART III: SUPPLEMENTARY READING THE GALLIC UPRISING OF 64 B. C.^ CHAPTER I 549. Disposition of the Roman Army in Belgium for the Winter Eo anno propter frumenti inopiam coactus est Caesar legiones in pluris eivitatis distribuere; ex quibus unam in^ Morinos ducendam^ C. Fabio legato dedit, alteram in Nervios Q. Cice- roni, tertiam in Esiivios L. Roscio. Quartam in* Remis cumT. Labieno ad fines Trevirorum hiemare iiissit. Tres in Bellovacis conlocavit; his M. Crassum et L. Miinatium Plancum et C. Tre- bonium legatos praefecit. tJnam legionem et cohortis quinque in Eburones, qui sub imperio Ambiorigis et Catuvolci erant, misit. His militibus Q. Titiirium Sabinum et L. Aurunculeium Cottam legatos praeesse iussit. 1 You have finished your study of forms and constructions, and are now to see how effectively you can use your knowledge, to understand what a Roman writer has to say. The Lessons from this point on tell the story of a dramatic chain of events in one of the Gallic campaigns of Julius Caesar. Five years before, Rome had possessed, of what we now know as France, a small territory in the southeast. Caesar, the Roman governor of this prov- ince and also of North Italy and a strip of country further east, checked an attempted westward migration of the Swiss, which threatened the province. From this beginning, he became involved (not unwillingly) in a series of wars ; and, when our story opens, he had i)raotically conquered France and Belgium, and had even made a tentative invasion of Britain. In all this, he was spreading the civilization which we have inherited. In the autumn of 54 before Christ, his work was nearly undone by a sud- den uprising, and the bad error of judgment of two of his lieutenants. For- tunately, he had not yet gone back to North Italy for the winter. These Chapters tell, in his own narrative (condensed), what happened. ^Into (note the Accusative) the country of. ^ You see that the Future Passive Participle can serve to express Purpofie. *In (note the Ablative) the country of. Writing 217 660. VOCABULARY cOgO, cOgere, cOegi, coactum, 3 (con- + ago, drive together), gather; compel. distribuO, -tribuere, -tribui, -tri- bntum, 3, distribute. frtimentum, -T, N. 2, grain. hiemO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 (cf. hiemsj, winter. inopia, -ae, F. 1, want, lack, scarcity, (Opposite of cOpia.) quartus, -a, -um, fourth. quinque, indecl. Adj., five. ROMAN NAMES ROMAN NAMES (CONT'd) GALLIC NATIONS Aurunculeius, -i. Roscius, -I. BellovacI, -Orum. Sablnus, -1. TitCirius, -i. Titus, -1. Trebonius, -i. Caesar, Caesaris. Cicero, -Onis. Cotta, -ae. Crassus,-!. Fabius, -i. Labienus, -T. MOnatius, -1. Plancus, -1. Abbreviations T., Titus. GALLIC KINGS Ambiorix, -Igis. Catuvolcus, -1. EburOnes, -urn. Esuvir, -Orum. Morini, -Orum. Nervii, -Orum. Also Sing. Nervius, a Ner- vian. Remi, -Orum. Treverl, -Orum. C, Gaius; L., LQcius; M., Marcus; Q., QuFntus; 651. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION! 1. There was a scarcity of grain this year. 2. If ^ the legions should winter^ together, the supply ^ from the neighboring* coun- try would fail.^ 3. Caesar therefore distributed them among several states. 4. He gave one. legion and five cohorts to Sabinus and Cotta to lead^ into the country of the Eburones; (and) another legion to Labienus to lead into the country of the Remi. 5. Another legion he placed in the country of the Esuvii; (and) this he ordered Cicero to command. 6. Others he sent to different regions, with different lieutenants. 1 The notes will now l^ave you more largely to your own power of think- ing out Latin ways of expression, both for choice of words and for con- structions. 2 A Future Condition and Conclusion from a jtast point of view. 3 Use copia. 4 Use propinquus and loca. ^Purpose. Express it as Caesar did in the Latin oi)posite. 218 Beading CHAPTER II 552. Revolt of Ambiorix and Catuvolcus Atque harum omnium legi5num hiberna milibus passuum centum continebantur.V Caesar interea, quoad '^^ legiones conlo- catas munitaque hiberna cognovisset, in Gallia morari constituit. Ab omnibus, quibus legiones tradiderat, certior factus est in hiberna perventum locum que esse mdnitum. Diebus qumdecim quibus^ in hiberna ventum est, initium repentini tumult us ortum est ab Ambiorige et Catuvolc5; qui,* Indutiomari Treveri nuntiis impulsi, ad castra oppugnatum venerunt.* Cum celeriter nostri arma cepissent vallumque ascen- dissent, atque, equitibus emissis, equestri proelio superiores^ fuissent,^ desperata re^ hostes suos ab oppugnatione reduxerunt. Tum suo more conclamaverunt, uti^ aliqui^ ex nostris ad conlo- quium prodiret : habere^ sese, quae de re communi dicere vellent.^*^ 1 Tense of the Situation, the State of Affairs. 2 Summary of ideas with words meaning until (dum, donee, and quoad) : ! Actual Act looked back upon, Indicative. Act looked forward to (Anticipated), Subjunctive. 3 Withiyi which. In English we say after. 4 Really independent. A Forward-Moving Relative Clause. ^Higher in what sense? If you cannot see, consult p. 208, footnote 1. 6 Note two ways of introduction used together, the cum-Clause and the Ablative Absolute. 7 At once, you see that a Volitive Substantive Clause is coming. *^ Unusual use of aliqui as Substantive, in place of aliquis. 9 This must be a Principal Statement in Indirect Discourse. Now look back at uti . . . . prodiret, and you will find that the two fill out the meaning of the same verb, conclamaverunt. The whole is thus clearly in Indirect Dis- course. This shows us once more that there is no real difference between a Volitive Clause after a verb of saying, and a Command in Indirect Discourse. The latter is only one particular instance of the former. 10 Why is vellent Subjunctive, and what does it stand for? Writing 219 553. VOCABULARY ascendo, ascendere, ascendi, as- censum, 3, ascend, mount. centum, indecl. Adj., a hundred. conloquium, -i, N. 2, colloquy. desperO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 (de + sperO, hope), despair (of). emitto, emittere, emisl, emissum, 3 (e + mitto), send out. eques, equitis, M. 3, horseman, cavalryman. In PL, cavalry. equestris, -e, cavalry (as Adj.). Gallia, -ae, F. 1, Gaul. hiberna, -Orum, N. 2, a winter camp, winter quarters. impellO,-pellere, -pull,-pulsum, 3 (in + pello, drive on), impel. IndQtiomarus,-!, M. 2, name of a Gallic king. interea, Adv. (inter 4-ea), mean- while. moror, -ari, -atus sum, 1, delay. mQniO, -Ire, -IvI, -Itum, 4, con- struct, fortify. oppugnatio, -Onis, F. 3, siege. oppugnO,-are, -avT,-atum, 1 (ob + pugnO), besiege, attack {aforti- . fied place). prOdeO, -Ire, -ivi, -itum, irr.(prOd-, oldest form of prO, + eO), come forth. quindecim, indecl. Adj. (cf. quln- que and decern), fifteen. redncO,-dCicere,-dllxl,-ductum, 3 (re -\-dZic6), lead back. repentlnus, -a, -um, sudden. trado, tradere, tradidi, traditum, 3 (trans + dO)j hand over. tumultus, -ns, M. 4, disturbance, uprising. vallum, -1, N. 2, wall, rampart. 554. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Caesar waited until he was informed^ that the legions had come into winter-quarters. 2. And, even then, he by chance delayed, which fact^ was the salvation of the Roman power ^ in Gaul. 3. For when Cotta and Sabinus had constructed a camp, Ambiorix and Catuvolcus suddenly attacked it. 4. Our men, however, defended themselves fiercely, and the cavalry, being sent out from the camp, were* superior in a cavalry battle. 5. The barbarians then shouted-out that^ some one of our men should^ be sent to them for a conference, (saying) that they wished to talk about the common interest.'^ 1 Is this an actual act looked back upon, or an act looked forward to? 2 Use res, — a convenient general word. See two places in the Latin opposite. 3 Say "for salvation to. . ."(428). 4 Be careful of the tense. This will test your feeling. 5 What kind of a clause, in Eng- lish as in Latin? 220 Beading ' CHAPTER III 555. The Parley Mittitur ad e5s conloquendi causa ^ C. ArpTneius, eques Roma- nus, et Q. lunius; apud qu5s Ambiorix ad hunc modum^ locutus est: Sese pro Caesaris in se beneficiis plurimum ei c5nfiteri debere; id quod fecerit^ de oppugnati5ne castr5rum, n5n aut iudicio aut voluntate sua fecisse, sed coactu civitatis. Esse Gal- liae commiine consilium : omnibus hibernis Caesaris oppugnandTs hunc esse dictum diem, ne qua legio legioni subsidio venire posset. Non facile Gall5s GallTs negare potuisse.* Quibus^ quoniam^ pro pietate satisfecerit, habere nunc se rati5- nem^ offici pro beneficio Caesaris : monere, orare Sabinum, ut suae ac nnlitum saluti consulat. Magnam manum Germanorum Rhe- num transisse: hanc adfore biduo. Ipsorum^ esse consilium, velintne,^ prius quam fmitimi sentiant, milites aut ad Ciceronem aut ad Labienum deducere, quorum alter milia passuum quinqua- ginta, alter paulo amplius ab eis absit. lUud se polliceri, tutum iter per fines daturum. Hac oratidne^ habita ^ discedit Ambiorix. i(With the cause of,=) for the sake of, with the purpose of. Causa or gratia following a Gerund or Gerundive is a common way of expressing Purpose. ^ After this fashion^ ox as follows. . 3 That which he had done. Evidently a Determinative Clause. Why, then, Subjunctive? ^ Gauls had not been able easily to deny Gauls, i. e., it wouldn'^t have been easy for him, as a Gaul, to deny Gauls. ^Double Connective {whoiy, since . . .), where English would use but one (sinct . . . them). — What mood have you learned is used with quod, quia, quoniam, and quando (517)? Why then the Subjunctive here? . ^Had reckoning of, tx)ok account of, had regard for. 7 Their own counsel, i. e., a matter for themselves to decide. ^ Velint-ne, whether they wanted, whether they chose. ^Having delivered this address. What construction? , Writing 221 656. VOCABULARY Arpineius, -i, M. 2, a name, beneficium,-!, N. 2 (cf. bene and facio), well-doing, kindness. biduum, -1, N. 2, two days. coSctus, -Qs, M. 4, compulsion. cOnfiteor, -fiterl, -fessus sum, 2, confess. conloquor, -loqui, -loctitus sum, 3 (con- + lbquor), confer, cOnsuIO, -sulere, -sului, -sultum, 3, consult {for), look out for. debeo, debere, debul, debitum, 2 (de -f- habeO, have from), owe ; ought. finitimus, -a, -um, neighboring. PI. as Subst., neighbors. lanius, -1, M. 2, a name. negO, -are, -avi,-atum, 1, say no, say . . . not, deny, refuse. Oratio, -Onis, F. 3, speech, argu- ment. pietas, -atis, F. 3, loyalty, patri- otism. pro (same word as before), in be- half of; hence, in return for. Prep., taking Abl. qumquaginta, indecl. Adj., fifty. Rhenus, -I, M. 2, the Rhine, satisfacio, -facere, -feci, -factum, 3 (satis + facio), do enough (for), satisfy. tQtus, -a, -um, safe. 557. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. The argument of Ambiorix was after this fashion: 2. I have not besieged your camp of my own will or judgment, but under the compulsion of the state. 3. The Gauls have formed a common plan to attack^ all (of) Caesar's winter-camps on the same day. 4. I, a Gaul, could ^ not ^ say-no to the Gauls. 5. (But^) since I have now satisfied them, it is permitted to me to have regard for my duty in-return-for Caesar's kindness. 6. I speak for the saketof warning you. 7. A great band of Ger- mans has crossed the Rhine. 8. Before they shalP be present, I beg you to lead off your soldiers to (the camp of) Cicero or Labienus. 9. I will give you a safe conduct^ through our territory. iQf course you will not use the Infinitive in Latin. 2 = ''Was not able" (non potui). 3 Omit, and use double connective. •^Use causa. ^Is this looked back upon (Fact), or forward to (Anticipation)? ^Say "a safe journey." 222 Reading CHAPTER IV 558. Difference of Opinion. The Wrong Plan Prevails Arpineius et lunius quae audierant^ ad legates deferunt. nil, etsi ab hoste ea dicebantur,^ tamen non neglegenda^ exTstimabant.^ Itaque ad consilium rem deferunt, magnaque* inter e5s exsistit controversia.* Cotta compluresque tribuni militum nihil temere agendum^ neque ex hibernis iniussu Caesaris discedendum existimabant.^ Contra ea Sabinus sero facturos clamitabat, cum maiores manus hostium adiunctis Germanis convenissent.^ Magno esse Germanis dolori superi- ores nostras victorias; ardere Galliam; brevem consulendi^ esse occasionem. Caesarem se arbitrari profectum in Italiam. Res disputatione ad mediam noctem perducitur. Tandem dat ^ Cotta permotus manus : superat sententia SabinT. Pro- nuntiatur prima luce ituros. ConsQmitur vigiliis reliqua pars noctis. Prima luce ex castrTs proficiscuntur, longissimo agmine maximisque impedimentls. 1 What kind of clause is this? 2 The tense expresses the Situation^ the State of Affairs. When one is talking about the past, Situation will always be I expressed by the Imperfect or Past Perfect (which are the Help- ing Tenses) ; while the Leading Events will be expressed by Aorist Perfects or Picturesque Presents. Remember this in , your own writing. 3 Esse is omitted, as very frequently in Indirect Discourse. '^ Adjective not only before the Noun (abnormal place), but at the head of the clause; while the Noun itself is suspended^ to heighten curiosity. Write like this yourself. 6 This, you see, had not yet occurred. The act was still to be done (future). The tense, then, is ijot a real Past Perfect, but a V^^i Future Perfect (future to clamitabat, and finished before, i. e.. Perfect to, sero facturos). You will find the English tense by which you translate to corre- spond exactly. ^Opportunity OF, where we say FOR. 7 Dat .... ma.nus = yields. Note the emphasis of order. Something finally done (dat) by Cotta, — namely, .... giving up (shown by manus). Tenses in Historical Writing Writing 223 659. VOCABULARY arbitror, -arl, -atus sum, 1, think, suppose. ardeO, ardere, arsT, arsGrus, 2, burn, be in a blaze. brevis, -e, short, small. clamito, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 (cf. clamO), keep crying out. cOnsQmO, -sGmere, -snmpsi, -sQmptum, 3 (con-, intensive, -|- sOmO, take up), consume, spend. defer 0, -ferre, -tuli, -latum, irr. (de + ferO), carry off; report. disputatiO, -Onis, F. 3, discussion. dolor, -Oris, M. 3, pain. etsl (et + si), Conj., even if; al- though. exIstimO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, estimate; think. exsisto, -sistere, -stitl, -stitGrus, 3 (ex + sisto, cause to stand out), break out, arise. impedimentum, -1, N. 2 (as before), hindrance, in PL, baggage. iniussO, Adv., without orders. Inx, iQcis, F. 3, light. Prima iGx, daylight. occasio, -Onis, F. 3, occasion, opportunity. perdncO, -dacere, -dGxi, -ductum, 3 (per + dOcO, lead along), prolong. permoveO, -movere, -mOvi, -mo- tum, 2 (per + moveO, move), move deeply. serO, Adv., late, too late. tandem. Adv., at last. vigilia, -ae, F. 1, watch, vigil. 560. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. Some^ spoke after this fashion: 2. The things which have been reported^ to the council are said, not by a friend, but by an enemy. 3. Why should we trust an enemy? 4. Let us do nothing rashly. 5. We ought not to depart^ frona our winter quarters without orders from Caesar. 6. Against this, the argument of others^ was after this fashion: 7. We shall act* too late when the Germans shall have joined themselves to the Gauls. 8. Before they shall be present in front of our camp, let us lead off our men to the nearest winter quarters. 9. Caesar has set out for Italy. 10. Let us set out without delay for (the camp of) Cicero "or Labienus. 1 Alii .... alii . . . . , in the proper cases. 2 What kind of clause? 3 Use Impersonal verb, as opposite ('' it ought not to be departed by us "). ^Use faci5. 224 • Reading CHAPTER V 561. Ambuscade At hostes postea quam ex vigiliis de profectione eorum sen- seriint,^ conlocatis insidiis in silvis Romanorum adventum exspec- tabant; et cum se maior pars agminis in magnam convallem demisisset,^ ex utraqiie parte eius vallis subito se ostenderunt atque proelium committere coeperunt. Turn demum Sabinus, qui nihil provTdisset,^ trepidare et concursare. At Cotta, qui eogitasset* haee posse in itinere accidere, nulla in re communT saluti deerat. Hi cum^ propter longitudinem agminis non facile per se^ omnia obire et quid quoque^ loco faciendum esset providere pos- sent,*^ iusserunt pr5niintiari ut impedimenta relinquerent atque in orbem c5nsisterent. Quod^ consilium, etsi in eius modi casii reprehendendum n5n est, tamen incommode cecidit;^*^ nam et^^ nostris militibus spem minuit et hostis ad pugnam alacri5res effecit, quod^ non sine summo timore et desperatione id factum videbatur. lAoristic Narrative Clause (506). Postea quam = postquam. 2 Descriptive cum-Clause of Situation (487 ) . Practically interchangeable with the Aoristic Narrative Clause with ubi, ut, postquam, etc. (506, a). 3 The mood shows that the idea is Causal (Causal qui-Clause; 479). ■* Contracted form (for cogitavisset). So often from stems in -avi, -evi, -Ivi. ^ Don't think of a tr-anslatioii for cum as you read, but wait to see how the clause turns out. Here are the possibilities for it, if Subjunctive : Possibilities/ (Merely) Descriptive; when (487). of ) Descriptive, with additional Causal or Adversative force; Subjunctive j when (and sinee, or although; 488). cum-Clause \ (Purely) Causal or Adversative; siyice^ or although (489). 6 Through themselves^ that is, in person. The line was too long. 7 This is quoque, not quoque. It is the Ablative of quisque, each. 8 This proves to be a Causal cum-Clause {since; 489). y Always be on your guard with quod (Relative Pronoun or Conjunction) ! ^^ Fell, in the sense of happened. (Compare English ''befell.".) 11 After nam, et cannot mean "and." What then? Writing 225 562. VOCABULARY accido, accidere, accidi, , 3 longitndo, -inis, F. 3, length. (ad+cado), befall, happen. minuO, minuere, minul, minGtum, adventus, -Os, M. 4, arrival. 3 (cf. minus), lessen, diminish. coepi, coepisse, coeptum est, de- obeO, obire, obii, obitum, irr. fective, began, started. (ob+eO, go to meet), attend to. concursO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 (cf . ostendo, ostendere, ostendl, con- and currO), run to and fro. ostentum, 3, show. convallis, -is, F. 3, valley, defile, profectio, -Onis, F. 3, departure. desperatiO,-Onis, F. 3, de.spaiV. reprehendo, -hendere, -hendr, desum, deesse, defui, defutGrus, -hensum, S, censure. irr. (de+sum), be wanting, fail. timer, -Oris, M. 3, fear. incommode, Adv., disadvanta- trepido, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, be in geously, unfortunately. aflutter, lose one's head. 563. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. The Gauls, placing^ an ambuscade in the woods, waited until the army came-down^ into a valley. 2. Then our men saw, too-late, that the enemy had broken faith. 3. They were now in the greatest danger. 4. Their line of march was very long, and a great multitude was attacking it on either side. • 5. Cotta and Sabinus were not able to attend to everything in person. 6, They therefore ordered their men to leave the bag- gage and take-position in a circle. 7. This^ plan is often to be approved in such a case; but it strengthened* the hope of the enemy, who believed^ the Eomans to be thoroughly frightened. iThe English Present Participle is often inexact in tense. The real tense-fact here is Perfect (HAVING placed. They didn't wait while placing, but after they had placed, when they had placed).— But Latin has no Perfect Active Participle. Now, if conloco, place, were a Deponent verb, you could use the Perfect* Passive Participle, which has active meaning (315). But it is not. Hence you must express the idea by a clause with a conjunction meaning after or when (ubi, etc., or cum), or by the Ablative Absolute, with Perfect Passive Participle. This happens often. 2 Your translation will show whether you have mastered the until-Clauses. 3 How can you tie this sentence neatly to the last one? ^ Say " strengthened hope for the enemy," using conlirmo. ^Use the mood which will add the idea of since. 226 . Reading CHAPTER VI 564. A Desperate Battle. Gallic Strategy Nostri omnem spem salutis in virtute ponebant; et quotiens^ quaeque cohors procurrerat, ab ea parte magnus numerus hos- tium cadebat. Qua re animadversa Ambiorix pronuntiari iubet ut procul tela coniciant et, quam ^ in partem Rdmani impetum f ecerint,^ cedant, rursus se ^ ad signa recipientis insequantur. Quo praecepto ab iis diligentissime observato, cum quaepiam cohors ex orbe excesserat atque impetum fecerat, hostes vel5cissime refugiebant. Rursus, cum in eum locum unde erant pr5gressi reverti coeperant, et ab iis qui cesserant et ab iis qui proximi steterant circumveniebantur. Tamen multis vulneribus acceptis resistebant; et magna parte diei consiimpta, cum a prima liice ad hdram octavam pugnaretur,* nihil quod ipsis esset indignum commit tebant. Tum Q. Liicanius, fortissime pugnans, dum circumvent5 filio subvenit, interficitur, L. Cotta legatus omnes 5rdines adhortans in adversum^ 5s funda vulneratur. His rebus permotus^ Sabinus interpretem ad Ambi- origem mittit rogatum, ut sibi militibusque parcat/ 1 This is a good illustration of the Generalizing Clause, which is very like a General Condition (494 a and h): As often as (=if at any time) any cohort charged^ a great number of the enemy would fall. Note, now, the equivalency of several introductory words : Quotiens quaeque cohors procurrerat, as often as any cohort charged. Cum quaepiam cohors procurrerat, when any cohort charged. Quaecumque cohors procurrerat, whatever cohort charged. Si qua cohors , procurrerat, if any cohort charged. All these are general, and all assume something as a fact; whence the Indicative mood (note the two cum-Clauses of this kind below). ^In whatever direction. General, in future. Indirect Discourse. 3 Be careful ! Recipientis is active, and must have some Object. * Adversative cum-Clause. For the tense-force, see 547, footnote 1. ^ In the opposed face =full in the face. 6 Obviously Situation. This is what Participles regularly express. 7 You see that the feeling is that of Request or Entreaty (cf. 529, footnote2). Writing . 227 565. VOCABULARY adhortor, -ari, -atus sum, 1, en- parcO, parcere, pepercl or parsi, courage ; exhort, urge. parsQrus, 3, spare (Verb of animadvertO, -vertere, -vertl, Attitude). -versum, 3 (animus+ad+ver- praeceptum, -I, N. 2, direction. to, turn the mind to), notice. procul, Adv., at a distance, from conicio, -icere, -iecl, -iectum, 3 a distance. {con- -\-i3iciQ), hurl. quispiam, quaepiam, quodpiam {ortiter,AdY., bravely. Compar. orquidpiam(quis-declinedasin fortius, Superl. fortissime. quis-que, 200),Indef. Adj.,an2/. funda, -ae, F. 1, sZiTigr. quotiens. Adv. and Con]., hoio interpres, -pretis, M. 3, media- often, as often as. tor, interpreter. refugio, -fugere, -fQgi, -fugitGrus, Lncanius, -I, M. 2, a Roman name. 3, run back, retreat. neu (also neve), Conj., and not, rogO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, ash, nor. Corresponds to ne, as request. nee to nOn. rflrsus, Adv., back, again. observO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, subvenio, -venire, -veni,-ventum, observe. 4 (sub + venio), come to aid. octavus, -a, -um, eighth. velOciter, Adv., swiftly. 566. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. The enemy hurled their javelins from a distance on all sides into the legion. 2.. If any cohort charged, they would give-way. 3. When our nien retired ^ again, both (those) who had given-way and those who had stood close-by would surround them. 4. Still they fought most bravely for many hours. 5. Then, when Cotta had been wounded full in the face by a sling, and^ was no-^ longer^ able to command his men, Sabinus sent an interpreter to Ambiorix to beg that he should spare those to whom he had promised^ safe conduct. 1 A Generalizing Clause. Compare the if -clause just above. — You remem- ber also the Determinative cum-Clause (Indicative, 426), which defines an individual time, just as a qui-Clause does a man, etc. We are ready, then, to put the Indicative cum-Clauses into a Summary, as follows : Indicative C Determinative, fixing an individual time (426). cum-Clause ( Generalizing, of a repeated action (footnote opposite and 494, a) . 2 Say "nor now " (nee iam). 3 You see that this is Indirect. 228 Beading CHAPTER VII 567. The Trick. Destruction of the Army Ambiorix respondit: Si velit^ seciim conloqui, licere; ei nihiP nocitum iri; in earn rem se suam fidem interponere. Ille cum Cotta saucio communicat, si videatur,^ pugna ut excedat et cum Ambiorige iina conloquantur. Cotta se ad armatum hostem itiirum negat, atque in eo perseverat. Sabinus, quos * tribiin5s * militum circum se habebat et prim5- rum ordinum centuriones se sequi iubet, et, cum^ propius Ambio- rigem accessisset, iussus arma abicere^ imperatum facit, suisque ut^ idem faciant imperat. Interim, dum de condicionibus inter se agunt,^ paulatim circumventus interficitur. Tum vero suo more victoriam conclamant, impetiique in nos- tros fact5^ ordines perturbant. Ibi L. Cotta pugnans interficitur cum maxima parte militum. Reliqui se in castra recipiunt unde erant egressi. Aegre ad noctem oppugnationem sustinent ; noctii ad unum omnes desperata salute se ipsi^ interficiunt. Pauci ex proeli5 elapsi per silvas ad T. Labienum legatum in hiberna perveniunt atque eum de rebus gestis certiorem faciunt.^^ iWhat kind of Condition would this be in Direct Discourse? 2 Accusative of Extent. Translate no harm AT ALL would he done him. ^Ifit should seem (best) to him. What does the clause go with? Clauses in Latin are more likely to belong to something that is coming than to some- thing that has preceded. Keep this constantly in mind in reading : Most clauses modify FORWARD. 4 What tribunes he had, = the tribunes whom, etc. A common arrange- ment. Call it the RELATIVE CLAUSE LEADING. ^This is the bare cum-Clause of Situation (no additional idea). 6 Note iubed with Infinitive, but impero with Subjunctive (543, a). 7 Ag5 here means deal with, discuss. 8 Translate by the (inexact) English Present Participle. ^They^do it to themselves (se), and they themselves do it (ipsi). — Our English expression is less full. 10 Clearly Labienus ought now at once to send word to Caesar and all the other camps. See whether he does so. Writing 229 668. VOCABULARY abicio, -icere, -iecl, -iectum, 3 interpOnO, -pOnere, -posul, -posi- {a,h-\-ia,ci6), throw away ;throw turn, 3 (inter + pOnO), pw^ be- down, throw. tween; with fidem, pledge. accedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, paulatim, Adv. (cf. p&ulum), little 3 (ad + cedo, move toward), ap- by little, gradually, proach. perturbO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 (cf. condicio, -Onis, F. 3, terms, con- turba), throw into confusion. dition{s). propius, Compar. of prope, near. egredior, egredi, egressus sum, Adv., used as Prep. 3 (e + gradior, step out), march saucius, -a, -um, wounded, out, go out. sustineo, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum, elabor, elabi, elapsus sum, 3 (e + 2 (subs, a form of sub,+ teneO, labor, slip), slip out, escape. hold up), sustain. 569. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. To this Ambiorix said: If Sabiniis wishes to talk with me, I pledge my word that no harm will be done him. 2. Sabinus then sent an interpreter to^ ask Cotta to go with him for the purpose^ of conferring with Ambiorix. 3. Cotta answered: I will not leave the battle in order ^ to go^ to an armed enemy. 4. Sabinus, upon (cum; 487) approaching Ambiorix and throw^ing down his arms, was surrounded and killed. 5. Then the barbarians attacked our men fiercely. 6. A-few-only escaped from the battle. 7. A small part with difficulty returned to the camp, and here, at night, all killed themselves to a man. 1 You see here three English ways of expressing Purpose, and there are others, as with volitive" shall "and ''for . , . . -ing " (cf. ad with Gerundive, etc.).— The ways in Latin may be summarized as follows : (Dative of an Abstract Noun. Qui, quo, ut, or ne, with the Subjunctive (volifive). The Supine in -um (only after verbs of motion). expressed by \ ^^ "^'^^ *^^ Gerundive or Gerund. I Causa or gratia with Genitive of the Gerundive or Gerund. I The F uture Passive Participle in agreement with the Object \ of a verb. Remember that: Purpose is never expressed by the Infinitive in Latin prose. 230 Bedding CHAPTER VIII 570. An Attempt to surprise Cicero's Camp fails. The Siege Barbari ad Cicerdnis hiberna advolant magnaque manu legi- onem oppugnare incipiunt. Nostri celeriter ad arma concur- runt/ vallum ascendunt.^ Aegre is dies sustentatur. Hostes poster5 die multo maioribus coactTs c5piis castra oppugnant. A nostrls eadem rationed qua pridie resistitur. Hoc idem reliquis deinceps fit diebus. Tunc duces Nerviorum cum Cicerone conloqui sese velle dicebant. Facta potestate, eadem quae Ambiorix cum Sabino egerat,^ commemorant : licere illis ex hibernis discedere et sine metu proficisci. Cicero ad haec unum modo respondit: non esse consuetudinem populi Roman! accipere ab hoste armat5 condicidnem. Septim5 oppugnationis die barbari fervef acta iacula in casas, quae more Gallico stramentis erant tectae, iacere coeperunt. Hae celeriter ignem comprehenderunt. . At tanta militum virtus fuit atque ea* praesentia animi, ut, cum^ undique flamma tor- rerentur, non modo de vallo decederet^ nem5,^ sed paene ne respiceret quidem quisquam, ac tum acerrime fortissimeque pugnarent. iNote the rapid movement of the narration, without connectives. ^By the same theory, = in the same way. An Ablative of Means which has become an Ablative of Manner. This is one of the common expressions of Manner into which a Preposition never came ; 512, 6. 3 Had discussed with Sabinits, = had urged upon him. What kind of clause ? 4 You see in this passage an easy proof of what you learned in 422; namely that the Pronoun is can be used just like an Adjective ( = talis). Ea here is actually yoked up (by et) with the Adjective tanta (so great .... and such . . . . , that). ^The Situation in which (and in spite of which) no one left the rampart. Descriptive cum-Clause of Situation, with additional adversative idea ; 488. Note that English "when " has the same power (example in 572, 7). 6 Which is changed in position to give emphasis, decederet, or nemo ? Writing 231 571. VOCABULARY advolo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 (ad metus, -os, M. 4, /ear. + volO, fly), fly [to), rush {to), paene, Adv., almost. commemorO, -are, -avi, -atum, populus, -I, M. 2, peqpZe. 1 (make to remember), state, praesentia, -ae, F. 1, presence, mention, pridie, Adv., the day before. comprehendo, -prehendere, -pre- respiciO, -spicere, -spexi, -spec- hendr, -prehensum, 3, seize, tum,3(re + -spiciO; cf. spectO), catch. look hack, look around. concurrO, -currere, -currl and stramentum, -i, N. 2, straw* -cucurri, -cursum, 3 (con-+ sustentO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 (cf. curro), run together, rush. sustineO) sustain. fervefacio, -facere, -feci, -factum, torreO, torrere, torrui, tostum, 3, heat red hot. 2, scorch, hum, flamma, -ae, F. 1, flame, fire. tunc, then, a stronger tum (from iaculum, -I, N. 2, javelin. tum -) — ce, = that then). 572. MATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1 1. The barbarians flew to^ attack Cicero's winter-quarters before he should hear of the battle. 2. Our men defended them- selves with difficulty. 3. The enemy ^ attacked on the following day and on several days in succession. 4. Then, an opportunity for conferring with Cicero being given (them), they warned and begged him to lead* his troops out of their territory. 5. To which he answered: "It is not the custom of the Roman people to receive terms from an armed enemy.'' 6. On the seventh day of the siege^ the presence of mind of our soldiers saved the camp. 7. For eved when^ their cabins had caught fire, no one left the ramparts. ^Use picturesque tenses freely for practice, not only with main verbs, but in subordinate clauses (though never with cum). 2 Express this purpose by ad with Gerundive, for practice. 3 Is "the enemy" really Singular or Plural in meaning? ^ Request or Entreaty. In Latin, a Substantive Clause (cf . 529, footnote 2) . ^ Situation in spits of which. 232 Reading CHAPTEK IX 673, A Letter is carried through to Caesar Erat ^ unus intus Nervius nomine Vertico, qui ad Ciceronem perfugerat. Hie servo persuadet praemiTs, ut litteras ad Cae- sarem deferat. Has ille in iacul5 inligatas effert, et Gallus inter Gallos sine ulla suspicione ad Caesarem pervenit. Caesar acceptis Mitteris ^ ho ra eireiter undecima die! statim^ nQntium ad M. Crassum mittit, cuius hiberna aberant^ ab eo milia passuum viginti quinque. lubet media nocte legi5nem proficlsel celeriterque ad se venire. Exit cum nuntio* Crassus. Alterum ad C. Fabium legatum mittit. Scribit'' Labieno, si rei^ piiblicae^ commodo^facere possit, cum legione ad finis Nervi- 5rum veniat. Reliquam partem exercitiis, quod paulo aberat^ longius, non putat exspectandam. Equites eireiter quadrin- gent5s ex proximis hibernis conligit. Hora eireiter tertia de Crassi advent u certior fact us, eo die milia passuum viginti progreditur. Fabius, non multum mo- ratus, in itinere cum legi5ne occurrit. iWhat is the meaning of the Imperfect f Would the Perfect be right here? 2 Translate by the (inexact) English Present Active Participle, receiving. 3 Note the promptness with which Caesar acts, and to which he had trained his lieutenants. You see that Crassus does more than is asked of him. Caesar's political enemies said of him that he was a monster for vigi- lance and quickness. How much time did he allow for the covering of the twenty-five miles by the messenger (who, of course, went on horseback) and the start of Crassus ? How many hours was it before Crassus was near Caesar's camp ? About how many miles must Crassus' legion have covered before the evening of the first day ? ^ With the messenger^ that is, without delaying at all. ^What follows may be a Statement (Infinitive), or an Indirect Question (Subjunctive), or a Command (Subjunctive). What does it turn out to be? 6 (With advantage on the part of, =) with advantage to the common good. Writing 233 674. VOCABULARY circiter, Adv., and Prep, with occurro, -currere, -curri and -cu- Acc, about. curri, -cursum, 3 (ob + currO, commodum, -I, N. 2, advantage. run against), meet. efferO, efferre, extulT, elatum, irr. perfugio, -fugere, -ftlgl, -fugi- (ex + ferO), carry out or away, tGrus, 3 (per + fugiO, flee exeO, -Ire, -ii and -Tvi, -itum, irr. through), take refuge, desert. (ex + eO), go out, march out. praemium, -i, N. 2, reward. inligO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 (in + pDblicus, -a, -um, public. ligO, bind), bind up. scribo, scribere, scrips!, scrip- intus. Adv., within. turn, 3, write. littera, -ae, F. 1, letter (of the susplcio, -Onis, F. 3, suspicion. alphabet). PI., a letter. Gndecimus, -a, -um, eleventh. longe (as before), far. Compar. VerticO, -Onis, M. 3, a name. longius, Superl. longissime. viginti, indecl. Adj., twenty. 675. ;VIATTER FOR TRANSLATION 1. One of the Nervians, Vertico by name, had taken refuge with Cicero. 2. This (man) persuaded a slave to carry a letter to Caesar. 3. Having received it,^ Caesar immediately wrote ^ to Crassus and Fabius to come quickly to him, leaving a small band only to defend their camps. 4. He also sent a message to Labienus to come to him, if ^ he should be able^ to leave (= "go out from") his camp without serious danger. 5. The rest of the army, which was farther away, he determined not to wait for. 6. Crassus left (his camp) (upon) receiving Caesar's message, not delaying long. 7. (When) informed that he was approaching, Caesar set out with all his forces. 1 You have now recently seen five ways of introducing the main verb : Five Ways / Ubi, ut, postquam, or simul atque with Indicative. of I Cum with Subjunctive. Introducing < Dum, ivhile, with Present Indicative, the / Participle. • Main Verb: \ Ablative Absolute. The first way is Aoristic (absolute tense), the others express Situation. 2 What ideas might follow "wrote," and what idea does follow ? 3 Is this Direct Discourse, or Indirect ?— Arrange in Latin order. 234 Beading 576. CHAPTER X Caesar enters the Enemy's Country. How he sends a Message to Cicero Labienus, cum omnes ad eum Trever5rum copiae venissent/ veritus ne, si ex hibernis fugae similem profectionem fecisset,^ hostium impetum sustinere non posset,^ litteras Caesari remittit quanto cum periculo legionem ex hibernis educturus esset.^ Rem gestam in Eburonibus perscrlbit.* Caesar, consilio LabienI probato, etsi opinione ^ trium legi5num delectus^ ad duas redder at, t amen unum communi saluti auxilium in celeritate^ ponebat. Venit magnls^ itineribus^ in Nerviorum fines. Ibi ex captlvis cognoscit quae apud Cicer5nem gerantur,^ quantoque in periculo res sit. Tum cuidam ex equitibus Gallls magnis praemils persuadet, uti ad Ciceronem epistulam deferat. Si adire n5n possit,^ monet ut tragulam cum epistula intra miinltionem abiciat. Gallus perlculum veritus, ut erat prae- ceptum, tragulam mittit. Haec casu ad turrim adhaesit, neque ab nostrls biduo animad versa tertio die a quodam mllite conspi- citur, dempta ^^ ad Ciceronem def ertur.^^ 1 What is the main force of this clause, and what the additional one? 2 Future in meaning. You have now seen examples enough to allow you to say this : Every tense of the Subjunctive has two forces, one that of the Indicative of the same name^ the other a future force. ^Periphrastic (233, 2,6), — was going to lead, i. e., would have to lead. ^Caesar could get a message through, and Labienus could get one back. Had Labienus then done his duty? ^Cast down frotn his expectation (of having), i. e., disappointed in his expectation (of having) . Translate delectus reciderat like two mam verbs, connected by and. — What is the force of the case of opinione? 6 Again you se#Caesar's quickness in thought and action. "^With great days^ marches, = with forced marches (Abl. of Manner ; 513). 8 Evidently an Indirect Question. Of what kind? 9 Is this Condition direct, or indirect? 10 In English, is taken down and carried (cf. footnote 5). Writing 235 577. VOCABULARY adeO, adire, adii or adivi, aditum, opinio, -Onis, F. 3, opinion; ex- irr. (ad+eO, go to), approach. pectation. adhaereO, -haerere, -haesi, -hae- perscrlbo, -scnbere, -scrips!, snrusj 2, adhere, stick. -scriptum, 3 (per + scribo), captivus, -a, -um, captive. ivrite fully, write out. celeritas, -atis, P. 3, siviftness, praecipiO,-cipere, -cepl,-ceptum, speed. 3(prae+capio,takein advance), ccTnspicio, -spicere, -spexi, -spec- direct, order. tum,3 (con- + -spiciO,spy), see. quantus, -a, -um, interrog. and deicio, -icere, -iecT, -iectum, 3 re\., how great, as great as. (de-|-iaciO, throw down), cast recido, -cidere, -cidi, -cSstlrus, 3 Mental State or Situation. A modifier is necessary (390, 2). 4. Cause or Reason (440). 5. Way or Manner, regularly without a Preposition. But Abstract Nouns in less frequent use take cum if there is no modifier, and may take it even if there is one (513). Prepositions, — Place Constructions. — Imperative 243 CASES WITH PREPOSITIONS 692. Prepositions expressing the Separative,^ Sociative, or Loca- tive"^ Idea (also pro and prae) take the Ablative. Prepositions expressing other Space Ideas take the Accusative (78). Thus we have come to know: I. With the Ablative: ab, de, ex, sine (Separative); pro, prae (originally Separative); cum (Sociative); in and sub (Locative). II. With the Accusative: ad, ante, apud, circiter and circum, citra, contra, in, inter, intra, ob, per, post, praeter, prope, propter, secundum, sub, trans, ultra. 593. ORDINARY EXPRESSION OF PLACE (407) 1. Place From Which by the Separative Ablative with ab, de, or ex. 2. Place To Which by the Accusative with ad, in, or sub. 3. Place In Which by the Locative Ablative with in or sub. 594. EXPRESSION OF PLACE WITH NAMES OF TOWNS, domus AND rfls (409) 1. Place From Which by the bare Ablative (similarly domO and rCire). 2. Place To Which by the bare Accusative (similarly domum and rGs). 3. Place In Which by the Genitive of the First or Second Declension Singular, and elsewhere by the bare Ablative (similarly domi and ruri or mre). USES OF THE VERB IMPERATIVE 696. The Imperative (negative ne) is used to express Com- mand, Advice, Request, Entreaty, and the like (137). 1 From, away from, out of, — literal or figurative. 2 This must be understood as meaning, by convenient usage, not any kind of place-idea, but only that of the place in or within which, — English in, within, on, at, under. 244 Imperative. — Subjunctive SUBJUNCTIVE 596. The Subjunctive is used as follows (negative ne for Will or Wish, non for Other Ideas) : • I. To express an act as willed, anticipated, or wished; or as proper, likely, possible, or certain in an imagined case (368). A. Note especially the use of the Subjunctive of Will (Volitive) in: 1. Exhortations,Gommands, and Prohibitions (347, and n.). 2. Deliberative (better called Volitive) Questions (349, 354). 3. Clauses of Purpose, with qui, quO, ut, or ne (351). 4. Volitive Substantive Clauses: After Verbs of Will or Endeavor, with ut or ne (352). After Verbs of Hindrance, Prevention, or Check, with ne, quOminus, or quin (352). 5. Clauses of Fear or Anxiety, with ne corresponding to English "that" and ut corresponding to English "that not" (353). B. Note also the use of the Subjunctive of Anticipation in: 1. Clauses with words meaning "before" (antequam, prius- quam; 356). 2. Clauses with words meaning " until " (dum, dOnec, quoad ; 356, 552, n. 2). 3. All Past-Future Clauses expressed by a single verb-form (382, 558, n. 5). II. In Fact-Clauses of Consecutive nature or origin: Thus in: 1. Descriptive Clauses with qui or cum (421, 1; 487, 488). 2. Result Clauses with ut, ut nOn, or quin (421, 2). 3. Substantive Clauses with ut or ut nOn after Verbs of Bringing About or Existence (421, 3). 4. Causal oi- Adversative qui-Clauses (479) and cum-Clauses (489). III. In Conditions and Conclusions. See 600, 601. IV. In Indirect Discourse. See 602, II, a. V. By Attraction, in clauses closely attached to a Subjunctive or Infinitive (545). Indicative 245 INDICATIVE 597. The Indicative (negative non) is used to express an act as a fact, declaring, inquiring, or assuming. Thus in: I. Independent Statements and Questions of Fact. II. Determinative Clauses, with appropriate Relative or Con- junction. Thus especially in the: 1. Determinative qui-Clause, fixing the person who, or thing which (426). 2. Determinative cum-Clause, fixing the time at which (426, 584, n. 2). III. Clauses of Actual Past Acts with words meaning "before" or "until" (antequam or priusquam, dum, dOnec, or quoad). IV. Aoristic Narrative-Clauses, with ubi, ut, postquam, or simul atque (Perfect or Historical Present; 606). V. Substantive quod-Clauses, and quod-Clauses of Respect (444 and a). VI. Clauses of Cause or Reason with quod, quia, quoniam, or quando (517). SUMMARY OP CONDITIONS AND CONCLUSIONS 598. Neutral Conditions and Conclusions in the Present or Past are expressed by the Indicative (496). a. So frequently in Generalizing Clauses, with si, nisi, a Relative, or a Conjunction (494, a and h; 666, n. 1). ^ 599. More Vivid Future Conditions and Conclusions are ex- pressed by Indicative tenses of Future time (the Futiu'e and Futin:e Perfect; 498, 1). )600. Less Vivid Future Conditions and Conclusions are ex- pressed by Subjunctive tenses of Future time (the so- called Present and Perfect; 498, 2). 601. Conditions and Conclusions Contrary to Fact are expressed by the Imperfect and Past Perfect Subjunctive. The Im- perfect refers to the Present, the Past Perfect to the Past (524). 246 Infinitive, — Gerundive and Gerund. — Supine INFINITIVE 602. The Ini&nitive is used: 1. As in English, to express the Subject, Object, or Comple- mept of a Verb (87, «, h). Also in freer relations, in dependence upon many Verbs and Phrases (often in rivalry with a Subjunc- tive Substantive Clause; 543 and a). Its Subject is in the Accusative (542). II. In Principal Statements of Fact in Indirect Discourse. Its Subject is then in the Accusative (465). a. General Rule for Indirect Discourse: In Indirect Discourse the Principal Statement is put in the Infinitive, with Subject Accu- sative (which may be omitted if perfectly clear). All other verbs that would be in the Indicative if in Direct Discourse, and all Commands or Prohibitions,, are put in the Subjunctive (533). III. In lively Narration, in place of an Indicative. Its Subject is then in the Nominative (515). GERUNDIVE AND GERUND 603. 1. The Gerundive is almost a Verbal Noun in force, but is itself still dependent upon a Substantive, with which it agrees (303 a, 470, 1). 2. The Gerund is a complete Verbal Noun, governed like a Noun, but capable, like a Verb, of governing a Substantive, and being modified by an Adverb (471). 604. The Gerundive and Gerund exist only in the Genitive, Accusative, and Ablative cases, and (with the differences stated above) are precisely parallel in their uses. These are, in general, the same as the uses of Nouns (473). SUPINE 605. 1. The Supine in -um is used to express Purpose after Verbs of Motion (453, 1). 2. The Supine in -n is used to express Respect with Adjec- tives (453, 2). Tenses 247 USES OF THE TENSES TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE 606. The tenses of the Infinitive and Participle express an act as, at the time of the verb on which they depend, completed (Perfect), in progress (Present), or yet to come (Future). They do not, of themselves alone, tell in what division of time the act lies. They are thus purely relative (462). TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE 607. The tenses of the Indicative tell in what division of time the act lies, namely, in the Past, the Present, or the Future. Thus I ivas building (in the Past), I shall build (in the Future). 608. They are of two quite different kinds: I. One kind represents an act as at a certain stage of advance- ment (completed, in progress, or yet to come) at a time which is thought of. Thus he was painting a picture. Such tenses, when attached to any other verb, are naturally understood as relative to that verb, as in I saw the picture which he was painting. II. The other kind represents an act, not as in a certain stage of advancement at a certain time, but as a ivhole, in the lump. Thus he painted a picture. Such tenses are absolute. TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE 609. The tenses of the Subjunctive have the same forces as the tenses of the Indicative of the same name; and, in addition, each has a future force (576, 2). Thus in video quid facias, I see what you are doing, facias is present; but in te OrO ut id facias, I beg you to do this, facias is future. a. In conditions and conclusions contrary to fact, the Imperfect tense has gained a new power, that of referring to the Present (624:). This will be omitted in the table below. 248 Table of lyidicative and Subjunctive Tenses 610. The following table, grouping the tenses of the Indicative and Subjunctive, shows the division of time to which each carries the mind, the Idnd to which it belongs, and the natural combinatio7is. Flight of Time Past Present Future moods: INDIC. & SUBJ. INDIC. & SUBJ. INDIC. & SUBJ. Absolute Tenses : Perfect Present Future Relative Tenses: Imperf.,PastPerf. Pres., Pres.Perf. Put., Put. Perf. (Subj.Pres.,Perf. used over again) THE NATURAL HARMONY OF TENSES ("Sequence") 611. The natural combinations in what we have to say (in Latin as in English) are of main tenses with relative tenses- of their own time, — i. e., past tenses with relative tenses of the past, present with relative tenses of the pre- sent, and future with relative tenses of the future. That is to say : 612. In combinations of main and depiendent verbs, whether Subjunctive or Indicative, a verb of the past is generally accompanied by the Imperfect or Past Perfect, a verb of the present by the Present or Perfect, and a verb of the future by the Future or Future Perfect (replaced, in the Subjunctive, by the Present or Perfect). a. But the Narrative Clause with ubi, ut, postquam, and simul atque is regularly aoristic (i. e. absolute, imrelated). Thus ^^when the barbarians came,^^ not ''had come.^^ b. The tenses of the present are often used picturesquely in place of the soberer tenses of the past, to put past events before us as now taking place. The subordinate verbs are likewise generally picturesque, but sometimes sober. First Declension Nouns 249 SUMMARY OF FORMS DECLENSIONS, COMPARISON, NUMERALS AND CONJUGATIONS NOUNS 613. The Declensions of Nouns are divided as follows: First Declension: Second Declension: Third Declension: Fourth Declension: Fifth Declension: a-Stems o-Stems Consonant or i-Stems u-Stems e-Stems FIRST DECLENSION: Si-Stems 614. serva, {woman) slave, F. Stem serva- Endings F. (orM.) Sing. Norn. serva -a Gen. servae -ae Dat. servae -ae Ace. servam -am Voc. serva -a Abl. serva -a PI. Norn. servae -ae Gen. servarum -arum Dat. servis -Is Ace. servas -as Voc. servae -ae Abl. servis -Is 250 Second Declension Nouns SECOND DECLENSION: o-Stems 615. o-STEMS, in -us and -urn Stem servuSy slave, M. donum, gift, N. vo- dOno- Endings M. and F. N. ing. Nom. servus donum -us -um Gen. servl donl -1 Dat. servo donO -0 Ace. servum donum -um Voc. serve donum -e -um Ahl. servo donO -0 7. Nom. servi dona -I -a Gen. servOrum donOrum -Orum Dat. servis donis -Is Ace. servOs dona -OS -a Voc. servi dona -r -a Abl. servis donIs -Is 616. SHORTENED ro-STEMS, in -er and -ir puer, boy, M. ager, field, M. vir, man, M. Stem puero- Sing. Nom. puer Gen. puerl Dat. puerO Ace. puerum Voc. puer Abl. puerO PL Nom. pueri Gen. puerOrum Dat. pueris Ace. puerOs Voc. pueri Abl. pueris agro- viro- Endings ager vir As above, agri viri exceijt in agro virO Nom.-voc. agrum virum Sing. rfger vir agro virO agri viri agrOrum virOrum agrls virls agros virOs agri viri agrls viris Third Declension Nouns, Consonant Stems 251 THIRD DECLENSION 617. CONSONANT STEMS rex, king, M. miles, soldier, M. caput, head, N. Stem reg- milit- capit- Endings M. and F. N. Sing. Nom. rex miles caput -s or — — Gen. regis mllitis capitis -is -is Dat. regi militl capiti -I -r Ace. regem mllitem caput -em — Voc. rex miles caput -s or — — AN. rege milite eapite -e -e PI. Nom. reges milites capita -es -a Gen. regum militum capitum -um -um Dat. regibus multibus capitibus -ibus -ibus Ace. reges milites capita -es -a Voc. reges milites capita -es -a Abl. regibus militibus capitibus -ibus -ibus 618. CONSONANT STEMS (Continued) victor, victor, M. pater, father, M. robur, oak, N. Stem victOr- patr- robor- Sing . Nom. victor pater robur Gen. victoris patris. roboris Dat. victor! patri robori Ace. victorem patrem robur Voc. victor pater robur Abl. victore patre robore PI. Nom. victores patres robora Gen. victorum patrum roborum Dat. victoribus patribus roboribus Ace. victores patres robora Voc. victores patres robora Abl. victoribus patribus . roboribus Endings As above 252 Third Declension Nouns, Consonant Stems THIRD DECLENSION 619. CONSONANT STEMS (Continued) sermO, talk, M. muItitQdO, multitude, F. nOmen, name, N. Stem sermOn- multitCidin- nOmin- Endings Sing. Nom. sermo multitudo nomen As Gen. sermonis multitudinis nominis given Dat. sermoni multitudinl nomini in Ace. sermon em multitudinem nomen (617) Voc. sermo multitudo nomen Abl sermone multitudine nomine PL Nom. sermones multitudines nomina Gen. sermonum multitudinum nominum Dat. sermonibus multitudinibus nominibus Ace. sermones multitudines nomina Voc. sermones multitudines nomina Abl sermonibus multitudinibus nominibus 620. CONSONANT STEMS (Finished) (The Stems of these Nouns formerly ended in s. But s between vowels became r). pulvis, dust, M. mOs, custom. M. corpus, body. N. Stem pulver- mOr- corpor- (Formerly pulves- mOs- corpos-) Endings Sing. Nom. pulvis mos corpus As Gen. pulveris moris corporis given Dat. pulverl mori corporl in Ace. pulverem morem corpus (617) Voc. pulvis mos corpus Abl. pulvere more corpora PI. Nom. pulveres mores corpora Gen. pulverum morum corporum Dat. pulveribus moribus corporibus Ace. pulveres mores corpora Voc. pulveres mores corpora Abl. pulveribus moribus corporibus Third Declension Nouns, l-Stems and Mixed Stems 253 THIRD DECLENSION: i-Stems 621. NEUTER i-STEMS Tnsigne, animal, exemplar, Endin signal, N. animal, N. pattern, N. Stem insigni- animali- exemplari- Sing. Nom. Insigne animal exemplar -e, - Gen. Insignis animalis exemplaris -is Dat Insignl animalr exemplar! -! Ace. insigne animal exemplar -e, - Voe. Insigne animal exemplar -e, - Abl. insigni animal! exemplar! -1 PL Nom. insignia animalia exemplaria -ia Gen. insignium animalium ex.emplarium -ium Dat. Insignibus animalibus exemplaribus -ibus Ace. insignia animalia exemplaria -ia Voc. Insignia animalia exemplaria -ia Abl Insignibus animalibus exemplaribus -ibus 622. MASC. AND FEM. i-STEMS MIXED STEMS (Mostly like Consonant Stems in (Consonant Stems in Sing., Sing , but i-S terns in Plural. ) but i-Stems in Plural.) finis, end, M. caedes, slaughter, F. nox, night, F. gens, race, F Stem fini- caedi- noct- in Sing. nocti- in PI. gent-inSing genti- in PL Sing. Nom. finis caedes nox gens Gen. finis caedis noctis gentis Dat. fin! caedl noct! gent! Ace. finem caedem noctem gentem Voc. finis caedes nox gens Abl. fine caede nocte gente PI Nom. fines caedes noctes gentes Gen. finium caedium noctium gentium Dat. finibus caedibus noctibus gentibus Ace. fims (-es) caedis (-es) noctis (-es) gentis (-es) Voc. fines caedes noctes gentes Abl. finibus caedibus noctibus gentibus 254 Third Declension Nouns, Exceptional IStems 623. THIRD DECLENSION (Finished) EXCEPTIONAL i-STEMS turris, tower, F. ignis, fire, M. Stem turri- igni- Sing. Nom. turris ignis Gen. turris ignis Bat turn igni Ace. turrim (rarely- -em) ignem Voc. turris ignis Ahl. turn (-e) igni (-e) PI. Nom. turres ignes Gen. turrium ignium Dat. turribus ignibus Ace. turris (-es) ignis (-es) Voc. turres ignes Ahl. turribus ignibus a. These Exceptional Stems show i in the Singular, as well as in the Plural. VESUVIUS IN THE ERUPTION OF 1906 View taken from the Observatory Fourth and Fifth Declensions 255 624. FOURTH DECLENSION : u-Stems casus, chance, M. cornQ, horn, N. btem casu- cornu- Sing. Nam. casus cornCi Gen. casQs cornus Dat. casui, -n cornQ Ace. casum cornQ Voc. casus cornCi Abl. casG cornQ PI. Nom. casus cornua Gen. casuum cornuum Dat. casibus cornibus Ace. casus cornua Vac. castis cornua Abl. casibus cornibus Endings M. and F. N. -US rQ -OS -OS -ul, -u -n -um -ii -us -n -G -0 -Ds -ua -uum -uum -ibus -ibus -ns -ua -as -ua -ibus -ibus 625. FIFTH DECLENSION : e-Stems dies, day, M. and P. Stem die- Sing. Nom. dies Gen. diei Dat. diei Ace. diem Voc. dies Abl. die PL Nom. dies Gen. dierum Dat. diebus Ace. dies Voc. dies Abl. diebus res, thing, F re- Endings res -es rei -ei or -ei rer -ei or -el rem -em les -es re -e res -es rerum -erum rebus -ebus res -es res -;es rebus -ebus The Genitive and Dative Singular have long e (e) after a vowel, but short e after a consonant. Thus diei, but rel. 256 Irregular Nouns 626. IRREGULAR NOUNS OF THE SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH DECLENSIONS Sing. PI domus, house or home VIS, force (Mixed Second and Fourth) (Irregular Third) Nom. domus Sing. Nom. VIS Gen. domOs or doml Gen. vis (rare) Dat domui or domO Dat. VI (rare) Ace. domum Ace. vim Voe, domus Voe. vis AN. domn or domO Abl. VI Nom. domOs PL Nom. vires Gen. domuum or domOrum Gen. virium Dat. domibus Dat. viribus Ace. domas or domOs Ace. viris (-es) Voe. domtis Voe. .vires Abl. domibus Ahl. viribus HOUSE OF THE VETTII, POMPEII. GARDEN COURT Adjectives, First and Second Declensions 257 ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLEN- SIONS 627. O- AND a-STEMS bonus, good SINGULAR Stem bono- M. bona- F. bono- N. Sing. . Nom. bonus bona bonum Gen. boni bonae boni Dat. bono bonae bono Ace, bonum bonam bonum Voc. bone bona bonum Abl bono bona PLURAL bono PL Nom. boni bonae bona Gen, bonOrum bonarum bonOrum Dat. bonis bonis bonis Ace. bonOs bonas bona Voc. boni bonae bona Abl. bonis bonis bonis 628. 1 rO- AND ra-STEMS miser, miserable piger, lazy SINGULAR SINGULAR Stem misero- misera- misero- pigro- pigra- pigro- M. F. N. M. F. N. Nom. miser misera miserum piger pigra pigrum Gen, miserl miserae miserl pigri pigrae pigri Dat, miserO miserae miserO pigro pigrae pigro Ace, miserum miseram miserum pigrum pigram pigrum Voc, miser misera miserum piger pigra pigrum Abl. miserC 1 misera PLURAL miserO pigrO pigra PLURAL pigrO Nom. miserl miserae misera pigri pigrae pigra Gen, miserOrum miserarum miserOrum I pigrOrum pigrarum pigrOrum Dat. miseris miseris miseris pigrls pigrls pigrls Ace. miserOs miseras misera pigrOs pigras pigra Voc. miserl miserae misera pigrI pigrae pigra Abl. miseris miseris miseris pigrls pigrls pigrls 258 Adjectives, Third Declension, Consonant Sterns ADJECTIVES: THIRD DECLENSION CONSONANT-STEM ADJECTIVES 629. Comparative Adj ective Adjective of One Ending certior, surer vetus, old Stem certior- veter- M. and F. N. M. and F. N. Sing. Nom. . certior certius vetus vetus Gen, certioris certioris veteris veteris Dat certior! certior! veteri veteri Ace. certiorem certius veterem vetus Voc. certior certius vetus vetus AU. certiore certiore vetere vetere PI Nom. certiores certiora veteres Vetera Gen. certiorum certiorum veterum veterum Dat. certioribus certioribus veteribus veteribus Ace. certiores certiora veteres Vetera Voc. certiores certiora veteres Vetera AU. certioribus certioribus veteribus veteribus a. All Comparative Adjectives are declined like certior. h. There are very few common Oonsonant-Stem Adjectives of one ending. ARCHES OF CLAUDIAN AQUEDUCT NEAR ROME Partly choked with earth. Water channel visible in middle Adjectives, Third Declension, l-Stems 259 ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION I-STEM ADJECTIVES 630. Of Three Endings Of Two Endings acer, sharp fortis, brave Stem acri- forti- M. F. N. M. and F. N. Sing. Nom. acer acris acre fortis forte Gen. acris acris acris fortis fortis Dat acri acrl acri forti forti Ace. acrem acrem acre fortem forte Voc. acer acris acre fortis forte Ahl acrl acri acri forti forti PL Nom. acres acres acria fortes fortia Gen. acrium acrium acrium fortium fortium Dat. acribus acribus acribus fortibus fortibus Ace. acrls (-es) acrls (-es) acria fortis (-es) fortia Voc. acres acres acria fortes fortia Ahl. acribus acribus acribus fortibus fortibus a. I-Stem Adjectives have the -1 (I) in the Abl. Sing., as well as in the regular places in the Plural. 631. Of One Ending: duplex, double Stem duplici- M. and F. N. Sing. Nom. duplex duplex Gen. duplicis duplicis Dat. duplici duplici Ace. duplicem duplex Voc. duplex duplex Abl. duplici duplici PI. Nom. duplices duplicia Gen. duplicium duplicium Dat. duplicibus duplicibus Ace. duplicis (-es) duplicia Voc. duplices duplicia Abl. duplicibus duplicibus 260 Present Active Participle. — Plus, Complures THIRD DECLENSION (Finished) 632. PRESENT ACTIVE PARTICIPLE amans, loving monens, ivarning Stems amant- in Sing. monent- in Sing. amanti- in PI. monenti- : in PI. M. and F. N. M. and F. N. Sing. No m, . amans amans monens monens Gen. amantis amantis monentis monentis Dat. amanti amanti monentr monenti Ace. amantem amans monentem monens Voc. amans amans monens monens Abl. amante or -I amante or -I monente or -l monente or -i PL Nom. amantes amantia Gen. amantium amantium Dat. amantibus amantibus Ace. amantis (-es) amantia Voc. amantes amantia Abl. amantibus amantibus monentes monentia monentium monentium monentibus monentibus monentis (-es) monentia monentes monentia monentibus monentibus a. Present Participles are Mixed Stems (Abl. Sing, -e); but when used as Adjectives, they are i-Stems (Abl. Sing. -i). 633. IRREGULAR : pins, 7nore, and complQres, a good many M. and F. N. ^ M. and F. SINGULAR N. Nom plus Gen. pluris Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. pins plnre PLURAL Nom . plures plura complures compluria or -a Gen. pliirium plurium complurium complurium Dat pluribus pluribus compluribus compluribus Ace. pluris (-63) plura com pluris (-es) compluria or -a Voc. Abl. pluribus pluribus compluribus compluribus Comparison of Adjectives 261 634. COMPARISON REGULAR COMPARISQ]^ OP ADJECTIVES POSITIVE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE certus certior certissimus diligens diligentior diligentissimus acer acrior acerrimus aeger aegrior aegerrimus facilis facilior facillimus difficilis difficilior diflBcillimus idoneus magis idoneus maxime idoneus 636. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES bonus, good malus, bad magnus, great multus, much parvus, small melior, better peior, worse maior, greater plus, more minor, smaller optimus, best pessimus, worst maximus, greatest plurimus, most minimus, smallest 636. For a few Adjectives, the Positive is lacking or rare, or appears only in Adverbs or Prepositions. Thus : citra, on this side ultra, beyond in, intra, within prope, near prae, pro, before exterus, outside (and ex) inferus, below superus, above (and super) posterus, follow- ing (and post) citerior, hither ulterior, farther interior, inner propior, nearer prior, former exterior, outer inferior, lower .superior, higher posterior, later citimus, hithermost ultimus, farthest intimus, innermost proximus, nearest primus, first extremus extimus ' infimus I imus supremus summus postremus ) last postumus ) late-born outermost lowest [ highest 262 Comparison of Adverbs. — Numerals 637. REGULAR COMPARISON OP ADVERBS tarde, slowly diligenter, dili- gently acriter, fiercely facile, easily tardius, more slowly diligentius, more diligently acrius, more fiercely facilius, more easily tardissime, most slowly diligentissime, most diligently acerrime, most fiercely facillime, most easily a. Magis and maxime are often used, as with Adjectives. 638. IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE ADVERBS melius, better peius, worse bene, ivell male, ill magnopere, ^ great- multum, )much multum, much parum, little prope, near saepe, often magis, more plus, more minus, less prius, before propius, nearer saepius, oftener COMPARISON OP optime, best pessime, worst maxime, most plurimum, most minime, least primum, first proxime, nearest, next saepissime, oftenest NUMERALS 639. CARDINALS (Telling liow many) CARDINALS 1 tinus, one 2 duo, two 3 tres, three 4 quattuor, /oitr, etc. 5 quinque 6 sex 7 septem 8 octo 9 noveA 10 decern 11 undecim 12 duodecim 13 tredecim 14 quattuordecim 15 quindecim ORDINALS (Telling which in order) ORDINALS primus, first secundus (or alter), second tertius, third quartus, fourth, etc. quIntuB eextus Septimus octavus nonus decimus undecimus duodecimus tertius decimus quartus decimus quintus decimus Numerals. — Declension of Duo 263 CARDINALS ORDINALS 16 sedecim sextus decimus 17 septendecim Septimus decimus 18 duodevlginti duodevicensimus 19 undevlginti Undevicensimus 20 viginti vicensimus 21 vlginti unus or vicensimus primus or tinus et vlginti, etc. tinus et vicensimus 30 triginta tricensimus 40 quadraginta quadragensimus 50 quinquaginta quinquagensimuB 60 sexaginta sexagensimus 70 eeptuaginta septuagensimus 80 octoginta octogensimus 90 nonaginta nonagensimus 100 centum centensimus 101 centum (et) unus, etc. centensimus primus 120 centum (et) vigint i, etc. centensimus vicensimus 121 centum viginti unus,etc. centensimus vicensimus primus 200 ducenti ducentensimus 300 trecenti trecentensimus 400 quadringenti quadringentensimus 500 .quingenti quingentensimus 600 sescenti sescentensimus . 700 septingenti septingentensimus 800 octingenti octingentensimus 900 nongenti ndngentensimus 1,000 mille millensimus 1,100 mille centum millensimus centensimus 2,000 duo milia, etc. bis (= twice) millensimus 10,000 decem milia, etc. deciens millensimus 100,000 centum milia, etc. centiens millensimus 640. DECLENSION OF duo, two (Similarly ambo, both) Nom. duo duae duo Gen, duorum duarum duorum Dat, duobus duabus duobus Ace. duos or duo duas duo jr^^ V oc. Abl. duobus duabus duobus 264 Declension of the Pronominal Adjectives THE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS 641. The Pronominal Adjectives and the Pronouns are in the main of the First and Second Declensions, but with the peculiar Pronominal Endings, -lus and -I (sometimes -ius, pronounced like English -yoos, and -i) in the Genitive and Dative Singular. The . individual points of each must be separately acquired. They are arranged below in the order of variation from the type first given. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES 642. Nine Adjectives are declined like Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions, except in the Genitive and Dative Singular^ which have the peculiar Pronominal Endings -lus and -1 in all genders. But alius has Neuter aliud, and its Genitive is generally replaced by alterius, from alter. The nine words are: ViViViSy one, only alius, o^/ier, anof/ier (of several) nllus, any alter, the other (of two), a second ntlllus, none, no uter, which 9 (of two) solus, solCj alone neuter, neither (of two) totus, total, whole a. Except unus and solus these lack the Vocative. 643. The Declension in the Singular is thus as follows: alter, the other Norn, Gen, Dat, Ace. Voc. Abl. Nom. Oen, Dat. Ace. Voc. Ahl. totus, whole M. F. totus tota totlus totius toti toti totum totam N. totum totius toti totum M. alter alterius alterl alterum F. altera alterius alterl alteram N. alterum alterius alterl alterum totO tota totO alius, another alius alia aliud (alterius alterius alterius) alii alii alii alium aliam aliud alterO altera alterO uter, which 9 (of two) uter utra utrum utrlus utrlus utrlus utrl utrl utrl utrum utram utrum alio alia alio utrO utra utrO a. The Plural is regular in all these words. Declension of Ipse and Ille 265 644. Sing. Noni. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. PL Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. ipse, self M. F.. ^ ipse ipsa ipsius ipsius ipsi ipBi ipsum ipsam ipsis ipsis N. ipsum ipsius ipsI ipsum ipso ipsa ipso M. F. N. ipsi ipsae ipsa ipsorum ipsarum ipsorum ipsis ipsis ipsis ipsos ipsas ipsa ipsis a. Notice that ipse is declined precisely like the Pronominal Adjectives, except for the single form ipse itself, . 645. ille, that, he. Similarly iste, this (that) of yours Sing. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. PI. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. M. ille illius illi ilium F. ilia illius illi illam N. illud illius illi illud illo ilia illo M. F. N. illi illae ilia illorum illarum illorum iUis illis illis illos illas ilia illis illis illis a. Ille is like ipse, except for the d-Neuter (Nom.-Acc. Sing.). 266 Declension of Is and Idem 646. is, this, that, the, he, she, it M. F. N. Sing. Nom. is ea id Gen. ems ems ems Dat. el ei ei Ace. eum earn id Voc. AN. eo ea eo PL Nom. ei or ii (I) eae ea Gen. eorum earum eorum Dat. CIS or iis (Is) eis or iis (is) eis or iis (Is) Ace. eoa eas ea Voc. Ahl. eis or iis(is) eis or iis (is) eis or iis (Is) 647. ider n, the same M. F. N. Sing. Nom. idem eadem idem Gen. eiusdem eiusdem eiusdem Dat. eldem eidein eidem Ace. eundem eandem idem Voc. Ahl. eodem eadem eodem PI. Nom. eidem or idem (iidem) eaedem eadem Gen. eorundem earundem eorundem Dat. elsdem or elsdem or elsdem or ' isdem (ilsdem) isdem (iisdem) isdem (iisdem Ace. eosdem easdem eadem Voc. Abl. elsdem or elsdem or elsdem or' isdem (iisdem) isdem (iisdem) isdem (iisdem) a. Notice that idem is declined very nearly like is above, witJi -dem added. b. In the Plural of is, the preferred forms are spelled with two i's, but pronounced with one. In the Plural of idem, the preferred forms are both spelled and pronounced with one i. Declension of Hie 267 648. M. Sing. Nom. hie Gen. huius Dat. huic Ace. hunc Voc. AU. hoc PI. Nom. hi Gen. horum Dat. his Ace. hos Voc. AU. his hie, this, he F. haec huius huic hanc hac hae harum his has his N. hoc huius huic hoc hoc haec horum his haec his a. Hie (for hi-ce), together with qui, quis, quidam, and quisque (next two pages) has a special pronominal ending -ae, in the Nom. Sing, Fein., and the Nom. -Ace. Neut. PI. THE ANIO AS IT DIVIDES ABOVE TIVOLI Before its fall 268 Declension of Qui and Quis 649. qui, Rel. Pronoun, who, and Interrog. Adjective, what 9 SINGULAR F. N. , quae quod cuius • cuius cui cui quis, Interrog. Pronoun, who f (as Substantive) Nom. Gen. Dat Ace. Voc. Ahl. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voe. Ahl. M. qui cuius cui quern quo M. qui quorum quibus quos quam qua quod quo M. «&F. quis cuius cui quern quo N. quid cuius cui quid quo (Same for both words) plural F. quae quarum quibus quas N. quae quorum quibus quae quibus quibus quibus a. Quicumque, whoever, is declined like qui with -cumque added. 650: Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Ahl. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voe. Ahl. quidam, a certain Adjective and Substantive SINGULAR M. quidam cuiusdam cuidam quendam F. quaedam cuiusdam cuidam quandam N. quoddam or quiddam (Substantive) cuiusdam cuidam quoddam or quiddam (Substantive) quodam quadam quodam PLURAL (same for Adjective and Substantive) M. quidam quorundam quibusdam quosdam F. quaedam quarundam quibusdam quasdam N. quaedam quorundam quibusdam quaedam quibusdam quibusdam quibusdam a. Notice that quidam is declined like qui above with -dam addedt has also the Neuter Subsfxintive form from quis. but Declension of Quisquam, Quisque, Aliquis 269 COMPOUNDS OP quis (Compounds of quis have quod- Adjective and quid- Substantive.) 651. Nom, Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. AN. quisquam, any at all (Substantive) M. & F. N. quisquam » quicquam cuiusquam cuiusquam cuiquam cuiquam quemquam quicquam 652. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. AN. a. 653' Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. AN. quisque, M. quisque cuiusque cuique quemque quoquam each: As Adjective quoquam As Substantive F. quaeque cuiusque cuique quamque N. quodque cuiusque cuique quodque M. & F. quisque cuiusque cuique quemque N. quidque cuiusque cuique quidque quoque quoque quaque Similarly quispiam, any. aliquis (aliquT), some, any As Adjective SINGULAR M. F. N. aliqui aliqua aliquod alicuius alicuius alicuius alicui alicui alicui aliquem aliquam aliquod quoque quoque SIMILARLY quis, Indefinite As Substantive M. &F. aliquis alicuius alicui aliquem N. aliquid alicuius alicui aliquid aliquo aliqua aliquo aliquo aliquo PLURAL (same for Adjective and Substantive) Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. AN. M. aliqui aliquorum aliquibus aliquos F. aliquae aliquarum aliquibus aliquas N. aliqua aliquorum aliquibus aliqua aliquibus aliquibus aliquibus a. Note that aliquis and the Indefinite quis are declined like Int£rrogatine quis (649), but tvifh the adjective ending -a in place of the pronominal ae. 270 Declension of Ego, Tu, Sui. — Conjugation of Sum 664. PERSONAL PRONOUNS (7, you) First Second Nam. ego Gen. mei Dat. mihi Ace. me Voe. Ahl. me REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS {myself, yourself, himself, etc.) First Second Third SINGULAR SINGULAR tu tui mei tul BUI tibi mihi tibi sibi te me te Be, Bese tu t6 me te Be, sese PLURAL PLURAL NoTYi. nos vos • Gen. nostrum, -tri vestrum, -tri nostri vestri sui Dat. nobis vobis nobis vobis sibi Ace. nos vos nos vos se, sese Voc. vos Abl. nobis vobis nobis vobis se, sese a. The Pronouns of the Third Person are is, ille, hie, iste. 655. CONJUGATION OP sum (Irregular) (Given first because entering into Conjugation of the Regular Verbs.) Principal Parts: sum, esse, fuT, futOrus Indicative 1st Sing. 2d " 3d " Ist PI. 2d " 3d " sum, I am es, thou art est, he (she, it )is sumus, we are estis, you are sunt, they are Present 1st Sing, eram, I was 2d " eras, thou wast 3d " erat, he was Imperfect 1st PL 2(} " 3d " eramus, we were eratis, you were erant, they were Subjunctive sim SIS sit Bimus Bitis eint essem esses esset essemus essetis essent Sum Finished . 271 Future 1st Sing. erO, I shall he 2d " eris, thou wilt he 3d " erit, he will he ^ 1st PI erimus, we shall he 2d " eritis, you ipill he 3d " erunt, they will he Perfect 1st Sing. fur, I have heen, was fuerim 2d " fuistr, thou hast heen, wast fueris 3d " f uit, he has been, was fuerit 1st PL fuimus, we have heen, were fuerlmus 2d " fuistis, you have heen, ivere fueritis 3d " fuerunt, -ere, they have heen, were Past Perfect fuerint isf ^Singf. f ueram, I had heen fuissem 2d " fueras, thou hadst heen fuisses 5c? " fuerat, he had heen fuisset isiP/f. fueramus, we had heen fuissemus 2d " fueratis, you had heen fuissetis 5d " fuerant, they had he^n Future Perfect fuissent :?s^ Sing. fuerO, I shall have heen 2d " fueris, thou wilt have heen 5c^ " fuerit, he will have heen 1st PI fu erimus, we shall have heen 2d " fueritis, you will have heen 5d " fuerint, they will have heen Imperative ' Pres. 2d es, he thou este, he ye Fut. 2d esto, thou shalt he estote, you shall he 3d esto, he shall he Infinitive Pres. esse, to he Perf. fuisse, to have heen eunto, they shall he Fut. futnrus esse, or fore, to he ahout to he Participle Fut. futdrus, ahout to he 272 First Conjugation: Amo 656. FIRST CONJUGATION amO, love ♦ * Principal Parts: amO amare amavl amatum ACTIVE PASSIVE Indicative Subjunctive Indicative Subjunctive Present amO amem amor amer amas ames amaris, -re ameris, -re amat amet amatur ametur amamus aij^gmus amamur amemur amatis ametis amamini ameminl amant ament amantur Imperfect amentur amabam amarem amabar amare r amabas amares amabaris, -re amareris, -re amabat amaret amabatur amaretur amabamus amaremus amabamur amaremur amabatis amaretis amabamini amaremini amabant amarent amabantur Future amarentur amabO amabor amabis amaberis, -re - amabit amabitur atnabimus amabimur amabitis amabimini amabunt amabuntur Perfect amavl amaverim amatus sum amatus sim amavisti amaverls amatus es amatus sis amavit amaverit amatus est amatus sit amavimus amaverlmus amatr sumus amati simus amavistis amaveritis a mat! estis amati sltis amaverunt, -ere amaverint amati sunt amati sint Amo Finished 273 ACTIVE Indicative Subjunctive Past amaveram amavissem PASSIVE Indicative Subjunctive amaveras amaverat amavisses amavisset Perfect amatus eram amatus eras amatus erat amatus essem amatus esses amatus esset amaveramus amavissemus amaveratis amavissetis amaverant amavissent amati eramus amatressemus amati eratis amatI essetis amati erant amatr essent Future Perfect amaverO amatus erO amaveris amatus eris amaverit amatus erit amaverimus amati : erimus amaveritis amati eritis amaverint amati erunt Imperative singular PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL Pres. ama amate amare amamini Fut, amato amatote amator amantor amatO amantO amator Infinitive Pre s, amare amarl Perf, amavisse amatus esse Fut . amatCirus esse amatum Irl Participle Pres . amatis Perf. amatus Fut. amattirus Fut. amandus Gerund Gerundive Oen. amandl Gen. amandl, -ae, -I Dat. amando Dat. amando, -ae, -0 Ace. amandum Ace. amandum, -am, -um Abl, amando Abl. Supine amatum, -a amando, -a, -0 274 Second Conjugation: Moneo 657. SECOND CONJUGATION moneO, warn Principal Parts: moneO monere monui monitum ACTIVE . . PASSIVE Indicative Subjunctive Indicative Subjunctive Present moneO moneam moneor monear mones moneas moneris, -re monearis, -re monet moneat monetur moneatur monemus moneamus monemur moneamur monetis moneatis monemini moneaminl monent moneant monentur \ Imperfect moneantur monebam monerem monebar monerer monebas moneres monebaris, -re monereris, -re monebat moneret monebatur moneretur monebamus moneremus monebamur moneremur monebatis moneretis monebamini moneremini monebant monerent monebantur Future monerentur mongbo . monebor monebis moneberis, -re monebit monebitur monebimus monebimur monebitis monebimini monebunt monebuntur Perfect monul monuerim monitus sum monitus sim moDuisti monueris monitus es monitus sis monuit monuerit monitus est monitus sit monuimus monuerlmus monuistis monueritis monuerunt, -ere monuerint monitl sumus moniti estis monitl sunt monitr simus monitl sitis monitl sint Moneo Finished 275 ACTIVE Indicative Subjunctive PASSIVE Indicative Subjunctive Past Perfect monueram monuissem monitus eram monitus essem monueras monuisses monitus eras monitus esses monuerat monuisset monitus erat monitus esset monueramus monuissemus monitl eramus moniti essemus monueratis monuerant monuerO monueris monuerit monuerimus monueritis monuerint SINGULAR Pres. mone Fut, monetO moneto monuissetis moniti eratis monuissent moniti erant Future Perfect monitus erO monitus eris monitus erit moniti erimus moniti eritis moniti erunt Imperative plural singular monete monere monetote monetor monento monetor moniti essetis moniti essent PLURAL monemini monentor Infinitive Pres. monere monerl Perf. monuisse monitus esse Fut. monitnrus esse monitum Irl Participle Pres. monens Perf. monitus Fat. monitnrus Fut. monendus Gerund Gerundive Oen. monendl Gen. monendl, -ae, -i Dat. monendo Dat. monendo, -ae, -0 Ace. monendum Ace. monendum, -am, -um Ahl. monendo Abl. monendo, -a, -0 Supine monitum, -U 276 Third Conjugation: Tego 668. THIRD CONJUGATION tego, cover Principal Parts: tegO tegere t6xT tectum ACTIVE . ^ PASSIVE Indicative Subjunctive Indicative Subjunctive Present tego tegam tegor tegar tegis tegas tegeris, -re tegaris, -re tegit tegat tegitur tegatur tegimus tegamus tegimur tegamur tegitis tegatis tegimini tegamini tegunt tegant teguntur Imperfect tegantur teggbam tegerem tegebar tegerer tegebas tegeres tegebaris, -re tegereris, -re tegebat tegeret tegebatur tegeretur tegebamus tegeremus tegebamur tegeremur tegebatis tegeretis tegebamini tegereminl tegebant tegerent tegebantur Future tegerentur tegam tegar tegfis • tegeris, -re teget teggtur teggmus tegemur tegetis tegemini tegent tegentur Perfect texl texerim tectus sum tectus sim texisti texeris tectus es tectus SIS texit texerit tectus est tectus sit teximus texerimus tecti sumus tecti simus texistis texerltis tecti estis tectl sltis texerunt, -ere texerint tectl sunt tecti sint Tego Finished 277 ACTIVE PASSIVE Indicative Subjunctive Indicative Subjunctive Past Perfect texeram texissem tectus eram tectus essem texeras texisses tectus eras tectus esses texerat texisset tectus erat tectus esset texeramus texissemus tectl eramus tecti essemus texeratis texissetis tecti eratis tecti essetis texerant texissent tectl erant tecti essent Futuvi e Perfect texerO tectus erO texeris tectus eris texerit tectus erit texerimus tectl erimus texeritis tectl eritis texerint tectl erunt Imperative SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR plural Pres. tege tegite tegere tegiminl Fut. tegito tegitote tegitor tegito tegunto tegitor teguntor Infinitive Pres. tegere tegl Perf. texisse tectnrus esse Fut. tectarus esse tectum irl Participle Pres. tegens Perf . tectus Fut. tectorus Fut. tegendus Gerund Gerundive Gen. tegendl Gen. tegendl, -ae, -i Dat. tegendo Dat. tegendo, -ae, -0 Ace. tegendum Ace. tegendum, -am, -um Abl. tegendo Abl. tegendo, -a, -0 Supine tectum, -n 278 669. Third Conjugation, in -io: Capio THIRD CONJUGATION, IN -iO capio, talce Principal Parts : capiO capere cepi captum ACTIVE PASSIVE Indicative Subjunctive Indicative • Subjunctive Present capio capiam capior capiar capis capias caperis, -re capiaris, -re capit capiat capitur capiatur •capimus capiamus capimur capiamur capitis capiatis capimini capiamini capiunt capiant ' capiuntur Imperfect capiantur capiebam caperem capiebar * caperer capiebas caperes capiebaris, -re capereris, -re capiebat caperet capiebatur caperetur capiebamus caperemus capiebamur caperemur capiebatis caperetis capiebamini caperemini capiebant caperent capiebantur Future caperentur capiam capiar capies capieris, -re capiet capietur capiemus capiemur capietis capiemini capient capientur Perfect cepi ceperim captus sum captus sim cepistr ceperTs captus es captus sis cepit ceperit captus est captus sit cepimus ceperlmus capti sumus capti simus cepistis ceperltis captT estis capti sitis ceperunt, -ere ceperint capti sunt capti sint Capio Finished 279 ACTIVE PASSIVE Indicative Subjunctive Indicative Subjunctive Past Perfect ceperam cepissem captus eram captus essem ceperas cepisses captus eras captus esses ceperat cepisset captus erat captus esset ceperamus cepissemus capti eramus capti essemus ceperatis cepissetis capti eratis captr essetis ceperant cepissent captr erant capti essent Future Perfect ceperO captus erO ceperis captus eris ceperit captus erit ceperimus captr erimus ceperitis capti eritis ceperint capti erunt Imperative SINGULAR PLURAL singular PLURAL Pres. cape capite capere capimini Fut, capito capitote capitor capito capiuntO ' capitor capiuntor Infinitive ^ Pres, . capere cap! Perf, . cepisse captus esse Fut. captGrus esse captum irl Participle Pres. capiens Perf. captus Fut. captQrus Fat. capiendus Gerund Gerundive Gen. capiendi Gen. capiend] [,-ae,-I Dat. capiendo Dat. capiendo, -ae, -0 Ace. capiendum Ace. capiendum, -am, -um Abl. capiendo Abl. capiendo, -a, -0 Supine captum ,-tl 280 Fourth Conjugation: Audio 660. FOURTH CONJUGATION audio, hear Principal Parts: audio audire audlvl audrtum ACTIVE Indicative Subjunctive PASSIVE Indicative Subjunctive Present audio audiam audior audiar audls audias audiris, -re audiaris, -re audit audiat auditur audiatur audlmus audiamus audimur audiamur audltis audiatis audimini audiamin! audiunt audiant audiuntur imperfect audiantur audiebam audlrem audiebar audlrer audiebas audlres audiebaris, -re audlreris, -re audiebat audiret audiebatur audlretur audiebamus audiremus audiebamur audlremur audiebatis audiretis audiebamini audlremini audiebant audlrent audiebantur Future audlrentur audiam audiar audies audieris, -re audiet audietur audifimus audiemur audi€tis audiemini audient audientur Perfect audlvl audiverim auditus sum auditus sim audlvisti audlverls aiiditus es auditus sis audlvit audlverit audrtus est auditus sit audlvimus audlverlmus auditl sumus audit! simus audlvistis audiveritis audit! estis audit! sitis audiverunt,«^re audlverint audit! sunt audit! sint Audio Finished 281 ACTIVE PASSIVE Indicative auicllveram audiveras audiverat audiveramus audiveratis audiverant audiverO audlveris audlverit audiverimus audiveritis audlverint SINGULAR Pres. audi Fut. audito audit Subjunctive Indicative Past Perfect audlvissem audltus eram audlvisses audltus eras audlvisset audltus erat audlvissemus audlvissetis audlvissent audltl eramus audltl eratis audltl erant Subjunctive audltus essem audltus esses audltus esset audltl essemus audltl essetis audltl essent Future Perfect audltus ero audltus eris audltus erit audltl erimus audltl eritis audltl erunt Imperative plural singular audlte audlre audltote auditor audiunto auditor PLURAL audlmini audiuntor Infinitive Pres. audlre audlrl Perf. audlvisse audltus esse Fut. audltnrus esse audltum Irl Participle Pres. audiens Perf. audltus Fut. audltDrus Fut. audiendus Gerund Gen. audiendl Dat. audiendo Ace. audiendum Ahl. audiendo Gerundive Gen. audiendl, -ae, -I Dat. audiendo, -ae, -0 Ace. audiendum, -am, -um Ahl. audiendo, -a, -0 Supine audltum, -G 282 Synopsis 661. SYNOPSIS (BIRD'S-EYE-VIEW) for three Specimen Verbs _ . . , amO '-Is amare amavi tegere texi audire audivi amatum, love tectum, cover audrtum, hear ACTIVE Indicative Pres. Imperf. Fut. Perf. Past Perf. Fut. Perf. amo amabam amabo amavl amaveram amavero tego tegebam tegam texi texeram texero Subjunctive audio audiebam audiam audivl audlveram audivero Pres. Imperf. Perf. Past Perf. amem amarem amaverim amavissem tegam tegerem texerim texissem Imperative audiam audirem audiverim audivissem Pres. Fut. ama amato • tege tegito Infinitive audi audito Pres. Perf. Fut. amare tegere amavisse texisse amaturus esse tecturus esse audire audivisse auditiirus esse Participle Pres. Fut. amans amaturus tegens tecturus Gerund audiens auditurus amandi, etc tegendl, etc. Supine audiendi, etc. amatum, -u tectum, -u auditum, -u Synopsis 283 SYNOPSIS for three Specimen Verbs, Finished Principal Parts [ amor amari amatus sum, be loved tegor tegi tectus sum, he covered I audior audlrl auditus sum, be heard Pres. Imperf. Fut. Perf. Past Perf. Fut. Perf. Pres. Imperf. Perf. Past. Perf. Pres. Fut. Pres. Perf. Fut. Perf. Fut. amor amabar amabor amatus sum amatus eram amatus ero amer amarer amatus sim amatus essem PASSIVE Indicative tegor tegebar tegar tectus sum tectus eram tectus ero Subjunctive tegar tegerer tectus sim tectus 6ssem Imperative amare amator amari amatus esse amatum iri amatus amandus tegere tegi tor Infinitive tegi tectus esse tectum iri Participle tectus tegendus Gerundive audior audiebar audiar auditus sum auditus eram auditus ero audiar audirer auditus sim auditus essem amandi, -ae, -i, tegendi, -ae, -i, etc. etc. audire auditor audiri auditus esse auditum iri auditus audiendus audiendi, -ae, -i, etc. 284 Conjugation of Deponents 662. CONJUGATION OF DEPONENTS Conj. I miror, miran, mlratus sum, wonder at Principal ) II vereor, vererl, veritus sum, respect Parts: j III sequor, sequi, secDtus sum, /oZZoi^? IV partior, partirl, partitus sum, share Indicative Pres. -re Imperf, Fut Perf. I miror miraris, miratur miramur miramini mirantur mirabar mirabor miratus sum -re -re III sequdr eequeris, sequitur sequimur sequimini eequuntur sequebar sequar secutus sum II vereor vereris, veretur veremur veremini verentur verebar verebor veritus sum Past Perf. miratus eram veritus eram secutus eram partitus eram Fut. Perf. miratus ero veritus ero secutus ero partitus ero Subjunctive verear sequar vererer sequerer veritus sim seciitus sim L veritus essem secutus essen Imperative verere sequere veretor sequitor Infinitive vereri sequi veritus esse secutus esse veriturus seciiturus esse esse Participle verens sequens veriturus seciiturus veritus seciitus verendus sequendus Gerundive and Gerund verendi, etc. sequendi, etc. Supine miratum, -u veritum, -ii seciitum, -u Pres. mirer Imperf. mirarer Perf. miratus sim Past Perf. miratus esser Pres. mirare Fut. mirator Pres. mirari Perf miratus esse Fut. miratiirus esse Pres. Act. miran s Fut. Act. miraturus Perf. Pass, miratus Fut. Pass, mirandus mirandi, etc. IV partio?: partiris, -re partitur partimur partimini partiuntur partiebar partiar partitus sum partiar partirer partitus sim partire partitor partiri partitus esse partitiirus esse partiens partitiirus partitus partiendus partiendi, etc. partitum, -ii Periphrastic Conjugation 285 PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION (or Roundabout Future) 663. The Periphrastic Conjugation is made up of the Future Active or Future Passive Participle with the verb sum. Thus: ACTIVE amatGrus sum, I am about to love Indicative Subjunctive Pres. amaturus sum, lam about to love amaturus sim Imperf. amattirus eram, I was about to love amaturus essem Fut. amaturus ero, I shall be about to love Perf. amaturus fui amaturus fueriir Past Perf. amaturus fueram amaturus f uissei Fut. Perf, amaturus fuero Infinitive Pres. amaturus esse Perf. amaturus fuisse . PASSIVE amandus sum, I {am to be loved) have to be loved Indicative Subjunctive Pres. amandus sum, I have to be loved amandus sim Imperf. amandus eram, I had to be loved amandus essem Fut. amandus ero, I shall have to be loved Perf. amandus f ui amandus fueriir Past Perf. amandus fueram amandus fuissei Fut. Perf. amandus fuero Infinitive Pres. amandus esse Perf. amandus fuisse a. The Periphrastic Future is, by its nature, confined to uses in which it stufes, or assumes, something as about to be done (as in "the war which the boys are going to wage," bellum quod pueri gesturi sunt, or "if the boys are going to wage war," si pueri bellum gesturi sunt). Thus it cannot be used to express ordinary Purpose, for it would mean, for example, not "in order that the boys may wage war," but "in order that they may be about to wage war." 286' Conjugation of Possum 664. Pres. CONJUGATION OP possum, am able, can Principal Parts: possum posse potui Imperf. Fut Perf. Past Perf.^ Fut. Perf. Pres. Perf. Indicative possum potes potest possumus potestis possunt poteram, -as, -at, etc. potero, -is, -it, etc. Indicative potui, -isti, -it, etc. potueram, -as, -at, etc. potuero, -is, -it, etc. Infinitive posse potuisse Subjunctive possim possis possit possimus possit is possint possem, -es, -et, etc. Subjunctive potuerim, -Is, -it, etc. potuissem, -es, -et, etc. Participle potens (which has be- come an Adjective) COINS OF THE EMPEROR HADRIAN And Sabina, his wife Conjugation of Volo, Nolo, Malo 287 665. CONJUGATION OF volo, nolo, malo volo velle volui Principal Parts \ nolo nolle nOlui malo malle malul — will; want — he unwilling — prefer Indic. Pres, volo VIS vult volumus vultis volunt Imperf, volebam Fut. vol am Perf. volui Past Perf. volueram Fut. Perf. voluero SUBJ. velim velis velit velimus velitis veliiit vellem voluerim voluissem Indic. SUBJ. nolo nolim non VIS nolis non vult nolit nolumus nollmus non vultis nolitis nolunt nolint nolebam nollem no] am nolui noluerim nolueram noluissem noluero Pres. Imperf. Fut. Indic. malo mavis mavult malumus mavultis malunt malebam malam Perf. malui Past Perf. malueram Fut. Perf. maluero SUBJ. malim mails malit malimus malitis malint mallem maluerim maluissem Imperative Pres. noli Fut. nolito nolite nolitote Pres. velle Perf. voluisse Pres. volens Infinitive nolle noluisse Participle nolens malle maluisse 288 666. Conjugation of Fio CONJUGATION OF flO, become (= Passive of facio) (The Perfect System and the Future Passive Participle are formed regu- larly from facio.) Pres. Imperf. Fut Principal Parts: fiO fieri factus sum Perf. factus sum Past Perf. factus eram Fut. Perf. factus ero Indicative flo fis fit fiunt fiebam flam Subjunctive flam fiamus fias fiatis fiat fiant fie rem factus sim factus essem Imperative Pres. fi fite Infinitive Pres. fieri Perf. factus esse Fut. factum iri Participle Perf. factus Fut. faciendus Gerund faciendi faciendo faciendum faciendo Gerundive faciendi, -ae, -i faciendo, -ae, -o faciendum, -am, -um faciendo, -a, -o Supine factum factu a. Prepositional compounds of facio usually have the regular Passive. .Thus the Principal Parts of conficio are : Active: conficio, conficere, confeci, confectum. Passive: conficior, confici, confectus sum. iThe i is long except in fit and before short e (thus fieri, fierem). Conjugation of Eo 289 667. CONJUGATION OF eo, go (Note the contracted forms.) Principal Parts: eO Ire ii (or ivi) itum Indicative Subjunctive Pres. eo Imus earn earnus Is itis eas eatis it eunt eat eant Imperf. ibam irem Fut ibo Perf, ii {or ivi) iimus isti (or iisti) letis {or iistis) lit {or it) ierunt {or iere) Past Perf, ieram Fut, Perf. iero Imperative Infinitive Participle Pres. ire Pres. iens, lens, Gen. eun tie isse (or iisse) Fut. Pres. i Fut. ito ito ite itote Perf. eunto Fut. iturus iturus esse Gerund eundi eundo eundum eundo Fut. Pass, eundum (est, Impersonal) REMAINS OF ROMAN ROAD IN NORTHERN SYRIA From Butler's "Architecture and Other Arts," by permission 290 Conjugation of Fero 668. CONJUGATION OF ferO, hear Principal Parts: ferO ferre tulr latum Active Passive Indic. SUBJ. Indic. SuBJ. Pres. fero feram feror ferar fers feras ferris feraris or -c fert ferat fertur feratur ferimus feramus ferimur feramur fertis feratis ferimini feramini ferunt ferant feruntur ferantur Imperf, ferebam ferrem ferebar ferrer Fut feram ferar Perf, tuli tulerim latus sum latus sim Past Perf. tuleram tulisseru latus eram latus essem Fut Perf. tulero latus ero Imperative Pres. far ferte ferre ferimini Fut ferto fertote fertor ferto ferunto fertor feruntor Infinitive Pres. ferre ferri Perf. tulisse latus (esse) Fut laturus (esse) latum iri Participle Pres. ferens Perf. latus Fut laturus Fut, ferendus Gerund Gerundive ferendl ferendl, -ae, -i ferenda ferendo, -ae, -o ferendum ferendum, -am, -um ferendo ferendo, -a, -o Supine latum, -u LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY The references are to sections. Summary of Forms. a or ab, Prep, with Abl., from^ away from; by (of Agent of Passive Voice). A fronte, etc., on the fronts etc. abicio, -icere, -iecl, -iectum, 3, throw away, throw down, throw. absum, abesse, aful, afutnrus (also abfui, abfutnrus), irr., 6eaii?a2/, he absent, be distant [655]. ac, see atque. accedo, -cedere, -cessT, -cessum, 3, approach. ^^-^^ accido, accidere, accidi, ,3, befall, happen. accipiO, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum, 3, take, receive, accept. accurrO, -currere, -curri and -cu- curri, , 3, run up. acer, acris, acre, sharp, fierce, 293 [630]. Compar. acrior, Superl. acerrimus, 511, 2 [634]. acies, -ei, F. 5, sharp edge, line of battle. acriter, Adv., keenly, fiercely. Compar. acrius, Superl. acer- rime, 538 [637]. ad, Prep, with Ace, at, {near) by. With idea of motion, aim, pur- pose, etc., to, toward, for. Ad hunc modum, after this fashion. adeO, adire, adii (or adivT), adi- tum, irr., approach, 503 [667]. Figures in brackets refer to the adferO, adferre, attuli, allatum, irr., bring (to), 522 [668]. adgredior, -gredi, -gressus sum, 3, step, go, go against, attack. adhaereO, -haerere, -haesi, -hae- snrus, 2, adhere, stick. adhortor, -arl, -atus sum, 1, en- courage; exhort, urge. adiungO, -iungere, -itlnxi, -innc- tum, S,join (to). adiuvO, -iuvare, -iQvI, -intum, 1, assist, aid. administrO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, administer, manage, do. adpropinquO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, approach. Word of Relation, taking Dat. adsuefacio,-facere,-fecr, -factum, 3, accustom {to). adsum, adesse, adfuT, adfutnrus, irr., be by, be present, be at hand, be here [655]. adventus, -Ds, M. 4, arrival. ad versus, -a, -um, adverse, opposed. Word of Attitude, taking Dat. advolo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, fly (to), rush (to). aeger, aegra, aegrum, ill aegre. Adv., in an ill manner, ill, with difficulty or annoyance. aeque. Adv., equally. aequus, -a, um, equal; fair; favorable. 291 292 Latin-English Vocabulary aestas, -atis, F. 3, summer. ager, agri, M. % field, 111 [616], agmen, agminis, N. 3, army (on a march); line of march. ago, agere, egi, actum, 3, drive, lead; carry on, deal with, dis- cuss ; act, do ; pass, spend. agricola, -ae, M. 1, farmer. alacer, -cris, -ere, eager. aliquantus, -a, -um, some. Neut. as Substantive = somewhat. aliquis, aliquid (Adj. forms aliqul, aliqua, aliquod). Indefinite, some, any one, any, 207 [653]. aliquot, indecl. Adj., some, sev- eral. aliter. Adv., otherwise, differ- ently. alius, -a, -ud, other, another (of several); different, else. Alius . . . alius, one . . . another-; PI. some ... others, 130 [643]. alter, -tera, -terum, -o^/ier, an- other (of two), a second. Alter . . . alter, the one, the other; PI., one party . . . the other party, 130 [643]. altior, higher. Compar. of altus, high. altus, -a, -um, high, lofty. amans, loving, Pres. Act. Par tic. of amO. Declension, 300 [632]. Ambiorix, -Tgis, M. 3, a name. ambo, -ae, -0, both, 328 [640]. ambulO,-are, -avi, -atum, 1, walk. amica, -ae, P. 1 (woman or girl), friend. amicus, -I, M. 2 (man or boy), friend. amO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, love, like [656]. amplius, more. As Aqc. of De- gree, more, further; equiva- lent to an Adv. Compar. Neut. of amplus, ample. amplus, -a, -um, ample, large. an, Conj., or (in second part of a question), animadvert©, -vertere, -verti, -versum, 3, notice. animal, -alis, -ium, N. 3, animal, 270 [621]. animus, -I, M. 2, mind, spirit; feeling. annus, -I, M. 2, year. ante, Prep, with Ace, before, in- front-of. Also Adv., before, in advance. antea. Adv., before this, before that, formerly. apertus, -a, -um, open. appello, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, address; call, name. aptus, -a, -um, apt, fitted, fit. apud, Prep, with Ace, at, among ; at-the-house of. arbitror, -arl, -atus sum, 1, think, suppose. ardeO, ardere, arsi, arsGrus, 2, burn, be in a blaze. arma, -Orum, N. PI. 2, arms, weapons. armO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, arm. Arplneius, -I, M. 2, a name, ars, artis, -ium, P. 3, art, skill. ascendo, ascendere, ascendl, as- censum, 3, ascend, mount. at, Conj., but, yet. Of contrast or objection. Not so strong as sed. athleta, -ae, M. 1, athlete. Latin-Eng lis h Vocabu lary 293 atque or ac, Conj., and. Of close connection, like -que. auctOritas, -atis, F. 3, authority, audeo, audere, ausus sum, 2, dare, audio, -Ire, -ivl, -Itum, 4:yhear [660]. Aurunculeius, -I, M. 2, a name, aut, Conj., or. Aut . . . aut . . . , either , . , or . , , autem, Conj., postpositive, on the other hand, hut, however; now. Of contrast, but not so strong as at. auxilium, -I, N. 2, aid, help. Baculus, -1, M. 2, a name, barbarus, -a, -um, barbarian, beatus, -a, -um, happy, blessed, fortunate, Bellovaci, -Orum, M. PI. 2, name of a Gallic nation, bellum, -1, N. 2, war, bene, Adv., if?eZZ. beneficium, -i, N. 2, well-doing, kindness, benignus, -a, -um, good-natured, kind. Word of Quality and Attitude, taking Dat. biduum, -1, N. 2, twQ-days. bonus, -a, -um, good^ 117 [627]. bracchium, -T, N. 2, (fore-) arm. brevis, -e, short, small. C, for Gaius. cado, cadere, cecidi, castirus, 3, fall; befall, happen. caedes, -is, -ium, F. 3, slaughter, 271 [622]. caedo, caedere, cecldl, caesum, 3, cut, kill, Caesar, Caesaris, M. 3, a name. caespes, -itis, M. 3, sod, turf. capio, capere, cepi, captum, 3, take, take up. Consilium capio, /orm apian [659]. Capreae, -arum, F. 1, Capri. captivus, -a, -um, captive, caput, capitis, N. 3, head, 256 [617]. casa, -ae, F. 1, cottage, cabin. castra, -Orum, N. PI. 2, camp. casus, -iis,M. 4, chance, accident; case, 369 [624]. Catuvolcus, -1, M. 2, a name. causa, -ae, F. 1, cause, reason. Causa with Gen. of Gerundive or Gerund, for the purpose of, cautus, -a, -um, cautious. cedo, cedere, cessi, cessum, 3, yield; give way. Word of Atti- tude, taking Dative. celeritas, -atis, F. 3, swiftness, celeriter, Adv., swiftly, quickly. cena, -ae, F. 1, dinner, ceno, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, dine. centum, indecl. Adj., a hundred. centurio, -Onis, M. 3, centurion (commander of a company). certamen, -inis, N. 3, contest, certe, Adv., certainly, surely; at any rate, at least. certior, -ius, surer, trustier, Compar. of certus, sure. Cer- tiorem (or -es) facio, I inform. Declension, 286 [629]. certo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, con- tend, strive. certus, -a, -um, certain, sure, as- sured, fixed; trusty, Cicero, -Onis, M. 3, a name. circiter, Prep, with Ace, and Adv., about. 294 Latin-English Vocabulary circum, Prep, with Ace, around, around in. Also Adv., around. circumdo, -dare, -dedi, -datum, 1, throw around, surround. circummitto, -mittere, -misr, -mis- sum, 3, send around. circumveniO, -venire, -veni, -ven- tum, 4, surround. citerior, -ius, on this side, hither. Compar.; cf. citra, on this side, 631 [636]. citra. Prep, with Ace, on this civitas, -atis, -ium (sometimes -um), F. 3, state. clamito, -are, -avT, -atum, 1, keep crying out. clamO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, shout. clamor, -Oris, M. 3, shout. coactus, -OS, M. 4, compulsion. coepi, coepisse, coeptum est, de- fective, began, started. cOgitO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, think, plan. cognOscO, -gnoscere, -gnOvT, -gnitum, 3, learn thoroughly, find out; recognize. cOgO, cOgere, c5egi, coactum, 3, gather; compel. cohors , cohortis , -ium, F. 3, cohort (tenth part of a legion). coUis, -is, M. 3, hill. colO, colere, colul, cultum, 3, cultivate. commemorO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, state, mention. committo, -mittere, -misl, -mis- sum, 3, join, commit. commode, Adv., conveniently, properly. commodum, -I, N. 2, advantage. commOnicO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, communicate. commCiniO, -Ire, -IvI, -Itum, 4, fortify. communis, -e, common. commnto, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, completely change. compleo, -plere, -plevi, -pletum, 2, fill thoroughly, fill up, fill. complores, -plaria (or -a), -pla- num, a good many, 327 [633]. comprehendo, -prehendere, -pre- hendl, -prehensum, 3, seize, catch. conatus, -ns, M. 4, attempt, un- dertaking. concede, -cedere,-cessl, -cessum, 3, yield, grant, concede. conclamO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, shout vigorously, shout out. concurrO, -currere, -curri and -cucurri, -cursum, 3, run to- gether, rush. concurs 0, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, run to and fro. condicio, -Onis, F. 3, terms, con- dition{s). condiscipulus, -I, M. 2, fellow- pupil, schoolmate. cOnfertus, -a, -um, crowded, cOnfestim, Adv., immediately. cOnficiO, cOnficere, cOnfecI, cOn- fectum, 3, finish, complete, cOnfldO, -fidere, -fisus sum, 3, trust (to), confide {in). Word of Attitude, taking Dat. (also the Locative Abl.). cOnfirmO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, strengthen, establish. cOnfiteOr, -fiterl, -fessus sum, 2, confess. Latin-English Vocabulary 295 conicio, -icere, -ieci, -iectum, 3, hurl. conligO, -ligere, -legl, -Iectum, 3, gather^ collect. conloco, -are, -avT, -atum, 1, place, station. conloquium, -i, N. 2, colloquy. conloquor, -loqui, -locntus sum, 3, covfer. cOnor, -an, -atus sum, 1, attempt y undertake. cOnsequor, -sequi, -secntus sum, 3, follow vigorously, overtake; gain. cOnservO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, save, 2^'i^6serve. consldo, -sidere, -sedi, -sessum, 3, sit down; halt; camp. consilium, -i, N. 2, counsel, plan ; Judgment, wisdom; council. cOnsistO, -sistere, -stiti, 3, take position ; halt. conspicio, -spicere,-spexi, -spec- tum, 3, see. cOnspicor, -arl, -atus sum, 1, get sight of. cOnstituO, -stituere, -stitul, -sti- tQtum, 3 (stronger than statuO), establish, place ; determine. cOnsuetCidO, -inis, F. 3, custom. cOnsulO, -sulere, -sului, -sultum, 3, consult {for), look out for. cOnsultO, Ad\., purposely, inten- tionally. constlmO, -snmere, -snmpsi, snmptum, 3, consume, spend. contemnO, -temnere, -tempsT, -temptum, 3, despise. contemptio,-Onis,F.3, contempt. contendo, -tendere, -tendi, -ten- tum, 3, strain ; strive, hasten. contineO, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum, 2, hold in, ^em in, keep. contra, Prep, with Ace, against. contraho, -trahere, -traxi, -trac- tum, 3, contract. contrOversia, -ae, F. 1, contro- versy. convallis, -is, F. 3, valley, defile. convenio, -venire, -veni, -ventum, 4, come together, meet. convert©, -vertere, -verti, -ver- sum, 3, turn about. Converts signa, I wheel about. cOpia, -ae, F. 1, abundance, sup- ply. In PL, resources /(military) forces. coqua, -ae, F. 1, cook. Corflnium, -T, N. 2, Corflnium. Cornelius, -T, M. 2, a name. cornn, -OS, N. 4, horn; wing (of an army), 369 [624]. corpus, -oris, N.3,6od2/, 265 [620]. cotidie, Adv., daily, every day. Cotta, -ae, M. 1, a name. Crassus, -i, M. 2, a name. credo, credere, credidi, creditum, 3, believe. Word of Attitude, taking Dat. culina, -ae, F. 1, kitchen. culpa, -ae, F. 1, fault, blame. culpO, -are, -avI, -atum, 1, blame, censure. cum. Prep, with Abl., with. cum, Conj., when, as; since; although. ctlnctus, -a, -um, all (together), ivhole. In PL, all, everybody. cupide, Adv., eagerly. cupidus, -a, -um, desirous. cupio, cupere, cupivi (and cupil), cupitum, 3, desire, wish, want. 296 Latin-Evglish Vocabulary car, Adv., why? cnra, -ae, F. 1, care, anxiety. currO, currere, cucurrl, cursum, 3, run. cursus, -OS, M. 4, running, run. de. Prep, with Abl., down from, from (of descent); concerning about. debeo, debere, d^bui, debitum,2, owe; ought. decedo, -cedere, -cessl, -cessum, 3, go away, withdraw. decern, indecl. Adj., ten. decerto, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, set- tle the war, fight it out, decimus, -a, -um, tenth. decipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum, 3, catch, deceive. dedo, dedere, dedidi, deditum, 3, give up. Me dedo, I give myself up (to), devote myself (to); surrender. dedaco, -dcicere, -dnxi, -ductum, 3, lead off, lead away. defatigO, -are, -avI, -atum, 1, fatigue, tire out. defendO,-fendere,-fendI,-fensum, 3, defend. defero, -ferre, -tull, -latum, irr., carry off; report, 622 [668]. deficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum, 3, fail. deicio, -icere, -ieci, -iectum, 3, cast down. deinceps, Adv., in succession, one after the other. deinde, Adv., afterward, next; in the second place, dellbero, -are, -avI, -atum, 1, de- liberate. demitto , -mitter e , -misl, -missum, 3, send down, let down. Me demitto, descend, come down. demo, demere, dempsi, demptum, 3, take down. demum. Adv., at last, finally. denique. Adv., at last, finally; in short. desldero, -are, -avI, -atum, 1, desire. desisto, desistere, destiti, desti- torus, 3, desist, stop. desperatio, -Onis, F. 3, despair. desperO, -are, -avI, -atum, 1, de- spair (of). desum, deesse, defuT, defutarus, irr., be wanting, fail [655]. dexter, -tra, -trum, right. Dex- tra, -ae, as Noun, F. 1, right hand. dicO, dicere, dixi, dictum, 3, say, speak, dictum, -1, N. 2, saying, word. dies, diei, M. and F. 5, day. Dies dictuSf ^ day appointed, 395 [625]. difficilis, -e, difficult. Compar. difficilior, Superl. difficillimus, 611, 3 [634]. dignus, -a, -um, worthy. Takes Abl. dlindico, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, de- cide (between). diligens, -ens. Gen. -entis, dili- gent, careful. Compar., di!i- gentior, Superl., dlligentissi- mus, 611, 1 [634). diligenter. Adv., diligently^, care- fully. Compar., diligentius, Super]., dlligentissime, 6BS [6371. Latin-English Vocabulary 297 diligentia, -ae, F. 1, diligence, carefulness. dimicO, -are, -avi, -atum, \, fight. disced©, -cedere, -cessl, -cessum, 3, move off, depart. discipllna, -ae, F. 1, discipline. discipulus, -T, M. 2, pupil, school- boy. disco, discere, didicT, , 3, learn. displiceo, -plicere, -plicul, -plici- tum, 2, be displeasing, dis- please. Verb of Quality, taking Dat. disputatio, -Onis, F. 3., discus- sion. distribuO, -tribuere, -tribui, -tri- bntum, 3, distribute. dia, Adv., /or a long time, long. diversus, -a, -um, different. divido, dividere, divisi, dlvisum, 3, divide. do, dare, dedi, datum, 1, give. (For the short a, see 163, ftn. 1). doceo, docere, docui, doctum, 2, teach, inform, tell, show. doleo, dolere, dolui, dolitnrus, 2, suffer, ache, grieve. dolor, -Oris, M. 3, pain. dolus, -1, M. 2, trick, stratagem. domina, -ae, F. 1, mistress. dominus, -i, M. 2, master. domus, -Gs and -I, F. 4 and 2, house, home, 406 [626]. donee, Conj., while; until. donum, -1, N. 2, gift, present, 107 [615]. ducenti, -ae, -a, two hundred. doco, dncere, dtlxi, ductum, 3, lead. dum, Conj., while; until. duo, -ae, -o, two, 328 [640]. duplex, duplex. Gen. duplicis, twofold, double; ambiguous, 293 [631]. dnrus, -a,-um, hard, stern, harsh. dux, ducis, M. 3, leader^ guide. e or ex. Prep, with Abl., out of, from; of (m the sense of from). Ex cOnsuetOdine sua, in ac- cordance with his habit. Ex utraque parte, etc., on either side, etc. EburOnes, -um, M. PI. 2, name of a Gallic nation. edDcO, edtlcere, edtixi, eductum, 3, lead out. effero, efferre, extull, elatum, irr., carry out or away, 522 [668]. efficio, efficere, effecl, effectum, 3, make out, accomplish, bring about. ego, mel, J, 214 [654]. egredior, egredl, egressus sum, 3, march out, go out. eicio, eicere, eiecl, eiectum, 3, throw out. Me eicio, I rush out. eiabor, elabr, elapsus sum, 3, slip out, escape. eligo, eligere, elegl, eiectum, 3, pick out, elect, choose. emitto, emittere, emisl, emis- sum, 3, send out. enim, Conj., /or. Like nam, but postpositive in its clause, eo. Ire, ii (or IvI), itum, irr., go, 503 [667]. eO, Adv., thither, to that place. epistula, -ae, F. 1, epistle, letter. 298 Latin-English Vocabulary eques, equitis, M. 3, horseman, cavalryman. In PL, = cavalry. equestris, -e, cavalry (as Adj.). equitatus, -Gs, M. 4, cavalry. equus, equT, M. 2, horse. erumpO, -rumpere, -rGpi, -rup- tum, 3, break out, sally out. eruptio, -Onis, F. 3, sally. Esuvii, -Orum, M. PI. 2, name of a Gallic nation. et, Conj., and. Et . . . et . . . both . . . and . . . etiam, Conj. and Adv., even, also. etsi, Conj., even if; although. ex, see e. excedo, -cedere, -cessl, -cessum, 3, come out (of), leave, with- draw. excipio, -cipere, -cepT, -ceptum, 3, receive, pick up. excitO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, rouse, rouse up, raise. exemplar, -aris, -ium, N. 3, pattern, 270 [621]. exemplum, -i, N. 2, example, pre- cedent. exeO, -Ire, -il (or -ivl), -itum, irr., go out, march out, 603 [667]. exerceo, exercere, exercuT, exer- citum, 2, exercise, practice, drill. exercitus, -os, M. 4, army. exiguus, -a, -um, scanty, slight. existimo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, estimate; think. experior, experlrl, expertus sum, 4, try. explorator, -Oris, M. 3, scout. explore, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, ex- plore, reconnoiter; find out. exsisto, -sistere, -stiti, -stitarus, 3, break out, arise. exspecto, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, ex- pect, await, wait for. extendo, extendere, extendi, ex- tentum and extensum, 3, stretch out, extend. exterior, -ius, outer. Compar. of exterus, outside, 531 [636]. exterus, -a, -um, outside. extremus or extimus, outermost, extreme, the edge of. Superl. of exterus, outside, 531 [636]. exuO, -uere, -ui, -Qtum, 3, strip (of), deprive (of). Fabius, -1, M. 2, a name. facile, Adv., easily, Compar. fa- cjlius, Superl. facillime, 538 [637]. facilis, -e, easy. Compar. facilior, Superl. faciilimus, 511, 3 [634]. facio, facer e, feci, factum, 3, make, do, perform, act. Facta potes- tate, opportunity being given. facultas, -atis, F. 3, facility; opportunity. fama, -ae, F. 1, fame, reputation. faveO, favere, favT, fautum, 2, be favorable to, favor. Word of Attitude, taking Dat. femina, -ae, F. 1, woman. fere, Adv., generally; about, almost. fero, ferre, tulT, latum, irr., bear, bring, carry ,^ 522 [668]. ferus, -a, -um, fierce, wild. fervefacio, -facere, -feci, -factum, 3, heat red hot. fides, -ei, F. 5, faith, loyalty; promise, word. Latin-English Vocabulary 299 frdo, fidere, fisus sum, 3, trust. filia, -ae, F. 1, daughter. frlius, fill, M. 2, son. finis, -is, -ium, M. 3, limit, end, boundary; Iq PL, boundaries, territory, 271 [622]. finitimus, -a, -um, neighboring. PL as Subst., neighbors. flO, fieri, factus sum, irr., become; be done; happen. Used as Passive of facio, 502 [666]. firmO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, make Urm, strengthen. flamma, -ae, F. 1, flame, fire. fleO, Here, flevi, fletum, 2, weep, cry. flnmen, -inis, N. 3, river. forsitan. Adv., perhaps.. With Subjunctive of Possibility, fortasse, Adv., joer/iaps. forte. Adv., by chance, perhaps. fortis, -e, strong, brave, 293 [630]. fortiter. Adv., bravely. Corapar. fortius, SuperL fortissime. forttina, -ae, F. \, fortune. frater, fratris, M. 3, brother. frOns, frontis, -ium, F. 3, fore- head, front. frDmentum, -I, N. 2, grain. fruor, frui, frdctus sum, ^, profit by, enjoy. Takes AbL fuga, -ae, F. 1, flight. fugio, fugere, fOgi, fugitnrus, 3, flee, run away. funda, -ae, F. 1, sling. fungor, fungi, fnnctus sum, 3, perform, discharge. Takes AbL ^ Gaius, -r, M. 2, a name. I * Galba, -ae, M. 1, a name. galea, -ae, F. 1, helmet, Gallia, -ae, F. 1, Gaul. Gallicus, -a, -um, Gallic. Gallus, a Gaul. Also a man's name, Gallus. gaudeo, gaudere, gavlsus sum, 2, rejoice, be glad of. gens, gentis, -ium, F. 3, race, 271 [622]. genus, generis, N. 3, race, kin; kind, class. Germanus, -i, M. 2, a German. gero, gerere, gessi, gestum, 3, carry f bear; carry on, wage, m^anage; do. gladius, -1, M. 2, sword. gloria, -ae, F. 1, glory. gradus, -ns, M. 4, step. gratia, -ae, F. 1, popularity, favor. gratus, -a, -um, gratifying, pleas- ing, agreeable. Word of Qual- ity, taking Dat. gravis, -e, heavy, serious, grave. gravor, -ari, -atus sum, 1, be an- noyed. habeo, habere, habul, habitum, 2, have; hold; regard. OratiO- nem habeO, deliver an address. Pro certo habeO,/eeZ sure. habito, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, in- habit, dwell, live. heri. Adv., yesterday. hiberna, -Orum, N. PL 2, a ivinter camp, winter-quarters. hie, haec, hoc, this; he, she, it] the latter, 166 [648]. hic. Adv., in this place, here. hiemO, -are,- avI, -atum, 1, spend the winter, winter. 300 Latin-English Vocabulary hiems,hiemiSjF.S,storm;ivinter. hodie, Adv., today. homo, hominis, 3, man. (The ordinary word for a man mere- ly as a human being, whereas vir implies a compliment.) honestus, -aLy-um, honorable. honor, -Oris, M. 3, honor. hOra, -ae, F. 1, hour. hortor,-ari, -atus sum, 1, exhort, urge. hortus, -1, M. 2, garden. hostis, -is, -ium, M. 3, enemy. iacio, iacere, iecl, iactum, 3, throw. iaculum, -i, N. 2, javelin. iam. Adv., by this time, already, now. ibi. Adv., there. Idem, eadem, idem, the same, 168 [647]. idOneus, -a, -um, suitable, jit. Compar. magis idOneus, Su- perl. maxime idOneus, 511, 4 [634]. ignis, -is, -ium, M. 3, jire (Abl. Sing. -1 or -e), 278 [623]. ille, -a, -ud, that; he, she, it; the former, 145 [645]. imago, imaginis, F. 3, image, likeness, representation. impedimentum, -i, N. 2, hin- drance. In PI. , baggage. impello, -pellere, -pull, -pulsum, 3, impel. imperator, -Oris, M. 3, general (in chief). imperatum, -i, N. 2, command. imperium, -I, N. 2, command, sway; empire. imperO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, com- mand, order. Word of Atti- tude, taking Dat. impetus, -ns, M. 4, attack. impiger, -gra, -grum, energetic, industrious. impigre. Adv., energetically, vigorously. imus, see Infimus. in. Prep, with Abl. of rest, in, on, upon ; with Ace. of motion (literal or figurative), into, at, upon, against, for. incendo, -cendere, -cendi, -cen- sum, 3, set on jire. incipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum, 3, begin. incolumis, -e, unharmed, safe. incommode. Adv., disadvanta- geously, unfortunately. incommodum, -i, N. 2. trouble, misfortune. indignus, -a, -um, unworthy. Takes Abl. IndGtiomarus, -i, M. 2, a name. inermis, -e, unarmed. inferior, -ius, lower. Compar. of inferus, beloiv, 531 [636]. inferus, -a, -um, below. Infimus, -a, -um, or Imus, -a, -um, lowest. Superl. of Inferior, lower, 531 [636]. ingenium, ingeni, N. 2, intellect, ability. inimlcus, -a, -um, unfriendly, hostile. Word of Attitude, taking Dat. inimlcus, -I, M. 2, enemy. inlquus, -a, -um, disadvanta- geous. initium, -I, N. 2, beginning. Latin-English Vocabu lary 301 iniGria, -ae, F. 1, injury, wrong. iniussQ, Adv., without orders. inligo, -are, -avi, -a turn, 1, bind up. inopia, -ae, F. 1, want, lack, scar- city. inquit, says he, or said he. Used in direct quotation, and always follows one or more words. insequor, Tnsequi, insectltus sum, 3, follow up, pursue. insidiae, -arum, F. PI., 1, ambush, ambuscade. insigne, -is, -ium, N. 3, deco- ration, badge, device; signal, 270 [621]. insto, -stare, -stiti, -stattlrus, 1, press on. instruO, instruere, instrtlxT, in- strGctum, 3, draw up. inter, Prep, with Ace, between, among. Inter se, with one another, together. intercede, -cedere, -cessi, -ces- sum, 3, come between, inter- vene. interclodo, -clndere, clGsi, -clo- sum, 3, shut in, hem in, block. interea. Adv., meanwhile. interficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum, 3, MIL interim. Adv., meanwhile. interior, inner, 531 [636]. intermittO, -mittere, -misi, -mis- sum, 3, intermit, stop. interpOnO, -pOnere, -posul, -posi- tum, 3, put between. With fidem, pledge. interpres, -pretis, M. 3, mediator, interpreter, intervallum, -T, N. 2, interval. intimus, -a, -um, mtiermos^. Su- perlative of interior, inner, 531 [636]. intra. Prep, with Ace, within. intrO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, enter. intus. Adv., within. invenio, -venire, -veni, -ventum, 4, find, discover; invent. invito, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, invite; attract. ipse, -a, -um, self, 139 [644]. Iratus, -a, -um, angry. Word of Attitude, taking Dat. is, ea, id, this, that, the; he, she, it, 153 [646]. iste, -a, -ud, this {of yours) or that {of yours); he, she, it, 145, a [645]. ita. Adv., in such a way, thus, so. Ita ut (so as), as. Italia, -ae, F. 1, Italy. itaque. Adv., and so, therefore, accordingly, iter, itineris, N. 3, way, road, journey ; march. Magnum iter, forced march, iterum. Adv., again. iubeO, iubere, iussi, iussum, 2, bid, order. Takes Infin. index, itidicis, M. 3, judge. indicium, -I, N. 2, judgment, opinion. indicO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, judge. Inlia, -ae, F. 1, Julia, Inlius, -I, M. 2, Julius. iungo, iungere, iQnxI, iOnctum, 3, join, Innius, -1, M. 2, a name, instus, -a, -umy just, iuvO, iuvare, invl, intum, 1, help 302 Latin-English Vocabulary L., for Lncius. Labienus, -I, M. 2, a name. labor, labOris, M. 3, labor ^ work, exertion. labor, labi, lapsus sum, 3, slip. labOrO, -are, -avT, -a turn, 1, labor, work. lacessO, lacessere, lacessivi, la- cessitum, 3, worry. laetor, -ari, -atus sum, 1, be de- lighted, rejoice. laetus, -a, -um, joyous, glad, happy. lapillus, -1, M. 2, pebble. latus, -eris, N. 3, side; lung. laudo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, praise. legatus, -1, M. 2, ambassador; lieutenant. legio, -Onis, F.3, legion (division of an army), lego, legere, legi, lectum, 3, pick, choose; read. lex, legis, F. 3, law, rule. libenter, Adv., willingly. licet, licere, licuit and licitum est, 2, impers., be permitted. littera, -ae, F. 1, letter (of the alphabet). PL, a letter. locus, -1, M. 2, place. PI. loca, locorum, N. 2. longe. Adv., far. Compar. lon- gius, Super], longissime. longitndo, -inis, F. 3, length. longus, -a, -um, long. loquor, loqul, locntus sum, 3, talk, converse. LCicanius, -1, M. 2, a name. LQcius, -1, M. 2, a name. Indus,'-!, M. 2, play, sport, game. ICix , iGcis , F. 3, light. Prima lOx , daybreak. M., for Marcus. magis. Adv., more. Compar. of magnopere and multum, much, 539 [638]. magister, -tri, M. 2, master (= teacher), magnopere. Adv., greatly. magnus, -a, -um, great, large, big. maior, maius, greater, bigger. Compar. of magnus, great, 630 [635]. male. Adv., badly. maleficium, -T, N. 2, ivrong -doing. malo, malle, malul, , irr., leant more, 2')rcfer, 493 [665]. malus, -a, -um, bad. mane. Adv., in the morning. maneO, manere, mansi, mansum, 2, remain, continue. manus, -ns, F. 4, hand; band. Marcus, -1, M. 2, a name. ' mater, matris, F. 3, mother. mattlrO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, make ripe; hasten, make haste. matnrus, -a, -um, ripe. maxime. Adv., in the largest de- gree, very greatly, exceedingly, very. Superl. of magnopere and multum, greatly, m^uch, 539 [638]. maximus, -a, -um, greatest, largest, biggest; oldest. Superl. of magnus, great, 530 [635]. mei. Reflexive, of me, 215 [654]. medius, -a, -um, middle, or the- middle-of. melior, melius, better. Compar. of bonus, good, 530 [635]. melius. Adv., better. Compar. of bene, ivell, 539 [638]. Latin-English Vocabulary 303 memini, -isse, defective, remem- her. memoria, -ae, F. 1, memory. meridies, -er, M. 5, midday. metus, -ns, M. 4, fear. meus, -a, -um, my, mine. 'miles, militis, M. 3, soldier, 256 [617]. militaris, -e, military. Ars mili- taris, art of ivar, tactics. mrlle, indecl. Adj., or Noun, a thousand. PI. as Noun, milia, -ium, N. 3. Mille passuum = 5,000 feet, or a Roman mile, minime, Adv., in the smallest degree, not at all ; no. Superl. of parum, Utile, 539 [638]. minimus, -a, -um, smallest, or very small. Superl. of parvus, small, 530 [635]. minor, minus, smaller, less. Compar. of parvus, small, 530 [635]. minuO, minuere, minui, minGtum, 3, lessen, diminish. minus, Adv. less. Compar. of parum, little, 539 [638]. miror, -ari, -atus sum,' 1, admire [662]. miser, misera, miserum, miser- able, unhappy, 117 [628]. mitto, mittere, misi, missum, 3, send; throw (a weapon), modo, Adv., just, only ; just now. modus,-!, M.2, measure; method, way, manner, fashion; kind. Eius modi (huius modi), of this kind, of such a kind, such. monens, warning, Pres. Act. Partic. of moneO. Declension, 300 [632]. moneO, monere, monui, monitum, 2, admonish, warn, chide, in- struct [657]. mOns, montis, -ium, M. 3, moun- tain. mora, -ae, F. 1, delay. MorinT, -Orum, M. PI. 2, name of a Gallic nation. morior, mori, mortuus sum, 3, die. Partic. mortuus =dead. moror, -arl, -atus sum, 1, delay. mOs, moris, M. 3, custom, way, habit, manner, 265 [620]. moveo, movere, mOvi, mOtum, 2, move. mox. Adv., soon. multittido, -inis, F. 3, multitude, great number, 264 [619]. multus, -a, -um, much. In PL many. Multum, Ace. of De- gree, much; equivalent to Adv. Manatius, -1, M. 2, a name. mCiniO, -Ire, -Ivi, -itum, 4, con- struct, fortify. mQnitiO, -Onis, F.3, fortification. mQrus, -I, M. 2, ivall. mCltb, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, change, alter. nam. Con j., /or. natGra, -ae, F. 1, nature. -ne, interrogative enclitic, imply- ing nothing about the answer. ne, as Adv., not; as Conj., that not, lest. Ne . . . quidem, not even. nee, see neque. necesse, indecl. neut. Noun, necessity, in predicate, = neces- sary/. 304 Latin-English Vocabulary neglego, -legere, -lexi, -lectum, 3, neglect, pass by, disregard, negO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, say no^ say . . . not, deny, refuse. negotium, -I, N. 2, business, oc- cupation. nemo, Dat. nemini, Ace. nemi- ^.^x^ nem (Gen. and Abl. supplied nnlllus and nnllo), M. 3, no nobod:ffr^ — — ^^'^ "^— — ? neque or nee, Conj., neither or nor. Neque . . . neque . . . , neither . . . nor . . . Nervii, -Orum, name of a Gallic nation. Also Sing. Nervius, a Nervian. neu (also neve), Conj., and not, nor. Corresponds to ne, as nee to nOn. neuter, neutra, neutrum, neither (of two), 129 [642]. nihil, indecl. Noun, nothing. nimis. Adv., too much, too. nisi, Conj., unless. Without a verb = except. noeeo, noeere, noeui, nocitum, 2, be hurtful to, hurt, injure. Verb of Quality, taking Dat. noeto. Adv., at night, by night. nolo, nolle, nolul, , irr., not want, be unwilling, 493 [665]. nomen, nOminis, N. 3, name, 264: [619]. nOn, Adv., not. nOndum, Adv., not yet. nOnne, not? interrog. Adv., im- plying "yes." nOnnGllus, -a, -um, some. In PL, some, several, not a few. De- clined like ntillus, 129 [642]. nOnnumquam, Adv., sometimes. nOseO, ijOscere, nOvi, nOtum, 3, get acquainted with, come to know, learn. noster, nostra, nostrum, owr. novus, -a, -um, new. nox, noctis, -ium, F. 3, night, 271 [622]. nQllus,-a,-um, non£, no, 129 [642]. num, interrog. Adv., implying "no." numerus, -i, M. 3, number. numquam. Adv., never. nune. Adv., now. nnntio, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, an- nounce. nQntius, -i, M. 2, messenger ; mes- nnper. Adv., recently, 0, 0, or Oh (often used in address). ob. Prep, with Ace, against, before; on account of . obeo, oblre, obil (or -ivi), obitum, irr., attend to, 503 [667]. observO, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, ob- serve. obsidio, -Onis, P. 3, siege. obsto, obstare, obstiti, obstata- rus, 1, oppose, prevent. obstruO, -struere, -strtixl, -strQe- tum, 3, block up, obstruct. oeeasio, Onis, F. 3, occasion, opportunity. oeeldo, -eldere, -elsT, -elsum, 3, hill. oeeupo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, take possession of, occupy. oceurrO, -eurrere, -currl and -eu- eurrl, -cursum, 3, meet. oetavus, -a, -um, eighth. oculus, -1, M. 2, eye. Latin-English Vocabulary 305 officium, -T, N. 2, office, duty. omnlnO, Adv., in all, at all. omnis, -e, all, the whole; every, any. opinio, -Onis, F. 3, opinion, ex- pectation. oppidum, -I, N. 2, town. ' oppugnatiO,-Onis, F. 3, siege. oppugnO, -are, -avl, -atum, 1, besiege. ops, opis, F. 3, help. In PL, re- sources, means. optime. Adv., in the best way, best. Superl. of bene, well, 639 [638]. optimus, -a, -um, best. Superl. of bonus, good, 530 [G35]. opto, -are, -a VI, -atum, 1, wish, hope. opus, operis, N. 3, work, task. With est and Ah\.= there is need of. OratiO,-Onis, F. 3, speech, argu- ment. orbis, -is, -ium, M. 3, circle. In orbem consists, take posi- tion in a circle. OrdO, Ordinis, M. 3, order, rank. orior, orlrl, ortus sum, 4 (in several forms, 3), rise, arise. OrO, -are, -avl, -atum, 1, beg, en- treat. OS, Oris, N.3, mouth; face, coun- tenance. ostendO, pstendere, ostendi, os- tentum, 3, show. Otium, Oti, N. 2, ease, repose; leisure ; peace, paene. Adv., almost. pains, -Gdis, F. 3, swamp. par, par. Gen. paris, equal, even. paratus, -a, -um (from parO), pre- pared, = ready. parcO, parcere, pepercl or pars!, parsnrus, 3, spare. Word of Attitude, taking Dat. parO, -are, -avl, -atum, 1, prepare, get. pars, partis, -ium, F. 3, part; party, side (in this .sense either Sing, or PI.). partim, Adv.,parr. [655]. away from, a with Abl. ; {from inside of) ex with AbL bad, malus, -a, -um. badly, male. baggage, impedimenta, -orum, N. PI. 2. band, manus, -us, F. 4. barbarian, barbarus, -a, -um. (line of) battle, acies, aciei, F. 5. battle, proelium, -I, N. 2. be, sum, esse, ful, futurus, irr. [655]. bear {arms), gero, gerere, gessi, gestum, 3. beat,vinco,vincere,vIcI,victum,3. beautiful, pulcher, -chra, -chrum. because, quod, quia, with Indie.; cum tcith SubJ. before, ante, Prep, with Aec, and Adv. before, Conj., priusquam or prius quam, antequam, with Indie, of actual past act [597, III], and Sul'junctive of act anticipated. before that, before this, antea. beg, oro, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. begin, incipio, -cipere, -cepi, -cep- tum, 3; coepi, coepisse, coep- tum est, defective. be here, adsum, adesse, adful, adfuturus, irr. [655]. behind, post, Prep, with Ace., and Adv. believe, credo, credere, credidi, creditum, 3, with Dat. of the person, or Aec. of the thing, or both. 318 English-Latin Vocabulary be permitted, licet, licere, licuit and licitum est, 2, impersonal, beside, propter with Ace. besiege, oppugno, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. best, optimus, -a, -um, Superl. of bonus, 630 ,[635]. better, AdJ.y melior, melius, Compar. of bonus, 530 [635] ; Adv., melius, Compar. of bene, 539 [638]. between, inter wiih Ace. beyond, trans with Ace. big, magnus, -a, -um. bigger, maior, maius, Compar. of magnus, 530 [835]. blame, culpo, -are, -avI, -atum, 1. body, corpus, corporis, N. 3, 265 [620]. both, Pron., ambo, -ae, -o, 328 [640]. both . . . and, Conjs., et . . . et. boundaries, fines, finium, M. 3, PL of finis, 271 [622]. boy, puer,pueri,]yi. 2, 111 [616]. brave, fortis, -e. brains (=judgment), consilium, -I, N. 2. bravely, fortiter. break, rumpo, rumpere, rupi, ruptum, 3. bridge, pons, pontis, -ium, M. 3. bring about, efficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum,3. bring to, adfero, adferre, attull, allatum, irr., 522 [668]. brother, frater, fratris, M. 3. business, negotium, -i, N. 2. (be) busy in, versor, -ari, -at us sum, 1, with in, but, sed; at. by, of Agent, a or ab with AbL, orDat. with Fut.Pass. Partic. ; of Means or Instrument, Abl. ; (close) by, ad with Ace. by chance, easu; forte, by far, multo, Abl. of Measure of Difference, equivalent to an Adv. cabin, casa, -ae, F. 1. Caesar, Caesar, Caesaris, M. 3. call, voco, -are, -avI, -atum,- 1 ; appello, -are, -avI, -atum, 1. camp, castra, -orum, N. PI. 2. can, possum, posse, potui, irr., 485 [664]; also rendered in various uses by the Subjunc- tive of Possibility. Capri, Capreae, -arum, F. 1. captive, captivus, -I, M. 2. care, ctira, -ae, F. 1. careful, dlligens, -ens, -entis. carefulness, diligentia, -ae, F. 1. carry, fero, ferre, tuli, latum, irr., 522 [668]; defero, -ferre, -tuli, -latum, irr., 522 [668]. carry on, gero, gerere, gessi, ges- tum, 3. case, casus, -uSjlM. 4, 369 [624]. (in that) case, tum. catch, comprehendo, -prehen- dere, -prehendi, -prehensum, 3. Catuvolcus, Catuvolcus, -I, M. 2. cause, causa, -ae, F. 1. cautious, cautus, -a, -um. cavalry, equitatus, -us, M. 4; equites, -um, M. 3, PI. of eques. cavalry, as Adj., equestris, -tre. censure, culpo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. centurion, centurio* -onis, M. 3. English-Latin Vocabulary 319 certain, quidam, quaedam, quod- dam (quiddam), 193 [650J ; cer- tus, -a, -um. certainly, certe. chance, casus, -us, M. 4, 369 [624]. (by) chance, casu; forte. change, muto, -are, -avl, -atum, 1; verto, vertere, verti, versum, 3. charge, procurro, -currere, -cur- ri or -cucurri, -cursum, 3. ' chide, moneo, monere, monui, monitum, 2 [657]. choose, lego, legere, legi, lectum, 3; eligo, eligere, elegi, elec- tum, 3. Cicero, Cicero, -onis, M. 3. circle, orbis, -is, -ium, M. 3. city, urbs, urbis, -ium, F. 3. close by, proximus, -a, -um. Superl. of propter, 531 [636]. class, genus, generis, N. 3. cohort, cohors, -rtis, -ium, F. 3. collect, conligo, -ligere, -legi, -lec- tum, 3. come, venio, venire, veni, ven- tum, 4. come down, me demitto, -mit- tere, -misi, -missum, 3. come over, transeo, -Ire, -ii (or -ivi), -itum, irr., 603 [667]. come to aid, subvenio, -venire, -venT, -ventum, 4, with Dat. come to hope, in spem venio, . venire, veni, ventum, 4. come together, convenio, -venire, -veni, -ventum, 4. command, imperatum, -i, N. 2; imperium, -i, N. 2. command, impero, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. (be in) command, praesum, -esse, -ful, -futiirus, irr. [655], with Dat. common, communis, -e. communicate, communico, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. compulsion, coactus, -us, M. 4. concede, concedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, 3, with Dat. (safe) conduct, tUtum iter, confer, conloquor, -loqui, -locii- tus sum, 3. conference, conloquium, -i, N. 2. conquer, vinco, -vincere, -vici, -victum, 3; supero, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. conqueror, victor, -oris, M. 3, 257 [618]. construct, munio, -ire, -ivi, -itum, 4. contempt, contemptio, -onis, F. 3. contend, certo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. contest, certamen, -minis, N. 3. continue, maneo, manere, mansi, mansum, 2. controversy, controversia, -ae, F. 1. cook, coqua, -ae, F. 1. Corfinium, Corfinium, -i, N. 2. Cornelius, Cornelius, -i, M. 2. Cotta, Cotta, -ae, M. 1. cottage, casa, -ae, F. 1. council, consilium, -i, N. 2. country, riis, rUris, N. 3; loca, -orum, N. PI. 2; country of ... , may be translated by name of tribe alone. country, as Adj., rusticus, -a, -um. courage, virtus, -utis, F. 3. Crassus, Crassus, -i, M. 2. 320 English-Latin Vocabulary cross, transeo, -ire, -ii {or -ivi), -itum, irr., 603 [667]. crowd, turba, -ae, F. 1. cry, fleo, flere, flevi, fletum, 2. cultivate, colo, colere, colui, cul- tum, 3. custom, consuetude, -inis, F. 3; mos, moris, M. 3. cut, caedo, caedere, cecidi, cae- sura, 3. danger, periculum, -i, N. 2. dangerous, perlculosus, -a, -um. dare, audeo, audere, ausus sum, 2. daughter, filia. -ae, F. 1. day, dies, diei, M. and F., 5, 395 [625]. (every) day, cotidie. (late in the) day, magna parte die! consumpta. daybreak, prima lux. deceive, decipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum, 3. decide, statuo, statuere, statu!, statutum, 3; constituo, -stitu- ere, -stitui, -stitutum, 3. decide (between), diiudico, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. decoration, Insigne, -is, -ium, N. 3, 270 [621]. defeat, supero, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. defend, defendo, -fendere, -fendl, -fensum, 3. delay, mora, -ae, F. 1. delay, moror, -ari, -atus sum, 1. deliberate, delibero, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. (be) delighted, laetor, -arl, -atus sum, 1. depart, discedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, 3; (accomplish a) de- parture, profectionem facio, facere, feci, factum, 3. departure, profectio, -onis, F. 3. desire, desidero, -are, -avi, -atum, 1; cupio, cupere, cupivl, cupi- tum, 3. desirous, cupidus, -a, -um, with Objective Gen. desist, desisto, -sistere, -stiti, -sti- turus, 3. desperate { = extreme), extremus, -a, -um, SuperL of exterior, 531 [636]. determine, constituo, -stituere, -stitui, -stitutum, 3. devote, me dedo, dedere, dedidi, deditum. (be) devoted to, studeo, studere, studui, 2, ivitJi Dat. different, diversus, -a, -um. differently, aliter. difficult, difiicilis, -e. (with) difficulty, aegre. diligence, dlligentia, -ae, F. 1. diligent, diligens, -ens, -entis. diligently, dlligenter. dine, ceno, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. dinner, cena, -ae, F. 1. direct, praecipio, -cipere, -cepI, -ceptum, 3, mf/iDa^.o/Perso^. disadvantageous, inlquus, -a, -um. discharge, fungor, fungi, functus sum, 3, with Abl. discipline, discipllna, -ae, F. 1. display, prae me gero, gerere, gessi, gestum, 3. displease, displiceo, -plicere, -pli- cul, -plicitum, 2, with Dat. disregard, neglego, -legere, -lexi, -lectum, 3. English-Latin Vocabulary 321 from a distance, procul. distribute, distribuo, -tribuere, -tribui, -tributum, 3. divide, divido, dividere, divisi, divisum, 3. do, facio, facere, feci, factum, 3; ago, age re, egi, actum, 3. (be) done, flo, fieri, f actus sum, irr., 602 [666]. do harm, iniuriam facio, facere, feci, factum, 3. draw up, instruo, -struere, -strtixi, -structum, 3; prodtico, -diicere, -dtixi, -ductum, 3. drill, exerceo, exercere, exercui, exercitum, 2. drive, pello, pellere, pepuli, pul- sum, 3. drive out, pello, pellere, pepuli, pulsum, 3. dust, pulvis, pulveris, M. 3, 265 [620]. duty, officium, -i, N. 2. each, quisque, quaeque, quidque (quodque), 200 [652]; each of two, uterque, utraque, utrum- que {declined like uter, 130 [643] + -que). eager, alacer, -cris, -ere. (be) eager for, studeo, studere, studui, , 2, with Dat. eagerly, cupide. easily, facile. easy, facilis, -e. Ebur6nes, Eburones, -um, M. 3. (the) edge of, extremus, -a, -um, Superl. of exterior, 531 [636]. effect, efficio, -ficere, -feci, -fec- tum, 3. either {of two), Pron., uterque, utraque, utrumque {declined like uter, 130 [643] + -que), either . . , or, Conjs., aut . . . aut; {giving choice) \q\ . . . vel. elect, eligo, -ligere, -legi, -lec- tum, 3. end, finis, -is, -ium, M. 3, 271 [622]. enemy, {of the state) hostis, -is, -ium, M. 3; {of an individual) inimicus, -i, M. 2. energetic, impiger, -gra, -grum. energetically, impigre. enjoy, fruor, frui, fructus sum, 3, with Abl. engage in or (be) engaged in, versor, -ari, -atus sum, 1. enough, satis. enter, Intro, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. equal, par, par, paris; aequus, -a, -um. equally, aeque. escape, elabor, elabi, elapsus sum, 3. establish, confirmo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1; constituo, -stituere, -stitui, -stitutum, 3. Esuvii, Esuvii, -orum, M. PI. 2. even, etiam. (not) even, ne . . . . quidem. ever, umquam. every, omnis, -e; quisque, quae- que, quodque (quidque), 200 [652]. everybody, ciincti, -orum, M.Pl. 2; omnes, -ium, M. PL 3, from omnis. every day, cotidie. every one, omnes, -ium, M. PI. 3, from omnis. 322 English-Latin Vocabulary (on) every side, undique. everything, omnia, -ium, N. PI. 3, from omnis. example, exemplum, -i, N. 2. exceedingly, maxime, Superl. of magnopere and multum, 539 [638]. except, nisi, exercise, exerceo, exercere, ex- ercui, exercitum, 2. expect, exspecto, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. experienced, perltus, -a, -um, with Objective Gen. explore, explore, -are, -avI, -atum, 1. extend, extendo, -tendere, -tendl, -tentum and -tensum, 3. eye, oculus, -i, M. 2. (in the) eyes (of), Dat. of the Person Judging. Fabius, Fabius, -I, M. 2. face, OS, oris, N. 3. (full in the) face, in adversum os. fact, res, rel, F. 5, 395 [625]. fail, deficio, -ficere, -feci, -fec- tum, 3. fair, aequus, -a, -um. faith, fides, fidel, F. 5. fall, cado, cadere, cecidi, casu- rus, 3. fame, fama, -ae, F. 1. (by) far, multo, Ahl. of Measure of Difference. far, longe. farmer, agricola, -ae, M. 1. fashion, modus, -i, M. 2. father, pater, patris, M. 3, 257 [618]. fault, culpa, -ae, F. 1. favor, faveo, favere, favi, fau- tum, 2, ivith Dat. favorable, aequus, -a, -um. fear, timor, -oris, M. 3; metus, -us, M. 4. fear, timeo, timere, timul, — , 2; vereor, vererl, veritus sum, 2. feel, sentio, sentire, sensi, sen- sum, 4. feel sure, pro certo habeo, habere, habui, habitum, 2. feel V7ell, valeo, valere, valui, valiturus, 2. feeling, sententia, -ae, F. 1. (a) few (only), pauci, -ae, -a. field, ager, agrl, M. 2, 111 [616]. fierce, acer,acris, acre, 293 [630]; ferus, -a, -um. fiercely, acriter. fight, pugna, -ae, F. 1. fight, pugno, -are, -avi, -atum, 1; dimico, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. fight it out, decerto, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. fighter, pugnans, -ans, -antis, Pres. Act. Partic. of pugno. fill, compleo, -plere, -plevi, -ple- tum, 2. finally, denique. find, invenio, -venire, -veni, -ven- tum, 4. finish, conficio, -ficere, -feci, -fee tum, 3. fire, ignis, -is, -ium, M. 3, 278 [623]; flamma, -ae, F. 1. (set on) fire, incendo, -cendere, -cendl, -censum, 3. first, primus, -a, -um, Superl. of prior, 531 [636]. (at) first, primo. (in the) first place, primum. English-Latin Vocabulary 323 fit, aplus, -a, -um. fitted, aptus, -a, -um. five, quinque, indecl. Adj. fixed, certus, -a, -um. flee, fugio, fugere, f ugi, f ugitu- rus, 3. flight, f uga, -ae, F. 1. (take to) flight, me in fugam do, dare, dedi, datum, 1. fly (to), advolo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. follow, sequor, sequi, secutus sum, 3. following {= next), posterue, -a, -um. follow up, sequor, sequi, secutus sum, 3, insequor, -sequi, -secu- tus sum, 3. fool, verba do, dare, dedi, datum , 1. foot, pes, pedis, M. 3. for. Prep., expressed by Dat. ; by ad or in with Ace; {=through a period of time) per with Ace, or Ace. of Extent of Time. for, ConJ., emm,postpos.; nam. for a little (while), paulisper. for nothing, sine til la causa. for the purpose of, causa or gratia with Gen. of Gerundive or Gerund; ad with Gerun- dive or Gerund; qui, quo, ut, ivith SubJ. for the sake of, causa or gratia with Gen. for this reason, ob eam causam. for which reason, quare. forbid, prohibeo, -hibere, -hibui, -hibituoi, 2; veto, vetare, vetui. vetitum, 1, with Infin. force, forces, copiae, -arum, F. 1, PL of copia. forced march, magnum iter. forehead, frons, frontis,-ium, F.3. foresee, provideo, -videre, -vidi, -visum, 2. forest, silva, -ae, F. 1. form (a plan), capio, capere, cepi, captum, 3 [659]. former, pristinus, -a, -um; prior, -us, Compar., 531 [636]. formerly, antea. fortification, munitio, -on is, F. 3. fortify, communio, -miinire, -miinivi, -mtinitum, 4. fortunate, beatus, -a, -um. four, quattuor, indecl. Adj. four hundred, quadringenti, -ae, -a. friend {man or boy), amicus, -i,M. 2; {woman or girl), amica, -ae, F.l. (in a) fright, territus, -a, -um, Perf. Pass. Partic. of terreo, terrere, terrui, territum, 2. (thoroughly) frighten, perterreo, -terrere, -terrui, -territum, 2. from, {= away from.) aor ab, with Abl.; {—down from) de with Abl.; {=out of) e or ex, with Abl. from a distance, procul. front, frons, frontis, -ium, F. 3. (in) front of, prae with Abl. ; pro icith Abl. ; ante with Ace. full in the face, in adversum os. further, amplius, Neut. Ace. of Degree, equivalent to an Adv. gain, consequor, -sequi, -secutus sum, 3. Gaius, Gains, -i, M. 2. Galba, Galba, -ae, M. 1. Gallic, Gallicus, -a, -um. 324 English-Latin Vocabulary Gallus, Gallus, -i, M. 2. game, Itidus, -I, M. 2. garden, hortus, -I, M. 2. gate, porta, -ae, F. 1. Gaul, Gallia, -ae, F. 1. (a) Gaul, Gallus, -i, M. 2. general, dux, duels, M. 3; general {in chief )y imperator, -oris, M. 3. generally, fere. German, Germanus, -i, M. 2. get (possession of), potior, potiri, potitus sum, 4, with Abl. get into condition, vires con- firmo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. get sight of, conspicor, -ari, -atus sum, 1. girl, puella, -ae, F. 1. give, do, dare, dedi, datum, 1. give advice, suadeo, suadere, suasi, suasum, 2, with Dat. give way, cedo, cedere, cessi, cessum, 3, with Dat. glad, laetus, -a, -um. (be) glad of, gaudeo, gaudere, gavlsus sum, 2. glory, gloria, -ae, F. 1. go, eo, ire, ii {or ivi), itum, irr., 503 [667]. go on {=be done), fio, tieri, f actus sum, irr., 602 [666]. going to, expressed by Fut. Act. Partic. good, bonus, -a, -um, 117 [627]. good-bye, vale. (a) good many, complures, com- pluriaor-a, 327 [633]. good- will, voluntas, -atis, F^ 3. grain, frumentum, -I, N. 2. great, magnus, -a, -um; often tantus, -a, -um. (a) great many, pluriml, -ae, -a, Superl o/multus, 630 [635]. greater, maior, maius, Compar. of magnus, 630 [635]. greatest, maximus, -a, -um, Superl. o/ magnus, 630 [635 J. (how) great, quantus, -a, -um. (so) great, tantus, -a, -um. greatly, magnopere. grieve, doleo, dolere, dolul, doli- turus, 2. ground, locus, -I, M. 2, PL loca, -orum; regio, -onis, F. 3. guide, dux, ducis, M. 3. guide, rego, regere, rexl, rectum, 3. habit, mos, moris, M. 3; consue- tude, -inis, F. 3. halt, consisto, -sistere, -stiti, ,3. hand, manus, -us, F. 4. happy, beatus, -a, -um; laetus, -a, -um. hard, dtirus, -a, -um. hardly, vix. harm, noceo, nocere, nocui, noci- tum, 2, with Dat.; do harm {to u person), iniuriam facio, fa- carp, feci, factum, 3; no harm is done him, ei nihil nocetur, noceri, nocitum est, 2. harsh, durus, -a, -um. (make) haste, mature, -are, -avI, -atum, 1. hasten, contendo, -tendere, -ten- di, -tentum, 3. hate .(to do a thing), gravor, -ari, -atus sum, 1, ivith Injin. have, habeo, habere, habul, habi- tum, 2; Dat. of Possession with sum. English-Latin Vocabulary 325 have regard for, rationem habeo, habere, habui, habitum, 2, with Gen. he, is, 153 [646]; ille, 145 [645]; iste,145, a [645]; hie, 166 [648]. head, caput, capitis, N. 3. hear, audio, audire, audivi, audi turn, 4. heavy, gravis, -e. helmet, galea, ae, F. 1. help, auxilium, auxili, N. 2. help, iuvo, iuvare, itivi, ititum, 1; adiuvo, -iuvare, -iuvi, -iutum, 1. (come to) help, subvenio, -venire, -veni, -ventum, 4, with Dat.; auxilio venio, venire, veni, ven- tum, 4, with Dat. hem in, contineo, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum, 2. her. Gen. Sing, of is, 153 [646], ille, 145 [645], iste, 145, a [645], or hie, 166 [648]; Reflexive, her (ovvn), suus, -a, -um. herald, praeco, -onis, M. 3. here, hic. (be) here, adsum, adesse, adfui, adfu turns, irr. [655]. high, altus, -a, -um. highest, supremus, -a, -um, or summus, -a, -um, Svperl. of superior, 531 [636]. hill, collis, -is, -ium, M. 3. (of, etc.) himself. Reflexive, sul, etc., 215 [654]; (he) himself. Intensive, ii)se, -a, -um, 139 [644]. hindrance, impedimentum, -I, N. 2. his, Gen. Sing, of is, 153 [646], ille, 145 [645], iste, 145, a [645], or hic, 166 [648]; his (own), suus, -a, -um. hold, teneo, tenere, tenul, ten- tum, 2. home, domus, -us and -i, 4 and 2, 406 [626]. (at) home, domi, 409, 3, a. honor, honor, -oris, M. 3. honorable, honestus, -a, -um. hope, spes, spei, F. 5; (come to) hope, in spem venio, venire, veni, ventum, 4. hope, spero, -are, -avi, -atum, 1; opto, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. horn, cornti, -us, N. 4, 369 [624]. horse, equus, -i, M. 2. horseman, eques, -itis, M. 3. hour, hora, -ae, F. 1. (at the) house (of), apud with Ace. how, quam; { = in what way, by what means) qui. how great, quantus, -a, -um. however, autem, postpositive. hurl, conicio, -ice re, -ieci, -iec- tum, 3. hurry, propero, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. hurt, noceo, nocere, nocui, noci- tum, 2, with Dat. I, ego, mei, 214 [654]. if, si. if not (—unless), nisi. ill, aeger, -gra, -grum. image, imago, -inis, F. 3. immediately, confestim; statim. in, of Place, in with Abl. (or the Locative of names of Towns, etc., 409, 3, a [594. 3] ); of Respect, Abl. of Respect; of Time, Abl. of Time. in accordance with, see according to. 326 English-Latin Vocabulary (be) in command, praesum, -esse, -ful, -futtirus, irr. [655], with Dat in front of, ante with Ace, pro with Abl. in order to, ut with SuhJ.; in order not to, ile with Subj. in person, per me, te, or se. in return for, pro with Abl. in succession, deinceps. ia that case, turn, in the eyes of, expressed by Dat, of the Person Judging. in the first place, prlmum. in the second place, deinde. in the morning, mane, in this way, ita; sic. indeed, vero; quidem. influence, gratia, -ae, F. 1. influential, potens, -ens, -entis. inform, doceo, docere, docui, doc- tum, 2; certiorem (-es) facio, f acere, feci, factum, 3. injure, noceo, nocere, nocul, noci- tum, 2, with Dat, injury, initiria, -ae, F. 1. inquire, quaero, quaerere, quae- sivi, quaesltum, 3. instruct, moneo, monere, monui, monitum, 2 [657]. interest, studium, -I, N. 2; res, rei, F. 5, 395 [625]. interpreter, inter pres, -pretis, M. 3. intervene, intercedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, 3. into, in loith Ace, invite, invito, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. it, id, 153 [646]; illud or istud, 145 and a [645]; hoc, 160 [648]. Italy, Italia, -ae, F. 1. javelin, pilum, -i, N. 2; iaculum, -I, N. 2. (Gallic) javelin, tragula, -ae, F. 1. join, iungo, iungere, iunxi, iunc- tum, 3; adiungo, -iungere, -iunxl, -iunctum, 3; join battle, proelium committo, -mittere, -misi, -missum, 3. judge, iudex, iudicis, M. 3. judge, iudico, -are, -avI, -atum, 1. judgment, iudicium, -i, N. 2; con- silium, -1, N. 2. Julia, Itilia, -ae, F. 1. Julius, lulius, -I, M. 2. just, iustus, -a, -um. just now, modo. keep, servo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. keep out {= stay away from), absum, abesse, afui, afuturus {and abful, abfuturus), irr, [655]. keep {some one from) prohibeo, -hibere, -hibui, -hibitum, 2. kill, caedo, caedere, cecidi, cae- sum, 3; occido, -cidere, -cidi, -cisum, 3; interficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum, 3. kind, benignus, -a, -um. kind, genus, generis, N. 3. kindness, beneficium, -I, N. 2. king, rex, regis, M. 3, 256 [617]. kingship, regnum, -I, N. 2. kitchen, cullna, -ae, F. 1. know, scio, scire, sclvl, scltum, 4; Perfect tenses of nosco, nos- cere, novl, notum, 3, and cog- nosce, -gnoscere, -gnovl, -gni- tum, 3. English-Latin Vocabulary 327 Labienus, Labienus, -i, M. 2. large, magnus, -a, -um. larger, maior, maius, Compar. of magnus, 630 [635]. (at) last, denique. late in the day, magna parte diel consumpta. (too) late, sero. later, postea; post. lazy, piger, -gra, -grum. lead, duco, dticere, duxi, duc- tum, 3. lead off, deduce, -ducere, -duxl, -ductum, 3. leader, dux, ducis, M. 3. learn, disco, discere, didici, , 3; nosco, noscere, novi, notum, 3; cognosce, -gnoscere, -gnovi, -gnitum, 3. (at) least, saltern. leaivey (transitive) relinquo, -lin- quere, -liqui, -lictum, 3; (in- transitive), decedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, 3; discedo, -cedere, cessi, cessum, 3; ex- cedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, 3. left, reliquus, -a, -um. legion, legio, -onis, F. 3. leisure, otium, -i, N. 2. less, Adj., minor, minus. Corn- par, of parvus, 630 [635]. less, Adv., minus, Compar. of parum, 639 [638]. less than, minus quam. lest, ne with SubJ. let (me or us), generally ex- pressed by Subj. letter (of correspondence), epis- tula, -ae, F. 1; litterae, -arum, F. 1, PI. of littera. lieutenant, legatus, -I, M. 2. life, vita, -ae, F. 1. like, amo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. line of battle, acies, aciei, F. 5. line of march, agmen, -inis, N. 3. listen (to), audio, -ire, -ivi, -Itum, 4. little, parvus, -a, -um. little. Adv., parum; Substantive, paulum, -I, N. 2. (by a) little, paulo, Abl. of Meas- ure of Difference, equivalent to an Adv. (a) little while, (for) a little while, paulisper. live, habito, -are, -avI, -atum, 1. live on, vescor, vesci, , 3, with Abl. lofty, altus, -a, -um. long, longus, -a, -um. long ( = for a long time), diu. (no) longer, non iam; nee iam. (as) long as, quam diu. love, amo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. lowest, infimus, -a, -um, Superl. of inferior, 631 [636]. Lucius, Lucius, -i, M. 2. lung, latus, lateris, N. 3. make, facio, facere, feci, factum, 3; {= bring about that) efficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum, 3, with ut or ut non, and Subj. make haste, mature, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. man, vir, viri, M. 2, 111 [616]; homo, hominis, M. 3; men (our men, his men, etc.), nostri, sui, etc. (to a) man, ad unum. 328 English- Latin Vocabulary manage, admin istro, -are, -avi, -atum, 1; gero, gerere, gessi, gestum, 3. many, multi, -ae, -a, PL of mul- tus. (a good) many, complures, com- pluriaor-a, 327[633]. (line of) march, agmen, agminis, N. 2. Mark, Marcus, -I, M. 2. master, {of a household) dominus, -1, M. 2; {of a school) magister, -trl, M. 2. matter, res, rel, F. 5, 395 [625], (by) means of, expressed by Abl, of Means. meanwhile, interim; interea. meet, convenio, -venire, -veni, -ventum, 4. memory, memoria, -ae, P. 1. men {our men, his men, etc.), nostrl, sul, etc. merely, tantummodo. message, nuntius, -I, M. 2. messenger, nuntius, -I, M. 2. method, modus, -i, M. 2. midday, merldies, -ei, M. 5. (the) middle of, medius, -a, -um. mile, mille passuum, PL milia passuum. military, militaris, -e. mind, animus, -I, M. 2. mine, meus, -a, -um. misfortune, incommodum, -i, N..2. missile, telum, -i, N. 2. mistress, domina, -ae, F. 1. mob, turba, -ae, F. 1. mock {=pretended), simulatus, -a, -\im, from simulo, -are, -avI, -atum, 1. money p pecunia, -ae, F. 1. more, Substantive, plus, Gen. plti- ris; in PL, pltires, plura, plu- rium, 327 [633], Compar. of multus, 530 [635]. more, Adv., magis; plus and am- plius, Compar. Adjs. in Ace. of Degree, equivalent to Advs. (in the) morning, mane. (this) morning, hodie mane. most. Adv., expressed by Super- lative form; also by maxime, SuperL of magnopere and multum, 539 [633]. most, as Substantive, maxima pars. mother, mater, -tris, F. 3. mountain, mons, montis, -ium, M. 3. mouth, OS, oris, N. 3. move, moveo, movere, movi, mo- tum, 2. much, AdJ.,mu\tus, -a, -um. much. Adv., multum. Ace. of Degree, equivalent to an Adv. ; much (= by much), multo, Abl. of Measure of Difference, equi- valent to an Adv. (as) much ... as, tarn . . . quam. (too) much, nimis. (very) much, plurimum, Ace. of Degree, equivalent to an Adv. SuperL of multum, 539 [638]. multitude, multitudo, -inis, F. 3. must be . . , { = is to be , . , ) expressed by Fut. Pass. Partic, with sum. my, meus, -a, -um. (of) myself. Reflexive, mei {from ego, 214 [654] ). (my)self, Intensive, ipse, ipsa, ipsum, 139 [644]. English-Latin Vocabulary 329 name, nomen, -inis, N. 3. name (= caZZ), appello, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. nature, natura, -ae, F. 1. near, propinquus, -a, -um, with Dat near, prope with Ace, nearer, propius, Compar. Adv., 639 [638]; used also as Prep. with Ace. nearest, proximus, -a, -um, Com- par. of propior, 631 [636]. (is or are) necessary, necesse est or sunt, (it is) necessary, necesse est. need, opus, indecL Noun with Abl neglect, neglego, -legere, -lexl, -lectum, 3. neighboring, propinquus, -a, -um. neighborhood, loca propinqua. neither, Pronoun^ neuter, -tra, -trum, 129[642]. neither (=^and not), ConJ., neque (nee). neither . . . nor, neque . . . neque (nee . . . nee . . . ). Nervian, Nervius, -I, M. 2. never, numquam. nevertheless, tamen. new, novus, -a, -um. news, aliquid novl. night, nox, noctis, -ium, F. 3, 271 [622]. (at) night, noctu. no. Adj., nullus, -a, -um, 129 [642]. no, in Answers, non, minime, Superl. of parum, 639 [638]; implied in Questions, num. no longer, non lam; nee iam. no one, nemo, nullius, 290. noise, strepitus, -us, M. 4. none, nullus, -a, -um, 129 [642]; nemo, nullius, 290; mhi[,indecl. Noun. nor, neque (nec^. not, nefor Imperative, Volitive, and Optative ideas (except in questions); non for all other ideas and all questions. not, in questions, nonne, inter- rog. Adv. implying ''•yes.'' not at all, minime, Superl. of parum, 639 [638]. not even, ne . . . quidem. not only . . . but also, non solum or non modo . . . sed etiam. not yet, nondum. nothing, nihil, indecl. Noun. (for) nothing, sine tilla causa, notice, animadverto, -vertere, -verti, -versum, 3. now, (= at this time) nunc; (= by this time), iam. (just) now, modo. number, numerus, -i, M. 2; multi- tudo, -inis, F. 3. (a) number of, complures, -pluria or-a, -ium, 327 [633]. o, o. oak, robur, roboris, N. 3, 267 [618]. observe, observo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. of, of Possession, expressed by Gen. ; of the Whole, expressed by Gen.y or de or ex with Abl.; of Separation ; by a with Abl., or Abl. alone ; of Cause or Rea- son by Abl. of war, mllitaris, -e. 330 Efiglish-Latin Vocabulary often, Baepe. (very) often, saepissime, Superl. of saepe, 539 [638]. oh, o. old , vetus, vetus, veteris, 286 [629]. oldest, maximus, -a, -urn, Superl. o/magnus, 530 [635J. old-fashioned, vetus, vetus, vete- ris, 286 [629]. on, of Place, in with Abl; of Time, Ahl. ; on {the front, etc.), ab or ex tvith Abl. on account of, ob or propter with Ace. ; Abl. of Cause or Reason. on all sides, undique. on every side, undique. (at) once, statim. one, unus, -a, -um, 129 [642]; one {of two), alter, -a, -uid,130 [643]; one {who or that), talis (qui) or is (qui). one after another, deinceps. one at a time, singuli, -ae, -a. one in ten, decimus quisque. only, Pronom. Adj., solus, -a, -um, 129 [642]. only, Adv., solum; modo; tan- tummodo. (not) only . . . but also, non solum or non modo . . . sed etiam. opportunity, facultas, -atis, F. 3; potestas, -atis, P. 3. oppose, obsto, -stare, -stiti, -sta- tiirus, 1. opposed, adversus, -a, -um, with Dat. or, aut, vel {giving choice)-, an {in se -ond part of question). Either ... or, aut . . . aut; vel . . . vel; whether ... or, sive . . . sive (seu . . . seu). order, impero, -are, -avi, -atum, 1, with Dat. and SiibJ.; iubeo, iubere, iussi, iussum, 2, with Ace. and Infln. (in) order to, ut with Subj. ; (in) order not to, ne loith Subj. (without) orders, iniussd, Adv. other, alius, alia, aliud, 130 [643]; other {of two), alter, altera, alterum, 130 [643]; some . . . others, alii . . . alii. otherwise, aliter. ought, translated by Future Pas- sive Participle with sum, or by Subj.; also by debeo, debere, debui, debitum, 2. our, noster, nostra, nostrum. our men, nostri, -orum, M. PI. 2. (of, etc.) ourselves. Reflexive, nostri, etc., 215 [654]. out of, ex or e, with Abl. out of what, unde. pace, passus, -us, M. 4. paint, pingo, pingere, pinxi, pic- tum, 3. part, pars, partis, -ium, P. 3; regio, -onis, P. 3. party, pars, partis, or partes, par- tium, P. 3. pass, ago, agere, egi, actum, 3. past, praeter with Ace. pattern, exemplar, -aris, -ium, N. 3, 270 [621]. peace, otium, -i, P. 2. pebble, lapillus, -i, JM. 2. people, populus, -i, M. 2. perhaps, forte or fortasse with Indie. ; f orsitan with Subj. of Possibility. peril, periculum, -i, N. 2. English-Latin Vocabulary 331 period, spatium, -I, N. 2. (be) permitted, licet, licere, licuit and licitum est, 2, impers. persevere, persevero, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. (in) person, per me, te, or se. persuade, persuadeo, -suadere, -suasi, -suasum, 2, with Dat. pertain, pertineo, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum, 2. pick up, excipio, -cipere, -cepi, ceptum, 3. place, locus, -i, M. 2; PL loca, -orum, N. 2. (in the first) place, primum. place, pono, ponere, posui, posi- tum, 3; constituo, -stituere, -stitui, -stitutum, 3; conloco, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. plan, consilium, -i, N. 2. plan, cogito, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. (be) pleasing, = please {next word). please, placeo, placere, placul, placitum, 2, with Dat. pleasing, gratus, -a, -um, with Dat. pledge (one's word), (fidem) interpono, -ponere, -posul, -posi- tum, 3. Pompeii, Pompei, -orum, M. PI. 2. popularity, gratia, -ae, F. 1; (be in great or greater) popularity, sum in magna or maiore gratia. (take) position, consisto, -sistere, -stiti, , 3, possess (=get possession of), potior, potlri, potitus sum, 4. power, potestas, -atis, P. 3. (be) powerful, valeo, valere, valul, valiturus, 2. practice, exerceo, exercere, exer- cul, exercitum, 2. praise, laudo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. precede, praecedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, 3. prefer, malo, malle, malui, , irr., 49» [665]. prepare, paro, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. prepared, paratus, -a, -um, Per/. Pass. Partic. of paro. presence, praesentia, -ae, F. 1. present, donum, -i, N. 2. (be)present, adsum, adesse, adf ui, adfuturus, irr. [655]. preserve, conserve, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. pretend, simulo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. pretense, simulatio, -onis, F. 3. prevent, prohibeo, -hibere, -hibul, -hibitum, 2; obsto, -stare, -stitI, -staturus, 1. proceed, procedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, 3. proclaim, pronuntio, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. profit by, fruor, frui, frtictus sum, 3, with Abl. promise, polliceor, polliceri, pol- licitus sum, 2. properly, commode. protect, tego, tegere, texi, tec- tum, 3. Publius, Publius, -i, M. 2. pupil, discipulus, -i, M. 2. (for the) purpose of, causa or gratia, with Gen. of Gerundive or Gerund; ad, with Gerundive or Gerund; ut or ne, withSuhj. pursue, insequor, -sequi, -secii- tus sum, 3. 332 English-Latin Vocabulary put an end to, finem facio, facere, feci, factum, 3. queen, regina, -ae, F. 1. quickly, celeriter; velociter. race, gens, gentis, -ium, F. 3, 271 [622]. raise, excito, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. ramparts, vallum, -I, N. 2. rank, ordo, -inis, M. 3. rash, temerarius, -a, -um. rashly, tetnere. (at any) rate, certe; quidem. read, lego, lege re, legi, lectum, 3. read up, lego, legere, legi, lec- tum, 3. ready {^prepared), paratus, -a, -um, from paro, -are, -avi, -atum, 1; promptus, -a, -um. real, verus, -a, -um. really, vero. rear, tergum, -I, N. 2. « reason, causa, -ae, F. 1. (for this) reason, ob eam cau- sam. (for which) reason, quare. receive, accipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum, 3. recently, nuper. recognize, cognosc5, cognoscere, cognovi, cognitum, 3. (take) refuge with, perfugio, -fugere, -fugi, -fugiturus, 3, with ad. (have) regard for, rationem ha- beo, habere, habui, habitum, 2, with Gen. region, regio, -onis, F. 3. rejoice, laetor, -ari, -atus sum, 1; gaudeo, gaudere, gavisuss um, 2. (be) reluctant, gravor, -ari, -atus sum, 1. remain, maneo, manere, mansi, mansum, 2. remaining, reliquus, -a, -um. (Those) remaining, PL of reli- quus. remedy, auxilium, -i, N. 2. remember, memini, meminisse, defective. Remi, Remi, -orum, M. PI. 2. report, defero, -ferre, -tuli, -latum, irr., 622 [668]. reputation, fama, -ae, F. 1. resist, resisto, -sistere, -stiti, -stiturus, 3. resources, opes, opum, F. 3, PI. of ops, opis. (the) rest, reliqui, -ae, -a. retire, me recipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum, 3; pedem refero, -ferre, -tuli, -latum, irr., 522 [668]. retreat, me recipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum, 3; pedem refero, -ferre, -tuli, -latum, 622 [668]. return, reverter, reverti (Infln.), reverti {Perf.), reversum, 3. {Not deponent in Perfect.) (in) return for, pro ivith Abl. Rhine, Rhenus, -i, M. 2. rise, orior, oriri, ortus sum, 4 {in several forms, 3). river, flumen, -inis, N. 3. road, via, -ae, F. 1. Roman, Romanus, -a, -um; as Noun, Romanus, -i, M. 2. Rome, Roma, -ae, F. 3. rule, lex, legis, F. 3. run, curpo, currere, cucurri, cursum, 3, English-Latin Vocabulary 333 run away, fugio, fugere, ftigi, fugiturus, 3. run forward, procurro, -currere, -curri and -cucurri, -cursum, 3. run to and fro, concurso, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. Sabinus, Sabinus, -I, M. 2. safe, tutus, -a, -um. safe conduct, tutum iter, safety, salus, -utis, F. 3. (for the) sake of, causa or gra- tia, with Gen, sally, eruptio, -onis, F. 3. sally out, erumpo, -rumpere, -ru- pl, -ruptum, 3. salvation, salus, -titis, F. 3. same, idem, eadem, idem, 158 [647]. satisfy, satisfacio, -facere, -feci, -factum, 3. save, servo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 Gonservo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. say, dico, dicere, dixi, dictum, 3 he says, or sa3rs he, inquit, following one or more words say no, nego, -are, -avi, -atum, 1 scarcity, inopia, -ae, F. 1. scheme, consilium, -i, N. 3. school, schola, -ae, F. 1. schoolboy, discipulus, -i, M. 2. schoolmate, condiscipulus, -i, M.2. scout, explorator, -oris, M. 3. (in the) second place, deinde. see, video, videre, vidi, visum, 2. seek, peto, pete re, petivi, peti- tum, 3. seem, videor, videri, visus sum, 2. select, eligo, -ligere, -legi, -lec- tum, 3. self. Intensive, ipse, ipsa, ipsum, 139 [644]; Reflexive {myself, yourself, himself, themselves, etc.), mei, tui, eui, 215 [654]. send, mitto, mittere, misi, mis- sum, 3. send around, circummitto, -mit- tere, -misi, -missum, 3. send back, remitto, -mittere, -misi, -missum, 3. send out, emitto, -mittere, -misi, -missum, 3. serious, gravis, -e. servant, (man) servus, -i, M. 2; {woman) serva, -ae, F. 1. served ( == ready) paratus, -a, -um, Perf. Pass. Partic. of paro. Servius, Servius, -i, M. 2. set on fire, incendo, -cendere, -cendi, -censum, 3. set out, proficiscor, proficisci, profectus sum, 3. set up, statuo, statuere, statui, statiitum, 3. seventh, septimus, -a, -um. several, aliquot, indecL; aliqui, -quae, -qua, 207 [653];quidam, quaedam, quaedam, 193 [650]. Sextus, Sextus, -i, M. 2. sharp, acer, acris, acre, 293 [630]. she, ea, 153 [64.6]; ilia, 145 [645]; ista, 14r5a [645]; haec, 166 [648]. shield, scutum, -i, N. 2. shout, shout out, clamo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1; conclaino, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. show, doceo, docere, docui, doc- tum, 2. side, latus, lateris, N.3; {=parttj) pars, partis, -ium, F.3, orpartes, partium, F. 3, PI. 334 English-Latin Vocabulary side by side, paribus gradibus. (on every) side, undique. siege, oppugnatio, -onis, F. 3; obsidio, -onis, F. 3. (get) sight of, conspicor, -ari, -atus sum, 1. simultaneously, simul. since, cum with Suhj.; quoniam or quando with Indie. ; since he, etc., qui, etc., tvith Subj. sister, soror, sororis, F. 3. six, sex, indecl. Adj. slaughter, caedes, -is, -ium, F. 3. slave, {man) servus, -i, M. 2, 107 [615]; (woman) eerva, -ae, F. 1,86 [614]. sling, funda, -ae, F. 1. slow, tardus, -a, -um. slowly, tarde. small, parvus, -a, -um. smaller, minor, minus, Compar. o/parvus, 530[635]. smallest, minimus, -a, -um, Superl. of parvus, 630 [635]. so, ita; sic; tam. (and) so, itaque. so great, tantus, -a, -um. so that, ut with Subj. soldier, miles, mllitis, M.. 3. some. Adj., aliqui, aliqua, ali- quod, 207 [653]; aliquantus, -a, -um. some, nonnulli, -ae, -a. some .... others, alii .... alil. some on6. Substantive, aliquis, 207 [653]; quis, used with si, nisi, ne, etc., 397, a [653]. something, aliquid, 207 [653]. sometimes, nonnumquam. somewhat, aliquantum, Ace. of Degree, equivalent to an Adv. son, fllius, -I, M. 2. soon, mox. sound, sonus, -i, M. 2. space, spatium, -I, N. 2. spare, parco, parcere, peperci or pars!, parstirus, 3, with Dat. , speak, loquor, loqul, loctitus sum, 3. spend, conficio, -ficere, -feci, -fee - tum, 3. spirit, animus, -i, IVT. 2. splendid, splendidus, -a, -um. sport, Indus, -i, M. 2. stand, sto, stare, stetl, staturus, 1. state, civitas, -atis, F. 3. step, gradus, -us, IM. 4. stern, durus, -a, -um. still, tamen. stone, saxum, -i, N. 2. stop, desisto, -sistere, -stiti, -sti- ttirus, 3; intermitto, -mittere, -misi, -missum, 3. storm, tempestas, -atis, F. 3. stratagem, dolus, -i, IVE. 2. stream, rivus, -I, IM. 2. street, via, -ae, F. 1. strength, vires, -ium, F. 3, PI. of vis, 326 [626]. strengthen, firmo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1; confirmo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. strive, contendo, -tendere, -tendi, -tentum, 3. strong, validus, -a, -um; fortis, -e. (be) strong, valeo, valere, valui, valiturus, 2. study, studium, -i, N. 2. study, studeo, studere, studui, -,2. (in) succession, deinceps. English-Latin Vocabulary 335 such, talis, -e; is, ille, etc., often with Descriptive qul-Clause, in SubJ. sudden, repentlnus, -a, -um. suffer, doleo, dolere, dolui, doli- turus, 2. sufficiently, satis. suitable, idoneus, -a, -um. summer, aestas, -atis, P. 3. superior, superior, superius, Compar. of super us, 531 [636]. supper, cena, -ae, F. 1. supply, copia, -ae, F. 1. sure, certus, -a, -um. (feel) sure, pro certo habeo, ha- bere, habui, habitum, 2. surround, circumvenio, -venire, -veni, -ventum, 4; circumdo, -dare, -dedl, -datum, 1. swiftly, celeriter; velociter. sword, gladius, -i, M. 2. take, capio, capere, cepi, cap- tum, 3 [659]. take to flight, me in fugam do, dare, dedi, datum, 1. take position, consisto, -sistere, -stiti, , 3. take refuge, perfugio, -fugere, -ftigi, -fugittirus, 3, with ad. take up, capio, capere, cepi, cap- tum, 3 [659]. talk, sermo, -onis, M. 3. talk, loquor, loqui, locutus sum, 3; conloquor, -loqui, -locutus sum, 3. task, opus, operis, N. 3. teach, doceo, docere, docul, doc- tum, 2. teacher, magister, -tri, M. 2. tear down, scindo, scindere, scidi, scissum, 3. tell, doceo, docere, docui, doctum, 2; dico, dicere, dixi, dictum, 3. ten, decem, indecl. Adj. tent, tabernaculum, i, N. 2. terms, condicio, -onis, F. 3. terrify, terreo, terrere, terrui, territum, 2. (thoroughly) terrify, perterreo, -terrere, -terrui, -territum, 2. territory, fines, finium, M. 3, PZ.o/ finis, 271 [622]. terror, terror, -oris, M. 3. than, quam; also expressed by Abl. after Comparatives. that, Determinative Pron., ille, ilia, ilJud, 145 [645]; is, ea, id, 153 [6461. that. Relative Pron., qui, quae, quod, 184: [649]. that, ConJ. after ideas of Will, Wish, Request, or Consent^ ut with Subj. ; that not, ne with Subj. that (English more generally from . . . ing, etc.) after ideas of Hindrance or Prevention, ne, quominus, or quin, with Subj. {Originally that not.) that (= lest), after ideas of Fear, ne with Subj.; that not, ut with Subj. that, of Purpose {-in order that), ut with Subj. {with a Comparative, quo); that not, ne with Subj. that, of Result {after so, such, etc.), ut with Subj.; that not, ut non with Subj. {Consecutive Clauses of Fact). 336 English-Latin Vocabtilary that, in Substantive Clauses of Fact of Consecutive origin {originally full Result), ut with SubJ.; that not, ut non with SubJ, that, in Substantive Clauses of Fact not of Consecutive origin, quod with Indie. ; that not, quod non with Indie. that, in Principal Statements in Indirect Discourse, expressed by using Infin. that of yours, iste, -a, -ud, 145, a[645J. their. Gen. PI. of is, 153 [646], ille, 145 [645], iste, 145, a [645], or hie, 166 [648]; their (own), Reflexive, suus, -a, -um. (they) themselves. Intensive, PI. o/ipse, -a, -um, 139 [644]. (of, etc.) themselves. Reflexive, sui, etc., 215 [654]. then, turn; tunc. theory, ratio, -onis, F. 3. there. Expletive, not translated. there, o/PZace, ibi. therefore, itaque. thing or things, res, rei, F. 5, 395 [625]; often translated by Neut. PI. of Adjectives or Pro- nouns. think, puto, -are, -avi, -atum, 1; cogito, -are, -avI, -atum, 1; ex- istimo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1; sen- tio, sentire, sensi, sensum, 4. (way of) thinking, sententia, -ae, F.l. third, tertius, -a, -um. this, hie, haee, hoc, 166 [648]; is, ea, id, 153 [646]. this morning, hodie mane. this of yours, iste, ista, istud, 145, a [645]. thither, eo. thoroughly frighten, thoroughly terrify, perterreo, -terrere, -ter- rui, -territum, 2. though, see although. thoughtless, temerarius, -a, -um. three, tres, tria, trium. through, per with Ace. throw, iacid, iacere, iecl, iac- tum, 3; mitto, mittere, misi, missum, 3. throw down, abicio, -icere, -ieci, -iectum, 3. thus, sic; ita. time, tempus, temporis, N. 3. (at that) time, tum; tune. tire out, defatigo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. Tivoli, Tibur, Tiburis, N. 3. to, generally expressed by Dat. ; ofMotion,Sid with Ace; ( = into) in with Ace). to, of Purpose, translated by Dat ; qui, quo, ut, or ne with SubJ.; Supine in -um; ad with •Gerundive or Gerund; causa or gratia with Gen. of Gerun- dive or Gerund; Fut. Pass. Partic. in agreement with ob- ject of verb. to a man, ad iinum. today, hodie.. together, iina; inter se. too (=also), quoque, postpos. too (= too much), nimis; often translated by Compar. too late, sero. ' too much, nimis.* toward j ad with Ace; in with Ace. JE nglish-Latin Vocabulary 337 tower, turris, -is, -ium, F. 3, 278 [623]. town, oppidum, -i, N. 2. tranquil, tranquillus, -a, -um. Treviri, Trevirl, -orum, M. PL 2. tribune, tribunus, -i, M. 2. triumph, triumphus, -I, M. 2. trouble, incommodum, -i, N. 2. true, verus, -a, -um. trust, fido, fidere, fisus sum, 3, and confldo; -fidere, -fisus sum, 3, ivith AbL or Dat. (of a Per- son, Dat. only). try, experior, -periri, -pert us sum, 4. turn, verto, vertere, verti, ver- sum, 3. two, duo, duae, duo, 328 [640]. two hundred, ducenti, -ae, -a. unarmed, inermis, -e. under, sub, of Motion toward tvith Ace. ; of Place in which icith Abl. under compulsion, coactu, AbL of coactus, -us, M. 4. undertake, conor, -arl, -atus sum, 1. undertaking, conatus, -us, M. 4. unfriendly, inimicus,-a, -u.ui,with Dat. unhappy, miser, misera, mise- rum. unless, nisi, until, dum, donee, quoad, with Indie, of actual past acts, and SubJ. of anticipated acts. unworthy, indignus, -a, -um, with Abl. upon, in, of Motion toward with Ace. ; of Rest with Abl. upon ivith a Participial Noun, translated by cum with SubJ.; ubi, ut, postquam, or simul atque, with Indie. ; Abl. Abso- lute; Perf. Pass. Partie. of Deponent Verb. urge, hortor, -arl, -atus sum, 1. us, nos, Nom.-Acc. PI. of ego, 214: [654]. use, utor, uti, usus sum, 3, icith Abl. valley, vallis, -is, -ium, F. 3; con- vallis, -is, -ium, F. 3. Vertico, Vertico, -onis, M. 3. very. Adj., ipse, ipsa, ipsum, 139 [644]. very, Adv., expressed by Superl. or maxime. very much, pltirimum, Ace. of degree, equivalent to an Adv. Superl. of multum, much, 539 [638]. victory, victoria, -ae, F. 1. vigorously, impigre. villa, villa, -ae, F. 1. wage [war], gero, gerere, gessi, gestum, 3. wait, exspecto, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. wait for, exspecto, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. walk, ambulo, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. wall, murus, -i, M. 2; vallum, -i, N. 2. wander, vagor, -arl, -atus sum, 1. want, cupio, cupere, cupivi, cupi- tum, 3; volo, velle, volui, * , irr., 493 [665]. (not) want (be unwilling), nolo, nolle, nolui, , irr., 493 [665]. 338 English-Latin Vocabulary war, bellum, -i, N. 2. (of) war, mllitaris, -e. warn, moneo, monere, raonul, monitum, 2 [657]. watch, specto, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. ■way (=road or journey), via, -ae, F. 1; iter, itineris, N. 3. way {—habit), mos, moris, M. 3. way {^manner), modus, -i, M. 2. way of thinking, sententia, -ae, F. 1. (give) way, cedo, cedere, cessi, cessum, 3. (in this) way, sic; ita. we, nos, Nom. PI. of ego, 214 [654]. weapons, arma, -orum, N. PI. 2; (missile) weapon, telum, -i, N. 2. wear {= carry, bear),geT6, gerere, gessi, gestum, 3. ■weary, defatigo, -are, -avI, -atum, 1. (be) well, valeo, valere, valui, valiturus, 2. * (feel) well, valeo, valere, valui, valiturus, 2. ■well, bene, what, Interrog. Pron., quis, quid, and Interrog. Adj., qui, quae, quod, 184 [649]; what {=hoiv great), quantus, -a, -um. whatever, quicumque, quaecum- que, quodcumque, 192 [649, a], wheel about, signa converto, -vertere, -verti, -versum, 3. when, ubi or ut, with Indie; cum with Indie, in De- terminative Clause, Subj. in Descriptive; Abl. Absolute. where, ubi; where {=from. which), unde. whether .... or, sive .... sive (seu .... seu). which {of.two), uter, -tra, -trum, 130 [643]. which, Rel., qui, quae, quod; Interrog., quis (qui), quae, quid (quod), 184 [649]. while, dum, with Present Indie, in narration. (after a) while, post aliquantum temporis. (for a little) while, paulisper. who. Pel., qui, quae, quod, Inter- rog., quis (qui), quae, quid (quod), 184 [649]. whole, totus, -a, -um, 130 [643]; omnis, -e. why, cur. will, voluntas, -atis, F. 3. willingly, libenter. wing, cornu, -us, N. 4, 369 [624], winter, hiems, hiemis, F. 3. winter, hiemo, -are, -avI, -atum, 1. winter-camp, winter-quarters, hiberna, -orum, N. PI. 2. wisdom, consilium, -I, N. 2. wish, cupio, cupere, cuplvl, cupl- tum, 3; volo, velle, volul, , irr., 493 [665]. with, cum with Abl.; by Abl. alone to express Means, and (often) Manner, 513, and Ac- companiment, 507, a ; ( =at the house of or among) a pud ivith Ace. withdraw, decedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, 3. within, intra with Ace, without, sine with Abl. English-Latin Vocabulary 339 without orders, iniussu. •witness, specto, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. woman, femina, -ae, F. 1. wood, woods, silva, -ae, P. 1. word, verbum, i, N. 2; dictum, -I, N. 2; (=promise, faith, pledge) fides, -el, F. 5. work, opus, operis, N. 3; labor, -oris, M. 3. work, laboro, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. worry, lacesso, lacessere, laces- si vl, lacessitum, 3. worst, pessimus, -a, -um, Superl. of malus, 630 [635]. worthy, dignus, -a, -um, with Ahl. would that, utinam with Subj. wound, Yulnus, vulneris, N. 3. wound, vulnero, -are, -avi, -atum, 1. write, scribo, scribere, scripsi, scrip tum, 3. wrong, iniuria, -ae, P. 1. wrong-doing, maleficium, -i, N.2. year, annus, -i, M. 2. yes, ita, etiam, vero, certe, etc.; or the answer may be given by repeating the verb. yesterday, heri. yet, tamen. not yet, nondum. yield, cedo, cedere, cessi, cessum, 3, with Dat. ; concedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, 3, with Dat. you, tu, tui; PI. vos, e^c, 214 [654]. your, yours, in speaking to one person, tuus, -a, -um; in speaking to more than one, vester, -tra, -trum. yourself, Reflexive, tui, etc., Ph vestri, etc., 215 [654]. zeal, studium, -i, N. 2. GIRLS PLAYING AT JACKSTONES From a Painting found in Herculaneum THE ANIO, AS IT FALLS BELOW TIVOLI INDEX The references are in general to sections, but occasionally to pages, marked p., or footnotes, marked ?i. Numbers in brackets refer to the Summary of Constructions and Forms, pp. 240-290, Roman numerals not attached to others refer to Pronunciation, pp. 1-li. a and a6, choice between, p. 24, n. 1. with ablative of agent, 126. Ablative, a mixed case, 71. general forces, 72, 1, 2, 3 [591]. absolute, 308 and a. of accompaniment, 507 and a. of accordance, 455 and a. of agent, 126; origin, p. 44, n. 2. of cause "or reason, 440. of comparison, 457. of description, 390, 2. of manner, 513. of means or instrument, 274. of measure of difference, 332. this often like adverb, p. 191, n.. Ir of place in which, 78, a, 407, 3 ; with names of towns, domus, and rus, 409, 3; preposition may be omitted with certain words, 410. of place from which, 407, 1, 409, 1. of point of view from which, 411. of respect, 442. of separation, 519. of time at or within which, 399. of way or manner, 513. with/rdo, confidO, 432. with opus est, 445. with prepositions [592, 1]. with iitor, fruor, fungoi% potior, vescor, 334. summary of uses of ablative [591]. Ablative singular third declension, in -e or -I, 293, a, 319, 1-4, 320, 1-3. of participles, 300, a. Abstract nouns, defined, p. 169, n. 2. -ahus, dative and ablative in, 113. ac, see atque. Accent, XI, 1, 2. in genitive and vocative of nouns in 'ius or -ium, 112, 2, a. Accompaniment, with cuni, 507. cum omitted, 507, a. Accordance, ablative of, 455 and a. Accusative, 15. of direct object, 62. of extent, duration or degree, 434. this often like adverb, p. 191, n. 1. of place to which, with ad or in, 78, a; with sub, 467; with names of towns, domv^ and rus, 409, 2. of predicate object, with verbs of making, choosing, etc., 330. becomes subject of passive, 330, a. of space-relation (not separative, sociative, or locative), 78. of subject of infinitive in indirect discourse, 465 ; elsewhere, 542. "two accusatives," 330. with prepositions, 78 [592, II]. summary of uses of accusative [589]. acer, declension, 293 [630]. Active voice, defined, 122. ad, with accusative, 78 and h. after words of fitness or readiness, p. 98, n. 5, p. 116, n.. 4. of purpose with gerundive or gerund, p. 123, n. 4. Adjectives, defined, 12. declension: first and second, 117 [627, 628] ; third, consonant stems, 286 [629] ; t-stems, 293 [630, 631] ; pronominal, 129, 130 [642, 643]. comparison of, 511, 530, 531 [634-36]. agreement of, 119. through infinitives, 295, b. as substantives, 146, b. attributive, 25, 1. position of, 19, 2. possessive, 34. position of, 34, a. predicate, 25, 2. position of, p. 19, n. 1. with dative, 67. Adjective pronoun, defined, 147. 341 342 Index Adverbs, defined, 36. formation, p. ISO, n. 1, 537. comparison, 538, 539 [637, 6;38]. position of, 38. Adversative cwwi-clause, 489. g'Mi-clause, 479. -ae, pronominal ending, 166, ?>, 184, b. Agent, ablative of, with a or a6, 126, 281; dative of, 281. ager^ declension. 111 [616]. Agreement, general nature of, 13. of adjectives with nouns, 119. through infinitives, 295, b. of adjectives with infins., p. 38, n. 1. of appositive nouns, 44, of determinative pronouns, 147. of participles, 226, a, 247, b. of predicate nouns, 26. of relative pronouns, 189. of verbs, 95, b. summary and general rule [585]. a-i-, pronunciation of, p. 55, n. 4. aliquis (-qui), declension, 207 [653]. alius, declension, 130 [643]. alius . . alius . . , one . . anoth'jr, 131. Alphabet, I. alter, declension, 130 [643]. alter . . alter . . , one . . the other, 131. amandus sum, conjugation [663]. amans, declension, 300 [632]. amaturus sum, conjugation [663]. ambo, declension, 328 [640]. amo, conjugation in full [656]. animal, declension, 270 [621]. Answers to questions, 174. Antecedent, defined, 187, 2. sometimes repeated in relative clause, p. 158, n. 1. Antepenult, defined, XI, 2. when accented, XI, 2. antequam and priusquam, with indica- tive of actual past act [597,111]. with subjunctive of act anticipated, 356[596, B,l]. Anticipatory subjunctive, defined, 343. close to fut. indie, in meaning, 343, c. translation of, 343, d. with antequam, priusquam, 356. with dum, donee, quoad, 356. in past-future clauses in general, 382. see b\so past future, etc. Aoristic idea, defined, 221, 2. Aoristic narrative clause, with ubi, ut, postquam, simul atque, 506. interchangeable with cwm-clause of situation, p. 224, n. 2. Apposition and appositive, defined, 43, a. agreement of appositives, 44. Article, lacking in Latin, 6. ''As ... as possible," how expressed, p. 236, n. 3. atque and ac, choice between, p. 66, n. 1. Attempted action, imperf . of, p. 158, n. 2. Attitude, dative after words of, 67. Attraction, subjunctive by, 545. Attributive adjective, 25, 1. audio, conjugation in full [660]. aut and vel distinguished, 195. "Before," moods with words meaning, 356 [597, III]. bonus, declension, 117 [627]. caedes, declension, 271 [622]. capio, conjugation in full [659]. caput, declension, 256 [617]. Cardinal numbers [639]. Cases, defined, 15. endings of, see endings. table of meanings, 80- summaries of uses [585-94]. casus, declension, 369 [624]. causa, of purpose, p. 220, n. 1. Cause, expressed by : ablative, 440. quod, quia, quoniam, quando, and indicative, 517. citm-clause, subjunctive, 486, c, 489, gm-clause, subjunctive, 479, cedo, original meaning, p. 72, n. 1. certior, declension, 286 [629]. Clause, defined, 148, 1. for kinds, see special names. generally modifying forward, p. 228, n. 3. Collective noun, defined, 31, a. Combinations of words, pronunciation in,X. Command, imperative of, 137. subjunctive of, 347. in indirect discourse, 532, c, 533. Index 343 Common noun, defined, 31, Comparative adjectives, declension, 286, 287, 1 [629]. with ablative, 457. Comparative degree, defined, p. Ill, n. meaning " too," p. 187, n. 4, 540, Comparison of adjectives : (first shown, p. 130, n. 2, p. 187, n. 1.) regular, in -tor, -issimus, 511, 1. in -ior, -errimus, 511, 2. in -ior, -illimus, 511, 3. with magis^ maxime, 511, ■!• irregular or defective, 530, 531, summary [634-36]. Comparison of adverbs : (firstshown, p. 130, n. 2.) regular, 538. irregular or defective, 539. summary [637-38]. Complementary infinitive, 87, b. Completed action, see perfect, past perfect, future perfect, complures, declension, 327 [633]. Composite origin of constructions, ex- plained, 391, 1, 2. Composition, genitive of, 387. Compound verbs with dative, 527. Concern, dative of, 260. Conclusions, see conditions. Concrete noun, defined, p. 169, n. 3. Concrete object for which, 430, Conditions and conclusions, defined, 494, introduced by si, nisi, relatives, or conjunctions, 494, a, individual and general, 494, b. neutral (implying nothing as to fact), 496, more vivid future, 498, 1 ; less vivid future, 498, 2. contrary to fact, 524. general table, 525, confido, dative and ablative with, 432. Conjugation defined, 92, Conjugations distinguished by charac- teristic vowels, 9^, for details, see first conjugation, sec- ond conjugation, third conjuga- tion, etc. Conjunctions, defined, 14. frequent omission of , p 47, n. 1. Consecutive subjunctive, defined, 418, 419 andl, 2, 420. with qui^ cum, ut, ut nan, quin, 421,1-3,446. Consonant stems, see third declension. Consonantal i, V. Consonants, pronunciation, V. Constructiohs, summaries of [585-612]. Constructions of composite origin, 391 , 1,2. consuetildine, ablative of accordance, 455, a. Contraction in forms from perfect stems in -avi, -evT, -ivl, p. 224, n. 4. Contrary to fact, see conditions and conclusions, cornu, declension, 369 [624]. corpus, declension, 265 [620]. cum, conjunction: with indicative, determinative, 426, p. 239, n. 2, end. generalizing, 494, h; p. 226, n. 1. summary for indicative, p. 227, n. 1. with subjunctive, descriptive, 487. lightest touch of, p. 239, n. 2. interchangeable with clause with uhi, ut, etc., 506, a. descriptive with additional causal or adversative idea, 488. (purely) causal or adversative, 489. summary for subjunctive, p. 224, n. 5. cum, preposition with ablative, 74. enclitic with personal, relative, and interrogative prons., p. 167, n. 1. with ablative of accompaniment, 507. when omitted, 507, a, when used with ablative of way or manner, 513. Customary action, imperfect of, p. 159, n. 2. Dative, general force, 55. of agent, with future passive parti- ciple, 281. of concrete object, 430, of indirect object, 65, of person judging, 295, of possession, 289. of reference or concern, 260. of tendency, purpose, or result, 428. 344 Index Dative, continued: "predicate dative," p. 169, n. 1. " two datives," p. 169, n. 1. with adjectives, 67. vfithfldo and confidd, 432. with impersonal verbs, 402. with verbs compounded with prepo^ sitions, 527. with " verbs meaning believe, favor, help," etc., see next lines. with words of quality, attitude, or relation, 67. summary of uses of dative [588]. de or ex with ablative, in place of genitive of the whole, 202, b. Declension, defined, 79. of nouns, see first declension^ etc. of adjectives, see adjectives. of participles, see participles. of pronouns, see pronoun desired. Degree, accusative of, 434. Degree of difiference, see measure of difference. Deliberative questions, p. 134, n. 2, p. 139, n. 9. Demonstrative, see determinative. Deponent verbs, defined, 313. principal parts, 314. voice of participles of, 315. Descriptive idea, expressed by : adjective, 12. ablative, 390, 2. genitive, 390, 1. gm-clause, 421, 1, 422, c. cttm-clause, 421, 487. with additional idea of cause or opposition, 488. Determinative idea, expressed by : determinative pron., p. 51, n. 1, 147. cwm-clause, 426, p. 227, n. 1, p. 239, n. 2. gwi-clause, 426. Determinative pronoun, defined, 145 and n. 1. used as adjective, 147. as personal pronoun, 214. for hie, is, iste^ ille^ see word desired. position of, 133, 147, a. die, imperative of dico, p. 204, n. 1. diex, decl., 395 [625] ; gender, 396. Diphthongs, pronunciation, IV. are long, VII, b. Direct discourse, defined, 463. Direct object, defined, 61 ; case of, 62. Direction in space, how expressed : literal, 78, b. figurative, 55 and a, 78, b. dis-, meaning, p. 150, n. 3. Division of syllables, VI. Divisions of time, 251. do, short a in conjugation, p. 59, n. 1. domus, declension, 406 [626]. cases in constructions of place, 409, 1, a, 2, a, 3, a. donee, moods with, see dum. donum, declension, 107 [615]. Double connective, p. 220, n. 5. due, imperative of duco, p. 204, n. 1. dum, "while," with present indicative in narration, p. 126, n. 1. "until," with indicative of actual past act, p. 218, n. 2. with subjunctive of act antici- pated, 356. summary of mood-uses, p. 218, n. 2. duo, declension, 328 [640]. duplex, declension, 293 [631]. Duration, accusative of, 434. -e or -I in ablative singular, 319, 1-4, 320, 1-3. e-i-, pronunciation of, p. 55, n. 4. e and ex, choice between, 175. ego, declension, 214 [654]. when expressed as subject, 140. -ei or -ei in fifth declension, 395, b. eius, distinguished from suus, 216, 1 and 2. pronunciation, p. 55, n. 4. Emphatic order, see order. Enclitic, defined, p. 46, n. 2. enclitic conjunction introducing a clause, position of, 148, 1, a. Endings, in conjugation, personal, 124. in declension : first, 86 ; second, 107; third, 256, 257; fourth, 369; fifth, 395. English present participle, frequent inexactness of, p. 225, n. 1. Entreaty, see request, eo, conjugation, 503 [667]. -es and -is in third declension, 319, i, 2, 320,2,3. Index 345 esse, often omitted in perfect passive infinitive, almost always so in fu- ture active infinitive, p. 180, n. 1. ex or e, choice between, 175. Exactness, quantity, and number, posi- tion of words of, 133. exemplar^ declension, 270 [621]. e^cernpio, ablative of accordance, 455, a. Exhortation, subjunctive of, p. 134, n. 1. Expletive, defined, p. 30, n. 1, p. 88, n. 1. Extent of space, accusative of, 434. facio, passive of compounds of, 502, a. imperative, /ac, 522 and n. 1. Fact, indicative of, 59 [597]. subjunctive of (existing in consecu- tive clauses only), 421. substantive gwod-clause of, 444. Fear, clauses of, 353. Feminine gender of nouns : in first decl., 105; second, 106; third, 324, 3; fourth, 370; fifth, 396. fero, conjugation, 522 [668]. /Tdo, dative and ablative with, 432. Fifth declension, 395 [625]. genders in, 396. Figurative and literal direction, expla- nation of terms, p. 17, n. 1. filia, dative and ablative plural, 113. fllius, gen, and voc. sing., 112, 1, 2. finis, declension, 271 [622]. Finite moods, defined, p. 44, n. 1, 338. fid, conjugation, 502 [666]. First conjugation, in full [656]. First declension, of nouns, 86. genders in, 105. of adjectives, 117 [627, 628]. Five ways of introducing main verb, p. 233, n. 1. fore and futurum esse with ut and subj. for future infinitive, 466. Formal ut, p. 136, ns. 1, 5. Forms, summary of [613-68]. fortis, declension, 293 [630]. Forward-moving rel. clause, p. 171, n. 1. Fourth conjugation, in full [660]. Fourth declension, 369 [624]. genders in, 370. fruor, ablative with, 334. /nng^or, ablativfe with, 334. Future conditions and conclusions: more vivid, 498, 1 ; less vivid, 498, 2. Future imperative, formation, 448; meaning, 449. Future indicative, formation, 157, a, 206, a; meaning, 157, 6. Future infinitive, formation, 460, 3; meaning, 462. replaced often by fore or futurum esse with subjunctive, 466. Future participle : active, formation and decl., 233, 1. meaning, 233, 2. when given in principal parts, 234. passive, formation and decl., 279. generally expresses obligation, propriety, or necessity, 280. with dative of agent, 281. agreeing with object may express purpose, p. 216, n. 3. used impersonally, p. 187, n. 2. Future perfect indicative: formation, active, 243, passive, 248. meaning, 243, a. Future perfect subjunctive, expressed : by perf. subj., 497, 6, p. 234, n. 2, or past perf. subj., p. 222, n. 5. ' Future point of view, 251, a, 253 and 254 (headings), 379 and a, 380. Future subjunctive, expressed by pres. subj., 497, a and 6, p. 234, n. 2, or imperf . suIdj., 379 and a, p. 234, n.2. futurum esse ut, see fore ut. Gender, grammatical, p. 35, n. 1; in first declension, 105 ; in second declension, 106 ; in third declen- sion, 324; in fourth declension, 370; in fifth declension, 396. Generalizing conditions and conclu- sions, 494, b, p. 226, n. 1. Generalizing pronoun, quicumque, 192 ; also qui, 494, a. Genitive, defined, 53. forms, see first declension, etc. descriptive, 390, 1. objective, 209. of material or composition, 387. of the whole ("partitive"), 202. possessive, 53. summary of uses of genitive [587]. 346 Index gens, declension, 271 [622]. Gerund, defined, 470, 2. for uses, see gerundive and gerund below. Gerundive, defined, 303, 470, 1. for uses, see gerundive and gerund below. Gerundiye and gerund, choice, 474, a. uses in general, 473, 474. in genitive with causa or gratia, expressing purpose, p. 220, n. 1. with ad, expressing purpose, p. 123, n. 4. gratia, of purpose, see fourth line above. Growth of language, two principles in, 391. Habitual action, imperfect of, p. 159, n. 2. Harmony of tenses ("sequence"), 475,1. Helping tenses, p". 222, n. 2. hie, declension, 166 [648]. distinguished from is, iste, ille, 167, 1. Hindering, substantive clauses after verbs of, 352(2). Historical infinitive, 515. subject in nominative, 515. Historical present, 504 and a. ' Hortatory " subjunctive, fee volitive subjunctive, and exhortation. i as consonant, V.' -I or -e in ablative singular, 319, 1-4, 320, 1-3. -I, pronominal dative ending, 129. i-stems, see third declension. Idem, declension, 158 [647]. iens, participle of eo^ declension, 503 [667]. ignis, declension, 278 [623]. ille, declension, 145 [645]. as personal pronoun, 167, 3. distinguished from hie, is, iste, 167, 1. with descriptive meaning, 422. Imperative mood, formation (all con- jugations), 448. tenses of, 449. uses of, 137. die, duc,fac,fer, p. 204, n. 1. Imperfect indicative, formation, 144, a, 198, a, b. tense sign, 144, a. meaning, 144, b. how diff( ring from perfect, compare 144, b, and 221, 2. of attempted action, p. 158, n. 2. of habitual action, p. 159, n. 2. Imperfect subjunctive, formation, 377, a. tense meaning, 379, 382, p. 234, n. 2. of action that had been for some time going on, p. 215, n. 1. impero, takes subjunctive, 543, a. Impersonal verbs, 400 and a. any verb may be so used, 401. dative remains with passive, 402. in with ablative, 78, a. with accusative, 78, a, b. = "at," with accusative, p. 67, n. 1. =^" for," of effect to be produced, with ace, p. 110, n. 1. Indefinite pronouns, declension of : aliquis i-qui), 207 IQ^S]. quis (qui), 397, ct. uses and position of quis, 397. quidam, 193. Indicative, formation and tenses, see present, imperfect, etc. mood of fact, declaring, inquiring, or assuming, 59 [597]. in independent statements and ques- tions of fact, 59 [597, 1]. in dependent clauses of fact: aoristic narrative clauses with ubi, ut, postquam, simul atque, 505. determinative clauses: with cum, 426, with qui, 426. general conditions of fact, 494, b, 496. more vivid future.conditions, 498, 1 ; table, 525. neutral conditions, 496; table, 525. of actual past act with words mean- ing "before" or "until," p. 207, ns.6, 7,p. 218, n.2. of cause or reason with quod, quia, quoniam, quando, 517- quod-clause of respect, 444, a. substantive quod-clause of fact, 444. summary of uses of indicative [597]. Index 347 Indirect discourse, defined, 463, a. general rule for, 533. table, 534. indirect clauses of cause or reason with quod, quia, quoniam, quan- do, 533 and c. indirect commands or prohibitions, 533, 534. See also p. 218, n. 9. indirect questions of fact, 533, 534. indirect statements of fact, 465, 533, 534. omission of subject, 465, a. omission of esse, p. 222, n. 3. tenses in, 463, c, 464. indirect subordinate clauses, 533, 534. Indirect object, dative of, 65. Infinitive, defined, 87. origin of, p. 181, n. 1. formation, 138, 460, 1-3. esse often omitted in compound tenses, p. 180, n.l. meanings of tenses, 462. distinguishing conjugations, 92. as subject, object, or complement, 87 and a, h; in freer relations, 542. historical infinitive, 515. subject in nominative, 515. in indirect discourse, 465, 533. subject in accusative, 465. subject omitted, 465, o. in rivalry with subjunctive, 543, a. Xnsigne, declension, 270 [621]. Instrument, ablative of, 274. -10, of third and fourth conjugations, 178, 1, 2, 179. Interjections, defined, 46. Interrogative particles, 173, 2-4. Interrogative pronoun, defined, 186. Intransitive verb, defined, 63 and a. Introducing main verb, five ways of, p. 233, n. 1. ipse, declension and meaning, 139 [644]. distinguished from se, p. 83, n. 4. Irregular comparison, see comparison, is, declension, 153 [646]. as personal pronoun, 167, 3. distinguished from hie, ille, iste, 167, 2. general use, 167, 2, 3. - descriptive, = talis, 422, p. 230, n. 4. -IS and -es in third declension, 319, 1,2, 320, 2, 3. Islands, small^ expressions of place with names of, 409, 1-3. iste, declension, 145, d [645]. meaning, 167, 1. iubed, takes infinitive, 543, a. -ius and -ium, genitive and vocative singular of nouns in, 112, 1, 2. -lus, pronominal genitive ending, 129. " Jussive subjunctive " = volitive. Leading evonts, tenses of, p. 222, n. 2. Less vivid future conditions and con- clusions, 498, 2 ; table, 525. Locative, force of word, p. 23, n. 3. Locative ablative, 72, 3. Locative case, use of, 409, 3. Long vowels, see vowels. maiar, pronunciation, cf. p. 55, n. 4. malo, conjugation, 493 [665]. Manner, ablative of, 513. Masculine gender of nouns: in first decl., 105; second, 106; third, 324, 2; fourth, 370; fifth, 396. Material or composition, gen. of, 387. Means or instrument, ablative of, 274. Measure of difiference, ablative of, 332. this often like adverb, p. 191, n. 1. mei, mihi^ me, personal pronoun, 214 [654] ; reflexive, 215 [654]. Mental certainty, expressed by sub- junctive, 365, 368, VII. meus, vocative singular mi, 112, b. omission of, 35. Middle verbs, 311. miles, declension, 256 [617]. mille, declension and use, 490. miror, conjugation [662]. miser, declension, 117 [628]. Mixed stems, see third declension. Modifier, defined, 16. monens, declension, 300 [632]. moneo, conjugation in full [657]. Monosyllable, defined, p. 33, n. 2. Mood, defined, 59, a, 368, c. for details, see indicative, etc. More vivid future conditions and con- clusions, 498, 1 ; table, 525. 348 Index mos^ declension, 265 [620 J. more, ablative of accordance, 455, a. multitudo, declension, 264 [619]. multum, in ace. of degree, p. 191, n. 1. Mute consonants, defined, p. 125, n. 2. Natural harmony of tenses ("se- quence ") 475, 1 [611, 612] ; 477 [610]. Natural likelihood, expressed by sub- junctive, 368, V. -ne, interrogative enclitic, 173, 2. ne, see negatives. nee, see neque. necesse, indeclinable noun, 374. in predicate = "necessary," 374. Negatives : ne for imperative, 449. for optative, 368, b. for volitive, 344, 368, h. non for other subjunctives, 368, b. for all questions, 349, b. for indicative, 59, c. nemo, declension, 290 wegue and nec,choice between, p. 66, n.l. corresponding to non, 181, 565, neuter, declension, 129 [642]. Neuter gender in second declension, 106 ; in third, 324, 1., Neuter i-stems, 270 [621]. Neutral conditions and conclusions, 496 ; table, 525. neve (neu), corresponding to ne, 565. "No" in answers, 174, 1, 2. noli with infinitive= prohibition, p. 195, n.3. nolo, conjugation, 493 [665]. nomen, declension, 264 [619]. Nominative as subject, 24. non, see negatives. nonne, in questions, 173, 3. Normal order, see order. noster, distinguished from mens, 216, 1. nostri, reflexive, declension, 215 [654]. nostrum, -tri, distinguished, 214, a. "Noun clauses," see S'Mfes/a?iiiuec/aztses. Nouns, defined, 12. declension, see iirst declension, etc. genders, see gender. common nouns, defined, 31. collective nouns, defined, 31, a. proper nouns, defined, 30. used as appositives, 44. as predicates, 26 and a. as subjects, 24. for other uses, see greni